LIFT STATION 33 - 09-0003-UT & LIFT STATION 42 - 10-0051-UTA� �� I �os/i3%zo��
CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS
CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES
BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED
1 REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. _
IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to
the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the
certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 CONTACT Di3n3 Defreauw
NAME:
M. E. Wilson Co., Inc. PHONE F�
300 W. Platt St.
Ste 200
Tampa, FL 33606
INSURED
TLC Diversified, Inc.
2719 17th Street East
Palmatto, FL 34221
E:
F:
813-229-8021
ddefreeuw�mewilson.com
WESTFIELD INS CO
FCCI INS CO
___ NAIC #
24112
10178
COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 33561103 REVISION NUMBER:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR ADDL SUBR POLICV EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS
LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER MMIDDMlYY MMIDD/YYYY
A GENERAILIABILITY TRA3972460 04/O1/1 04/O1/14 EqCH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000
X DAMAGE TO RENTED 150, 000
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES Ea occurrence $ __
CLAIMS-MADE � OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 10 , 000
X Contractual Liability PERSONALBADVINJURY $ 1,000,000
X$SOO Prop Dmg Ded GENERALAGGREGATE $2.000,000
GEN'LAGGREGATELIMITAPPLIESPER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ Z.000,000
POLICY X PRO- X LOC $
A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY TRA3972460 04 O1 1 04 O1 14 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 1, 000, 400
Ea accident _
X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) $
ALL OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY (Per aaident) $
AUTOS AUTOS -
NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $
X HIRED AUTOS X AUTOS Per accident __
$
A X UMBRELLALIAB X OCCUR TRA3972460 04/01/1 04/O1/14 EACHOCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000
EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ 5, 000, 000
DED X RETENTION $ 0 $
B WORKERSCOMPENSATION OO1WC13A61661 04/O1/1 04/O1/14 X WCSTATU- OTH-
AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY T Y LIMIT ER ___
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y� N E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500, OCiO
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? � N � A
(Mandatory in NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 500, OCiO
If yes, describe under 5 0 0, 0 G 0
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $
A Inatallation Floater TRA3972460 04/O1/1 04/O1/14 Any One Site: 1,000,000
Transit & Storage: Included
Deductible: 1,000
DESCRIPTION OP OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 701, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required)
Certificate Holder Liated as Additional Insured
Lift Station 33 (09-0003-UT) and Lift Station 42 (10-0051-UT) Rehabilitation Projects
TLC Job # 13-12-01
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
City of Clearwater
P.O. Box 4748
�earwater, FL 33758-4748
I
ACORD 25 (2010/05)
JL002
33561103
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE
THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
USA I � � F\�
O 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD
u
�
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
ADDENDUM NO. 1
for
LIFT STATIONS 33 & 42
REHABILITATION
�09-0003-uT & io-oosl-uT�
DATE: March 29, 2013
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 1 shall be attached to and made
part of the above-named Bid Documents, dated March 2013.
The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items
shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in
the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the
additions, deletions and revisions listed herein.
IN THE SPECIFICATIONS
1. SECTION IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHANGE item 5 on page 4 of 133 to read as follows:
"The Contract Period shall be 300 consecutive calendar days from Notice to Proceed to
Final Completion. �
The term Final Completion means the time at which the Work has progressed to the point
where in the opinion of the Engineer, the Work, including all "punch list" items, is fully
and fnally completed in a good and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the
Contract Documents and free of all defects and deficiencies; all required final
governmental inspections and approvals have been obtained, closeout paperwork has
been submitted and approved and; the Work is ready for final payment upon execution of
the final Change Order and submission of the Engineer's written recommendation of fnal
payment."
2. SECTION IVA - TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iv
ADD "16150 MOTORS"
CHANGE "16483 MOTOR STARTERS" to "16482 MOTOR STARTERS"
3. SECTION IVA — SPECIFICATION SECTION 01030 SPECIAL PROJECT
PROCEDURES
CHANGE the footer at the bottom of every page from "01015" to "01030"
Page 1 of 3
�
•
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
4. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 01065 PERMITS AND
EASEMENTS
ADD the following to the table on Page 01065-2:
"Pinellas County Right-Of Way Use Permit"
DELETE Line 23 on Page 01065-2.
5. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 01625 START-UP SYSTEMS
TESTING
CHANGE Line 16 on Page 01625-1 to read as follows:
"provide a written startup plan, for review by the Engineer, for individual"
6. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 02140 TEMPORARY
DEWATERING
CHANGE Line 27 on Page 02140-1 to read as follows:
"Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review the"
7. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 03350 MULTI-LAYERED
MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
CAANGE Line 5 on Page 03350-4 to read as follows:
"review by the Engineer."
8. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 13567 TEMPORARY BYPASS
PUMPING PROVISIONS
CHANGE Line 19 on Page 13567-1 to read as follows:
"complexity as the proposed system for review by the Engineer. The proposed"
IN THE DRAWINGS
1. LIFT STATION #33 REHABILITATION C1.02 SITEWORK
DELETE the entire drawing C1.02 SITEWORK.
ADD the attached drawing "C1.02 SITEWORK".
2. LIFT STATION #33 REHABILITATION M1.01 PROPOSED FRP WETWELL,
VALVE VAULT AND BALLAST PLAN AND SECTION
DELETE the entire drawing M1.01 PROPOSED FRP WETWELL, VALVE VAULT
AND BALLAST PLAN AND SECTION.
Page2of3
�
1� J
u
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
ADD the attached drawing "M1.01 PROPOSED FRP WETWELL, VALVE VAULT
AND BALLAST PLAN AND SECTION".
3. LIFT STATION #33 REHABILITATION SHEET M1.02 PROPOSED PIPING,
PUMPS, AND WALKWAY PLAN AND SECTION
DELETE the entire drawing M1.02 PROPOSED PIPING, PUMPS, AND WALKWAY
PLAN AND SECTION.
ADD the attached drawing "M1.02 PROPOSED PIPING, PUMPS, AND WALKWAY
PLAN AND SECTION".
GENERAL CLARIFICATIONS
1. Bidders are advised that at the time of the initial advertisement, some duplicative
specifications were posted and some specifications were not posted. The posting has
been corrected. Bidders are advised to visit the City's web site to ascertain the project
specifcation requirements.
2. There are no MBE or WBE requirements for this project.
3. Bidders are advised to review the Report of Geotechnical Investigation Pump Station #33
Rehabilitation included in the Contract Documents. Note the presence of large pieces of
asphalt, rock, and debris in the excavation areas. This material shall be removed as noted
on SHEET C1.02 SITEWORK ofthe Lift Station #33 Rehabilitation Drawings
END OF ADDENDUM #1
Page 3 of 3
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
Bv: /s/William B. Horne, II
City Manager
LEGEND
°= 10'-0•'
a; REPLACEMENT NADTH
• B�
a� 6' PERFORATED 2' �f57 STONE EX. GRADE
g� GEOWEB w/ /57 STONE SURFACE
g� I
�.�
o
•
•
� .,� • '�.. ,' . _ ...
:° 12' STABILIZED SUBGRADE J � GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
�� LBR 40 (SEE NOTE 2)
�� NOTES:
- 1. EXCAVAIE 7HE SUBGRADE SOIL SUCH THAT THE SURFACE ELEVATONS AT TNE
�� C01APlETION OF CONSTRUCTION MATCH THE EXISTING ELEVA710NS. DISPOSE OF EXCESS
g§ MATERULS OFF-SITE.
�� 2 COMPACT THE TOP 12-INCHES OF THE SUBGRADE SqL TO 98X OF AIAXIMUM STANDARD
PROCTOR DRY DENSITY (SPDD).
3. EXPAND GEOWEB SECTIONS, DIMENSIONED ACCORDING TO THE CONSTRUCTION DRAINNGS,
INTO POSITION USING S1F2ETCHER iRAMES, TEMPORARY STAKES, OR OTHER SUITABLE
YETHODS TO 7EMPORARILY FIOLD IN PLACE.INTERLEAF OR OVERLAP ADJACENT SECTONS
ACCORDING TO WHICH SIDE WALL PROFlLES ABUT. ENSURE 1HAT ALL ADJOINING CELLS
ARE FULLY STAPLED.
4. PLACE THE SPECIFlED INFlLL MATERIAL IN AND 2-INCHES ABOVE THE CELL WALLS.
COMPACT THE INFlLL MATERIA� TO 95R SPDD.
5. PLACE AND COMPACT ADDITIONAL /57 STONE AS REQUIRED TO MATCH IXISTING GRADES
AND RESULT IN A FLAT SURFACE.
ROAD STABILIZATION DETAIL
N75
� .
F, `
r
� ... _._ ._.
�2�•
TCH EXISTING ' � �" �"'
GRADE
?_ t �: �'t.i.-t a ._ .. . .
�� �a;�*,a;.:
.:r.;,:,... . ,.. ..,t.
'� t EXIEND E%ISTING WATER sa., ��
l/,z-.. �>, p�_ tJNE. SEE M 1.02 1�.��.
,� � ,
,. � �..... - -
/ L ' i
�� �� a� ;� ��
� ���� � , _ ,�� _. - a. _ _ .. _ . . .
n�a � .
rc' it �t
sri` L��".� �` �'•
ti
��� i':��
,f � �3��
cx .�n�/
� t.��., w.�:i r �''.. t.
� �c�er^, .a±�!�:. --.. �
� .�� ;=-,c. �s r ,�. u� i"\ .
,� � �
iS MATCH XISTING � � �'
GRADE 5a
t {
;'t 4:5 f � Q .
�
,�� � 2 I
��� �
.� � �� �o� � �
� �,.
' - i }6 �^� I _
� ��pi �
- ��,u .. I
`_ �
'- $
RECORD DRAWINGS
smcrrn ar: ortnw er:
SILT FENCE 607
t.00
- !. PROPOSED SITE GRADING
_'£,Y. . _.«_
Y ,
r
�. R. � - '�. .:
t'f uNE r' °-
_ . �^y ' . _ pRO�� � , ' , - � o,
���i :oP• .. . . J
\
£ Y
f• ' � `�
�
� S ' j �
� '� '�% �:.. CONTRACTOR TO CUT AND REAIOVE EXISTING
� � ° SOIL / DEBRIS. REGRADE SITE AS SHOWN. INSTALL
� BAHIA SOD ON ENTRE LIFT STATION SITE INSIDE THE WETLAND LINE.
_ .
��'��' 15.= -
� .� �:.a
ti,'y� � MATCH EXISTING GRADE AT
, WETLAND LINE
�� � z < _
: :: F. °'sh�7a. " •,.,::
� i PROPOSED PUMP STAiION
� SEE SHEET A11.02
—s�—
REVISION
�FINISHED C�12ADE FOR NEW
UNPAVED ROAD SHALL MATCH
EXISTING GRADE. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE
PRE—CONSTRUCiION AND POST—CONSTRUCTION
TOPO SURVEY TO VERIFY ELEVATIONS
�`�� t ��'�f:H :9r. r.�._
, tiK.;
SILT FENCE/
uMirs ov ca�srnucnorr
h,c�ALa���` CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA �CALL 811
��. ' � ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SUNSHINE STATE
° ONE CALL
n �_�. ��Q OF fLORIDA
F �Q 100 S. Myrtle Ave. ,.�,��,,,,,n�..�om
�IER �' Clearwater, Fl 33756 r (a �� ,sz-.no
,� ��
BY D�h � BEfiAE YW GGV�IE
LIFT STATION #33
REHABILITATION
�
.,,<:�e:tr,
9 �
�a�� �
. �t�a�!'sL?
;r
t f`
� :.4
�
rX, +.:i.t4R�:t"s.
�` 7
�I�, v° J^_....._ .....,
l � �a� �s.�i� �,�
� 10 20 ,� j
f
SCALE: FEET `
��,, � 1
f ? "` t
__ .�
. t� ,;
-, ,r �'n �. . ......_
`` { TM��x
`�.,�` l�`� ✓` ,,,•r ° �,,, .� �
.
,
�r'- , .
�
ti � . ;��✓ . a .._._. � � .. .
e 1
�- ° :�„
e �
.%'`; -��` �, ,. �
��
�� ? �
x �
� z �
_._. ..�.k „ �,. A _,
� �Y .� �
(z) Hr�w s'-o' nccESS ;`3 � ;,s
^ATES AND POSTS j -- �
SEE DETAIL SHT. D7 01
i
, _ ,. _ �. d=€ . ,�i,� .
i
S ITE W ORK
C1.0
�
i
i
�
2�
J
Q��
•/ .r - -
�° ; ;.�
�
a. i
�
�S�'.
�
B/D D O C IJ�I��1 laS°
4921 Memorial Highway
One Nem<r al Center Smte300
���� T�mpn Fbnd 39644
Phone 813 880 8881
r
ENGINEERINOASSOCIA7ES.INC www�.ul_en_lneeruie-wnl
6ngfncenng Liccnsc #?610
,,�� .�
��,�,
a. o, „
JEE
�mr. AS SHOWN
nanz AS SHOWN
�ATC—
�
•
�
�
�
.
, ,.
�N,y
i � ' ... : .,,.
�� .:�
: "� ' , , f '\ '
�t
3 / . � ..k`" �1..
i �
: .�'� ,.'.: � f ,`�,,, . � : ::- �,,,.::
�
� .' , s.. ;I': s_ �: �--=
�I 1 '�
- -- _ � - _ M 1.01
0 4 8 76... �\ 'l� ___ .__.. ......... ....... _.._ ....__ ___. ._........ _ ..... .. ...... _... ......... ___.... ... .... ... .. _....._ .._.._ ._.:2�
$CALE: 3/8' = 1'-0' �� � _._ ....... ....... .. .........
...,`. .� ..._ ............ ......... ........ . .... ..... . ........ ........ .. .. . .. . . . .......... ..... . ...... . .. .... .. .... ......._ ... ...... �.. '�.
3'.,lv,'...,. __ . ... ... .... . . . ... ..... ...._. ____ ...._... ......... _ ... .... ._...... ........ . ...... ... _..... ....... . . . ... . ___.. ......... '�.
� � ,
�'.. 15 ____. .._._ ._.... _...... .._.._ ..___ ___. ....._. __.. .._._ ____. -___ _..... ..._... __._ .__._. ____. � '.
15
�� .. ...... ....... ... 10'x10' CONC. TOP SLAB 300� PSF 6-F00T - '�
£ ..._. ....._....... . .. . .. .._.._. . . . .. ... .._... , i
� _ �'" DIAMETER ALUMINUM LID W/ '�,
�s.z:i�,�_-__.. _ ._._...,...._ . ____... ' ` .._. ..__. __... ____. _._. _.._.. __._ .._.. _ ._.. . ....__. ........ .36'...x 48'...MA7CH--COYERS... ...__ _.__ ...__. �,.
_..
`"' �, ' WRAP VALVE VAULT STONE BASE AND FALL PROIECTION '�,
..... ,.,'`' ......._IN-GEOiEXT1LE��FABRIC AS .._..... ... ...... .......... . . . .... .... . .. ... ... . .... ......... . ...._. ....... .. ......... _...... _.......
�-'--..._ -;. DESCRIBED ON PAGE 3 OF THE . �,
.. „_...,. ......REPORT�OF��GEOiECHNICAL ......... ..... ......... ...... . .. ......._ .._..... _....... ............ ... ._._.. ......... _.._.
.. � .� � INVESTIGA710N WNP STATION /33 ....... .... ... .. . I
10 __._...REMABW7ATION . _... __... ....... __... .._... __. ..__._ _....... ___.. ._..... ...._.. ...._. ......_. .._._ '�. 10 �
.....,..\ �. � Q� �',.
}`�-�,� 6k6'x4' FRP PACKAGED VALVE ����= , ;'� INSTALL NEW PRE-PACKAGED .
; •, ...... VAULT...WJ300...PSF.��LOCKABLf.... . ____ . ......... . . .... .. ... . � .•..... _ 6' Y FRP WETWELL. VAIVE VAUIT, WPLEX PUMP, �.
� ..' . � .. ... .•', ... PIPING...AND CONTROL PANE... . ....... �
10'x10' CONC. TOP SLAB , DWBLE ALUMINUAI HATqi COVERS � L ASSEMBLY �, �
,%� , .... (ROTATEO FAR CLARI717..ANCHOR ... .:' ...... . .. � . . ._ r�.=ziz .._ _. .
; , TO BALLAST CONC IN MANNER �' T ��
300 PSF 8' DIAMETER ALUMINUM `Y. "• , '' ':�..' � � ..... APPROVED BY ENGINEER. . .... ...._ ... ... . .... . ... ... .. �{ . _.` .... '',.
. � _ _ _ _ _ - ex cRn�E
LID N7TH 36' x 48' HATCH CO�ERS •..��. ��. �'. . /5 BARS AT �' � / ' �' �
AND FALL PROTECTION �� g �_._.. ..._..12' O.C,...EW_ .. . ____. _._ •: ____ ......._ ___.. ,�+ _..._ ex._canoe J ,- � ......_ � Ex z'xz rncrn� cRr,rc ...._ �-; 5 ��I
, TOF' OF BOX EL = 4.25 EL = 4. 6-r � Ex eaicK uPaEa wn�� i
. . ,..: �:. , ...... .. i ...� _._ _ __. ....... \TT\7T\ • .• _. (2) 10' P`/C SLEEVES_... ; : _ ._.._. . . APPL . .. . ..__. ____.
10'-0' _ _;,., ' �-c�/�/ . ������� , (PUMP DISCHARGE) . . -�,.... ���� L11-LAYERED, SPRAY-ON 7YPE .
. , .���/�\���\� �/�\�/�\� ,.� . AIANHOLEUUNING SYSiEM TO 7HE �
- '`�� ' � �-- ��- � �`- 1 � . ... INTERIOR WALLS AND BENCH OF THE
MI%, �_���� '9 ' �� �y...a .,.,._ � �....MXIS71WETlAND AREA �� ... . .... \�\�f�j�j . IP .... N R IN. =7 ps._ ...._ .._ ... ..... FlNIS ANHOLE ...__. ___ . I
� , . . � � � .- �...� �� ti
.'. - . ., :. 4
... ..
_.
,
..,.�..::.�� .��:-,��.' . " .. ', °-..... `i, 6'._ J CAP � �
� ' � . ,. .� i r�. 0 .-_ -�� . . ;.� �, ._,_ �� ., -. __.. . -- -- - ...... —_ p
z ,. _,. : .'.'.'.'.'.'. '::. ` .��"M / .
� � .,. . . . . . _. .-., ����� ,...� x�,, ,�iz.�.._ .�'��, �.:. ..V�AL�VEXVAU T _ .._t1)_.6 PVC��SLEEVE � ORE DRILL EX. STRUCTURE ��I
��' 10'-0' �, �, .. � . .'. . . . . . . , . . . ... . . - . _. .. - tLRST EONC. - —.. ... . ._._. ...__ ... .... � I
� .� :. � ' ` : .,��.. '^r � ..._...._ __.__....�,......,. � KORLN DSEAL, � AND KORN N-SEAL B00 TCONNEC�TORR _. ..
�:,..... ... ,
, .'.'. . . . . , . . - ' , _
� . . . , , � , : �. - a _... _ ..,.. _..
`. . . • . • . . • .. = . � . ..__. ... ,_. ..__ __. __ FORM BENCH / GRWT
. � . . .. ; , . ... . B00T CCiJNECTOR
., ,. � � .. ,�...�.....�. . . � _. . .
. .. ._ _ __._ ..._ .__.. __. . B OF �57 STON
, - . . " � , � .,. _..._ .
.. . .. , .- � °"""' '- .. �.,._._ .." SEE M7 02 FOR BACKFlLLSAND COMPACT E
- -. , . . . . . . . . . . . . , , ..... � .-...�..
� ;
��. , 'i �°' .
`, . . . , ., -�.� � .. , : ;: , "'--_ :. .. . NEW FM P1P1NG. W/.. GRANULAR. FILL.SO ' `• ._... _ ...... ....... . .... � rx....io". o i P . .
�. W
`�. .� . : : : .; �,.,, .�.� ; � .... " OF STANDARD _ . _ ....
.+ :.. ' ` . . . . , , _- , ...,. _ . _. ......_ _..._.. .. _... . _._ . _..._. . _. _ . _ EL� _g 4B_... - — _ _.. ._._.._.... __ .._ 5
n : . . � . .-- ;' �
957. ..
- 5. PROCTOR DENSIT' (TYP.j __. r.' . INY:
, -� . �-.��' � -._. .
. :. , ,:' , �. � � E NEW DI MJ REDUCER & CPLG EL= -6.00 � �. �
�>, -'. �: . � �'� ...:.,:. � .( :� ._. _..__ .-'' �� I IF REWIRED �..�. �_ . ` �..�= ; �,�� . � iNV. e�.--aee ���..
c `, ;�_. ..., :• .,�_, ' . � , -'�:,,;� _.. ...... .... P . . .... .. �� ... .... ...
r •. . �
' � TOP EDGE OF EX STEEL PUA1 STATION --(1} 14' PVC�SLEEVE��� �•
- �,. ...� -: ^ .. .. .. . . ......... . . ... . • ... �GRANTY. SEWER) .. � .. '� , �. , ._ ......
m 2'-0" .. � , '�
$„� �• .. � wn �oNC �owER -
d \�'. . �s -10 �......... ___.. ......... ......... _. .... _..__. . .' ____ _....... _ .:� _....... . �.� . _. ._.. ____ ____. 1
.
.: • p
c : , ; ,:.: __._ . -
� :. � •� i __ ___ ..... . ... ......... ____ ...._... SEE SHT • .. ��' •t '�.
, %. ..;.... ,.:. •`. -iNV EX WETWELL PtT Et =tt-:04
,. �... •_ ; .
° � ` %' eorroM ov ai. E�.=-n �� _S 1 _. _ .:_• . •.'. , . •_.:;. . ' •" . , ��.
� 300 PSF DOUBLE ALUMINUM t . .... ... ....
w 60' z 36' HATCH COVERS 8•_�- , ��. �-- - �
� MATH PAD LOCK PROVISION `,. ;.. '� I .. .. _. . ..... .. .. .. . ..... .. . .. .._...._ _..... ... ... . .._.. .... ....... .. . .._..... FlLL EX. WETWELL ?0 INVERT ......... .
� � EIEVATYON �1MiH��CONCRE7E. �
4 . . I ' �. '�.
__.
Y �.:., ..... . ..... . . . . .. ..... .... _..._ _. -..� ... .... '�.
V `FP '� ' ' FlLL ANNULAR SPACES ... ... .... ... .... . .
w...�........�....:� _.. . . .. . �� :. ,�� -is ... _ . _ . _.. wITTi CONCRETE -_ _. __ ._ _. ._ .. ._.. .- --- -- -15
W f ��.. , ; NOIE:
¢ � ��. � ,� ,�� CONCRETE LANDING `� ..... ..... ..... . .. ... ... . . .... __ _. ... .... ...... ._ ....... .. . . ._ .... .....
�� � t-`}+' ��� s-� FOR STAIRS ' �, ALL PIPING TO BE RESTRAINED. _
w
� �%/ . , �, �..
� - i "s. �� � e� .,,. _. �. . . �.
. , .->:�� . . ,
a � �
\ � _ _ _ _ _ __SECTION_ _ �__
� , , _ _ _ __ '
� l� :,� �� -20 .__ __.._....__ . . . ..... _ .._..._ scn�e:__a�e =i o�.__ ._ ._... _... M1.01.. .___. .___. ._.._. _........ ...... '�-20
SILT FENCE� �t '
� � uMirs aF cor�snzucnoN � � B�D �� C U/ �/ �/ d Ta..J
m �°� 6'x 6'x4' FRP .
N PAqCAGED VALVE VAULT W/300 PSF,
� ��; � �` LOCKABLE, DOUBLE ALUMINUM HATCH COVERS � %
� �.. .,,,..., +3" ..
� , ' - .. . e° <, c;%3�q
O �1 �,��� - � � � �
V �
D--� _ � �` _:. :r. :.ta��' .
$ �
� ,
RECORD DRAWINGS
��,ma. �,.�„� �c�A1'�r�,�` CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA �CALL 81^1
� reHercn er: �� � SUNSHINE STATE
Z ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT oNe cn��
� 100 S. M rtle Ave. or r�orsio�
c'a ¢
� �— l-` Q� y w. v//:uuh/ns.com
�"""°�`° a" 9�liq�g c'�� Clearwater, Fl 33756 � ceo �> uz-n�o
.. r ...� m � REViSION o�h acsar+c rw ezu .�c
LIFT STATION #33
REHABILITATION
4921 Mamonal H�ghway
One Memor aI Center Su te 300
Kin� Tampa Flonda33694
Phone 813 880 8881
F V 2 Vyn y¢
E�������`T�•�. www.l,[ngen�mezring.c.om
�� 6ngineertng License N2610
DMC MNIL FlF]D BOp(: A1R\
M7.01
PROPOSEJ FRP WETWELL, °°' 09 000a-ur °"� 09 0� i� °""`
VALVE VALILT AND BALLAST '� � °""`° °" °"`
JEE
PLAN AND SECTION � °,�,�
wrt. AS SHOWN
���
�
u
t_J
�, �,. � _._ ,
. _ _
� �- � ___
�;_ _._.
,� - �� ��< < :, � �s.
,
i ' _ - c � a.�,� � �}, `�
f % . ... 0 4 8 �6 'i
l �
M 1.02 I
: .��" `-..Y. .;G YF.Wp.^._ .:u,. SCALE: 3�8� - 1'-0� . . • 'jQ ... . .. .. ..... . ........ ........ .._.__ .____ ..._ .. ....... _\_ ___._ ..___ _.___ ....... . .. .._... ......... ____. __._. , 2�
; � , �., �. .... ......... ......... ......... ......... ._ ..... ....... .. . . ..... .. ......... ...6'_R..X..PE..SChf �40 SS PIPE ....... ......... ......... ,,.
� '� INSTALL SS fUNGE ON PE WITH FlLLET WELD '�.
... .. .... . .... .. . .. ......... ......... ...... ... ....... .. ANiENNA ........ . ...... ........PERFORMED...M...T+if FIEW.............. .. . ......... ......... _
'�. SEE SHEET R1.00 -
. ,,,.,... ., ......_ ...... . _ ......... ......... . ........ .. ......... CON7ROL PANEL/RN PANEL..IMTH ... _... . ........ ...... . . . �.
>:a .. .... . .. ...... ........ ...... PROMSION FOR A PADLOCK AND .. .....
F�� � ...4' PVC J-VENT W1TH BUGSCREEN . . . . .... .. MWNTED TO TOP�SLAB W/..UNISTRUT .. ... ........ . '
� �� �
`'� , , 't5 __.._ ....... .. ......... _._. ......... ...... '.
: ... ......... . . . . ._ ...... __... .___ .__.. .___. ..__ ._.._ . 75
��:..��` �'�. 70'x10' CON0. TOP S�AB 6' SCH 40 SS FLANGED 90' BEND '�..
�� ��� h' ����� FACE��OF���CANTLEVER�� ALUMINUM ACCESS STAIRWAY
; � "� ANTENNA AND CONC. BASE '� -'---�- . ' HANDRAIL MWNTED TO
'- �� SEE SHEET R7.00 `�-..., `�� .�. , .. . ..... . ......... ... (TYP. ALL 4 SIDES) . ...... . .. ......... ATTACHED TO CONCRETE DEp( ......... . ........
� - � '"`�..,, ,.:.._,i':.. ........ . ... .. .. . ......... ......._ ......... ......... . .... . _ iROTATED FOR CLARITY) ......... __. . _ ..._. _
INSTALL NEW PRE-PACKAGED AND PRE PIPED
u i �`'.�~`. 6' 0 FRP WETNELL, VALVE VAULT, DUPLEX PUMP,
� r
� NEW q MJ REDUCER ��.,,, AND CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBI.Y
�� IF REQUIRED ELECTRICAL CONDUITS INSTALLED �p -....... __ ....... _...... ____. __.._
' BELOW TOP SLAB. PENEiRATE SIDE ~� RESTRNNED FLANGE COUPLING ADAPIER ----� � �-��-�� ���-�� ��
� INSTALL NEW 6� ECC. PV W/ RISER pp WE7WELL, (Q�qNTITY AND SIZE ���
"- AND VALOE BOX PER ELECIRICAL DRANANGS) ,' \� ... ..... .... 6� R X�PE DI PIPE a .-." ,.. `.' ......... ......4QU� COVER�D �'�.
0
7EMPORARY BY-PASS CONNECTION � `\ , FRP VALVE VAULT �
TO BE REMOVED, AND CAPPED. _. -<-. I� �\ ROTATED FOR CLARITY
.:�s.. .t,� _,.�.,. - - .... .....�.. ......._) ...__ _ ......._ • ` .... '� _ ,.-...�.. 7iz . ...
-•. 5-0' 6" DI R 90' BEND ' - ' __� __ ..._ _. - _ _ _ Ex -cRnoe � .
' X„-` 6" fL RWGV �1 ��. - -- I ��l.l ��-_.
�'' CONTROL PANEL N PANEL 1MiH INSTALL NEW 10' GRAVIT' 6' CAM LOK W/ COVER % ' Y — ��
t /R , • ,� INSTALL NEW 10� SDR-26 PVC -- ��
�� REMOVE TEMPORARY �._p. Q PROVISION FOR A PADLOCK AND SEWER. CONNECT TO NEW g _. __.. .._ _.. __ . __. .• . • ...._ . _..;�,; . __.(�2AViTY SEWER. CONNECT TO . 5 �'�
l, PLUC AND CONNECT NWNTED TO TOP SLAB W/ UNISiRUT �T�LL �'-,, TOP OF BOX EL= 4.25 �� � 4� .• 6'-0" � Ex cRnoE� �,;� �� NEW WETWELL W/ BOOT ��..
. � , 45' BEND _� - - - - - ', ... . .... __ � � . _. . . �.. ._ _ ; r �. ._CONNECTOR
: .. HOSE REEL & SPIGOT y�::.;� ..... � � rl�� � ..._. .._. .._. . �,\ ��% ' � . ' _. .__ " ... ..... I .. .. ..___ .._.....
t EX. 2 X 2 METAL GRATE --� / i. /`i. i, 3 � �
� �'"�., � TO BE REPLACED W� 2�x2� u�E TO MATCH EXISTING ,�� ��� .�
SOL1D COVER, USF 2108 COVER GRADE AT WETUND AREA i� �� ��," I
,.�' ..' .' ' --�. .' .� , . .�.,.,-.. APPROVED EWAL � x i K uaa R wnu
. �, pR INTEGRAL SL �E TO DRA�N E eac e
�`.. � ,. .�. . , . .: . � - .... - __ _ _ ..... EX. �WETWELL MANHOLE . .
� -, , . _: .... g x 0 . . ..... / .. __ ..._ __. ROTAIEQ FOR CLARITY � �
- ; ,
� \�j
. '
; . �.. ., _ _ . " .�.a..__ �
; . . .. . -._ .y�. __......�.�..._
-�
%
�
.: . `r
�
-� � 2 r . f , ; 7, t� � 4 /\
� ,_ \ . �, .,..
,
,, . .. ..�. ; .
I /��j /� / y�� /� j �
4 , . ... . , �
.._ , ,
� �.
,�
.�
.
, f �y� �
10' x 10' CONC. TOP SUB � ...:' .�. , ,.'� ; . �y"...._. "` ... STRUDTURE pENE7RAT10N . � � . . ....... .._ .... ...... ... ..... ._...... _ ......
; \ .;;< . . .� : __. . —i—!. .. .: 1r� � __.,._.V..m. �� � �� ..__...� ._._ (SEE NOTE 1) ...f��� ....._ '.... . __ __. .......
HANDRAIL MOUNIED TO ' �- -, ; `" . , : . . � - , t �%.`�.'� : t _....... ._. . .V.,... � .... . . ....... .. ......._ _ . . . ,.. ...... .. . .... . ....... . ..... _ . . .. .... .
ED _
FACE OF CANTILEVER � ��� � - .� .. . ..°-. 2 SCH BO P DRAIN t
, t !
(iYP. ALL 4 SIDES) � . .' , -., ,_ , , _� _..... � ,, .._ � 7R 1 _ . _ - '�. ex. io' o � P_ .
l
� �� '� °� �� \ � U P DISCHAR E PIPIED � :
fi' DR-18 C-900 FM \ ; : ' . ,. ' . � :_ �--..,, _. _ , , . _ .... .... ....... __ __. G . __ ...._.. — _ .._ ._ __ _. ....... ....._.. -g ,.
P MP NG
. .,-^° F 5 ' . •
fi' FL X PE SCH 40 SS PIPE � � � ��� �� iMV E� a&e I
, . . . _...._.......,..✓``� _ EL� -6.00 : ..� _. , � :�
FALNGE ON PE WITH FlLLET WEtD � . ���. ' , ,� .. . _.. .._ _ �j, .... ��,:. ,�. ':�.. �� � . - '�.
PERFORMED IN 711E FlELD � . `�� �- , ' ��� �' � ,- ` •� INTERMEDIATE 376 SS PIPE ;
�'�• i � � � . .. <' • ��' PENE ATON ����� I t SUPPORTS O 6' 0.0. r � ' �� -
;,, , r
:ESTRAINED FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTER (TYp.) , . � r , '' -
(SEE NOlE 1) ... _._ .� _. -'°,. .
� __. .... ._ __ _.. __.. .. ___ ... ._..
�4. 2' PVC UNION � ; 6' X 4" SCH 40 55 FLANGE CONCENTRIC RED. : ' � -: �' .'� Ex coNC �owER '�
`,2' PVC DRAIN ;• . .... .... .... .... .... ... . .-.._ .. •.; � ......... . ;� �.,'; .+_:.. , .... .. wnu ......... '..
. �. i'-0' A80� EX BOTTOM ,-. ;.. ' , .;.,.; ' ", ..:.t ., .. ���.
6' DI FL 90' BEND �'.`,� I 2"_SCH 80 PVC -10 ___. ____. ___. ._..... ._._... ....._.. ____ � .• _ . __._ ::._ � :. .:. ._._ ._._ __.. _7
6' R RWGV WATER SERNCE CONNECT ... . ........ ...... ..... ..... ...... : •
6' CAM LOK W/ COVER l�. O 6' FL L k W CV (7YP.) TO EXISTING WATER SERVICE .� ���' ��'�
• ` ;� �, �.' .. "` .-' ,K� ��{ -iNV��Ex -WE-iW€lt��PIT El:�-t1-:fl4
�, BOTTOM OF PIT EL=-It 71 . ' •'.. ,. • . � .. � � .. �,� . �
(2) 6' DI MJ 90' BEND �,.'' �;��� �- ''�. . 'NTE� MIN 6'FlLLET W/ -- ^ �,
: STAIRWAY ... ___ ......_. ..__. ......... . '., . .. .. . ......�.. .-. _._OPE ........... . . ... ......... ......... _._... ..... '
,� i - •'` ���.
�
_�__ ....,� _�..�.._. �' ./ ; COM&NAT10N ,�' NEW SUBNIERSIBCE PUTAPS AND BASE ELBOWS� : INSTALL LEVEL 7RANSDUCER _
�.� `•�' ' �R ��� .;: PUMP SMALL PASS A 3' SOLJD SEE DETAIL, SHT. D1.01 ��.
i 6' DI FL TEE 6' FL RWGV (TYP.) '�,;'. _15 ..._ ._. __. ___. __ ...... .... ... _._ ... _... __ .... ._. . . _ .._ <.-15
i
F
� 1�..�'d, �..� ��z}{y (� - 2•-0• k ... .... ..._ . .... . ... . - ..... ... . . . . . .
' ��� ;- E;� .s, �" ,t..,-'.; �°�::: � � . MIN. .... __ _.... _.. .... ___ ..... ... ... .. . _ ._ INSTALL (4) FLOAT SWITCHES .__. .._ _. .
�, , . , ._... . .
�. i: ... _'_ :�.�'� .�� fRP VALVE VAULT � ... ... ... ..... . .. ... __. '
� — SECTION %�
SILT FENCE/ a� j ��, scn�: a/e°=r_o' tA . ,,,.
� � CONSTRUCTION UMITS '�. '�
>a
`: E
� _ _ __ _ _ _ _ __Bio ooc��E�rs
' �' ' EX. HOSE BIBB, & RISER TO BE REMOVED � _20 ���
t}�, EXTEND SERVICE TO NEW PLATFORM ` �
� MINIMUM 36' COVER . �
. .,; �:c� - a`sG t.3sac-.
°�� NOTE:
.,
� � 1. ALL FRP STRUC7URE PENETRAlI0N5 SHALL 8E MOLDED ��
� FRP HUBS WI7H SLEEVES INSTALLED AT THE FACTORY.
LINK SEALS SHALL BE USED AT ALL FRP PENETRATIONS �
EXCEPT THE GRANTY SEWER UNE. A B00T CONNECTOR
� SHALL BE USED FOR THE GRAVITY SEWER CONNEC110N.
, 2. ALL PIPING TO BE RESTRAINm.
RECORD DRAWINGS
�� ��,�. ,c,�AL'+��` CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA �CALL 811
�� �. a ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT SUNSHINE STATE
ONE CALL
�* �— F="`� 100 S. M rtle AVC. 0� FLORIDA
�o�m e.: 9 � pQ Y .. on ,,.,na..ro„�
�ER �' C learwa ter, F l 3 3 7 5 6 � c8�µ us-.no
a . xi ... i r �— REVISION onre ecrowc �n "uvrz
LIF"I' STATION #33
REHABILITATION
4921 Mcmorial Highway
� One Memt nal Cen[er. Smte 300
Tampa Plonda 93614
Phone 813 880-8881
K ina eu ars o . F. .. x �; RRn_RRR�
�ow�oMO,ia �-� "'"""t�'"""x'�''"'���"�. .ww.kmgen��neenng.com
�� engmccrtng Licensc #2610
Dw NAYL i1E1D 90pc: A1R�
M7.02
PROPOSED PIPING, PUMPS AND °°" os 0003-uT °"" 09 0, „ °""�
WALKWAY PLAN AND SECTION �� ��o en�EE °"`
�� ��
�,�,�
wrt. AS SHOWN
�«� as sHOwN
� �:
�
City of Clearwater, Florida
LIFT STATION 33 REHABILITATION
(09-0003-UT)
AND
LIFT STATION 42 REHABILITATION
(10-0051-UT)
SECTION I
SECTION II
SECTION III
• SECTION IV
�
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IVA SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V
APPENDIX A
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
Page i
10/29/12
• ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
LIFT STATION #33 REHABILITATION
(PROJECT NO. 09-0003-UT)
AND
LIFT STATION #42 REHABILITATION
(PROJECT NO. 10-0051-UT)
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or
purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address:
www.myClearwater.com/cityprojects, on Friday, March 8, 2013, until no later than close of
business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as
indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of: Rehabilitation of Lift Stations #33 and #42.
A Mandatorv Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Frida
March 22, 2013 at 10:00 AM on site at the MSB Conference Room 130. Representatives of the
Owner and the Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located
. at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 South Myrtle Ave., 3�d Floor Conference Room 342,
Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 PM on Thursdav, April 4, 2013, and publicly opened
and read at that hour and place for REHABILITATION OF LIFT STATIONS #33 and #42,
CONTRACT NUMBERS 09-0003-UT and 10-0051-UT, respectively.
•
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits
and proposal form is available to. the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers,
vendors, etc.} for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from
those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction
category of Wastewater and Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre-qualification
amount of $ 1,500,000.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) work
days prior to the bid opening date.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Michael Murray, Purchasing Manager
(727)562-4634
SECTION Il.doc
Page 1 of 1
03/04/13
•
•
•
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents:
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ..................................................................................1
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE .................................1
4
5
6
7
8
INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2
BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3
CONTRACTTIME .......................................................................................................... 3
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3
SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3
9 SUBCONTRACTORS ......................................................................................................3
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5
13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5
15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6
18
19
20
21
AWARDOF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7
BIDPROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7
TRENCHSAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 9
CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 9
SectionII.docx
0
4/3/2012
•
•
•
Section 11— lnstructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
l.l Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan
Room — website address: www.myclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract
Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only,
which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications,
bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified
bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a
possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a"Subcontractor"
package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
].2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner befare obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); l00 South
Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727)
562-4750. Pre-Qualification requirements information is also available on City of
Clearwater Website at address:
www.mvclearwater.com/ ov/depts/pwa/engin/Construction/prequal.asp.
Contractors wanting to pre-yualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so
two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre-qualified by
the City do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.l It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof far the
purposes of bidding ar construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
SectionII.docx
Page 1 of 9
4/3/2012
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) •
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former •
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto reyuired for
temporary construction facilities or starage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an uneyuivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every reyuirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.l All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded
by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions
received after the time frame specified at the pre-bid meeting prior to the date for opening of •
Sectionll.docx Page 2 of 9 4!3/2012
�
4.2
5
Section ll — Instructions to Bidders
Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be
binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) ofthe Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting
the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the reyuired Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (l0) days after the award of contract
by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or far a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
53
• s
6. l
%
7.1
$
The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
CONTRACT TIME
The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
reyuested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
� of yualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
SectionII.docx Page 3 of 9 4/3/2012
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed �
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. lf
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices
shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in
the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures,
the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents.
Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each •
section or item shall be for furnishing all eyuipment, materials, and labor for completing the
section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities
or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or
should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for
each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid
for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xll" manila envelope with the
project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall •
be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and
Sectionll.docx Page 4 of 9 4/3/2012
Section ll — Instructions to Bidders
• addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at
the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or
facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
121 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
• alteration of form, unautharized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, ar
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any ar all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
161 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
• in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
SectionII.docx
Page 5 of 9 4/3/2012
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical �
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
l 6.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes reyuired by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the
WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase
(ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical
Specifications and as defined in Section llI — General Conditions.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
l 7.l In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace progam shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace progam. In arder to have a drug-free workplace •
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition. .
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business`s policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection ( l), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation progam if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted. •
SectionII.docx Page 6 of 9 4/3/2012
.
•
•
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
reyuirements.
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
l 8.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the yualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems
necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved
person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts
giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals.
Opening dates for bids or due dates for reyuests for proposal will be printed on the
bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a ma�cimum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written reyuest. Protests of recommended award should cite
SectionII.docx
Page 7 of 9
4/3/2012
Section I1— Instructions to Bidders
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly �
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should
be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated
with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10)
work days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing •
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid.
19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
SectionII.docx
Page 8 of 9
4/3/2012
•
�
LJ
CJ
•
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance
related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety
Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s
1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit
and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater
management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively
reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining
water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control
practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment
loadings to surface waters.
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and
sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion
and sediment control provisions.
NPDES Management
Environmental Division
Management Practices.
References EPA website
SectionII.docx
Measures available at Citv of Clearwater Engineerin�
and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best
Page 9 of 9
4/3/2012
•
Table of Contents:
1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
DEFINITIONS.................................................................................................................. 1
PRELIMINARYMATTERS ........................................................................................... 5
DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5
COPIESOF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 5
COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THEPROJECT ................................................................................................................ 5
BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 5
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 6
PROGRESSMEETINGS ................................................................................................ 6
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7
3.l INTENT ........................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCEPOINTS .................................................................................................... 8
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ......................................................................................... 8
• 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................ 8
43 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, iJNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 9
•
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9
S.l PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................... 9
5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................... 9
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTYDAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 12
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES .....................................................................12
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14
6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS .................................................. 14
6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 15
6. S.1 STAGING AREAS .................................................................................................... I S
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ................................................................................ 1 S
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16
6.8 PERMITS .......................................................................................................................17
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17
6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................18
6.11 DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................18
SectionlII.docx
7/31l2012
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ........................ 18
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 19
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 21
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES :....................................................................................................23
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 23
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23
6.14 1NDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 24
6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION ......................................... 24
7
7.l
7.2
8
9
10
11
fia
13
14
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
OTHERWORK .............................................................................................................. 24
RELATEDWORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 24
COORDINATION......................................................................................................... 25
OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25
OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................
CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ...........................................
REJECTING OF DEFECTNE WORK ...........................................................
SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .....................
DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ...........................................................................
LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES
............ 25
............ 26
............ 26
............ 26
............ 26
............ 27
CHANGESIN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 28
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28
I l.l CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 30
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 30
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 31
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OFDEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 31
TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31
UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 32
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32
CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 33
WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 33
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33
OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 34
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34
APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34
CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 35
REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35
PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 36
FINALINSPECTION ................................................................................................... 37
FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ...........-• ...................................................... 37
FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37
WAIVEROF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 38
SectionIII.docx
ii
7/31/2012
•
•
•
�
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 38
l 5.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 38
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38
l 5.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 40
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION .....................................................
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
�
......... 40
MISCELLANEOUS....................................................................................................... 40
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40
17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 40
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 41
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 41
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 4l
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................................... 4l
17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ................................................. 41
ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 41
MATERIALUSED ......................................................................................................... 41
CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 42
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 42
RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 42
22.1 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................42
22.2 EXAMPLE .....................................................................................................................42
23.1
232
233
23.4
23.5
23.6
23.7
23.8
24
25
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 43
SCOPEAND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 43
TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 43
FIXEDSIGN ................................................................................................................. 44
PORTABLESIGNS ...................................................................................................... 44
SIGNCOLORING ......................................................................................................... 44
SIGNPLACEMENT ..................................................................................................... 44
SIGNMAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 44
TYPICALPROJECT SIGN .......................................................................................... 45
AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 45
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA
AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM ..................................................................... 46
SectionIIl.docx
iii 7/31/2012
Section lll — General Conditions
` 1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
City.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
• Bid
The offer ar proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
ciry
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility far the management of construction
• contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes ar decisions regarding
SectionIII.docx Page 1 of49 7/31/2012
Sec[ion III — General Conditions
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution
Day
of the schedule.
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
SectionIIl.docx Page 2 of 49 7/31/2012
�
C�
•
Section IU — General Conditions
• professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D.O. T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department ofTransportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. T'hese terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
• A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
•
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
SectionIII.docx
Page 3 of 49 7/31/2012
Section Ill — General Conditions
Partial Utilization •
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material ar
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative defails applicable thereto.
Subcontractor •
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereo� which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplter
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractar and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond. •
SectionlII.docx Page 4 of 49 7/31/2012
Section lIl — General Conditions
� Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
. Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED;
STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
• Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
SectionIII.docx Page 5 of 49 7/31/2012
Section lII — General Conditions
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any wark at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor,
Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the
parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedUle of the Work and general Contract procedures.
Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the
Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction
conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction
Manager.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a
color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events
including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shalt deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a
completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of
construction stakeout and as-built survey.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for
reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification.
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting,
and all material test reports generated in the same time period.
SectionIII.docx Page 6 of 49 7/31/2012
�
•
•
Section Ill — General Conditions
• 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereo� to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade. usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization ar association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shalt mean the latest standard specification,
manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any
referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by
reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents,
shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's
Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
• Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in
these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such
provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the
Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
•
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Wark, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed
with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's
Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
SectionIII.docx Page 7 of49 7/31/2012
4
Section IIl — General Conditions
AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands
which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent
structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of
conditions at the
have been relied
those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shail promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any
subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially
from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer
shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer
and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
SectionIII.docx
Page 8 of 49
7/31/2012
•
•
•
•
u
�
Section III — General Conditions
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner
and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or
destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor
licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for
more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew
is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the
Contractor will be charged at the rate of $] 00.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge
of one hour.
5
5.1
BONDS AND INSURANCE
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after
the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws
and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the
Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of
"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff,
Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall
be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified
to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety
on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to
do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet
the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice
thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
SectionIII.docx Page 9 of 49 7/31/2012
Section Ill — General Conditions
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for •
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person ar property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner,
with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is reyuired to purchase and maintain in accordance with this
paragraph. The policies of insurance so reyuired by this paragraph to be purchased and
maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect
of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include
coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include
completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's
indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal
refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor
and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the
Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at
all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in •
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each
other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and
telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, •
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
SectionIII.docx Page ]0 of 49 7/31/2012
•
•
•
Section lil — General Conditions
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(l) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $ l ,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of lnsurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which
may be less than reyuired by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for
purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractar,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's
Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide
full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be
accepted without prior approval from Owner.
Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
SectionIII.docx
Page I I of 49
7/31/2012
Section Ill — General Conditions
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons ar entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all
such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to
the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and;
(ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or
after final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, seyuences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, seyuence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at al1 times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's
Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
Contractar's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The
Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed
SectionIII.docx
Page 12 of 49
7/31/2012
�
U
•
•
Section Ill — General Conditions
• from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the
Owner's Representative.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally
approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign
an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his
records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full
reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the
Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on
weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be
$60.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise reyuired for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
• and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
�
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary far the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to
be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in
the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
SectionIII.docx Page ] 3 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality reyuired. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by wards reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or eyuipment proposed by Contractor is functionally eyual to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or eyuipment
proposed by Contractor does not yualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or
equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction
conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed
by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractar shall include with
this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and
organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's
Representative far approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other
persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractar shall reyuire all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
SectionIlI.docx
Page 14 of 49
7/31/2012
•
•
•
Section 111— General Conditions
• All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor ar Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
• or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS
The Contactar shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging
and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction.
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
• calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
SectionIII.docx Page IS of49 7l31/2012
Section lil — General Conditions
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is •
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (l5) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• Sod must be restored within fourteen (l4) consecutive calendar days of a successful
pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of
driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a
period of thirty (30} days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of
denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents far use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract
Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and •
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product ar device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor
performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,
Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work:
however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not
relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as
described above.
When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02
shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E-Verify System to verify employment
eligibility. •
SectionIII.docx Page ]bof49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
• 6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary far the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of
opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work,
and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees
will be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall,
and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or
• injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractar or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident
prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and
supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition,
avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an
effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of
contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective eyuipment in all operations where there
is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of
immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment ar if property damage exists. This
provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the
Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all
safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract
performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic
materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall
take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent
disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
• shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
SectionIII.docx Page 17 of 49 7/31/2012
Section Ill — General Conditions
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, •
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or mdirectly, m whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perforrn or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Wark is acceptable.
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in
the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is reyuired because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or
Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will •
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractar shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, seyuences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the reyuirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and
Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the
Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The •
SectionIII.docx Page 18 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
• Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The
Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress
meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive
calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay
claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the reyuired number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
• will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a
number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's
Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number
of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and
Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings,
Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0
times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work
completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all
of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to
Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractar.
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
• plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
SectionIII.docx Page 19 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which �
are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay reyuests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not
conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner lnspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter SJ-] 7.052, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
SJ-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or •
vertical dimensionad data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also
knonw as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professiona] Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the
Owner with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction •
SectionIII.docx Page 20 of 49 7l31/2012
Section I11— General Conditions
� plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than l00 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. Far projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of
1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of ineasurement
shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or
vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter SJ-l7 and the
• Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
•
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbo}s
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text — use far all text, no matter the prefix
SectionIII.docx
Page 21 of 49
7/31/2012
6.
Section Ill — General Conditions
11.3.1.2 La er Namin Definitions:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property corners, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
SectionIII.docx
Page 22 of 49
7/31/2012
�
•
U
Section llI — General Conditions
� All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text
height of .O 10 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
The as-built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of ]"=20' unless
approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable
file formats include: DWG, of a shape file.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony�a�myClearwater.com.
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
� Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's
Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by
the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or
any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review
and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance
by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
• disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resoiution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
SectionIII.docx Page 23 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itsel�,
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractar shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims
against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or
employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in
company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email
addresses, etc.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own farces enter the construction site at any time and
perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether
related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for
these purposes.
SectionIII.docx Page 24 of 49 7/31/2012
•
•
\J
Section Ill — General Conditions
� The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity
is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with
the Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2 COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site,
the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
• Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
the Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible far Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, ar a designee of the Project's Owner. The
duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
•
SectionIII.docx Page 25 of 49 7/31/2012
Section 111— General Conditions
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS �
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the reyuirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of
Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract
Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued
form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as
provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to
the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to reyuire special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop •
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change
Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection
with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on
Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements af the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles far Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a reyuest for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will
be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event
giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and
the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shail submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's •
SectionIII.docx Page 26 of49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
• written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60)
days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and
Contractar.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have
under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute
or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
• Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any
other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in
good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,
exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall
create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of
the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered
by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
• The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
SectionIII.docx Page 27 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions,
deletions or revisions will be autharized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work
Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with
the Work involved which witl be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance
of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on
Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to autharized adjustments)
payable to Contractar for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days)
SectionlIl.docx
Page 28 of 49
7/31/2012
C�
�
•
Section III — General Conditions
. after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such
occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by
claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any
Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim far an adjustment in the Contract Price will be
determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the yuantities of the items involved (ii)
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii)
where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for
directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall
apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and
other items of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
• payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation
costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current
rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as
the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment
and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs
associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned
equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize
lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed
estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for
equipment on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed
by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
• percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
SectionIII.docx Page 29 of 49 7/31/2012
Section lll — General Conditions
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. •
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
reyuired by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall
be correspondingly adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times .
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred
additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract
Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily
complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project
construction and completion that not all unit yuantities will be used in their entirety and that a
finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually
used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract
Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor
in his original bid.
•
SectionlIl.docx Page 30 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
• 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that
the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract
Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with
the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
• article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall
be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable
to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including
but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for
Other Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the
Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
• all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
SectionIII.docx Page 31 of 49 7/31/2012
Section 111— General Conditions
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in •
the Contract Documents.
lf Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereo�
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required
for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or eyuipment to be incorporated in the Work,
or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if reyuested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's
Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written reyuest of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and •
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may reyuire, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and eyuipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractar shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Wark will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been •
SectionlII.docx Page 32 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
• eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, instailed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by
or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in
accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective
and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of
• others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the
Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of wark of others) will be paid by
Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
• the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
SectionIII.docx Page 33 of 49 7/31/2012
Section lll — General Conditions
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for .
Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's
recommendation for final payment an appropr�ate amount will be paid by Contractor to the
Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accardance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or
if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may,
after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In
exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from
all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall
allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors,
and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable
the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and
damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the •
amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of
Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or
replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable
to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described
herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for
review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated
in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully
installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of
the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey
and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and
•
SectionIII.docx Page 34 of49 7/31/2012
Section lll — General Conditions
• acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an
Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site
marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the
Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the
report is provided.
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials ar supplies for the Work
shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims ar encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner
• harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at the Owner's reyuest, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
whereupon payment to Contractar shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this
Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the
Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and
the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment,
unless the application reyuires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment reyuires
review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment
will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment
is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the
• reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in
writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper.
SectionIIl.docx Page 35 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. •
The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any
payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such
payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be
necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because:
(i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged reyuiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's
Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated
in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay
in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative
or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the
amount so withheld, ar any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when
Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION •
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such
part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor
will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make
an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that
part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial
Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
accessthereto. •
SectionIIl.docx Page 36 of 49 7/31/2012
Section ]ll — General Conditions
. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and
Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which
this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will
produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and
assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list.
Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the
contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract.
Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or
remedy such deficiencies.
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as reyuired in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii)
• consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in
connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the
Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i)
the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien
could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be
responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to
furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
• been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
SectionIII.docx Page 37 of 49 7/31/2012
Section IIl — General Conditions
accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for •
such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final
payment, except that such payment shal] not constitute a waiver of claims.
lf on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as reyuired by the Contract Documents, Owner's
Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in
writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment.
Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative
will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to
recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as
to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay
contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled. •
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Wark on the date
so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this •
SectionIII.docx Page 38 of 49 7/31l2012
Section 111— General Conditions
� Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the
Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise
than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to
the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or
that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and,
to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such
excess will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by
Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
• Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
•
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accardance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
SectionIII.docx Page 39 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — Genera] Conditions
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE �
If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act
on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has
failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor
may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work
until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended
to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or
Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to
Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for •
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall
be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
•
SectionIII.docx Page 40 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
• 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any
error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to
the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights
to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions
• and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction
Department.
�
17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS
All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers
and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the
City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562-4923 or email:
Michael.P�(a�mvC learwater.com.
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
19 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
SectionIII.docx Page41 of49 7/31/2012
Section Ill — General Conditions
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical
Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION
The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's
documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in
the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is
exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable
taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The
Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various
construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of
construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis.
Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See
SECTION IV, ARTICLE l.l - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract
Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents.
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
22.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of
construction; general seyuence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water
service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the
Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo
(optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances
which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the
scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by
the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and
durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-'/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's
activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected
by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas,
equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor
cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is reyuired to
maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain
appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inyuires after business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
22.2 EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
SectionIII.docx Page 42 of 49 7/31/2012
•
•
�
•
C�
Section Ill — General Conditions
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
, We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
',any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager
at (727)
struction is anticipated to begin on:
We will be more than happy to assist you.
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active
work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s)
shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in
SECTION IV, ARTICLE l.l — SCOPE DESCRIPTION.
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
• after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
SectionIIl.docx Page 43 of49 7/31/2012
Section ]ll — General Conditions
23.3 FIXED SIGN •
Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade
plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of l/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a
minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts
and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring
in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate
mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for
approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"x30") in size and will be
attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080-
inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be si(kscreen or vinyl
lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic
barricade.
23.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall
be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black.
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT •
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-
way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations
of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the reyuest for final payment.
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SectionIII.docx Page 44 of 49 7/31/2012
•
.
.
•
Section III — General Conditions
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
� PROJECT NAME
�-
(CONTRACT NUMBER)
�DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT
. � CONTRACTOR: _ __.------- --- -
�
COMPLETION DATE: _ __ _ _ __ ____-___-_--_
FUNDING: --------- --__ - - --- --
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:
_�-_ LL_ .cs_
_ °��rwater
,��
' U
L------
, ��t! , —_ �i,I�
' �,; _ _-- ',�'.�li
�, ` — I(
i
� iii �� i,
I in'j � i �I�
g i �i
, I4, �i I
'I
�Y,'� i� i i �,II.
,��' T i� ! � � ��� � "�:
� � III'� I�
I� ''; �i
�!'��
(� i � �
,`, I`�
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
�
�_
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in
Article 2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE
DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor
fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the
Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be
discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee
Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the
SectionIII.docx
Page 45 of 49
7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars •
($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS
WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies
with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum
Energy Sector List, ar is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and
may not bid on, submit a proposal far, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of
Clearwater for goods ar services for an amount equal to or greater than one million
($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or
response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list ar
engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or
response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for
purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or
Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling,
possessing, Ieasing, or operating eyuipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal
property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce.
The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with
all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. •
Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City
of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed
either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies
with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed
on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been
placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business
operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then
the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission
of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the
previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of
Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist:
A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies
with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must
occur):
1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 20l 1.
2. T'he scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July
l, 2011.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
contract with the company or entity.
•
SectionIII.docx Page 46 of 49 7/31/2012
Section lll — General Conditions
• 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal
plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any
new scrutinized business operations.
C�
u
B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria:
1. The business operations were made befare July I, 2012.
2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
contract with the company or entity.
4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal
plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new
business operations in Cuba ar Syria.
Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a
contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount eyual to or greater than
one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the
above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the
contract is offered.
The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies
as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form.
SectionIII.docx Page 47 of 49 7/31/2012
Section III — General Conditions
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND .
SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL.
FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL
NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the
requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in
Cuba and Syria; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to
participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum
Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and
3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging
in commerce in any farm in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acyuiring,
developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment,
facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military
equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal,
subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, •
no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba
and Syria.
Authorized Signature
Printed Name
Title
Name of Entity/Corporation
u
SectionIlI.docx Page 48 of49 7l31/2012
Section lll — General Conditions
• STATE OF
u
.
COUNTY OF
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of
, 201_, by (name of person whose signature
is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of
corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a
(type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take
an oath.
Notary Public
Printed Name
My Commission Expires:
NOTARYSEAL ABOVE
SectionIII.docx Page 49 of 49 7/31/2012
C�
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents:
SECTIONIV .................................................................................................................................. i
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... i
1 SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 6
2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 8
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 8
2.1.1 GRADES, LINESAND LEVELS ..................��----..................................................... 8
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ....................................................................................................... 8
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................. 8
3
3.l
3.2
4
. 5
6
7
7.1
7.2
8
8.1
DEFINITIONOF TERMS ............................................................................................... 9
REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 9
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 9
ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 10
EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK ........................................................10
CONCRETE.....................................................................................................................11
EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK ........................................ 12
EXCAVATION.............................................................................................................. 12
FORMS......................................................................................................................... 12
REINFORCEMENT....................................................................................................... 12
BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 12
9 OBSTRUCTIONS ...........................................................................................................12
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
ANDSTREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... 13
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................13
12 DEWATERING ...............................................................................................................14
12.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 14
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 14
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 14
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND
WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY ........................... 14
13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 17
• 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE ...........•••••-• ...........................................••-....................••••--................ 17
13.2 PRECAST TYPE . • 17
SectionlV.doc i 5/15/2012
14
15
16
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 18 •
13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 18
l 3.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 18
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. l8
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 18
BACKFILL...................................................................................................................... 18
STREETCROSSINGS, ETC . .......................................................................................19
RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURE5 ................................................................................................................19
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 19
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 19
17.1 BAS1S OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 19
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 19
18 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 20
I 8.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 20
182 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 20
19 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 20
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 21
19.2 TESTING ......................................................................................................................21
l9.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 21
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 21
20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 21
20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 21
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 22
20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 22
20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 22
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 22
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 23
20.4 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 23
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................ 23
20. 4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 23
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 23
20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 23
20.5.2 FORCEMAINPIPE ...................................................................................�--�-�---- 24
21 DRAINAGE .....................................................................................................................24
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 24
22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 24
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 25
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............................... 26
22.2 SUBGRADE ................................................................................................................. 26
22.2.1 BASIS OFMEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 26
22.2.2 BASISOFPAYMENT ............................................................................................26
SectionIV.doc
�I
5/15/2012
•
•
_
• 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ...................................................................26
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 26
23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................26
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 27
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 27
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 27
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 28
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 28
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 29
23.6.1 CRACKS ................................................................................................................29
23.6.2 POTHOLES ...........................................................................................................29
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES .......................... ................ 29
.....................................
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 30
23.9 SUPERPAVEASPHALTIC CONCRETE ....................................................................30
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 31
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 31
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 31
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 32
25.1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 32
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................32
• 25.1.2 PRODUC7'S ..........................................................................................................33
25.1.3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................................37
252 LANDSCAPE ...............................................................................................................41
25.2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................41
25.2.2 PRODUCTS ..........................................................................................................46
25.2.3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................................49
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 56
26.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 56
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 56
26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 56
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 57
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 57
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 57
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 58
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 58
26.9 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................58
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 58
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 58
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 58
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 59
29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 59
• 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 59
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 59
SectionIV.doc iii 5/15/2012
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 59
31
32
33
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................................
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..............................................
..................... 59
..................... 59
..................... 60
..................... 60
SODDING........................................................................................................................ 60
SEEDING......................................................................................................................... 60
STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES................................................................................................................ 61
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 61
332 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 61
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 62
34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 62
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 62
36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 62
37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 62
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 62
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 62
373 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 62
37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 62
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 63
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 63
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 63
37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 63
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 63
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 64
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................•--................................ 64
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 64
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 64
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDEDAREAS ................................................................. 64
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 64
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 64
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ 65
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 65
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 65
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 65
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 66
38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 66
38.10 COMPLIANCE ................................................................................................••-..........66
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 69
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 69
SectionIV.doc iv 5/15/2012
�
•
•
�
•
r�
U
41
42
43
POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES....................................................................................................... 69
41.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 69
4 ] .2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 70
41.2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................70
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 70
41.2.3 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 72
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 72
41.2.5 HYDRANTS ...........................................................................................................73
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 74
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTIONAND REPAIRS .................................................................. 74
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................ 74
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ....................................:........................................................ 75
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS--�---• ............................................................................... 75
41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................75
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 75
41.3.2 PIPELAYING ............................................................•-----.....................................75
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTSAND FITTINGS ......................................... 77
41. 3. 4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 77
41.4 TESTS ...........................................................................................................................78
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS .........................•--...............................................---........... 78
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ...................�--.......................................................................... 78
4l.5 STERILIZATION ......................................................................................................... 78
41. S.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 78
41. 5.2 FL USHING SYSTEM ................ ............................................................................ 78
41. 5. 3 STERILIZATION PROCED URE .......................................................................... 78
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 79
41.5. S BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 79
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 79
41. 6.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 79
41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 80
41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ................................................................... 80
41.6.4 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXESAND
COVERS................................................................................................................ 80
41.6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 80
GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 81
TENNISCOURTS .......................................................................................................... 81
43.2 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ...................
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ......................
43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..............................
43.1.3 PRIME COAT ................................
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE .....................
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ......................
43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...............................
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS .....................
43.2.1 GENERAL ......................................
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION .....................
SectionIV.doc
Tu
.................................................................... 81
.................................................................... 81
.................................................................... 81
.................................................................... 81
.................................................................... 81
.................................................................... 81
.................................................................... 82
.................................................................... 83
.................................................................... 83
.................................................................... 84
5/15/2012
43.2.3
43.2.4
43.2. S
43.2.6
43.2. 7
43.2.8
43.2.9
43.2.10
43.2.11
43.2.12
43.2.13
43.2.14
43.2.1 S
43.2.16
43.2.17
SLOPE...........................................................................
BASE CONSTR UCTION ...............................................
PERIMETER CURBING ...............................................
SURFACE COURSE .....................................................
ROOTBARRIER ...........................................................
FENCING.....................................................................
WINDSCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COURT EQUIPMENT .................................................,
SHADE STR UCTURE ...................................................
WATER SOURCE (Potable) .........................................,
CONCRETE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING........
WATER COOLER .........................................................
DEMONSTRA TION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WARRANTY . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........................ 84
........................ 85
........................ 85
........................ 85
........................ 85
........................ 86
........................ 86
........................ 86
........................ 88
........................ 88
........................ 88
........................ 88
........................ 89
........................ 89
........................ 89
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 90
441 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 90
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 90
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ......................................................................................... 90
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 91
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................... 91
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ................. 91
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ......................................................... 91
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ............................................................................................. 91
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 91
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 92
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 92
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 92
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 92
46
45.1
45.2
45.3
45.4
45.5
45.6
45.7
45.8
45.9
INTENT........................................................................................................................ 92
PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 93
MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 93
CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 93
TELEVISION INSPECTION .......................................................................................94
LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 94
LATERAL RECONNECTION .............••--..................._...............----............................. 94
TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 94
PAYMENT.................................................................................................................... 94
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 95
46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 95
46.1.1 PIPE AND FI777NGS ........................................................................................... 95
46.1.2 QUALITYCONTROL ........................................................................................... 95
46.1.3 SAMPLES ..............................................................................................................95
46.1.4 RFIECTION ..........................................................................................................95
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 95
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 96
SectionIV.doc
vi
5/15/2012
•
•
�
. 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ........................................................................................... 96
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS .................................................................... 96
46. 3. 3 PIPE JOINING ..................................................................................................... 96
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ............................................................................. 96
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ........................................................................................ 96
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTSAND DIMENSIONS ...................................................... 96
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ........................................................................... 96
46. 4. 3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .......................................................... 97
46.4. 4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ................................................................................ 97
46. 4. 5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ...................................................................... 97
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ................................................ 97
46.4.7 BACKFILLING .....................................................................................................98
46. 4. 8 POINT REPAIR ..................................................................................................... 98
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ................................................................................... 98
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 98
47.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 98
47.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 98
47.3 PIPE .............................................................................................................................. 98
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 99
47.5 FITTINGS .....................................................................................................................99
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 99
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 99
. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GiJNITE ................. 99
48.3 COMPOSITION ........................................................................................................... 99
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 100
48.5 MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. 100
48.6 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 100
48.7 REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................... l 00
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 100
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ....................................................................................... 101
48.10 PROPORTIONING .....................................................................................................101
48.11 MIXING ......................................................................................................................101
48.12 APPLICATION ...........................................................................................................101
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................................... 102
48.14 SURFACE FINISH ..................................................................................................... 102
48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................................... 102
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ................................................................... ] 02
48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 103
48. ] 8 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 103
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION .........................104
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ............................................................................................... 104
49.2 PAYMENT ..................................................................................•...............................104
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 104
49.3.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................104
• 49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION...-• ............................................................. 105
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 105
SectionIV.doc
vii
5/15/2012
50
51
52
53
49.4.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................106
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ...................................................................................... l06
49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 106
49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ l 06
49.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 107
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 107
49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. l 07
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... l 07
49.11.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................107
49.11.2 MIXING ...............................................................................................................108
49.11. 3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 108
49.11. 4 PROD UCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 108
49.11.5 CURING ..............................................................................................................108
49.11. 6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 109
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... l09
49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................109
49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................109
49.12. 3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ...................................................................111
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ...........................................................................113
IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM .............................................................113
51.1 SCOPE ...................................................................................
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ................................................
51.2.1 ASPHALT .......................................................................
51.2.2 CONCRETE ...................................................................
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX ......................................
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ...................
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .....................
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION ...............................................
51.6 PLAYING LINES ..................................................................
51.7 GENERAL .............................................................................
51.8 LIMITATIONS .......................................................................
....................113
....................1 l 4
....................114
....................114
............ ........114
....................114
....................115
......................................115
......................................115
.................... I 15
.................... I 15
RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................116
GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................116
53.1 MATERIAL .....................................••-........................................................,
53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MA7TRESS MATERIAL ...................................
53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL : ...............................
53.1.3 MA?'?'RESS WIRE ....................�--.........................................................
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE F.4BRIC .....................•----..............................................
53.2 PERFORMANCE ........................................................................................
...............116
...............116
...............118
...............119
...............119
...............119
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................120
54.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 120
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................................................ 120
543 WORK METHODS .................................................................................................... 121
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ....................................................................... 121
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ........................................................................... 121
SectionIV.doc
viii
5/15/2012
•
•
•
• 54.4 LITTER .......................................................................................................................121
54.5 VISUAL CHECK ....................................................................................................... l21
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 12]
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 121
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 121
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL .........-••• ................................................................................... 122
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ l 22
54.1 l PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... 122
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... l 22
54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... 122
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 122
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... l22
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 122
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 123
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 123
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... l23
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. l23
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 123
C J
�
55 MILLING OPERATIONS ........................................................................................... 124
55.1
55.2
55.3
55.4
55.5
55.6
55.7
55.8
55.9
55.10
EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... l24
ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... l 24
SALUAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. l25
DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 125
ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROtJND UTILITIES .................. l25
ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ l25
TYPESOF MILLING ................................................................................................ l25
MILLINGOF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. l26
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...........................................••-...................................... l26
BASISOF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 126
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 126
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 126
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 126
57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 126
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 126
57.2 BAS1S OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 127
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 127
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. 127
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 127
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 127
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... 128
60 SIGNING AND MARKING ..........................................
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT .....................
.....................128
128
61 ROADWAY LIGI3TING .............................................................................................. 128
SectionIV.doc ix 5/15/2012
61.1
62
62. l
62.2
623
63
64
63.1
632
633
63.4
63.5
63.6
63.7
64.1
64.2
BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... l28
TREEPROTECTION ..................................................................................................129
TREEBARRICADES ................................................................................................ 129
ROOTPRUNING ....................................................................................................... l 29
PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 130
PROJECT WEB PAGES ..............................................................................................131
WEBPAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 131
WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 131
THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 131
MAPSAND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 132
INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... l 32
POSTING.................................................................................................................... 132
WEBPAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ l32
OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE ...................................................... 132
CLEARANCEOPTIONS ........................................................................................... 132
REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES ............................................. l32
SectionlV.doc
x
5/15/2012
•
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
� 1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name: REHABILITATION OF LIFT STATIONS #33 AND #42
Project Numbers: 09-0003-UT and 10-0051-UT
Description of Work:
The Work includes the rehabilitation of Lift Stations #33 and #44 including site, mechanical and
electrical work as shown and described in these Contract Documents.
The work consists of, but is not limited to, the tasks described hereinafter.
1. REHABILITATION OF LIFT STATION #33
Bypass Pumping
Temporarily plug the existing gravity sewer.
Design, furnish and install, and continuously operate and maintain a sewage bypass pumping
system.
Site Work
• Provide a topographic survey of the site before and after construction. The topographic survey
shall include a 50 foot radius of the new wet well and the entire access road. Provide an as-built
survey of the site after construction. The as-built survey shall include the horizontal and vertical
location of structures, and all underground pipe and fittings, and electrical conduit.
Upgrade access roadway to allow for heavy truck use.
Furnish and install new entrance gates and posts.
Furnish, install and operate a ground water dewatering system during construction.
Mechanical Work
Modify existing wetwell/manhole.
Install a multi-layer manhole lining system, in the modified wetwell/manhole.
Demolish and modify portions of the existing pump drywell.
Demolish existing concrete slabs.
Furnish and install:
• Pre-packaged FRP duplex submersible wet well and FRP valve vault.
• Submersible pumps.
• Gravity sewer.
• Force main and connection to existing force main.
• • Wet well fall protection.
SectionIV.doc Page 1 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV—Technical Specifications
• Access platform, stairs, and handrail.
Electrical Work
Furnish and install:
• Power, control, and instrumentation conduit and wire.
• Pole mounted site lighting.
• Pump control panel.
Pump Controls and SCADA System
Replace the existing:
• SCADA RTU with a TAC Pack TCU by Data Flow Systems.
• SCADA antenna and tower.
Furnish and install:
• Well level sensor with a pressure-based transducer.
• Floats switches for backup pump control.
Miscellaneous Work
�
• All other wark shown on the drawings and specifications or required for proper
completion of the work required under this contract.
2. REHABILITATION OF LIFT STATION #42 •
Bypass Pumping
Permanently relocate an existing 4-inch force main connection to the wet well to the first
manhole upstream of the lift station.
Temporarily plug the existing 24-inch gravity sewer inlet to the wet well.
Design, furnish, install, operate, and maintain a bypass pumping system.
Site Work
Provide a boundary and topographic survey of the site before construction and an as-built survey
of the site after construction. The as-built survey shall include the horizontal and vertical
location of all underground pipe and fittings, and all electrical conduit and wire.
Replace the perimeter fence, fence post, gates, and gate posts.
Excavate, remove and dispose of the upper 8-inches of existing material within the fenced area
of the site, and replace with 4-inches of crushed stone and a 4-inch thick concrete slab.
Furnish and install new potable water hose bib and hose rack assembly.
Install a 6-inch raised concrete eyuipment pad for the new odor control unit.
Mechanical Work
Replace:
• Pump discharge riser pipes and elbows with flanged stainless steel pipe and fittings. •
SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 133 5/IS/2012
•
L�
•
Section IV—Technical Specifications
• Pump discharge base elbows.
• 4-inch wet well vent with 6-inch vent.
• Generator remote mounted radiator, fan, and piping assembly.
• l2-inch check valves.
• 12-inch plug valves.
Furnish and install:
• Temporary 12-inch line stops.
• Sleeves in the valve vault and the wet well walls installation of the pump discharge
piping, including core drilling and appurtenances.
• PVC pump discharge pipes between the wet well and valve vault.
• Fall protection in 6locations.
• l2-inch resilient wedge gate valves.
• Odor control system, ductwork, and utilities.
Miscellaneous Work
Paint all valve vault and above ground piping, fittings, and valves.
Clean valve vault drain.
Grout and slope valve vault floor towards the drain.
Plug leak in valve vault wall.
Pressure wash and vacuum clean the wet well and valve vault.
Electrical, HVAC Work
Replace:
• VFDs.
• Pump disconnects.
• Main disconnect.
� Generator radiator fan disconnect and starter.
• Replace surge protection at the main disconnect.
• Replace pull box for wet well.
• Replace conduit and wire from pump disconnects to pull box.
• Replace conductors from power company source to the meter.
• Replace three exterior light fxtures.
• Replace refrigerant lines between evaporator and condenser.
Relocate existing receptacle from south side of slab to the light pole.
Install electrical power conduit, wire, and breaker for odor control unit.
SectionlV.doc
Page 3 of 133
siis�2o�z
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Pump Controls and SCADA System •
Replace the existing SCADA system RTU with a Data Flow System TAC Pack TCU to monitor
and control pumps equipped with variable frequency drives. The new control system shall
enable remote and local monitoring and control of the lift station. Install a new antenna and new
antenna cable on the existing tower.
Replace the existing wet well level sensor with a pressure based transducer.
Furnish and install floats as a backup pump control system.
Miscellaneous Other Work
• All other work shown on the drawings and specifications or required for proper
completion of the work required under this contract.
3. PROJECT SIGN
The Contractor shall provide one (1) fixed project sign at each site as described in SECTION III,
ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents.
4. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE
There are no Owner Direct Purchase provisions for this Contract.
5. CONTRACT PERIOD
The Contract Period shall be 270 Consecutive Calendar Davs.
SectionIV.doc Page 4 of 133 5/IS/2012
•
•
•
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: REHABILITATION OF LIFT STATIONS #33 AND #42
Project Numbers: 09-0003-UT and 10-0051-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
1 � Sco e Of Work
2.1 � Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractar
2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City
3 � Definition Of Terms
4 ❑ Order And Location Of The Work
5 � Excavation For Under round Work
6 � Concrete
7 � Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 � Reinforcement
9 ❑ Obstructions
] 0 � Restoration Or Re lacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
1 l � Work In Easements Or Parkways
12 � Dewatering
13 � Sanitary Manholes
14 � Backfill
15 ❑ Street Crossings, Etc.
16 ❑ Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 � Unsuitable Material Removal
18 ❑ Underdrains
19 ❑ Storm Sewers
20 � Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 ❑ Drainage
22 � Roadway Base And Sub rade
23 ❑ As haltic Concrete Materials
24 ❑ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price ForAsphalt
25 ❑ General Plantin S ecifications
26 ❑ Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pi e Lining
27 ❑ Plant Mix Driveways
28 ❑ Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 ❑ Concrete Curbs
30 � Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 ❑ Soddin
32 ❑ Seedin
33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 ❑ Material Used
35 � Conflict Between Plans And S ecifications
36 ❑ Street Signs
SectionIV.doc Page 5 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
37 � Audio/Video Recording Of Work Areas
38 � Erosion And Siltation Control
39 ❑ Utility Tie In Location Marking
40 ❑ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 � Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 ❑ Gas S stem Specifications
43 ❑ Tennis Courts
44 ❑ Work Zone Traffic Control
45 ❑ Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining
46 ❑ S ecifications for Polyethylene Sliplinin
47 ❑ Specifications for Pol vinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe
48 ❑ Gunite Specifications
49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 � Project lnformation Signs
51 ❑ In-Line Skating Surfacing System
52 ❑ Resident Notification of Start of Construction
53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses
54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance S ecifications
55 ❑ Milling Operations
56 � Clearin and Grubbin
57 ❑ Riprap
58 ❑ Treatment Plant Safety
59 ❑ Traffc Si nal E ui ment and Materials
60 ❑ Signing And Marking
61 ❑ Roadway Lighting
62 � Tree Protection
63 ❑ Project Web Pages
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name:
Project Number: - -
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
1 ❑ Sco e Of Work
2.1 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor
2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The City
3 ❑ Definition Of Terms
4 ❑ Order And Location Of The Work
5 ❑ Excavation For Under round Work
6 Concrete
7 ❑ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 ❑ Reinforcement
9 ❑ Obstructions
SectionIV.doc Page 6 of 133 5/15/2012
•
•
�J
�
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
10 ❑ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
l 1 ❑ Work ln Easements Or Parkways
12 ❑ Dewatering
l3 ❑ Sanitary Manholes
14 ❑ Backfill
l S ❑ Street Crossings, Etc.
l6 Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 ❑ Unsuitable Material Removal
18 ❑ Underdrains
19 ❑ Storm Sewers
20 ❑ Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
2l ❑ Drainage
22 ❑ Roadway Base And Subgrade
23 ❑ Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 ❑ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt
25 ❑ General Planting Specifications
26 ❑ Hd e Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining
27 ❑ Plant Mix Driveways
28 ❑ Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 ❑ Concrete Curbs
30 ❑ Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 ❑ Sodding
32 ❑ Seeding
33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 ❑ Material Used
35 ❑ Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 ❑ Street Signs
37 ❑ AudioNideo Recordin Of Work Areas
38 ❑ Erosion And Siltation Control
39 ❑ Utility Tie In Location Marking
40 ❑ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 ❑ Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 ❑ Gas System Specifications
43 ❑ Tennis Courts
44 ❑ Work Zone Traffic Control
45 ❑ Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining
46 ❑ Specifications for Pol ethylene Sli linin
47 ❑ S ecifications for Pol vin 1 Chloride Ribbed Pipe
48 ❑ Gunite Specifications
49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 ❑ Project Information Signs
51 ❑ In-Line Skating Surfacin System
52 Resident Notification of Start of Construction
53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses
54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 ❑ Milling Operations
56 ❑ Clearin and Grubbing
SectionIV.doc Page 7 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
2
2.1
FIELD ENGINEERING
LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR�
The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such
work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site
improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the
work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the
Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals
under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As-
built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III
(General Conditions), Article 6.1 l.2 of these Contract Documents.
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and
shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any
permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or
disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the
proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land
Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida.
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. T'he City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
SectionIV.doc
Page 8 of 133
5/IS/2012
C �
•
�
��
��
C�
•
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III,
ARTICLE 1- DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that
the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a
basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not
assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated
quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate
of yuantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations
pertaining thereto.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of
local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard
adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:
SectionlV.doc
AA
AAMA
AASHTO
ACI
AISI
AMA
AMCA
ANSI
APA
ASAE
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWG
AWMA
AWS
AW WA
CFR
CISPI
CRSI
CS
DEP
DOT
EPA
Aluminum Association, Inc.
Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers'Association
American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Of�icials
American Concrete Institute
American Iron and Steel Institute
Acoustical Materials Association
Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
American National Standards Institute
American Plywood Association
American Society ofAgricultural Engineers
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wire Gauge
Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Code of Federal Regulations
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards
Department of Environmental Protection (Florida)
Department of Transportation (Florida)
Environmental Protection Agency
Page 9 of 133 5/15/2012
FAC
FBC
FFPC
FGC
FMC
FPC
FedSpec
HI
IBBM
IEEE
IPS
MIL
NAAMM
NBFU
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
NPT
NWMA
PCA
PCI
SBC
SBCCI
SDI
SFPC
SGC
SJI
SMACCNA
SMC
SPC
SPIB
SSPC
TCA
UL
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Florida Administrative Code
Florida Building Code
Florida Fire Prevention Code
Florida Gas Code
Florida Mechanical Code
Florida Plumbing Code
Federal Specifications
Standards of Hydraulic Institute
Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Iron Pipe Size
Military Specification
National Association ofArchitectural Metal Manufacturers
National Board of Fire Underwriters
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Pipe Thread
National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association
Portland Cement Association
Prestressed Concrete Institute
Standard Building Code (SBCCI)
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
Steel Door Institute
Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI)
Standard Gas Code (SBCCI)
Steel Joist Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI)
Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI)
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
Steel Structures Painting Council
Title Council ofAmerica
Underwriters' Labaratories
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE
WORK.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
SectionIV.doc
Page ]0 of 133
5/15/2012
�
�
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a"Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
suf�icient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
• safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
•
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
SectionIV.doc Page 11 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all •
concrete placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders wi(1 be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry"
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
eyual to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or •
springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or •
SectionIV.doc Page 12 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above wark including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a syuare yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
• replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
�
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the wark and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor- shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractar shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
SectionIV.doc
Page 13 of 133
5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on �
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
12.1 GENERAL
Unless specifically autharized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage ar undue inconvenience to the work, �
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL
The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for
the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to
dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must
collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The
following document has been incorporated into this section for reference...
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED
GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE
ACTIVITY
Citv Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental
Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: �
SectionIV.doc Page 14 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• l) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results
2) A copy of the FDEP Notification
It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have
any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance.
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER
FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY
The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site
activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62-
620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the
listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites,
analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to
determine if contamination exists.
Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be
sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement
of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued
coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit
shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be
• sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1.
TABLE 1
�
Screening Values for Discharges into:
Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) l0A mg/1 10.0 mg/1
PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5
Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631 E 0.012 µg/1 0.025 µg/1
Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/1
Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1
Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/1
Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1
Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 µg/1
Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1
SectionIV.doc Page 15 of ]33 5/15/2012
Naphthalene
Section IV — Technical Specifications
100.0 µg/I � 100.0 µg/1
If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the
discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the Cit�of Clearwater.
(a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which
may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic
compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC
requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional
information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the
method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The
Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates
that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight
organic compounds.
(b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty
(30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information:
l. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued
to;
2. the name and address ofthe facility, including county location;
3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s);
4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and
longitude);
5. the name of the receiving water; and
6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit.
(c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the
Department. �
For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0
units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless
the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of
this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units
for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural
background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal
waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units,
the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural
background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH
of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses reyuired under paragraph (2) of this
permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration
of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or
greater than I 500 mg/1.
In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from
floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on
surface waters.
If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph
(2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an
individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface
SectionIV.doc Page 16 of 133 5/15/2012
�
•
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
� waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other
applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit.
If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any
source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having
to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed
activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office
within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during
discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge
Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department.
All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic
Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
• The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to AST'M C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4040 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
• to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
SectionIV.doc Page 17 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as �
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
bemg sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section lV, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete —
Adjustment of Manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes sha11 be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush •
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equai. Interior of built up manholes which
have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have
the inside plastered with I/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below.
The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214-351
Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP-R
Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all •
fill shall be similar material.
SectionlV.doc Page 18 of 133 5lIS/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
• Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
•
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
SectionIV.doc Page ]9 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A#57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved
eyual) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 94l
of the current FDOT Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
SectionI V.doc
Page 20 of 133
5/15/2012
i
�
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractar at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
• trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, eyuipment, filter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R.
35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying
• length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet.
SectionIV.doc Page 21 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and •
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property Iine.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 4l of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
20.2 INSTALLATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. •
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and
compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be
performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted
haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adeyuate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insuf�icient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe. •
SectionIV.doc Page 22 of 133 5l15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shali take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
• they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The
Contractar shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of
bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than l/4-
inches shall be cause for rejection.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any ar all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of l50 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as
described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per ]ineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
• the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
SectionIV.doc Page 23 of 133 5/ISl2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section N, Article 1"Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. T'he cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item
price for base.
•
•
3. CRUS�IED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed •
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
SectionIV.doc Page 24 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
� labaratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week far continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested mare frequently by the City
Engineer ar designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be
• at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200-7
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11 and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
• made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
SectionIV.doc Page 25 of 133 5/15/2012
Sec[ion IV —Technical Specifications
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE •
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place •
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shalt be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in
thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable
tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment,
however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, eyuipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. •
SectionIV.doc Page 26 of 133 5/15/2012
�
U
•
i
Section IV — Technical Specifications
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 9l6 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Pavment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined bv the following:
1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/o" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of'/4" or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, ar if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notifv the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may
be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight.
SectionIV.doc
Page 27 of 133
5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches) Type S—I Type S I with Type S—III FC-3 Type S—III Type S—I
Type S—III with FC-3 with FC-3
Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer
1 st 2nd 1 st 2"d 1 st 2nd 1 st 2"d 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd
1 1 l
1 %z l'/z
2 ���4 3�4 * � 1
2'/z 1'/a 1'/4 1%z 1 1%z 1
3 1'/2 1%2 2 ] 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S—III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractar shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S—llI per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
(imit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction reyuirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
SectionIV.doc
Page 28 of 133
5/15/2012
C�
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
l. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
• 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
T`he riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
reyuirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is
. acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
SectionIV.doc Page 29 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final .
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between
initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree
aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included
in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they
are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of
impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled
paving.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid
item for asphalt.
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving,
all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or
mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be
equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the •
Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day
before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/4" above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index 101.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All
asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). •
SectionIV.doc Page 30 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 9l6 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction reyuirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of ineasurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
• 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than l 0% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business
with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
• 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
SectionIV.doc Page 31 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by yualified personnel or a yualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchasec�.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
SectionIV.doc
_ _
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
Page 32 of 133
5/15/2012
�
•
•
�
�
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the wark area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traf�ic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of traf�ic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (l) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is reyuired to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
SectionIV.doc
Page 33 of 133
5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER •
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections sha11 be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
l. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe-T-Shear Stem
5. Safe-T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/Z" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AW WA-G509
2. 2001b. O. W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" syuare operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
LJ
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
•
SectionIV.doc Page 34 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than I50 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/LTV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek # l 8l 014 (10") circular valve box with # 181 O 15
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek # 182001 (6") economy turf box with # 182002
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
• system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7".
SectionIV.doc Page 35 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be •
installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be •
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 36 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
� D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendara,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of progamming an unlimited number of t1NIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
• Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections reyuired by
• outside authorities.
SectionIV.doc
Page 37 of 133 5/15/2012
Section N—Technical Specifications
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. �
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all reyuired sleeving
prior to roadway base.
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support far pipe on bottom of trenches. •
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have l 8" of fill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than %z in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use eyuipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density. •
SectionIV.doc Page 38 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of inechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
•
�
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
SectionIV.doc
Page 39 of 133
5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Instal] all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
SectionlV.doc
Page 40 of 133
5/15/2012
•
�
�
�_�
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� 25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid far directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
• Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for al1 plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the
Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
•
SectionIV.doc Page 41 of 133 5/15l2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate �
and be considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS •
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acyuired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 42 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• C. W.:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base ofthe
fronds.
SPR.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR. :
Straight trunk.
MIN.:
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
O. C.:
On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.:
Diameter.
Lvs.:
Leaves.
• D.B.H.:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.:
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner 's Representative:
Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and yuality of
• materials specified and execution of installation.
SectionlV.doc Page 43 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Contractor: •
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect:
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every l inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B& B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at •
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 44 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
• 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. lmmediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractar incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays; etc. in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to undergound utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 45 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a"Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
�i
LJ
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida # 1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, •
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size yuality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as reyuired by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 46 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B& B
procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If reyuested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed. Sod must be kept moist priar to and after installation.
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place.
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification reyuirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
. A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved eyual, shall be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/4 the
• nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
SectionIV.doc Page 47 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS •
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper.
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2" x 4"
by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1".
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, �
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved eyual, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4-'/2 feet above grade.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 48 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
• of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
•
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be reyuired to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
"Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the reyuired finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
SectionIV.doc
Page 49 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1-'h inches in any
dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material offthe site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (l/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per ] 000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
SectionIV.doc Page 50 of 133 5/15/2012
u
•
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an l8 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
• equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
1 gallon
3 gallon
5 gallon
7 gallon
Trees
Palms
1 - 21 gram tablet
2 - 21 gram tablet
3 - 21 gram tablet
4 - 21 gram tablet
3 tablets each'/z" (12 millimeters) caliper
7- 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
• Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
SectionIV.doc
Page 51 of 133
5/15/2012
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each •
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved eyuivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adeyuately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (]) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 syuare feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to ] inch to l-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Su�icient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the •
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipr�ent so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. •
SectionlV.doc Page 52 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
� Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of l00% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
• buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the frst row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
•
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
SectionlV.doc
Page 53 of 133 5/15l2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shali maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Flarida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
SectionIV.doc Page 54 of 133 5/15/2012
•
•
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within ] 5 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
l. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
suf�icient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
� 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
•
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor far plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
SectionIV.doc Page 55 of 133 5/15/2012
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING •
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to l2"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record far the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactary experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to •
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material Property ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi
HDPE
Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements. •
SectionIV.doc Page 56 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer far approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, lnc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an eyual
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
• in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
• OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
SectionIV.doc Page 57 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractar shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restaration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard far Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
SectionIV.doc Page 58 of 133 5/15/2012
•
•
•
i
�
•
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
This Article deleted.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed l0 feet. In addition,
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspectar a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 ps.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. T'he welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
SectionIV.doc Page 59 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the •
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area far sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall •
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any yuestions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment far sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractar provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the reyuired line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also reyuired
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 60 of l33 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
� When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
• The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the reyuirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be
• acceptable for storm structures.
SectionIV.doc Page 61 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED.
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND
SPECIFICATIONS.
36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation.
37.4 EQUIPMENT
All eyuipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such
coverage shall be obtained by walking.
SectionIV.doc
Page 62 of 133
5/IS/2012
i
•
•
•
•
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
37.8 LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
SectionIV.doc
Page 63 of 133
5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX •
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement ar
right of way at any one time.
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this wark.
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
SectionIV.doc
Page 64 of 133
5/IS/2012
�
•
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
• 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or mare shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
• removal of sediment from the basin.
•
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
wark cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are reyuired, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
SectionIV.doc Page 65 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION •
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a"Stop Work Order".
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods
that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
SectionIV.doc Page 66 of 133 5/15/2012
u
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• . .
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
T'he City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of
soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The
procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence - Warning
2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee
3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee
4th occurrence - Stop Work Order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify
the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
� The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
•
If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact
Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Reyuired - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Engineering Department with specific yuestions at 562-4750.
SectionIV.doc Page 67 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF
EROSION VIOLATION
UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DNISION 7— EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF
ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSiON
CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE.
Warning
$32.00 Re-inspection Fee
$80.00 Re-inspection Fee
Stop Work Order
DATE POSTED:
Inspector's Name:
Inspector's Signature:
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741
r,�
ENGINEERING/CONSTRUCTION 727 562-4750
Received by:
(Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been
received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt
or concurrence with findings of the inspector.)
IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED
SectionIV.doc Page 68 of 128 5/15/2012
• s •
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
•
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER
WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical
curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK
SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and eyuipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and
• appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching backfilling and clean up.
SectionN.doc Page 69 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first yuality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA ClSI/A21.S1 8l or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure
(In.) (PSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAW WA C 15l /A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AW WA
C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241
and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
•
•
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
•
SectionIV.doc Page 70 of 133 5/15/2012
��
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length
(OD/Thick.) (PSI) (Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
g l8 I50 20
Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the
use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements ofASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid
strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about l 8-inches between each piece
of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to l2-inches minimum
above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the
adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass
plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M
• brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and
elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with requirements of ANSUAW WA C l 53/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSUAW WA C l 1 l/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AW WA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptabte.
41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors.
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
• gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
SectionIV.doc Page 71 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method •
by the Engineer.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall
be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted
with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all
valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with
ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the
following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage •
at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing
body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring
bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body..
Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the
service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsutated with EPDM rubber in
conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure.
All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers,
bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass.
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3-
piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of vatve boxes and extension pieces shall be
provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their
installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of
5& Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2& Sheet
2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail.
SectionIV.doc
Page 72 of 133
5/15/2012
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� 41.2,5 HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B-84-B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AW WA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two
sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts not allowed. ,
• 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shalt be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a#7 (1-l/2-inch) pentagon nut.
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into
upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
l 1. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with O-
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open.
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper
nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
• Specifications.
SectionIV.doc Page 73 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with �
AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may
be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service
connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1 /2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2-
inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC
202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless
steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM orAWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. •
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that
are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be
purchased from the City and installed by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest
revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
•
SectionlV.doc Page 74 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
• such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the reyuired locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42-
inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and
obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress
of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is reyuired, the Engineer
shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or
arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the
• obstructions.
SectionIV.doc Page 75 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION •
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
ropes, or other suitable tools or eyuipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oi) and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shal) be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there •
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSUAWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 76 of 133 5/IS/2012
� 41.3.3
41.3.3.1
•
LJ
Section IV — Technical Specifications
SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to
exceed l 8-inches from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City lndex No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5&
Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2& Sheet 2
of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located
10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to, City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants
shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held. in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all reyuirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
SectionIV.doc Page 77 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be �
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed
before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed
under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision.
All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and
all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor
at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance
notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION •
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AW WA C651.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are
not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never
more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be •
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
SectionIV.doc Page 78 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
If inethods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all
respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
• 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
��
�_J
41.6.1 GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form.
Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum
payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full
compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials reyuired to complete the work. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
applicable pay items of work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
• Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joints materials
• Tests and sterilization
� Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
SectionIV.doc Page 79 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are
listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and eyuipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
SecdonIV.doc Page 80 of 133 5/15/2012
•
•
r�
U
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Of�ice.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
• applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RG250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications far Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
• approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
SectionIV.doc Page 8] of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
be approved. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface �
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In reyuests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractar shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled •
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
reyuire the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will reyuire the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured colar coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 82 of 133 5{15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
degrees, Fahrenheit and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
• Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
�
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractar shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
SectionIV.doc Page 83 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adeyuate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided.
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to
Proceed."
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is
reyuired. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (l) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
SectionIV.doc Page 84 of 133 5/15/2012
.
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E] 54, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
• 43.2.5.1 CURB
•
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-yuarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (l/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
SectionIV.doc Page 85 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25
pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system.
43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be l-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
�
U
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with •
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-offtype, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or eyual by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
•
SectionIV.doc Page 86 of 133 5/15/2012
Section N—Technical Specifications
• the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treatea to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly
• secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 — 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
•
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (1 each) — six-foot length aluminum.
SectionIV.doc Page 87 of 133 5l15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as reyuired by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potabie)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES 8� FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
SectionIV.doc Page 88 of 133 5/IS/2012
�
•
�
U
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• Pole TI existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole TS new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
• 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
•
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and eyuipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
SectionN.doc Page 89 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/ar as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved temporary traf�ic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
SectionIV.doc Page 90 of 133 5/15/2012
•
•
•
Seclion IV — Technical Specifications
• 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-51 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectars, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic stafffor preliminary traffic control options.
• Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C-View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is reyuired, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traf�ic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
• 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractar's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
SectionN.doc Page 91 of 133 5/15/2012
Section N—Technical Specifications
All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or
an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. •
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traf�ic
control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may reyuire that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the •
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
•
SectionIV.doc Page 92 of 133 5/15/2012
\ J
•
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi
Flexural Modulus ofElasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
preyualification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractar will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency reyuirements. The
Contractor may be reyuired to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
SectionN.doc Page 93 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION •
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The
television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear
picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method •
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTI4N
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole far the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
SectionIV.doc
Page 94 of 133
5/15/2012
r �
�J
C �
L�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded ar manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe yuality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the yuality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the reyuirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
• otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specifed by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
SectionIV.doc Page 95 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
•
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused �
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
l6-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
2l %2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5} into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be reyuired prior to
inserting the liner. •
SectionIV.doc Page 96 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
• Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the l2-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm atl pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
• connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
SectionIV.doc Page 97 of 133 5/15/2012
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A •
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. •
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wail bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 98 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
� Standard laying lengths shall be l 3 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one hal� cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1(one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 far Portland
• Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/ar organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
• produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
SectionIV.doc Page 99 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation CI50
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve
Passing No. 4 Sieve
Passing No. 8 Sieve
Passing No. 16 Sieve
Passing No. 30 Sieve
Passing No. 50 Sieve
Passing No. 100 Sieve
48.6 WATER
100%
95% to l 00%
80% to 100%
50% to 85%
25% to 60%
10°/a to 30%
2% to 10%
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
8.33 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 far
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the reyuirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
SectionIV.doc Page 100 of 133 5/15/2012
•
•
r�
�J
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air/water blast to
remove all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
� If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be tharoughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned tharoughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
• Seyuence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
SectionlV.doc Page 101 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in •
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if:
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of inesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet. •
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 102 of 133 5/15/2012
•
•
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capaciTy that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Comp. Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press.
(cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi)
365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 2 l/2 2 1/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor eyuipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: 'The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be suf�iciently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadeyuate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
SectionIV.doc Page 103 of 133 5/15/2012
49
49.1
Section IV — Technical Specifications
SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractar will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shatl be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all reyuirements of ASTM D
3753.
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
SectionIV.doc
Page 104 of 133
5/I S/2012
�
�J
�
•
•
�
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertighmess and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with l 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
SectionIV.doc
Page 105 of 133
5/ISl2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum reyuirements:
1.
2.
3.
Compressive Strength (ASTM G109)
Shrinkage (ASTM G596)
Bond (ASTM C-952)
4. Cement
5. Density, when applied
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
15 min., 200 psi
28 days, 150 psi
28 days, 150 psi
Sulfate resistant
105 +/- 5 pcf
6 hrs., 1,400 psi
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended reyuiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
SectionIV.doc
Page 106 of 133
5/15/2012
.
�
U
.
Section IV — Technical Specifications
. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-5 l pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum l/2" thickness after troweling ar brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
• Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
• pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
SectionlV.doc Page ]07 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix. •
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using yuick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light •
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than l/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed. •
SectionlV.doc
Page 108 of 133
5/IS/2012
.
CJ
u
Section IV —Technical Specifications
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures far manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
SectionN.doc
1-3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
Page 109 of 133
5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength
Elongation
Bonding Strength
380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
400% ASTM D 3574-86
250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density
Tensile Strength
Elongation
Shrinkage
Toxicity
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574
150 psi ASTM D- 412
250% ASTM D-3574
Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Non Toxic
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color wil) be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
8.1x10 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 cm/sec
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (befare adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
SectionIV.doc
Page I 10 of 133
5/15/2012
C�
•
•
•
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 I500 1800 2000
Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08
Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4- 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with AS'TM C
l 1 l6 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume
Color (other colors available on request)
Pot Life, hrs
Tensile Strength, psi, min
Tensile Elongation, %
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
1:1
Light Gray
2,000
10 —20
1,800
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochlaric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
SectionIV.doc
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
Page I 11 of 133
snsi2o�2
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will atso be made as
required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall reyuire a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystal l ization.
49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #I to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
SectionIV.doc
Page 112 of 133
5/15/2012
•
C�
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
l. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
• Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. lf the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS.
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
• 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Cotor Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
SectionIV.doc Page I 13 of 133 5/15/2012
Section lV —Technical Specifications
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
• 1 Coat ofAcrylic Resurfacer
• 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
• 2 Coats of Plexiflor
• Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder accarding to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: l00 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section l 0.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer
Water (Clean and Potable)
Sand (60-80 mesh)
Liquid Yield
55 gallons
20-40 gallons
600-900 pounds
ll2-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .OS -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
SectionIV.doc Page 114 of 133 5/IS/2012
•
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
•
•
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .OS-.07 gallons per syuare yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base
Plexichrome
Water
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
30 gallons
20 gallons
20 gallons
1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.OS gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
SectionIV.doc
Page 115 of 133
snsi2oi2
Section IV — Technical Specifications
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative
humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
This article deleted. See SECTION IlI, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START
OF CONSTRUCTION.
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1
53.1.1.1
GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade ar
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall eyual or
exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4'/2 inches. T'he overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge l0), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 %2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite
SectionIV.doc Page 116 of 133 5/15/2012
r�
U
•
•
Section IV — Technical Specifications
� Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class l, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
1. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Accarding to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at l 00% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
• 5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HCI (hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
• a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
SectionIV.doc Page 117 of 133 5/15l2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
3. Exposure to high temperature: �
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
1. Appearance:
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3. Durometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than l0% of its initial value.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
�
U
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
• Absorption, maximum 5%
• Los Angeles Abrasion (FM l OT096), maximum loss 45%
• Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12%
•
SectionIV.doc
Page 118 of 133
5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed S% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating sha11 be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the O.l 06 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
• Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be eyually divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is reyuired at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of inesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
• reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
SectionIV.doc Page 119 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section 1V—Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
• Traf�c safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
• Proper fertilization and pest controi of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Mulch replacement;
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
SectionIV.doc Page 120 of 133 5/IS/2012
•
•
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• 54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
• after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
�lower formation, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
• contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
SectionIV.doc Page 121 of 133 5/IS/2012
Section IV—Technical Specifications
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the •
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamenta) fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil •
moisture, usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 122 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
� 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractar will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no
• further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 pm. — 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
•
SectionIV.doc
Page 123 of 133
5/15/2012
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
55 MILLING OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
l. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The
sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust.
Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in
addition to the roadways before leaving the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
\ J
�
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects ar Section 330 (latest edition) for
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. •
SectionIV.doc
Page 124 of 133
5/I S/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs reyuired to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways sha11 be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
• All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
•
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.� of the City's
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
SectionIV.doc Page 125 of 133 5/15/2012
Sec[ion IV —Technical Specifications
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS •
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the •
Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 126 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
• 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
• An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
• contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
• Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
• The date of the training, and
• The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary eyuipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
• service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectars,
SectionIV.doc Page 127 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of •
existing tra�ic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's
Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report,
shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All
mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the
manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both
the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown
features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traffic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
��i�� Ct]_►_I_I_►` [t1-1 `I �l ►`� /_1:7:/ I � C�'
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. •
This specification includes the following wark: RPM's (Section 706), painted trafflc stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all eyuipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans. •
SectionIV.doc Page 128 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
. 62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above reyuirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
• remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning reyuirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be reyuired to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment
• designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
SectionIV.doc Page 129 of 133 5/]5/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade •
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects
for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction
inspector assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of l 8" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than l8".
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to •
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and •
other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
SectionIV.doc
Page 130 of 133
5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• B. Proper pruning techniyues for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will reyuire replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
• information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.or�/TR/ 1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
htt,p://www.section508. �ov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
materiaL It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
• Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
SectionIV.doc Page 131 of 133 5/15/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifica[ions
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE
64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS
When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the
following options:
Option 1- Having the power lines de-energized and visibly grounded.
Option 2- Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350
kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV.
Option 3- Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table
included in Section 64.2.
64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
VOLTAGE MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE
(nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet)
Up to 50 10
Over 50 to 200 15
Over 20 to 350 2p
Over 350 to 500 25
Over 500 to 750 35
SectionIV.doc
_
Page 132 of 133
5/15/2012
�
U
C�
•
u
.
•
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Over 750 to 1,000 45
Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or
registered professional engineer who is a
qualified person with respect to electric power
transmission and distribution)
Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200
means up to and including 200kV.
SectionlV.doc
Page 133 of 133
5/15/2012
•
•
SECTION IVA
LIFT STATION 33 REHABILITATION
(PROJECT NO. 09-0003-UT)
AND
LIFT STATION 42 REHABILITATION
(PROJECT NO. 10-0051-UT)
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
0
�
�
E-
�
PREPARED FOR:
� �
�
-,.�.., .,,,�,�.. .
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE
CLEARWATER, FL 33756
-- -�- � -
� _. -
�
ENGINEERING ASSOC(ATES, INC.
KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY
ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300
TAMPA, FL 33634
BID DOCUMENTS
� MARCH 2O13
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
•
•
�
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01015 CONTROL OF WORK
01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01040 COORDINATION
01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS
01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
• 01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01300 SUBMITTALS
01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND
SAMPLES
01385 COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01505 MOBILIZATION
01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
• 01625 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01640 QUALITY CONTROL �
01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01820 TRAINING
DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02125 SILT BARRIERS
02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02220 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES •
02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02276 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02444 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02485 SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES AND PARKING AREAS
02574 PAVEMENT/ROADWAY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
02626 TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM
02740 POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03350 MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS •
�
� 03600 GROUT
03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 METALS
05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09900 PAINTING
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11307 SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11516 ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
• 13567 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13600 REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
• 16110 RACEWAYS
16120 WIRE AND CABLES
�
16135
16142
16143
16170
16190
16195
16230
16452
16483
16620
16775
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
WIRING DEVICES
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
SUPPORTING DEVICES
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
GROUNDING
MOTOR STARTERS
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
iv
�
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
�23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Description
L:3
C
SECTION 01005
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and
equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract.
Work Included
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant,
power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other
means of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the
Work. He shall perForm and complete the Work in the manner best calculated
to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during
and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs
incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property th�at
may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work.
The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for
which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the
general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the
various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and
equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in
a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract.
Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his
workmanship, materials and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer
nofinrithstanding.
Public Utility Installation and Structures
42 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all
43 poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vautts,
44 manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether
45 owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or privately
46 owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with
• 47 transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work
shall be deemed included hereunder.
The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from
damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation,
or structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any
damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction
shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities
damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the Plans or have been
located in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his
expense, as directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made
for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures.
Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or
other governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed,
relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of
the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for
the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore.
Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the
Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the
Work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in
the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is
necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be
accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in
writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is
accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously
and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete
the removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is
accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and
Supplemental General Conditions.
34 All owner, other governmental utility departments, and other owners of public
35 utilities that may be affected by the Work will be informed in writing by the
36 Engineer within finro weeks after the execution of the Contract or Contract
37 covering the work. Such notice will set out, in general, and direct attention to,
38 the responsibilities of the Owner and other governmental utility departments
39 and other owners of public utilities for such installations and structures as may
40 be affected by the work and will be accompanied by one set of Plans and
41 Specifications covering the work under such Contract or Contracts.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
In addition to the general notice given by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
give written notice to Owner and other governmental utility departments and
other owners of public utilities of the locations of his proposed construction
operations, at least forty-eight hours in advance of breaking ground in any
area or on any unit of the work.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-2 10/29/12
r�
LJ
�
�
LJ
� 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•
The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility
installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein
provided, shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer.
1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
�
�
C�
!]
Drawings
When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used
in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to
small scale drawings.
Copies Furnished to Contractor
The Engineer will incorporate the Addenda into the Bid Documents to produce
a set of "conformed" drawings and specifications, and provide one electronic
copy of each to the Contractor. The conformed drawings and specificatians
shall not supersede the Contract Documents. It shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and specificatians
properly include all Addenda. The Contractor shall furnish each of the
subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the confirmed
documents as may be required for their work. Additional copies of Drawings
and Specifications, when requested, will be furnished to the Contractor at the
cost of reproduction.
Supplementary Drawings
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more
fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any
changes which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary
Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the
Engineer and copies thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner.
Contractor to Check Drawings and Data
The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the
Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data
received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions;
conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered, detailing
all errors, omissions, conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall provide a
response to all RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not be
allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will
be furnished by the Engineer, should such errors or omissions be discovered.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-3 10/29112
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
E
F
Specifications
The Technical Specifications consist of three parts: General, Products, and
Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements that govern
the work. Products and Execution modify and supplement these by detailed
requirements for the work and shall always govern whenever there appears to
be a conflict.
Intent
All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not
shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice verse, shall be of like
effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the
Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in
the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be
perFormed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or
described.
The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent
omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done
and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best
general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the
best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be
made upon that basis.
The inclusion of the Related Requirement
the General part of the specifications is
Contractor, and shall not be interpreted
Specification Sections.
1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturer
s(or work specified elsewhere) in
only for the convenience of the
as a complete list of related
The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to
furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. Such approval must be obtained
before shop drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for
any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good
reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of
the Engineer, be required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a
similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a
like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory
performance. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall
be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the
Engineer, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the
Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor
from his full responsibility under this Contract.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-4
10/29/12
•
•
•
� 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
.
L
�
Any finro or more pieces
classification, and being
the same manufacturer.
Delivery
of material or equipment of the same kind, type or
used for identical types of service, shall be made by
The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the mast
speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the wark
within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in
order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any
related Contractor.
Tools and Accessories
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably
marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to
adjust, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances
shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and
equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys.
Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified
to be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the
manufacturer", the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally
or commonly recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the
manufacturer's readily available literature.
Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate,
securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name,
year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data.
Installation of Equipment
The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery
of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally
encountered in work of this character.
39 Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on fihe
40 foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless
41 directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be
42 correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be
43 installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily
44 befinreen the various units.
45
46 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and
.47 attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the
48 devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-5 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E.
approved by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the •
purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation
shall be furnished.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for,
and shall properly bed in non-shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its
supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill
the space befinreen the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces
coming in contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy
equal to Kop-Coat 300M.
Service of Manufacturer's Representative/Certificate of Proper Installation
The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and
experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer
and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place
in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents.
Prior to placing the equipment in permanent operation, the manufacturer and
shall furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a Certificate of Proper Installation
stating that the equipment has been installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, such •
engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by
the Engineer to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory
operating condition, shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the
Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment.
1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. General
For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall
make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in
such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract
Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and authorities'
certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the
acceptance of any material or equipment.
If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by
the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the
Contract, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to
refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly
from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without
cost to the Owner.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-6
10/29/12
r �
L_J
• 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•47
48
�
�
C
Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be
conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or
the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment
during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any clarm
for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner
formally takes over the operation thereof.
Costs
All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract shall be
borne by the Contractor or duly authorized inspections engineers or inspection
bureaus without cost to the Owner, unless otherwise expressly specified.
The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests
specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the
Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
price.
Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those
specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications.
The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in
making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non-
compliance.
Inspection of Materials
The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in
advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of
materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the
permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection,
the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the
manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the
Engineer will arrange to have a representative present at such times during
the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify
the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point
of manufacture, or he will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived.
The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any
material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor from the
responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Certificate of Manufacture
When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor
shall furnish to him authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of
Manufacture that the materials to be used in the work have been
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-7
10/29/12
1 manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. These •
2 certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical
3 tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly
4 on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer.
5
6 E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment
7
8 Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency,
9 perFormance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in
10 the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its
11 characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
12 No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the
13 Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
F
G
0
Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results
thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible
official of the manufacturing company, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for
approval.
The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop
test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
Preliminary Field Tests
As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the
preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract
that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments
and replacement required. The furnishing Contractor shall assist in the
preliminary field tests as applicable.
Final Field Tests
Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and
piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests as
specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials,
equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional
cost to the Owner. The Supplier shall assist in the final field tests as
applicable.
Failure of Tests
•
Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests,
guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly •
corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise as directed by the
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-8 10/29/12
� 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor
has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If
the Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and
equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified
requirements, the Owner, nofinrithstanding its partial payment for work, and
materials and equipment, may reject the materials and equipment and may
order the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense.
Final Inspection
11 During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In
12 no case will the final estimate be prepared until the Contractor has complied
13 with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final inspection
14 of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly and
15 satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
16 Documents.
17
18 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•
/�
:
C
Temporary Fences
If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence
or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the
Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until
the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for
the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the
type of temporary fence to be used.
Temporary Driveways
At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remave
all temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the
work and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to
allow construction of other projects in the area. The Contractor shall fully
cooperate with the Owner in providing this access.
Temporary Structures and Facilities
The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required
in order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during
construction.
1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. First Aid
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-9
10/29/12
1 The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in
2 progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access
3 thereto at all times when people are employed on the work.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1.07 LINES AND GRADE
A.
�
C
Grade
All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines
and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full
responsibility for keeping alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor.
The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established
bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place
excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the
reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him
contrary to this provision.
Surveys
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and
other such materials to estabfish all working or construction lines and grades,
as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof.
All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050.
Safeguarding Marks
The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments
and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re-
establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work
improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without
authorization such established points, stakes and marks.
The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners,
monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required,
shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or destroyed.
1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING
A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or
injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private
property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the
progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original
locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent
public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not
shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract
Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-10 10/29/12
•
�
•
• 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
:
C.
and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not
shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interFerence with the
work, payment therefore wilt be made as provided for in the General
Conditions.
Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures,
tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of
his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional
inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project
which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall iae
performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the
interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and
record by noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be
aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of
all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of
the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude
conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of
surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer.
Prior to the beginning of any excavations the Contractor shall advise the
Engineer of all building or structures on which he intends to perForm work or
which performance of the project work will affect.
Protection of Trees
The Contractor shal� adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes
or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of
trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to injure such
trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the
Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar
size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the
Contractor.
2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines
may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials,
except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully
supported and protected from damage.
3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the
Owner, to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so
ordered, the Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of
trees.
Lawn Areas
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-11
10/29/12
1 Lawn areas shali be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work.
2 Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced,
3 or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
D. Restoration of Fences
Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of
the work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as
good or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in
which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No additional payment will be
made for the replacement or repair of any fence.
13
14 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A.
G3
C
u
Barriers and Lights
During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain at
all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The
Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or
"street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes
obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the
public.
Smoke Prevention
The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment
generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the
production of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be
permitted.
Noise
The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all
times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the
exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with
mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be used to
avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly observe all local
regulations and ordinances covering noise control.
Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the
hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on Sundays. If the proper and efficient
prosecution of the work requires operations during the night, the written
permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting such items of the
work.
Access to Public Services
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-12 10/29/12
•
•
•
• 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
.23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•47
48
C�
Neither the materials excavated nor the materiais or plant used in tlhe
construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fiire
hydrants, valves or manholes.
Dust Prevention
The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic
by keeping the roads and/or construction areas sprinkled with water at all
times or when directed by the Owner and/or Engineer.
1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the wark
that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The work shall be perFormed by competent workmen skilled in
the trade required by the restoration.
1.11 CLEANING
A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site
of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as
is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a
nuisance or is objectionable.
The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and
temporary structures when no further need therefore develops.
B. Final Clearing
At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures
and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and
he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other
foreign substances.
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by
him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright,
clean, polished and new operating condition.
1.12 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion
1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and
bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water
courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-13
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
:
C.
�❑
E
F
2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shalt remove any siltation deposits
and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that
results from his construction operations.
3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from
the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas.
Protection of Wetland Areas
The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in
accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued
for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of
in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of
Engineers, etc.
Existing Facilities
The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation
insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for
maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as
described in the Special Provisions, herein.
Use of Chemicals
All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project
operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of
other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all
such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with
manufacturers' instructions.
Tree Removal
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer forty-eight (48) hours in advance of
any removal of trees on the project. No clearing shall occur and no earth
moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after the notice has been
issued. The Contractor shal! provide maintenance of the tree barricades and
other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to remain. Failure to
notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the in-kind
replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner.
Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems
�
u
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of
storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to
the approved Drawings. It is strongly recommended that no roadway base or
paving be constructed until the Contractor has performed lamping of these •
lines to his and the Engineer's satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-14
10/29/12
• 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
Ce�
sewer invert grades are verified in the field by the Owner. The tamping of lines
and verification of elevations in no way absolves the Contractor from any of his
contractual obligations.
Related Permits
The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have
received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the
Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the
Contractor shall accept said assignments upon such request from the Owner.
H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to
be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and their
conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings, are
the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that
additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls
shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction
process by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer.
It is the sofe responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any
information, data, etc. which is required as a condition of a permit. Required
information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by
the Contractor with copies to the Permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor
will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation
of permit conditions.
1.13 DISPOSAL
A. The Contractor will directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of the
construction demolition debris at all sites. The Contractor shall provide and
include in its bid all costs associated with hauling, disposal, and tipping fees.
B. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall use the Owner's disposal
service for disposal of construction debris.
- : �.�i :7 7_��ri7�[�1�' : �IJ:I:�►7
A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing
structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas,
fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not
specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the
Contractor unless otherwise specified.
B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at
least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following
construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting
the affected area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-15 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
remain open over night within a street right-of-way unless the governing Traffic •
Control Division grants specific approval.
C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or
replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of
construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs
will be accomplished in a professional workmanship-like manner in
accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if
addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30-day time limit above
only by specific written agreement with the Engineer.
D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the
permanent repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with
its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or
replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work
will be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies
owed the Contractor.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-16
10/29/12
•
�
• 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
�
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 01015
CONTROL OF WORK
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 WORK PROGRESS
A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe, appropriate
and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of
progress which will insure the completion of the work within the time stipulated
in the Proposal. If at any time such facilities appear to the Engineer to be
inefficient, inappropriate, insufficient or unsafe for securing the quality of wark
required or for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the
Contractor to increase the facilities equipment, and the Contractor shall
conform to such order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of the wark
and rate of progress required.
1.02 PRIVATE LAND
A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements,
except by permission of the Owner.
1.03 WORK LOCATIONS
A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the
Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be
found desirable to avoid interFerence with existing structures or for other
reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the
Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing
different or additional items where required.
1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS
A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary
barricades, caution signs, fights and other means to prevent accidents to
persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense,
provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating
travel by Owner's personnel, pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for
access to private property during construction shall be removed when no
Ionger required. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular
surrounding conditions and does not endanger existing facilities. If the
excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts tra�c, construction
procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking
excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain
open overnight.
CONTROL OF WORK
Q1015-1 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to
open trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, of other
obstacles, which could be dangerous to the public, shall be weli lighted at
night.
1.05 TEST PITS
A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits (pot hole) for locating underground
pipeline or structures in advance of construction to allow the work to be
constructed as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by the
Contractor so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfilled
immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored
and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper
authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and
pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's
operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide
temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for
safery satisfactory to the Engineer and the agency having jurisdiction.
B. Detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the Owner and
the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While
traffic is detoured the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and
those periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the
Owner.
C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to
open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist,
or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not
police protection has been provided.
1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and
private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage
thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property
by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution
of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by
the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing
before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other
manner acceptable to the Engineer.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-2
10/29/12
•
•
C�
• 1 B. Ali sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be
2 restored to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable
3 materials. All curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original
4 construction and in accordance with the best modern practice.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24 1.08
25
26
u
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery, and
other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly
workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor
shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as
conditions permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction that have
been damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original conditions.
D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against inju�y.
The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage because
of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without pr�or
notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs,
and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting in
accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools and materials.
E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall be
part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall
be included in the unit and/or lump sum prices established.
PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all
buildings, structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs,
services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants,
sewers, drains, and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are
shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall carefulty support and protect all
such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting
from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired by him at his expense.
B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining the location and
materials of construction of all underground structures and utilities (including
existing water services, drain lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained
and all costs or charges resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the
Contractor.
C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the
Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to
perform the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in the
Proposal, if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General
Conditions. If relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner will
notify the Utility to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The
Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner and Utility, and shall have no
cfaim for delay due to such relocation.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-3 10/29f 12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
D. Underground and above ground utilities/facilities are identified on the
Drawings based on best information available at the time for the preparation of
the plans. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities prior to
any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to
existing underground utilities and facilities, and shall coordinate the protection
of these utilities with the Owner.
1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES
A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or other
related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system as little
as possible, and shall notify the Engineer and public well in advance of any
requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a utility, so that
necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate agency.
B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the
Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines.
Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the existing
conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in
scheduling work.
1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT
��
A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or damage •
in every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads shall be
allowed and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed by the
Contractor at his own expense.
1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water
required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all connections
and other provisions necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's
potable and/or reclaimed water system, as required. The Contractor shall pay
the appropriate party for all water used for construction purposes. Bid prices
shall include the costs incurred for water usage.
1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW
A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains,
and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall
immediately remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for maintaining
existing flows shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of the interruption
of any flow.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-4
10/29/12
•
• 1 1.13 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT
2
3 A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall
4 cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and
5 shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or
6 required.
7
8 B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by
9 the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated
10 herein or directed by the Engineer.
11
12 1.14 COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT
13
14 A. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
15 Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As such,
16 the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and
17 accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work.
18 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
19
20
21
22
.23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•
B. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on-site on a
regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all equipment and
facilities, so as not to impede the operation and maintenance of said facility.
This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.15 CLEAN-UP
A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his
operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport and
properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber,
excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from the
construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner andlor
Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, he shall remove, transport and
properly dispose of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the
construction operation, and shall leave the entire site of his work in a neat and
orderly condition.
B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed fram
the site.
1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY
A. ff required, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power
company to have electrical service supplied to the site.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1.17 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service/operations.
Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner
that assures that the facility maintains service throughout the duration of the
project. Prior to taking any service or operation off-line, Contractor shall
prepare a work sequence and coordinate all shut downs with the Owner
and/or Engineer. All temporary measures and materials required to meet this
condition during construction will be provided, installed, maintained and
removed by the Contractor. All costs associated with this effort will be borne
by the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to meet this operating
condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, will be borne by the
Contractor.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-6
10/29/12
�
U
�
U
•
�
1
2
3
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
SECTION 01030
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be
understood by the Contractor that the proposal offered by the Contractor
included those products in his bid. Should the Contractor desire to provide
products equal to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as
described in the Standard General Conditions. The atternate product or
products submitted by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of the
Specifications and shall, in all respects, be equal to the products specified by
name herein.
B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles
for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products
of recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise.
C. Contractor shall properly dispose of all excess materials from the site.
1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and
prepare for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings.
All connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner andl'or
Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems
shall be attended by the Owner and/or Owner's Representative. The cost of
this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be
included in the various prices bid for the Work and shall not result in any
additional cost to the Owner.
1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact that during excavation, the
possibility exists that the Contractor will encounter various water, gas,
telephone, electrical, or other utility lines not shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate
and flag these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to
an existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the
Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out
in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be
borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-1 10/29/12
1 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles,
2 the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation,
3 are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the
4 pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable
5 advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor.
6
7 C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied
8 representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or
9 that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered.
10 Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on
11 the drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. The existing piping and utilities that interFere with new construction shall be
rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test
pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts.
Before any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the pipeline
or utitity and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed.
•
E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing
piping and utilities. All utilities that do not interFere with completed work shall
be carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any
way by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his •
expense, as directed by the Engineer.
F. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone,
electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within
recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the
obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in
the opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may
direct the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify
utility crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer.
1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN
A. Bid prices for equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent field
service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the
installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the
Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved
manufacturer's operation and maintenance data, shall be delivered to the
Engineer prior to training the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be
divided into finro or more time periods, as required by the installation program
or as directed by the Engineer.
B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is
presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the •
manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-2
10/29/12
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where
applicable:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts}.
Completeness in all details, as specified and required.
Correctness of setting, afignment, and relative arrangement of various
parts.
Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants.
Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls.
Energize equipment.
Deficiency correction.
8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification.
C. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the
equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under
the conditions specified.
D. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall
submit to the Engineer, a complete, signed report of the results of his
inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include detailed
descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative
results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be
taken to ensure proper maintenance.
E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's
operating personnel. Training shall not be performed until the requirements of
Paragraphs B, C and D above have been fully satisfied and any other
specified performance testing has been completed. Training shall be provided
for the number of days specified in each equipment section of these
specifications. Training shall be provided on an 8-hour per day basis. Partial
days [less than eight (8) full working hours] shall not be credited toward the
specified duration without the written approval of the Engineer. Training shall
not be concurrent with on-going testing, debugging or installation activities; but
shall be on a separate activity devoted exclusively to the instruction of the
Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the manufacturer's
equipment. Qualified representatives of each equipment manufacturer
specifically skilled in providing instruction to operations personnel shall
perform training. Training shall provide an overview of operations and
maintenance requirements and shall include as a minimum, but not be limited
to:
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description of unit and component parts.
Operating capabilities and performance criteria.
Operating procedures.
Maintenance procedures.
Servicing and lubrication schedules.
Troubleshooting.
Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface.
The operating and maintenance data to be provided shall be used as a
basis for training.
F. A"Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer stating that
the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment has been
satisfactorily tested and ready for operation, and that the operating personnel
have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of the equipment shall
be submitted before start-up by the Owner. The Certificate shall indicate date
and time instruction was given and names of operating personnel in
attendance. This certification shall be submitted on the certification sheet, as
approved by the Engineer.
G. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the
services of the manufacturer's field service technician.
H. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified,
shall furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the
manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over-heating makes
such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall
be delivered directly to the Engineer for approval within 60 days of shop
drawing approval. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or
stored on-site until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and
completeness of operating and maintenance data. Final approved copies of
operating and maintenance data shalf be delivered to the Engineer prior to
scheduling the instruction period (training) with the Owner.
��
U
B. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owner's representative a signed receipt •
acknowledging delivery of the operations and maintenance data. The receipt
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-4
10/29/12
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
shall fully list all operations and maintenance data delivered by the Contractor
to the Owner.
1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST
A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and
motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing
shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance
Data Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts for certain equipment to be provided are specified in the pertinent
sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare
parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment
they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the
delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be
furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contract.or
shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer no later than ten (10) days prior to
the equipment's start-up.
B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible
markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged
storage.
C. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owner's representative a signed receipt
acknowledging delivery of the spares parts. The receipt shall fully list all spare
parts delivered by the Contractor to the Owner.
1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with
particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric
drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified
millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the
anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened
against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been approved by
the manufacturer, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be
securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked
after securing to the foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the
sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and,
under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed.
B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary
to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by tlhe
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-5 10/29/12
1 Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so.
2 Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be
3 done at the expense of the Contractor.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES
A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall
provide a list including the equipment name, address and telephone number of
the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or
spare parts can be readily obtained.
1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS
A. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or
products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required
Shop Drawings.
B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where
identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period
of at least one (1) year.
1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install
anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to
complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by
subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and
patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the
following paragraph.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves,
inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the
execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective
cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc.
In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the
written approval of the Engineer.
1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION
A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run-
off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium
chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into
the supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be
adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased
more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by
the state or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish
unless limits have been established for the particular water. In surface water
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-6 10/29/12
•
�J
•
•
1 used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless
2 otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of
3 construction equipment to prevent operations that promote erosion.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA-NPDES general
permit for stormwater discharges and the stormwater pollution prevention plan
developed for the project.
1.13 VALVE INDICES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required
on the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above
ground valves shall be non-corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19-
gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base
as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for approval, two (2)
samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart
and letter styles. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, not
tess than 120 days before start-up, a valve schedule containing all valves
required for the work. The schedule shall contain for each valve, the location,
type, a number, words to identify the valve's function, and the normal
operating position. The information contained in the valve schedules shall be
coded on the tags in a system provided by the Owner. Above ground valve
tags shall be furnished with non-corrosive metal wire for attachment thereof.
Tag numbers and identification will be provided by the Engineer.
1.14 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN
A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should
outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no
additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning.
B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the
Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or
material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the
Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials
shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
1.15 WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment
supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year
unless otherwise specified. Warranty period shalf commence on the date that
the Work is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete.
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
__._
B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship,
design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the
warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to
the Owner.
C. If, within the guarantee period, repairs or changes are required in connection
with work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the
result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior,
defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor
shall promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to
the Owner:
1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and
correct all defects herein.
2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or
contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of
the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior,
defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract.
3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in
fulfilling any such guarantee.
D. If the Contractor, after notice, fails within ten (10) days to proceed to comply
with the terms of this guarantee, the Owner may have the defects corrected,
and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred,
provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion of the
Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without
notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost
thereof.
E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as
may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of
this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special
guarantees and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the
Contractor and delivered to the Engineer, along with a summary list thereof,
before the acceptance of the Work.
F. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the
Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall
be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment
warranties from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the
equipment specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract
Documents, or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner.
�
C�
G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one-year warranty •
commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall obtain
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-8
10/29/12
•
CJ
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty starting at the time of
equipment delivery to the job site. This three-year warranty shall not relieve
the Contractor of the one-year warranty commencing upon Owner acceptance.
The Contractor's one-year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the
project performance bond.
1.16 WATER TIGHTNESS
A. All water-retaining structures (those that are intended to hold a liquid) shall be
filled and tested for leaks by the Contractor, with water acceptable to the
Engineer, prior to surface coating or painting. Procedure and manner in which
any leaks are repaired must meet the approval of the Engineer. All cost
associated with the testing and repair of leaks shall be at the expense of the
Contractor.
1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the
governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever
there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these
Specifications, the more stringent shall apply.
1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE
A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to,
encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive
noise.
B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7
PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at
the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip-
ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at
any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have
the work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive
noise shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance
with the Contract Time, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting
from the creation of a public nuisance.
1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety
requirements.
1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-9
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior
by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of
the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue
such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During
suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and
protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if
the Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed.
1.21 RELOCATIONS
12 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including
13 but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and
14 drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the
15 Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at
16 no additional cost to the Owner.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1.22 SALVAGE
A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, va�ves, pipes,
fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of
construction under this project may be designated to be salvaged as
necessary by the Owner. Any existing equipment or material to be salvaged
shall remain onsite and the Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the
salvage equipment/materials to the exact location onsite as directed by the
Engineer.
1.23 PERMITS
A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable
permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate
governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all
applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer.
The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.24 PUMPING
A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to
prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations.
All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in
accordance with these specifications and/or regulatory requirements,
whichever is more stringent.
•
•
B. The Contractor shall, for the duration of the contract and with his own
equipment, pump out water that may seep or leak into the excavations or
structures. All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly
disposed of in accordance with these specifications and/or regulatory •
requirements, whichever is more stringent. Below grade galleries and other
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-10 10/29/12
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
•
operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. The extent of pumping required
in tanks, channels and other non-operating areas will be determined by the
Owner/Engineer.
1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the
Contractor shall notify the Owner/Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar
days in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work.
1.26 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES
A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of
the entire work. Upon completion of construction in each individual facility,
including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the
individual facitity, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion
and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership
and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one-year
guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of
not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work
as a whole when it is completed and tested.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-11
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK �
SPECIAL PROJECTS AND PROCEDURES
01015-12
10/29/12
�
•
�
1 SECTION 01040
2
3 COORDINATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION
8
9 A. The contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of the construction
10 efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the
11 following:
12
13 1. The work of subcontractors.
14
15 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers.
16
17 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during test and checkout.
18
19 4. The interrelated work with public and private utilities companies.
20
21 5. The interrelated work with the Owner to maintain plant operations and
•22 where tie-ins to existing facilities are required.
23
24 6. The effort of independent testing agencies.
25
26 7. The work of other General Contractors
27
28 PART 2— PRODUCTS (Not Used)
29
30 PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used)
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
34
�
COORDINATION
01040-1 10/29/12
I LLY LEFT BLANK •
TH S PAGE INTENTIONA
•
•
COORDINATION
01040-2 10/29/12
• �
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
• 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•47
48
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey
services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing
and/or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundary's,
project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines and levels and
all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also included are
such engineering services as are specified or required to execute the
Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be licensed
professionals registered in the State of Florida.
B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shatl be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and
marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has
established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for
the prosecution of the work.
1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those
designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect cont�ol
points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent referen�e
points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or
reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any
such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed
due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them
referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor.
1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered La�d
Surveyor (Registered Surveyor) to establish all lines and grades on the
Drawings necessary to fully construct the work in accordance with Chapter 5J-
17 of the Florida Administrative Code.
B. The Registered Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline right-of-way
adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50' intervals on curves
and at all changes in direction. The Surveyor shall place lath and hub at such
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-1 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C
points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be permitted.
1. The Registered Surveyor shall utilize current right-of-way maps, plats
and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with
existing monumentation to establish the existing right-of-way lines and
utility easement boundaries.
The Registered Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system in
accordance with Chapter 5J-17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written list to the
Contractor for his use.
D. The Registered Surveyor shall conduct a preconstruction topographic survey
of the unpaved roadway to establish target elevations for the unpaved
roadway improvements. The topographic survey shall include at minimum
cross sections of the 10-foot roadway on 25-foot centers. Drawings of the pre-
construction topographic survey shall be submitted to the Engineer. .
E. The Registered Surveyor shall conduct a post construction topographic survey
of the unpaved roadway to ensure that post construction roadway elevations
are the same as pre-construction etevations. The post construction
topographic survey shall be on the same cross sections as the preconstruction
topographic survey. This survey shall become part of the record drawings for
the project.
F. The Registered Surveyor will conduct the Contractor shall provide an as-built
survey that includes the horizontal and vertical locations of all the structures
on the site and all underground fittings, valves, and pipe inverts. The survey
shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Surveyor and Mapper.
1.04 RECORDS
A. The Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and
survey work as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the
information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall
be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
�
Q
Submit name and address of Surveyor to the Engineer.
On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field
engineering work.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-2
10/29/12
•
C�
u
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01065
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the construction of the
project adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards and regulations,
and to atl permits and easements acquired for the project.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights-of-way with the agency
having jurisdiction, including all road/lane closures, road/lane narrowing and
detours.
C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements
that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders
at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address:
www.myclearwater.com/citvproiects. The Contractor shall conduct all
operations in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and
License Agreements.
D. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements
require that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a
representative of the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all
coordination and notification required to assure full compliance with the permit
conditions.
E. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds,
Easement Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of
the project. A listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or
License Agreements that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed
below. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other Permits,
Easement Agreements, or License Agreements necessary for the proper
execution of the Work not specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions and
requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the
Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement actian
by any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in
the forms of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees c�r
consultant fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be
otherwise collectible from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally.
G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the
expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work.
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
H. Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil
tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of
Transportation (FDOT) design standards.
1.02 PERMITS
A. Permits obtained by, or applied for by, the Owner are as follows:
Permit Title Agency Permit/File Number
Construction of a Domestic
Wastewater Florida Department of CS52-0139900-047-
CollectionlTransmission Environmental Protection DWC/CM (Attached)
S stem LS 33
DeMinimus Exemption (LS Florida Department of
33) Environmental Protection
B. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions
that relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying
these permit conditions in developing a bid for the project.
C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain
the following permits as required and comply with their respective conditions
and submit copies of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner:
1. City of Clearwater building permit(s)
2. Generic Permit for the Production of Groundwater
3. Storm Water NPDES
4. Pinellas County Right-Of Way Use Permit
D. The Contractor shall obtain all construction permits required including those
necessary for clearing, grubbing, and tree removal. No clearing shall occur
and no earth-moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after the permits
have been issued.
E. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with all local and state
permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use
permitting, if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water
Management District.
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-2 10/29/12
•
•
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
• 45
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and complying with, all
required permits relating to discharges from dewatering shall obtain a State of
Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the
Discharge of Produced Ground Water From Any Non-Contaminated Site
Activity in accordance with 62-621.300(2) FAC.
G. The Contractor shall obtain, imptement and comply with the requirements of a
Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction
Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62-621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor sh�ll
submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of
Environmental Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall:
1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP or Nts
website, DEP Documents 62-621.300(4)(a) and 62-621.300(4)(b),
respectively.
�
3
�
Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water permitting
rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following:
a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobiliz�d
by storm water.
b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff.
c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment contrals
including Best Management Practices to reduce erosian,
sedimentation, and storm water pollution.
d. A maintenance and inspection schedule.
e. Plan and procedures for record keeping.
f. A map depicting storm water exit areas.
Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to
the local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee.
The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of Permit, along
with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer.
H. The Contractor shall obtain a right-of-way use permit from Pinellas County fior
work associated with LS 42 and shall comply with all maintenance of traffic
requirements specified therein.
1.03 EASEMENTS
A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the various easements for
the following parcels: N/A
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Easement Number Owner County Parcel ID
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-4
10/29/12
•
r�
U
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
48
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify
reference standards.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with
requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when
requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes
establish stricter standards.
B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contr�ct
Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS
Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed
for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract
Documents.
AA Aluminum Association
900 19th Street NW
Washington, DC 20006
AASHTO American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
ACI American Concrete Institute
38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331
AI Asphalt Institute
2696 Research Park Drive
Lexington KY 40511
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive
Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60601-2001
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1140 Connecticut Avenue
Suite 705
Washington DC 20036
ANSI American National Standards Institute
1819 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20036
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
ASTM
/� m �
American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA, 19428
American Water Works Association
6666 W. Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
AWS American Welding Society
550 N.W. LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 N. Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
FS
NEMA
PCA
Federal Specification General Services
Administration Specifications and Consumer
Information Distribution Section (WFSIS)
470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100
Washington, DC 20407
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
1300 North 17�h Street
Suite 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, IL 60077
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
209 W. Jackson Blvd.
Chicago, IL 60606
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-2
10/29/12
�
C�
r 1
U
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
•
•
SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
40 24th Street,. 6th floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
333 Pfingston Road
Northbrook, IL 60062
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-3
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-4 10/29/12
C�
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
SECTION 01150
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Proposal section
of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the specified
items included in the description in this section for each pay item number.
B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices of the Proposal will be
full compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and
incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and/nr
as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid on
a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the
manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed
in the Schedule of Prices will constitute full compensation for all work show�n
and/or specified to be performed under this project.
C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid pricEs
shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that
bid item. All existing structures and property that are altered, removed or
damaged during construction shall be restored to the same or better conditian
than existed prior to construction at no additional cost to the Owner. Tf�e
bidder shall hereby be advised that cleanup is an integral part of restoratian
process.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic mainte
necessitated by the construction/installation of those
requiring traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall
specific unit price submitted for that particular bid item.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT — BASE BID WORK
A. Lift Station 42 Rehabilitation (Pay Item 1)
nance requirements
specific bid items
be included in the
Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price
included in the Bid Form for Lift Station 42 Rehabilitation shall not be
made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
0
2. Pavment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 1 shall be in
accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation
for the furnishing of all labor, materials, toots, equipment, and
supervision required to pertorm the work as shown on the Drawings
and Specifications as indicated herein including, but not limited to, the
design, furnishing, installation, operation, and maintenance of a bypass
pumping system including permanently relocating an existing 4-inch
force main and temporarily plugging the existing gravity sewer;
providing a boundary survey of the site before construction and an as-
built topographic/location survey of the site after construction;
demolition; fence and gates; pavement; potable water hose bib and
hose rack assembly; one (1) line stop and gate valve on the northern
force main; pump discharge valves and piping; wet well vent; fall
protection; emergency generator remote mounted radiator and fan
assembly; check valves; plug valves; odor control system with ductwork
and all necessary utilities and ancillary equipment; painting; valve vault
work; VFDs; electrical work; instrumentation and control work; SCADA
system; and, all pertinent Division 1 requirements and all other services
necessary for the complete rehabilitation of Lift Station 42 as detailed in
the Contract Documents.
Lift Station 42 Line Stop and Valve Insertion on South Force Main (Pay Item 2)
Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price
included in the Bid Form for Lift Station 42 Line Stop and Valve
Insertion on the South Force Main shall not be made and all items shall
be included in the lump sum price bid. The work included under Pay
Item 2 may not be perFormed if an operational valve is found
underground precluding the need for the line stop and valve.
2. Pavment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 2 shall be in
accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation
for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
supervision required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings
and Specifications as indicated herein including, but not limited to, the
design, furnishing installation, operation, and maintenance of systems
and equipment to excavate, install specialized pipe fittings and valves,
perform pipe cutting, furnish and install a new valve into the force main,
remove the specialized fittings and valves, permanently cap the pipe
penetration, and all pertinent Division 1 requirements and all other
services necessary for the complete installation of a line stop and new
valve as detailed in the Contract Documents.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-2
10/29/12
�
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
`22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
� 46
��
�❑
E.
Lift Station 33 Rehabilitation (Pay Item 3)
Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price
included in the Bid Form for Lift Station 33 Rehabilitation shall not be
made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid.
2. PaVment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 3 shall be in
accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation
for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
supervision required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings
and Specifications as indicated herein including, but not limited to, the
design, furnishing, installation, operation, and maintenance of a bypass
pumping system; providing an as-built survey, providing pre-
construction and post construction topographic surveys of the si�e;
construction of flexible permeable pavement and entrance gates ar�d
posts; design, furnish, install, operate, and maintain a temporary
dewatering system; modifying the existing wetwell/manhole a�d
installing a multi-layered lining system in the manhole after the
proposed modifications are complete; demolishing and modifying
portions of the existing drywell; structural work; new gravity sewer;
prepackaged FRP duplex submersible pumping station; valve vault
piping; pumps; valves; force main and connection to existing force
main; fall protection; modifications to the existing water service; new
access steps and walkway handrails; electrical work; control and
instrumentation work, SCADA system; and, all pertinent Division 1
requirements and all other services necessary for the complete
rehabilitation of Lift Station 33 as detailed in the Contract Documents.
Mobilization (Pay Item 4)
Measurement: Measurement for payment of mobilization costs shall be
on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed four percent (4%) of
the proposed Total Project Price.
2. Pavment: Payment of the lump sum bid for Pay Item 4 shall be full
compensation for all costs associated with initiating the project as
limited by other sections of the Contract Documents including the
Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds. Payment for these
performances shall be based on the terms of Section III in accordance
with the Schedule of Values.
Indemnification (Pay Item 5)
Measurement: Measurement for payment of indemnification shall not
be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
2. Pavment: Payment of the lump sum of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00)
for Pay Item 5 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the
Owner and the Owner's Design Professional as specified in the
General Conditions, and shall be included in the first payment request.
F. Contingency Allowance (Pay Item 6)
1. Measur�ement: Measurement for payment shatl be as agreed upon by
the Owner and Contractor.
2. Pavment: Payment for contingency allowance shall be paid only for
OWNER DIRECTED additional work in accordance with the terms of
the authorization and, if applicable, in accordance with the Schedule of
Values.
END OF SECTION
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-4
10/29/12
�
�
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
SECTION 01152
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
�
:
Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the
approved payment schedule and in the format established by the Owner.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application
for Payment form, prior to the first Payment Request.
1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
A. Submit applications typed on forms either provided in these Specifications,
furnished by the Owner, or as approved by the Owner, with itemized data
typed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14-inch white paper continuati�an
sheets.
B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet:
1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of
Values accepted by the Engineer.
1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT
A. Application Form:
1.
2.
3.
Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed
prior to date of submittal of application.
Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated
on continuation sheets.
Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the
Contractor.
B. Continuation Sheets:
1
�
Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item
number and scheduled dollar value for each item.
Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when
work has been performed or products stored.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3
4
List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the
end of the continuation sheets.
a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original
component item of work.
Payment on component material stored on site, shall not be made.
1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Provide substantiating data, containing suitable information for review of costs
requested with a cover letter identifying:
1. Project.
2.
3.
Appfication number and date.
Detailed list of enclosures.
B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.
•
C. The Contractor is to maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record
drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor •
shall exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the
Engineer.
D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance
with the Specification. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule and narrative with
the applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the
required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may
withhold approval of progress payment estimates until such a time as the
Contractor submits the required updated schedule.
1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
�
L''
C.
Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.
Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as
specified in the Specification.
All appropriate information must be entered on the application form.
1. The line title, "Application Period", must indicate the dates befinreen
which all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must
be consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and •
they must not overlap.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-2
10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
�
U
2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project
Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any
Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" sectian
must include that information.
3
Q
All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny.
The application must be signed and dated by an authorized
representative of the Contractor.
1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Prior to submitting a completed Payment Request, the Contractor must
arrange a field meeting with the Owner and/or Engineer to review and verify all
installed quantities and/or stored material. Only when the Owner/Engineer
and Contractor agree on installed quantities and percentages, should the
Payment Request be submitted.
.
Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times
stipulated in the General Conditions.
When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will
transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor.
-_: -:•mz�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-3
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-4 10/29/12
C�
•
��
U
C J
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01153
CHANGEORDER PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures.
1.
2.
3.
Provide full written data required to evaluate changes.
Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and materiallforce
account basis.
Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.
B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization:
1
2
Who is authorized to accept changes in the work.
Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of
the authorization of changes in the work.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Change Order: See General Conditions.
B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner
and Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described,
authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum
or the Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order.
C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or
interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not
involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the
Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order
minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be
accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and/or
claims for other costs.
1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Direct�ve
Change to the Contractor. Request will include:
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
_
1
2
3
4
Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change
in the Project.
Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
The projected time span for making the change, and a specific
statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized.
A specific period of time during which the requested price will be
considered valid.
B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer,
containing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description of the proposed changes.
Statement of the reason for making the changes.
Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors.
Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract
Time, as appropriate.
1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A. A Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions
and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define
details of the change and will designate the method of determining any
change in the Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time.
B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as
authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes.
1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS
A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price,
which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data
to allow the Engineer to evaluate the quotation.
B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations:
1
2.
Labor required.
Equipment required.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-2
10/29/12
�
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
• 45
C
3. Products required.
a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.
b. Quantities required.
4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.
6. Overhead and profit.
7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time-and-
material/force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum
proposal, plus additional information:
1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date
of the order.
2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom.
3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
4. Receipts and invoices for:
a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use.
b. Products used, listing of quantities.
c. Subcontracts.
1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS
A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order.
B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions,
with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of tN�e
change.
C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract
Sum and in the Contract Time.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract
Documents, order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade-off
agreements.
E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum,
Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs.
1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and
attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor,
or requests from Owner, or both.
B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent
to Contractor for approval. After approval by Contractor, all copies should be
sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed
copies.
1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either:
:
C
�
1.
2.
3.
Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes.
Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer.
Survey of complete work.
The amounts of the unit prices to be:
1
2
Those stated in the Agreement.
Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be
determined prior to start of the work:
1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as
authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes.
When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work:
1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the
Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and
the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-4
10/29/12
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
•50
51
52
53
2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of
such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor
shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each
item and any claims for a change in Contract Time.
�3
0
�
Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change
in Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their
agreement with the terms therein.
Owner will then sign the change order.
1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL/FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTICIN
CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor
to proceed with the changes.
Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemiz�d
accounting and supporting data.
Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in
General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in
Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement
therewith.
Owner will then sign the Change Order.
1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Request for Payment
forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to record the
adjusted Contract Sum.
B. Not greater than monthly revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each
change in Contract Time. Revise subschedules to show changes for other
items of work affected by the changes.
C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in
Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-5
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK �
•
•
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-6 10/29/12
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01200
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of
Work, a preconstruction conference shali be held at a mutually agreed time
and place.
B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel
and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be
discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda
shall include as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule
Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings
Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Pay Applications
Maintaining Record Drawings
Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions
Field Decisions and Change Orders
Field Office, Storage Areas and Security
Equipment and Material Deliveries
Safety Meetings and Program
Traffic Control Plan
Pre-construction Video
C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping
the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance.
1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least
monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work.
The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
r resentatives of •
Contractor and/or Engineer may request attendance by ep
material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s).
B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference. The purpose of the meetings
shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the Work,
maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling and
resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future scheduling.
PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-2
10/29l12
•
u
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Before Work is started, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a
schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction schedule
shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and completion of
each part, the installation date for each major item af equipment, and the time
for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities.
B. At least every 30 days the schedule shall be revised as necessary to reflect
changes in the progress of the Work.
C. Owner may require Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction forces,
as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any
time during the construction period.
1.02 PROGRESS REPORTS
A. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each application f�or
progress payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit
additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request.
B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and
anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule, and
proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not
readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory
evidence.
C. Each progress report shall also include three (3) prints of the accepted graphic
schedule marked to indicate actual progress.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Schedule of Values
after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first
application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each
kind of work in sufficient detail as requested by the Engineer, shall be
acceptable to Engineer before any application for payment is prepared �r
approved.
B. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract
Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be
SUBMITTALS
01300-1 10/29/12
2
3
listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be
substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items.
4 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, the O&M manuals, as-built
5 drawings, start-up, training, and any other individualized component that the
6 Contractor or Engineer wants separately itemized for payment shall also be
7 included on the Schedule of Values.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor
on items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The
Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to
Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the
Schedule of Values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress
payments and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each
indicated item.
17 1.04 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS
18
19 A. Within thirty (30) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to
20 the Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall
21 be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more
22 than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule.
23
24 1.05 SURVEY DATA
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing
surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for
examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be
submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final
acceptance of the Work.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA
A. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will
become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for
review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in
sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of
component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and
supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for
installation and correlation with other materials and equipment.
B. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be transmitted in the format provided
by the Engineer, certified and signed by the Contractor indicating the submittal
to be correct and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and noting any
special instructions regarding the submittal. Each submittal shall identify the
submittal number in the format required by the Engineer, with the name and
number of this contract, the Contractor's name, and references to applicable
SUBMITTALS
01300-2 10/29/12
�
CJ
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each submittal shall indicate
the intended use of the item in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted,
applicable items shall be clearly identified. The current revision, issue
number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and other descriptive
data.
C. Contractor's stamp of approval is a representation to Owner and Engineer that
Contractor accepts full responsibility for determining and verifying all
quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers,
and similar data, and that he has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with
the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.
D. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each
submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such
submittals shall indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all
changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that
may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams.
E. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each
submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions
previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that
more than one resubmission is required because of the Contractor's failure to
account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner fc�r
the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions.
F. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter
returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days
the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the
stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed
within that time.
G. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining
Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of tf�e
Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the
work authorized by a Change Order.
H. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal, the
date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of
submission and return of any previous resubmittals. In addition, the
Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 01340.
Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover
only general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external
connections, and dimensions which affect the layout. Engineer's review does
not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of tt�e
material, equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals
SUBMITTALS
01300-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or
deviations, or responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.
J. It is intended that submittals be handled electronically whenever possible,
however, when necessary to employ paper copies, five copies of each drawing
and necessary data, plus the number of copies that the Contractor wants
returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer wilf not accept submittals
from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in
direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades.
Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter
(A, B, etc.), to indicate the sequence of the resubmittal. If applicable, the
Engineer will provide the Contractor with an electronic file of the submittal
format to be followed.
K. When submittals are returned marked CONFIRM or REJECTED - RESUBMIT,
the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by Engineer
and corrected copies shall resubmitted.
L. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct
specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made
other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions.
•
M. When the submittals are returned marked APPROVED or MAKE •
CORRECTIONS NOTED no additional copies need be furnished.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Operation and maintenance data shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking
instructions.
Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
Guide to "troubleshooting".
Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
B. The operation and maintenance data shall be in addition to any instructions or
parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which
may be required by Contractor.
C. A single electronic copy of the O&M Data shall be furnished for review. Five •
(5) hard (paper) copies, along with finro (2) CDs, of the final O&M Data shall be
SUBMITTALS
01300-4 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
•
furnished.
1.08 LAYOUT DATA
A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of ineasurements and
calculations made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of
such data shall be furnished to the Engineer for use in checking
B. Contractor's layout as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data
considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner by Engineer with
other records upon completion of the Work.
1.09 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION
A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color
selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of
all other items.
1. Paint for piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, etc.
2. Paint for equipment.
PART 2 — PRODUCT
PART 3 — EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
S U BM ITTALS
01300-5
10/29/12
THIS PAG
E INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
.
u
SUBMITTALS
01300-6 10/29/12
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that constructian
is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The
Contractor will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow
orderly and timely completion of all the work.
B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart typ�,
and shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA P3, or equal.
1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Within 10 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary constructiun
progress schedute. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such
that no single task has a value that exceeds 1.5% of the total Contract Amount.
Partial payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress
schedule has been approved by the Engineer.
B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the approved baseline
schedule and the Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress paymer�t
will be approved until the updated schedule is submitted and approved by the
Engineer.
C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regutar procedure only wi�h
the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may k►e
revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate
equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at
night.
D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative of his firm who shall
be responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and af
progress and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have
direct project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in
fulfilling the commitments of the Contractor's schedule.
1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK
A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent
any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materiais
and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the
Contract.
B. If the Contractor for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to
carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice
to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to
be made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the
Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The
Contractor shall light the different parts of the project as required to comply with
all applicable Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements
of the municipality in which the work is being done.
PART 2- PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. As required within the Generaf Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical
path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into
considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
B. The critical path progress schedule requirement will consist of a detailed
schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and
revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning,
scheduling, management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities
of the Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow Engineer to review
Contractor's planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to
assist Engineer in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to
allow other contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of
the Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction
schedule" and "cumulative outlay schedule."
C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor
has in writing called Enginee�'s attention to such deviations at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific
deviations, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from
responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals.
D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or
the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General
and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable
time adjustments for the nefinrork activity, or activities affected, exceed the total
float or slack time along the affected nefinrork paths, as shown in the precedence
diagram and computer printout report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice
to proceed with a change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-2 10/29/12
�
L�
•
�
L �
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
(c) detection of a subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d)
occurrence of cause for an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the
schedule, or the allocation of float time to activities by means of special logic
restraints or imposed dates, shall be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer,
Contractor, and his subcontractors and suppliers in proportion of their scope of
responsibilities. Excessive use of float time to the detriment of succeeding
activities may be cause for denying an extension of time if it can be
demonstrated that the float along the nefinrork paths affected at the instant of the
delaying condition would have been larger than the delay had it not been for the
excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation of the sharing concept
required by this Specification.
E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with
the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the
means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to
safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the
schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval
signed off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule
submittals shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that
Contractor, has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or
assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor and h�is
subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences
shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract
Documents.
2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
A. Graphic nefinrork diagrams shall be on a time-scaled precedence network format.
The graphic network diagram shall include the following format:
Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the
scope of work described.
2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to
achieve substantial completion, or any interim substantial completion,
such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of
regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication
and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as
set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to
support pre-operational and start-up testing; time required for the
relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with
the work of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner.
3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be
considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve
substantial completion, or interim substantial completion, within the
Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-3
10/29/12
1 concurred detailed schedule shall give rise only to non-prejudicial delays.
2 Attempts to impose after-the-fact logic constraints where none existed
3 previously to justify time extensions will not be permitted.
4
5 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
�
5. Graphic diagrams shall be time-scaled and sequenced by work areas.
The Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and
be shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible
and submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a
medium suitable for reproduction.
Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint:
Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity
man-days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish
date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and
total float and free float.
�
�J
2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and
restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows:
a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers. •
b. Activity, sort by department.
c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values.
d. Successor/predecessor report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
A. Submittal shall include a time-scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract
activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial
Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the
Notice to Proceed, and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date". Upon
receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and
discuss an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary
revisions resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed
schedule resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re-
submittal, if agreed to by Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the
concurrence of or at the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by
the Contractor for planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If
Contractor fails to provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be
deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated,
which will further constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-4 10/29/12
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02A abowe.
The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major areas of
work. The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for
interim dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the graphics
diagram.
C. This submittal
reports and th
requirements.
shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printaut
e narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling
D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contracto�'s
determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints
plugged into the schedule, and provide a"what-if' analysis pertaining to potential
problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require
additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten
calendar days.
3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS
A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall
submit to Engineer a Monthly Status Report (based on the Detailed Schedule)
with data as of the last day of the pay period. The monthly Status Report sh�ll
include a revised copy of the currently accepted graphic diagram, computer
printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report will be reviewed by the
Engineer. The Contractor will address the Engineer's comments in the
subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to provide acceptable
Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have provided a basis upon
which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason for refusing to
recommend progress payments.
B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram,
percentages ofi completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and
remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the
currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual
dates will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised
diagram by the Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the
time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the
corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order
shall govern.
C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a
narrative form:
1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule)
including:
a. Activities completed this reporting period;
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-5
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
b. Activities in progress this reporting period;
c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period.
2. Description of problem areas
3. Current and anticipated delays
a. Cause of the delay;
b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay;
c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on
completion dates.
�
5.
�
3.03 REVISIONS
Changes in construction sequence
Pending items and status thereof
a. Permits
b. Change Orders
c. Time extensions
d. Other
Contract completion date status
a. Ahead of schedule and number of days
b. Behind schedule and number of days
A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as
the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons
for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The
revision shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as-built
conditions. Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly
meetings. Changes to activities having adequate float shall be considered a
minor change.
B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when
required by Engineer, for one of the following reasons:
1
2.
Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in
the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path.
Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a
critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents.
C�
•
C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer •
requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-6
10/29/12
i
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
progress, Contractor shall provid
change effect(s) incorporated as
documents will be incorporated
Report.
3.04 START-UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
e an interim revised submittal for review with
directed. Approved interim revisions to the
during the first subsequent Monthly Status
A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, Contractor
shall submit a time-scaled (days after notice to proceed) graphic diagram
detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days prior to
Substantial Completion, together with a supporting narrative. Engineer shall
have 10 calendar days after receipt of the submittal to respond. Upon receipt of
Engineer's comments, Contractor shall make the necessary revisions and
submit the revised schedule within ten calendar days. If Contractor fails to
provide acceptable Start-up Schedule Submittals, he will be deemed not to have
provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reasr�n
for refusing to recommend payment.
B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The
Start-up Schedule is intended to show much greater detail than the Detailed
Schedule for start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not
limited to, the timing of vendor representatives, pre-op testing, individual
equipment start-ups, Owner's training, and performance certification testing.
C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for
those activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to Substantial
Completion, and detailed activities for the remaining 60-day period within t�e
time frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule.
D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as
outlined in Articles 3.03 and 3.04 above. In preparing these reports, Contractor
must assure that the Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in
the Start-up Schedule.
E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up
graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative. This revised
diagram shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates,
and remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the
accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that
contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of
these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with
the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity.
43
44 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
45
•46 A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation
47 and updated schedule data that any milestone and/or Contract completion date
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
will not be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work
back on schedule. Actions could include:
1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to
substantially eliminate the backlog of work;
2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work
days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any
combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the
backlog of work; and
3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment.
B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours
or any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed
Schedule shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered
justification for a Change Order or treated as an acceleration order.
END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-8
10/29/12
r�
U
�
U
•
LJ
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
+22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings,
shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter
in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Sectian
called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but
not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples f�ar
materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the
Contract Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in
other sections of these Specifications.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be
considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will
become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and
detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting
drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of
material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including
perFormance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work.
B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the
elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure
and/or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upan
field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the
shop drawings before being submitted for review.
C. See Shop Drawing Schedule requirements in Subparagraph 1.q7
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY.
1.03 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not
necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products
(sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product
specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns,
manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing-
in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring
diagrams, printed perFormance curves and operational-range diagrams,
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-1 10/29/"E 2
1 production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill
2 reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended
3 spare-parts listing storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as
4 applicable to the work.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS
A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be
considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such
as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities,
ground water control systems, forming and falsework; for underpinning; and
for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become
an integral part of the Project.
B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional
Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be
accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely
explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner
of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been
reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for
general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his
responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All
risks of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall
have no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by
the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be
delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes
as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted
unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges
on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not
be used in work until reviewed by the Engineer.
B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily
limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or
fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of
repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets,
specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work
to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing,
as applicable to the Work.
C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample,
shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of
this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-2 10/29/12
s
�
•
�
•
s
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
characteristics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to
change or modify any Contract requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable
promptness and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract
Work or in the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop
drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the
Contract Documents.
B. It is intended that all shop drawing be submitted electronically using email,
however, when electronic submittals cannot be made, the Contractor sh�ll
submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of the shop drawing, plus the number of
copies he wants returned. The Engineer will review the submittal and
electronically return to the Contractor appropriate review comments and/or
marked-up copies of the shop drawings if applicable.
C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be
furnished with the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Number and title of the drawing.
Date of drawing or revision.
Name of project building, facility or system.
Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting
drawing.
Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet
numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings.
Contractor Certification Statement.
Submittal Identification Number.
Contract Drawing Number Reference.
Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents.
D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's
standard product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or
equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements
because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall
describe such variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings
along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable,
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If
the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the
responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even
though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not
described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the
Contractor will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unfess
specifically noted and then approved as such in writing by the Engineer.
E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists
giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or
manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all
other pertinent data.
F. For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a
single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone
number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that
service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance
and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as
specified in Section 01730.
G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the
Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all
trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him
before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every
drawing or data sheet 11"x17" and targer shall bear Contractor's stamp
showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data
sheets 11 "x17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and
bear the Contractor's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully
describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers within the
package. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's
stamp will be returned to the Contractor, without review at the Engineer's
option.
B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to
submission to determine and verify the following:
Field measurements.
2. Field construction criteria.
3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data.
4. Conformance with Specifications.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-4 10/29/12
�
�
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
C�
Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. At a time decided upon at the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall
furnish the Engineer a Shop Drawing schedule fixing the respective dates for
the initial submission of shop and working drawings, the beginning of
manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment.
This schedule shall be provided as a separate submittal and indicate those
submittals that are critical to the progress schedule. The Contractor shall
prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the
related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the
individual work sections of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be
delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if
required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication,
delivery, and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be
authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit complete and
acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.
E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned,
"Confirm" or "Rejected- Resubmit". Before starting this work, all revisions
must be corrected by the Contractor. After resubmittal they will be review�d
and returned by the Engineer. If returned marked, "No Exceptions Taken" or
"Make Corrections Noted", the Contractor may begin this work. Any
corrections made to these shop drawings shall be followed without exception.
F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data
sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide not less than
twenty-one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the
Engineer receives them.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost that may result fro�n
the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of work prior �o
review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings.
H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by
subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking.
The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the
approved shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of
materials and project completion.
The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data,
working drawings and samples regarding measurements size of inembers
materials, and details
Contract Documents.
error shall be returnec
to the Engineer.
, ,
to satisfy himself that they are in conformance to the
Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in
to the subcontractors for correction before submissian
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING
DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and
contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving
the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications
or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for details and
accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades,
for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for
performing work in a safe manner.
B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. They shall
not be construed:
1. As permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
2. As relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including
details, dimensions, and materials;
3. As approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except
as otherwise provided herein.
r�
�J
C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and •
show a departure from the Contract Documents, which Engineer finds to be in
the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in
Contract Price or Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings
without noting an exception.
D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following:
"NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or
comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor
may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture.
"MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments
have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as
compared with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not
necessary prior to release for manufacturing.
"EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" or "CONFIRM" is assigned when a confirmation
of the notations and comments is required from the Contractor. The
Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however,
all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product
addressing the omissions and/or nonconforming items that were noted. Only
the items to be "confirmed" need to be resubmitted.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-6 10/29/12
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
"REJECTED - RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittai is iin
noncompliance with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and th�e
entire package resubmitted. This code generally means that the equipment or
material cannot be released for manufacture unless the Contractor takes full
responsibility for providing the submitted items in accordance with Contra�t
Documents.
"FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provid�s
information of a general nature that may or may not require a response.
E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. 4n
resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the
transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles or
other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the
Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that are not ctearly
identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
make corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not i�
accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the Engineer.
F. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to
constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give
written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to
release for manufacture.
G. The Engineer will review a submittal/resubmittal a maximum of two (2) times
after which cost of review will be borne by the Contractor. The cost of
engineering shall be equal to the Engineer's charges to the Owner under the
terms of the Engineer's agreement with the Owner. This requirement
supersedes any other requirements specified herein for compensation to the
Engineer for review of excessive shop drawing submittals.
H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance
therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written
instruction from the Engineer.
Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge
as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be
returned to the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or
mark the submitta! directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02. SHOP DRAWINGS
Final approved shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-7 10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-8 10/29/12
•
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SECTION 01385
COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope
The Contractor shall prepare color audio/video DVDs of all work areas within
20 days of the Notice to Proceed.
B. Requirements Included
16 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous col�r
17 audio/video DVD recording taken along the entire length of the Project
18 including all affected project areas, including access to the site of the work.
19 Streets, easements, rights-of way, lots or construction sites within the Project
20 must be recorded to serve as a record of pre-construction conditions. One
21 copy of DVD recordings and video log will be submitted to the Owner. The
22 Engineer will designate those areas, if any, to be omitted from or added to the
• 23 audio-visual coverage. All DVDs and written records will become property of
24 the Owner.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4Q
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
C
❑�
Scheduling
No construction shall begin prior to review and approval of the
the Project construction area(s) by the Owner. The Owne
authority to reject all or any portion of video DVD not
specifications and order that it be redone at no additiona
Contractor shall reschedule unacceptable coverage within s�
being notified. DVD recordings shall not be made more tha
Notice to Proceed.
Videographer Qualifications
DVDs covering
- will have the
conforming to
charge. The
�ven days afier
� 20 days after
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer
known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of preconstruction
color audio-video DVD documentation. The videographer, through the
Contractor, shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all equipment to be used for
the audio-video recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model number,
specifications and other pertinent information.
Additional information to be furnished by the videographer is the names and
addresses of two references that the videographer has performed color audio-
video recording on projects of a similar nature within the last 12 months.
COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-1 10/29f 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E
F
Ct�
Engineer's approval of the selected videographer is required prior to taking
first audio-video DVD.
Equipment
The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor to
perform this service. The total audio-video system shall reproduce bright,
sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion,
tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the
recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper
volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some
instances, audio-video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by
conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking.
The color video camera used in the recording shall be of Industrial Grade and
shall have EIA Standard NTSC type color - 1.OV 75 OHMS. Video output from
camera shall be capable of horizontal resolution of 350 lines at center and
utilize a minimum of 8:1 zoom with a 2/3 Newvicon tube or CCD pick-up
efement for optimum color imagery plus minimum lag through of one foot
candle. The recording shall be made with Industrial Grade recorder. The
recordings shall be high resolution, extended still frame capable, in color. The
recorded video DVDs shall be compatible for playback with any American TV
Standard DVD player.
Recorded Information, Audio
Each DVD shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by
the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress.
Accompanying the video recording of each video DVD shall be a
corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or
aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification,
differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being
shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be
free from any conversations.
Recorded Information, Video
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information
to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain
the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes
and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such
information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number,
direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt,
zoom-in and zoom-out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded
objects will be clearly viewed during video DVD playback. In addition, all other
camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video
COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-2 10/29/12
•
��
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
H
�
�
L
level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly
controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction
documentation shall be recorded in SP mode.
Viewer Orientation
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer
orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and
business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed
construction location will not be readily apparent to the video DVD viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashian
as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When
conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording
system, the vertical distance befinreen the camera lens and the ground shall
not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport Qf
the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
Lighting
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall k�e
done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when
sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording
and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects.
Speed of Travel
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be
directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features
within that construction areas zone of influence. Where applicable, the rate of
speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during recording
shall not exceed 44 feet per minute.
Video Log/Index
All video DVDs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified
by video DVD number and project title. Each video DVD shall have a log of
that video DVD's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of
coverage contained on the video DVD in terms of the names of the streets or
location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage,
video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if
reasonably available) and the date.
Area of Coverage
DVD coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of
influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such
coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks,
COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping,
culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the
existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. DVD coverage shall be limited to
one side of the site, street, easement or right-of-way at any one time.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the
pre-construction video with the Owner/Engineer and identify any work needed
to restore the site to pre-construction conditions.
END OF SECTION
COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-4 10/29/12
�
•
�
U
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01410
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing
Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction)
specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the
Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and
equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents.
1
2
Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the executiar�
of its required services.
Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor`s
obligations to perForm the Work of the Contract.
B. Contractor shall perform and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.)
required in the specifications.
1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. PerForm any duties of the Contractor.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
�
:
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to
Manufacturer's operations.
Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational
samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for
concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing
laboratory.
D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract
are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabricatian.
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E
Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the
Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide
statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the
materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in
full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship
indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing
statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obfigation of the Contractor,
and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing
and certification.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
2.
3.
4.
To provide access to work to be tested.
To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the
product to be tested.
To facilitate inspections and tests.
For storage and curing of test samples.
u
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the laboratory sufficiently in
advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory assignment •
of personnel and scheduling of tests.
When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice,
reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred
due to Contractor's failure to properly coordinate.
G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified
independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and
testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as approved by the
Engineer.
H. If the test results indicate the material or equipment complies with the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall pay for the cost of the testing laboratory. If the
tests and any subsequent retests indicate the materials and equipment fail to
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor may pay for
the laboratory costs directly to the testing firm or the total of such costs shall
be deducted from any payments due the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-2
10/29/12
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall furnish temporary separate male and female sanitary facilities
at the site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and
others performing work or furnishing services on the Project.
B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintain�d
throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the
greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at
least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 men. Contractor shall enforce the
use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site.
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public
travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private,
Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or
other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private
travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before
interfering with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be
maintained at all times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required
when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private
property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved,
to obstruct traffic at the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall
perForm the Work in accordance with the permits and easement agreements.
B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design
Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. Atl local Traffic
Regulations shall be followed.
C. In making open-cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than
one-half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the
shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing
shall be provided as necessary on shoulders.
1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to
traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed
acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs,
and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as
material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and
lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction
area.
C. Atl barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from
sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside
public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and
inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other
protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with
applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway
rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof.
D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends
and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme
weather conditions.
1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground
pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or
otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing,
driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utitity poles, guy wires, fences, and other
surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod
and shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original
condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be
made with new materials.
1.05 PARKING
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all
construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in
connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal
vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or
construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
1.06 DUST CONTROL
A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust.
Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by
application of a chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in
transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-2
10/29/12
�
u
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
�
U
B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be
adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors,
instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust
screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens.
1.07 SWEEPING
A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of
each workday.
1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary
wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction
activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or
watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other
substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures
will be taken to prevent such materials form entering any drain or watercourse.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
PART 3 — EXECUTION
(Not Used)
Not Used)
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-3
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-4
10/29/12
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 01505
MOBILIZATION
1��1��iQej��1 - •
1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE
A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of alt permits, insurance, and bonds;
moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants,
temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the
proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include,
but not be limited to, the following principal items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's
operations.
Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
Establish fire protection plan and safety program.
Secure construction water supply.
Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities.
Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and
employees' parking facilities.
Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds.
Obtain all required permits.
Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labar,
and all other required notices.
Have superintendent at the job site full time.
Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer.
If required, erect project construction sign(s).
Submit a finalized Schedule of Values of the Work acceptable to the
Owner.
14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals.
15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads.
MOBILIZATION
01505-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
16. Provide a continuous color audio-videotape recording of existing
conditions.
PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
MOBILIZATION
01505-2
10/29/12
•
�
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
SECTION 01510
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for constructio�,
remove on completion of Work.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A.
B.
C.
Comply with National Electric Code.
Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility
company requirements.
Comply with Municipal and County Health Department Regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the
required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power
and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the
construction, testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by
the Owner. All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent
power will be at Contractor expense.
B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not
adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public.
2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
�
�
Arrange with local telephone service-company to provide direct line telephone
service at the construction site for the use by personnel and employees.
Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site
superintendent(s).
2.04 TEMPORARY WATER
A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply
system a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements.
B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the
backflow preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during
construction.
2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations.
B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities.
3.02 REMOVAL
�
:
Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
longer required as �fetermined by the Engineer.
Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of
temporary facilities.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-2
10/29/12
C�
•
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
Material and equipment incorporated into the Work:
A.
B.
C.
�
Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved
in writing by the Engineer.
Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and
shop practices.
Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges,
to be interchangeable.
Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same
manufacturer.
Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall
be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is
designed or is specified.
1.02 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the
inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the
work without prior review of the Engineer.
B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment
shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to
beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit
samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demon-
strate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be
furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for
and pay for the tests.
C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit
consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation in
the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples
or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the Owner or
the Engineer.
D. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the
approved samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for
review.
1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such
instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the
Engineer.
1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during
installation and until completion.
B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord
with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with
manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further
instructions.
2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any
preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or
exempted by Contract Documents.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedufes,
coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original
containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
�
•
2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that •
Products are properly protected and undamaged.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-2
10/29/12
•
�
U
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handie Products by methods to prevent
soiling or damage to Products or packaging.
1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather-protected storage structure
providing a clean, dry, non-corrosive environment for all mechanical
equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation
equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project.
Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for
storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of
heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor shall
furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer
prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or
deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the
project. Equipment and materials not property stored will not be included in a
payment estimate.
B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
1
2.
Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight
enclosures.
Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by
manufacturer's instructions.
3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids,
prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to
deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate
ventilation to avoid condensation.
4. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces
to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled
and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to
prevent warping, finristing, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury,
theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment.
D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and
shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel, and
reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent
accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of
standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall be
handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry
products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage,
chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum.
E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as
to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from
the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the
damaged material or its removal.
F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make
periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained
under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.
G. Protection After Installation:
1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products
from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations.
Remove covering when no longer needed.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies
sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the
work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material,
equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final
inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without
additional cost to the Owner.
Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of
equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice
to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies
noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated
with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be
comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical,
engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary
corrections.
1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Contractor's Options:
1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product
meeting that standard.
2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers,
submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which
complies with the specifications.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-4
10/29/12
�
•
•
•
•
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3. For products specified by naming one or more products or
manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor shall submit a request as for
substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named.
B. Substitutions:
C�?
1.
2.
3.
After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider
written requests from Contractor for substitution of products.
Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete
data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that
specified.
Changes required in other elements of the work because of tN�e
substitution.
Effect on the construction schedule.
Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product
specified.
Any required license fees or royalties.
Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement
materials.
The Engineer will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed
substitution.
Contractor's Representation:
1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractar:
a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is
equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution
as for the product specified.
c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into
the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to
make the Work complete in all respects.
d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibiluty,
which may subsequently become apparent.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools
(including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal
adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their
use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and
instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty
period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's for one (1) year after the date
of Substantial Completion and acceptance.
1.09 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent
sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare
parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the
equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier,
and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item
shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost.
1.10 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL
A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished
with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's
supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type
recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and
intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the
equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of
operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END SECTION
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-6
10/29/12
•
�
U
�
.
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
SECTION 01625
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the
Contractor shall perform start-up testing services as specified herein.
B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all
structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing
systems. All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were
ready for use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall
provide a written startup plan, for approval by the Engineer, for individual
facilities and systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordanre
with the construction phasing plan described in the Contractor's Schedule
described in Section 01310.
C.
7
All equipment will be tested, approved, and accepted by the Engineer prior to
placement of the new facilities into operation.
All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and
tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of
equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory
certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these
Specifications. Such representatives shall assist the Engineer by instructing
the operating personnel of the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the
equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for producing the
most efficient results. These services shall be made during the initial
operation of the completed facilities and be in addition to services necessary
during erection or to correct defective materials or workmanship during the
guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and
qualified to provide installation services, adjustment, start-up, and testing work
and shall not be sales representatives only. The cost of such representation,
including subsistence and travel, shall be provided by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
i' � ' ��:ix�i�jl[�P►1
3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
A. General Requirements:
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
�3
Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate
satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and
performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the
Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion.
2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least
thirty (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details
of all test procedures to the Engineer for review, comment, and
approval. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with Specification Section 01340. This notification shall be
shown on the Progress Schedule.
3. All perFormance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten
(10) working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests
and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of
Monday through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the
Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of
equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor
make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the
time when the Owner takes over the operation thereof.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all
necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to
facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start-
up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner.
Preparation for Systems Start-Up:
All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that
each component is in good working order and properly installed and
connected. All systems shall be purged as reguired. All sumps, tanks,
basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically
checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once
the water testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and
flushed shall be drained clean.
2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full
operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for
proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be
made and confirmed by the specific factory authorized service
representative.
3. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to
complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-2 10/29/12
�
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and/or system
operation.
4. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is
in good working order.
5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved
equipment Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished
as specified.
6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified
technician for that particular component has confirmed that all
lubricants, electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systenns
have been provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
7. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Contractor has
submitted and the Engineer has approved the manufacture�'s
Certificate of Proper Installation.
3.02 PRESSURE TESTS
A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All
tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the
presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent.
B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the
applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard f�or
Insfallation of Cast Iron/Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C-600, Concrete
Pressure Pipe, AVWVA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AVW1/A C-605, except as
herein modified.
C. The Contractor shall submit his ptan for pressure testing to the Engineer for
review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall
remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after
completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the
Contractor.
D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and
leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will
be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall
be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor
shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in
order that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are
valves on the water supply system to be operated without the prior
authorization of the Engineer.
E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5
times the pipeline design pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The
duration of each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours.
F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges,
compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required
for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional
cost to the Owner.
G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow-offs and joints shall be
carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage
shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and
accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor
with new components at no additional cost to the Owner.
H
J
The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall
open up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks.
All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed by
the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to
meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test
requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at
the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner.
The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than
the allowable leakage as determined by the formula below:
L = S�(P)o.5
133, 200
37 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length
38 of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P"
39 is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square
40 inch, gauge.
41
42
43
44
45
46
K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized
agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for
performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants,
fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes
shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-4 10/29/12
i
�
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance
notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests.
3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES
A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and
cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed
and approved. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable
requirements of A1NWA C651 and as described hereinafter.
B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipe4ines installed under this
Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AVWWA
Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written
authorization from the Engineer.
1. Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas-water mixture shall be applied by
means of a solution-feed chlorination device. The device must provide
a means to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder.
2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent
calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be
prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line.
C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of
the pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the
newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine-bearirig
water into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the
valve controlling the flow into the pipeline extension.
D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be
controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the
application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in
the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water.
E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after
which the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg/I. Should the
initial procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorinatian
procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the
Contractor's expense.
F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and
provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated
location as directed by the Engineer.
G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the
line, at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-5 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
testing, is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution
system.
H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping
systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines.
At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the
presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer.
After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall
be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to
the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If
repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the
disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of
contamination. Final approval of the bacterial samples shall be received prior
to placing the system into operation.
The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water
pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the
work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance.
3.04 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER PIPELINES
�
A. All gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of •
the work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any interFerence
with the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer 72 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer
shall witness such tests.
B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing,
and tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the
observation of the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring
devices shall be new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
furnish all other labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel,
meters and gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for
making leakage tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing,
and removing testing equipment and placing in service.
C. Air Leakage Test
Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter
and smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on
pre-wetted pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with
clear water and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe
walls are pre-wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24
hours after filling the sewer section to be tested.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-6
10/29/12
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
•
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air
pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this
pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system
reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an
approved rotometer.
3. The maximum rate of air loss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of
interior pipe surFace and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm
when the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When
the groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level
adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air loss shall be reduced
6 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert.
4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving,
gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. �ir
testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to
prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig.
D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage
or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have
been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's
authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the
installed materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test
in accordance with ASTM C1244-93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage,
it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to
the Owner.
E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount,
defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located
and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot
be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the
original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results.
3.05 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Contractor Responsibilities
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer ten (10) days notice in writing
of his intent to perform systems start-up.
2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment,
monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test
equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc.,
as directed by the Engineer.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-7
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the
work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any
temporary utilities or construction aids required.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other
separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that
any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in
proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Start-Up Tests
Start-Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the
following:
a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing,
manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in
accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested.
b. The Contractor
manner, taking
high points.
shall fill the pipes with water, in an approved
care to allow the gradual release of air from all
c. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall
demonstrate the operation of all equipment and facilities
including all instrumentation and controls and all manual and
automatic control systems. The Contractor shall be responsible
for calibrating and verifying the accuracy of all new instruments.
The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all
auto-shutdown features and standby power systems or devices.
d. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects
of the Control System, PLC's, OperatQr Interface Terminals, and
all hardware and software furnished. If applicable, the
Contractor shall also demonstrate the full integration of the
SCADA System with the Owner's existing network. The
Contractor shall make modifications to the existing HMI screens
as required or as directed by the Engineer for a fully functional
system.
e. Following the successful completion of these tests, the
Contractor shall demonstrate automatic controlled operation of
the equipment and facilities over a period of not less than 72
hours of continuous successful operation.
•
•
The Contractor shall also be responsible for perForming all tests
outside of those previously described as may be required by the •
manufacturers for all equipment, pumps and control valves.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-8 10/29/12
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
•
U
g. Data records shall
shall be submitted
test period.
be kept by the Contractor. This informatian
to the Engineer for review at the end of the
2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory perFormance an
the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary
alterations, adjustments, repairs and replacements. When the facility is
again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall
be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary
until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, for the specified test duration.
END OF SECTION
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-9
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLA
NK •
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-10
10/29/12
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01640
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance and control of installation.
B. References.
C. Field samples.
D. Mock-up.
E. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
F. Manufacturers' field services and reports.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and
Certificates.
C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except
when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate
higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified
quality.
F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1.04 REFERENCES
�
�c?
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids.
Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,
request clarification for Engineer before proceeding.
C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered
from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any
reference document.
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A.
B.
C.
Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections
for review.
Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear
area after field sample has been accepted by Engineer.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
B.
C.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section.
Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage
devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
after mock-up has been accepted by Engineer.
1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
�
�
Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to
perform inspection and testing.
The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services
specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer.
C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in
duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating
compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix,
equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-2 10/29/12
.
•
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
�22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
•
1
2
Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected tirne
for operations requiring services.
Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional
samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements
shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the
Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by
deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Price.
1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required
observations. Observer shall be subject to approval of Engineer and Owner.
B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product
suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,
start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable,
and to initiate instructions when necessary.
C
�❑
Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'
written instructions.
Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for revieuv.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
C��I!Z�1�►���L�P►1
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-3
10/29/12
•
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-4
10/29/12
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 01670
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission,
processing and handling of requests for substitution and product
options. See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any
substitution or option shall be in accord with provisions of Contract
Documents, and completely coordinated with work of other trades.
2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General
Conditions for additional information.
B. Procedure:
1. For equipment and materials that are to be listed in the proposaf,
observe procedures outlined in the General Conditions.
2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or
specifications for which a request for substitution is made, obsen►e
procedures outlined in these specifications.
C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and
samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and
transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or
Engineer.
1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL:
A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in
specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and/�ar
manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from
consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other
trade names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names, capable of
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C
accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material specifically
indicated.
Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner
and Engineer.
D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not
specifical{y indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed
upon by Owner.
E. Conditional bids will not be accepted.
1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION:
A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will
consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other
items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after
the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as
specified below.
:
C
Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items
unless specifically approved otherwise.
Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request:
1. Name of product located by Drawing Number or Specification Number.,
followed by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which
request for substitution is initiated.
2.
3.
Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
For Products:
a.
b.
c.
Product identification by schedule or tag no., including
manufacturer's name.
Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model,
type, size, and options to be considered:
1) Product Description
2) PerFormance and test data
3) Reference standards
4) Difference in power demand
5) Dimensional differences for specified unit
r�
��
C�
Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right •
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-2
10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
�❑
�
5.
6.
7.
8.
Cl
to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for
comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of
samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible
for loss of or damage to samples.
Name and address of similar projects where product was used,
date of installation, and field performance data on installation.
For construction methods:
a.
b.
Detailed description of proposed method.
Drawings illustrating methods.
Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method
specified.
Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product
or method specified.
Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in
contract time or amount.
In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item,
Supplier/Manufacturer represents:
1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has
determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified,
and that it will perform function for which it is intended.
�
Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or
method specified.
Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include
but not be limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Building and structure modifications as necessary;
Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change;
Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation
changes, and
All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2Q
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
E
0
to permit incorporation of substitution into project.
Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which
subsequently become apparent.
Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative
consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received.
F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract
price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order
will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an
alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order
shall be issued.
G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons:
1
2
3
Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or
building spaces.
If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or
will not adequately perform function for which intended.
r�
u
If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this •
specification section.
1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY
A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy,
discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are
reasons for substitution after Contract award.
B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes
apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution
sufficiently in advance to avoid delays.
C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-4
10/29/12
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
�
:
Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications
for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.
Electronic Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals
1. The Contractor shall furnish final approved Shop Drawings and
Operations and Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf' format for all
equipment furnished under all Specification Sections.
2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and
Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and sectit�n
number, and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media (CDROM).
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Contractor considers the Work is substantially complete, he shall submit
to the Engineer:
.
C
1
2
A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is
substantially complete.
A list of items to be completed or corrected.
Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make
an inspection to determine the status of completion.
Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete:
1
2.
3
The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the
reasons therefore.
Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a
second written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer.
The Engineer will re-inspect the Work.
When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will:
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-1
10/29/'i 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
- 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
•
1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial
Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
before final payment.
2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in
General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work
substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the
Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a
revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected.
1.03 FINAL INSPECTION
A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written
certification that:
:3
C.
�
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Contract Documents have been reviewed.
Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the •
Owner's representative and are operational.
Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with
reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification.
Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:
1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the
incomplete or defective work.
2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated
deficiencies, and send a second written certification to the Engineer that
the Work is complete.
3. The Engineer will re-inspect the Work.
When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract
Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals.
1.04 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-2
10/29/12
•
��
�
U
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the
warranty period for equipment, the Owner may accept Partial SubstantMal
Completion of process systems. Partial Substantial Completion shatl be
allowed for a complete process system only, or combination of process
systems working together, and the Owner shall only consider for Partial
Substantial Completion those systems as specified herein.
B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner
accepting partial substantial completion of a system. Owner shall accept
stand-alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantNal
acceptance.
1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial
start-up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up
and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11.
2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the
operation of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications
outlined in Division 11.
3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner
as required by Section 01730.
4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety
interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must
be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16.
5. All Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the
system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined
in Divisions 13 and 16.
6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each
system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in
compliance with Division 01.
7. Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare
parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests.
1.05 RE-INSPECTION FEES
A. Should the Engineer perform re-inspections, due to failure of the Work to
comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor:
1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services.
2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final
payment to the Contractor.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER
A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.
B. Project Record Documents.
C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel.
D. Warranties and Bonds.
E. Keys and Keying Schedule.
F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens.
H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
I. Contractor's Final Affidavit.
J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers.
K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company.
L. Contractor's Guarantee.
1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:
1. The original Contract Sum.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Unit Prices.
c. Deductions for uncorrected Work.
d. Penalties and Bonuses.
e. Deductions for liquidated damages.
f. Deductions for re-inspection payments.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-4 10/29/12
�
U
•
•
i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
•
C
g. Other adjustments.
3. Total Contract Amount, as adjusted.
4. Payments.
5. Sum remaining due.
Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to
the Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders.
1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with
� procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-5
10/29/12
�
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-6
10/29/12
�
U
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
`22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions
6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples
7. Field Test Records
8. Construction Photographs, if provided
9. Detailed as-built construction schedule.
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart fram
documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do
not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the
Engineer.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E. As a pre-requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is to exhibit
the currently updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and
Owner.
1.03 MARKING DEVICES
A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code
designated by the Engineer.
1.04 RECORDING
A.
B.
C.
,!�
Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:
1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor
datum.
•
2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes •
to piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground
utilities and appurtenances, all referenced to permanent surface
improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
Details not on original Contract Documents.
Equipment and piping relocations.
Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors,
windows, etc.
Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and
shop drawings.
Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record:
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-2
10/29/12
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
•
Q
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of eac:h
product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
Shop Drawings (after final review and approval):
1. Five (5) sets of record drawings for each piece of process equipment,
piping, electrical and instrumentation system.
1.05 SUBMITTAL
A. At contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for ttie
Owner.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date,
2. Project title and number,
3. Contractor's name and address,
4. Title and number of each Record Document, and
5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END SECTION
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-3
10/29/12
.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
•
•
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-4 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of new equipment and processes furnished and or
installed by the Contractor.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Sectir�n
and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications.
2. The information in the O&M Manual shall be specific and targeted for
the equipment and processes supplied for this project.
3. Incorporate operating and maintenance data furnished by the Owner„ if
previously defined in the scope of work.
B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to supply
and deliver to the Engineer, O&M Manuals for the work, mechanical
equipment, instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process control
equipment, and software on a facility wide, system by system, and individual
equipment basis as pertinent to the project.
C. Five (5) draft 0&M Manuals for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to
the Engineer upon delivery of the equipment. The draft O&M Manuals will
include the manufacturer's test results and specification and may be used as a
training aid.
D. Furnish the Owner five (5) approved complete hardcopy sets of operation and
maintenance data and finro (2) approved complete set of operation and
maintenance data in electronic "pdf' format on a CD as specified herein for the
project.
1. Any modifications required after finaf O&M submission shall be made to
the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or
additional information included and clearly identified.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
products.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-1
1 Q/29l12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
•
2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate
essential data.
4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings.
1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Format:
1. Size: 8-1 /2 inches x 11-inches.
2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages.
3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
4. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text. •
b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11-inches x 17-inches and fold to
size of text pages and printed only on one side.
5. Provide tabbed fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of
operating equipment.
a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major
component part of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
C. Binders:
1. Commercial quality three-post binders with durable and cleanable
plastic covers.
2. Maximum post width: 2-inches. Each binder filled to not more than •
75% capacity.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-2 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into relat�d
consistent groupings.
D. Refer to Specification Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements.
1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each
volume shall be included with all volumes.
L:�
C
�
E
F
G
The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and
the responsible principal shall be included.
A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume.
A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of:
a. Manufacturer
b. Subcontractor or installer.
c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set
forth in Contract Documents.
Product Data:
1. Incfude only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clea�ly
illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
c. Owner Tag Numbers.
d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
�
Coordinate drawin s with information in Pro'ect Record Documents to •
9 1
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular
installation:
1.
2.
3.
Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure.
Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate.
Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following
information:
a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
b. Circumstances and events that may affect validity of warranties
or bonds.
1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE- •
PROTECTED, WEATHER-EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Catalog number, size, and composition.
Applicable Standards
Chemical Composition
Details of Installation or Apptication
Color and texture designations.
Information required for re-ordering special-manufactured products.
Storage instructions and shelf life information.
B. Instructions for care and maintenance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and
methods.
Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to
product.
Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-4
10/29/12
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communicatian
system, as appropriate:
1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or
instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of
the control or instrument.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
12.
13
A description of the system and its component parts.
Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for
the system, the sub-system, and the component parts.
Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parta.
Assembly drawings.
The manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
diagrams, and exploded views required for operations and
maintenance.
Manufacturer's model and serial number.
List of all special tools required to service equipment and/or systems
including where the tools are stored.
Circuit directories of panel boards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or
instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes.
An electrical schematic for each item.
14. A chart listing the controls/instruments in a loop identifying the
equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design
criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and
serial number.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
15.
16
17
18
19
20
Operating procedures.
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
d. Start-up, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions.
e. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency
instructions.
f. Special operating instructions.
g. Control settings and ranges.
Maintenance procedures.
a. Routine maintenance.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting."
c. Disassembly, repair, and re-assembly.
d. Alignment, adjustment, tolerances, and checking.
e. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities
required for each piece of equipment.
f. List of lubricants required.
g. Period between lubrications.
h. Servicing and lubrication schedule.
The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions
Abnormal and emergency operations.
a. Potential overloads.
b. Procedures for equipment breakdown.
c. Action to be taken in a power outage.
d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct.
e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards.
Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of
standard programming.
Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
21. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's
current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage,
and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
22. The final approved manual shall include the startup report for each
piece of equipment and documentation that the Owner's designated
personnel attended a formal training session as applicable for each
piece of equipment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-6
10/29/12
•
u
u
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
•
•
23. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location,
function, sheet number, model number, serial number, and actuator
type identified.
1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Refer to Specification 01820 for Training and Instruction of Owner's personnel.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used}
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-7
10/29/12
•
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
•
•
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-8 10/29/12
•
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in Section III and Section V.
B. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner.
1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts,
executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and
subcontractors.
• B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each.
C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete
information for each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone
• number.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-1 10/29/12
1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with
the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at
the time of substantial completion and/or final acceptance by the Owner,
whichever is later.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment
warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price
of more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties
for equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant
equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one-year warranty
period even though certificates of warranty may not be required.
C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide
a one-year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the
Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty
commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The finro-year
warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year
warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment.
1.04 WARRANTY START DATE
A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a"Notice of Substantial
Completion".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 — EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-2 10/29/12
•
•
�
LJ
�
SECTION 01820
TRAINING
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and/or coordinating the following work
relating to training the Owners designated personnef for this project:
A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of
the equipment and systems supplied and/or installed under this Contract.
B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished
by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment
manuals, and start-up, engineering, and training assistance.
C. Ensure that system suppliers provide qualified training instructors experienced
in the proper operation and maintenance of all applicable equipment and
• systems.
D. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field,
classroom, and hands-on training.
•
E. Furnish training videos and training manuals during the training program. The
training manual shall be a separate document from the O&M Manual.
F. Include in the Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training
manuals in addition to O&M manuals; conducting classroom instructions;
performing field, factory, and hands-on training; and coordinating and
incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities
required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as
determined by the Owner.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. TRAINING PLAN
In conjunction with submittal of draft O&M Manuals, and at least 30 days
before equipment or systems startup, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a proposed training manual and detailed training plan with specific
information as identified in PART 2 of this specification.
TRAINING
01820-1 10/29/12
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be
perFormed by personnel: -
1
�
Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment
and systems installed under this Contract.
Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the resumes and references for each instructor to
be used in the training program.
C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of
the resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve,
request additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training
program. If a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the
resume and references of another candidate within a reasonable time.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 TRAINING PLAN
A. A detailed training plan specific to the project or equipment shall be prepared
with specific information as follows:
L
C
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
Title and objectives.
Training schedule.
Prerequisite training and experience of attendees.
Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers,
operators, maintenance staf�.
Course description and outline of course content.
Duration.
Location (e.g., training center or site).
Format (e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on).
Instruction materials and equipment requirements.
Training manual.
The factory training program shall be completed before start-up of the Owner's
system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment.
The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the
approved schedule.
i
•
D. In conjunction with start-up of, the Contractor shall provide a competent and
experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for one 8-hour day to •
instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation, maintenance, and
TRAINING
01820-2 10/29/12
�
�
•
control of the equipment or systems.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the
Engineer 30 days before the first training event.
2.02 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall produce or provide video training material subject to
approval of the Owner.
B. Provide four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title,
the Owner's name, and date on a label in a clear plastic sleeve.
C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs.
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
TRAINING
01820-3
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
u
•
TRAINING
01820-4 10/29/12
• 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
48
SECTION 02062
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to remove
all existing structures, equipment, and appurtenances as noted on the Contract
Drawings, as reasonably inferred, and as required for the proper completion of
the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any equipment, piping, or
appurtenances without specific approval of the Engineer. Any equipment, piping
or appurtenances removed without proper authorization, which are necessary for
the operation of the existing plant or of the new facilities, shall be replaced to the
satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
B. All existing tubing, insulation, hangers, and supports not required to be reused
shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon removal from their
present locations. The Contractor shall remove such material from the plant site
at his own expense and it shall not be reused.
C. All existing valves, and other special line elements, greater than 3-inch diameter,
removed and not required to be reused shall remain the property of the Owner.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material to identify, clean, protect, crate,
box and store them at the plant site or remove them from the plant site.
D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 Ibs or more shall be mounted on suitable skicfs
before storing.
E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe and headers that are to
remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported or anchored
in an approved manner.
F
G
Equipment to be retained by the Owner shall be carefully removed from the
present location, cleaned, and immediately stored on-site as designated by the
Owner.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the
material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair any
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062-1 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the �
Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored shall be given to the
Owner's Representative monthly. A final typed itemized list shall be furnished to
the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of construction. The list shall include
items, method of packaging, and place of storage.
3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED
A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless designated
otherwise by the Owner.
B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant site at
the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062-2
10/29/12
•
u
�
�_�
2
3
4
SECTION 02064
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify, alter
and/or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required for the
installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances. Existing
piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary for the
performance of structural alterations in accordance with the requirements herein
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
18 PART 3 - EXECUTION
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
K��� _ ► : _
A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise remove
parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Contract
Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the work under
this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from the above work
in an approved manner. The work shall include all necessary cutting and bending
of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous metal work found
embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to be removed shall be
assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and supports, unless as otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and
other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for or
required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of making
connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel removed
shall be cut off one inch below the concrete surface. SurFace shall be finished as
specified in Division 3.
C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional new
piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed.
D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, removed,
or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the extent
approved by the Engineer.
E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures, and when making
openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and use
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-1 10/29/12
1 all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage the
2 structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to damage the
3 structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, line
4 drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
5
6 F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and
7 additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not
8 salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become the
9 property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at his own
10 place of disposal and at his own cost. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly
11 cleaned, lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged storage.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such
manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible
before any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall be
assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without delay.
H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations shall
conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as such
specifications are applicable.
J
�
r�
�J
All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to
new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the respective •
section of these Specifications covering the work. When not covered, the work
shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent directed by the Engineer.
Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as nearly
as possible the adjacent surfaces.
Non-shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling pump
bases, doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as shown.
L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the
Contractor shall cut existing pipelines/couplings in a manner to provide an
approved joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or
provide restrained or unrestrained Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required.
M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to
divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the flow
of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the Work underthis
Contract.
N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care
shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or
outside structures.
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-2 10/29/12
•
r�
�_J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
•
•
3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall verify exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc. of
existing piping and equipment prior to making the cuts or connections called out
in the Drawings. The verifications shall be performed with adequate time to
correct any potential alignment or other problems prior to the actual time of
connection.
3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure, channel,
conduit, or other structure, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of any grit or
other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful manner.
END OF SECTION
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-3 10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
.
•
•
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-4 10/29/12
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
PART 1 — GENERAL
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
SECTION 02125
SILT BARRIERS
A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing all necessary labar,
equipment, tools and materials, and in performing all operations in connectian
with the installation of a staked silt barrier, of cloth or straw bales, or a floating silt
barrier for the protection of open water, wetland systems or areas intended to
remain undisturbed by adjoining work.
B. This work shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of all
applicable sections of these specifications and in conformity with lines, grades,
notes and typical sections as shown on the drawings, as directed by the Engineer
or as directed by representatives of governmental agencies having permitting
jurisdiction over areas to be protected.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
•22
23 2.01 STAKED FABRIC SILT BARRIER
24
25 A. The sediment control fabric is to be woven polypropylene meeting the following
26 standards:
27
28 Mullen Burst Test (ASTM D-3786) 200 psi (min.)
29 Grab Elongation (ASTM D-1682) 30% (max.)
30 Slurry Flow Rate (VTM-51) 0.3 gpm/sf (min.)
31 Retention Efficiency (VTM-51) 75% (min.)
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
B. The fabric shall be provided in widths adequate to provide a barrier of a minimum
of 24 inches in height and allow for 8 inches of fabric to be buried for restraint.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 STAKED CLOTH SILT BARRIER
40 A. The sediment control fabric shall be attached per the manufacturer's
41 recommendations to the uphill or sediment producing side of the stakes. The
42 stakes shall be spaced at 6 to 10 foot intervals. A 4-inch to 6-inch trench shall be
43 dug along the fence line and backfilled with the bottom 8 inches of fabric in place.
44
45 B. The ends of each unit of fence shall be connected to adjoining fence sections
• 46 with a connector furnished by the manufacturer or by intertwining the two end
SILT BARRIERS
02125-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
posts to overlap the fabric sufficiently to prevent sediment from escaping, as
shown in the Drawings.
3.02 STAKED STRAW/SYNTHETIC BALES
A. Securely bound straw/synthetic bales may be used as a sediment barrier. The
bales shall be securely bound with finro strands of rope or wire. The bales shall
be positioned in a 4 inch trench along the plan alignment and each bale is to be
secured by driving two 2-inch x 2-inch stakes or #5 rebar through the bale and
18" to 24" into the ground. The tops of the stakes shall then be secured by a
continuous wire tie.
B. Deteriorated bales shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer.
3.03 REMOVAL
A. Upon obtaining Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall be responsible for
the complete removal of all silt barriers unless so directed by the Engineer.
Following removal, all materials shall become the property of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
SILT BARRIERS
02125-2
10/29/12
•
•
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 02140
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Work to be performed includes the furnishing of all equipment, materials and
labor necessary to remove surface or subsurface waters from excavation areas in
accordance with the requirements set forth and as shown on the Drawings or as
specified.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The dewatering of any excavation areas and the disposal of the water produced
shall be in strict accordance with the latest revision of all Laws and Regulations;
with the local, State and Federal permits for the project; and, with the Contractor's
approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
A. Prior to commencing work, the
Contractor's plans for dewatering.
with the overall construction plan.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer trie
The dewatering system shall be in conformity
B. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface �or
subsurface waters that may accumulate in the excavation. Flotation and
migration of fines shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive
and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fuNly
responsible and liable for all damages that may result from the operation and/t�r
failure of this system.
C. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable equipment
to adequately dewater the excavation so that it will be dry to a minimum depth of
12-inches below fills, pipelines or structures subgrade compaction level or over-
excavation level, whichever is lower, to facilitate effective subgrade compaction
and to provide for a stable excavation bottom, or as otherwise specified herein. A
wellpoint system, sock drain, trench drain, sump pump operation, or other
dewatering method shall be utilized to maintain the excavation in a dry conditian
for preparation of the bottom and until the fills, structures or pipes to be built
thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or
otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. No water
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
shall be allowed to contact masonry or concrete within 24 hours after being
placed.
D. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the
undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at proposed bottom of
excavation and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures and utilities. Well
or sump installations shall be constructed and operated continuously with proper
sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding ground.
Dewatering by trench pumping shall not be permitted if migration of fine grained
natural material from bottom, side walls, or bedding material may occur.
E. In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to
subsurface conditions, orwhere dewatering could damage existing structures, the
Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of wet trench construction or
procedure before commencing construction.
F. Engine-driven dewatering pumps shall be equipped with residential type mufflers.
Where practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric motor-driven
equipment shall be used in lieu of portable generators.
G. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any
structure during construction, including the installation of piezometers.
H. The Contractor shall take all precautions to preclude the accidental discharge of
fuel, oil, etc. to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality. All costs
associated with any such adverse effects shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, be required to excavate below
grade and refill with approved fill material if the Engineer determines that
adequate drainage has not been provided.
3.02 DISPOSAL
A. All product water from dewatering shall be pumped from the trench or other
excavation and shall be disposed of in strict accordance with applicable Permits.
B. Permission to use any storm sewers, or drains, for water disposal purposes shall
be obtained from the authority having jurisdiction. Any requirements and costs
for such use shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the
Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow in the
drainage facilities, and shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean as
originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be repaired or restored as
directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, at no cost to the
Owner.
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-2 10/29/12
r �
U
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
`22
23
24
u
3.03
C. Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all permits
required to discharge the product water from dewatering and shall protect
waterways from turbidity during the operation.
D. In areas where adequate disposal sites are not available, partially backfilled
trenches may be used for water disposal only when the Contractor's plan fa�r
trench disposal is approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor's plan
shall include temporary culverts, barricades and other protective measures to
prevent damage to property or injury to any person or persons.
E. No flooding of streets, roadways, driveways or private property shall be permitted.
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
A. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system is no
longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the system shall be
removed by the Contractor.
B. All sock drains shall be filled with grout when no longer needed, and abandoned
in place.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-3
10/29/12
THIS PAGE IN
TENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
u
C�
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-4 10/29/12
•
2
3
4
5
6
SECTION 02220
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 — GENERAL
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
A. The Contractor shall furnish al� labor, materials, equipment, and incidenta.ls
necessary to perform all excavation, backfill, and grading for structures required
to complete the work shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The work
shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, excavation for structures, footings,
all backfilling and fill; embankment grading for structures; disposal of waste and
surplus materials; and all related work such as sheeting; bracing and dewatering.
B. Structures and structural elements shall be installed at such places as indicated
by the drawings at the elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer.
C. Excess topsoil and fill generated during construction of the project shall be
stockpiled on site for the Contractor's use. All unused excess fill shall be
salvaged/disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
D. During the process of grading, the subgrade shall be maintained in such condition
that it will be well drained at all times. Temporary drains and drainage ditched
shall be installed by the Contractor as required to intercept or divert surface water
at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. If, during the excavation sequence, any earth material that could be used as fill is
encountered that cannot be directly placed, it shall be stockpiled for later use. No
extra payment will be made for stockpiling or double handling of material.
F. No grading is to be done in areas where there are existing utilities that may be
uncovered or damaged until such utilities have been located. Prior to relocating
lines, all service must be stopped, including closing required valves, electrical
circuits, etc. Pipeline to be abandoned must be plugged and sealed according to
these drawings and specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Soil Testing
Prior to the general placement of fill, and during such placement, the
Engineer may select areas within the limits of the fill for testing the degr�e
of compaction obtained. The Contractor shall cooperate fully in obtaining
the information desired.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Payment for testing shall be made by the Owner. If test results are
unsatisfactory, all costs involved in correcting deficiencies in compacted
materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer, shall be borne by the
Contractor. Repeated testing cost due to construction deficiencies shall
be paid by the Contractor.
B. Reference Standards (American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM, latest
edition):
1. ASTM C136 — Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.
2. ASTM D1556 (1974) — Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
ASTM D1557 — Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using 10-Ib. (4.5-kg)
Rammer and 18-in. (457-mm) Drop.
ASTM D422 — Particle Size Analysis for Soils.
ASTM D2216 — Laboratory Determination of Water Content of Soil &
Rock.
ASTM D2487 — Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
ASTM D2937 — Density of Soil in Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method.
ASTM D2972 — Density of Soil in Place by the Nuclear Method.
ASTM D4643 — Determination of Water Content of Soil & Rock by the
Microwave Oven Method
ASTM D4959 — Determination of Water Content of Soil by Direct Heating
Method
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit testing laboratory reports that indicate material for controlled fill meets the
requirements of this Section.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Lateral Support of Excavation for Structures
�
•
Furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing required to support the
sides of the excavations, to prevent any movement that could in any way diminish
the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper construction, and to
protect structures, pipe and utilities from damage due to lateral movement or •
settlement of ground. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-2 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
:
C
�
or proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports put
in at the expense of the Contractor, and compliance with such order shall not
relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of su�h
supports.
Dewatering for Structures
Furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a temporary dewatering system,
as required to lower and control the groundwater level, so that the structures may
be constructed in the dry. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, correct all
damage resulting from inadequacy of the dewatering system or from flooding or
the construction site from other causes.
Dewatering System
The dewatering system shall be adequate to drain any excavated area, to
maintain the water at such a level at least 24-inches feet below the lowest
subgrade within the structure, including utilities. The dewatering system
must maintain the lowered water table 24 hours per day, 7days per week
until the structure has been completed to the required stages.
2. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition so as to prevent
damage to the subsoil or fill during interruptions due to weather, labor
strikes, power failures or other delays. Provide and have ready for
immediate use at all times diesel or gasoline powered standby pumping
units to serve the system in case of failure of the normal pumping units.
3. Piping and boiling, or any form of uncontrolled seepage, in the bottom or
sides of the excavation shall be prevented at all times. If for any reasan
the dewatering system is found to be inadequate to meet the requirements
set forth herein, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make such
additions, changes and/or replacements as necessary to provide a
satisfactory dewatering system.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a
dewatering plan that shall be submitted to the Engineer for submission to
FDEP if specified in the Environmental Resource Permit. The plan should
be approved prior to initiating any construction activities.
Control of Groundwater Level
Maintain the groundwater level at or below subgrade of the structure ur�til
the concrete structures are up high enough to: (1) prevent floading the
structure, (2) support both bottom and top levels of walls, and (3) prevent
flotation.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2.
After the structure has been completed in its entirety, backfill as described
hereinafter.
3. Flotation shall be prevented by maintaining a positive and continuous
operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible and liable for all damages, which may result from failure of this
system.
4. Disposal of drainage water shall be in an area approved by the Engineer.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent the flow or seepage of drainage
back into the drainage area. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the
discharge of unsuitable drainage to a water supply or surface water body.
5. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomp►ished after the
dewatering system is no longer required.
• _ : ' ' �I1�1�
2.01 MATERIAL FOR CONTROLLED FILL
A. General
1. Materials for use as fill shall be as described below:
2. For each material, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's designated
representative of the source of the material at least ten (10) calendar days
prior to the date of anticipated use of such material, so that necessary
laboratory classification testing can be performed.
3. Structural fill shall be used to provide support for building foundations,
structure foundations and embankments. Common fill shall be used to as
backfill over pipes.
B. Structural Fill
1. Compacted granular fill, which will provide support for building or structure
foundations, will be referred to as "structural fill." Backfill that is placed
against the exterior side of the building walls or structures or as fill over
pipelines is referred to as "common fill."
2. Materials for compacted structural granular fill shall be gravel, sandy
gravel, or gravely sand free of organic material, loam, wood, trash, and
other objectionable material and shall be well-graded within the following
limits:
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-4 10/29/12
�
�
U
•
•
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
C
❑�
Sieve Size
6-in.
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
Common Fill
Percent Finer bv Weiqht
100
20 - 95
0-60
0-8
1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam,
wood, trash and other objectionable material that may be compressible or
that cannot be compacted properly. Common fill shall not contain stones
larger than 10-in. in any dimension, broken concrete, masonry, rubble or
other such materials. It shall have physical properties such that it can be
readily spread and compacted during filling.
2. Material falling within the above Specification, encountered during the
excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All mater�al
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for reuse shall be
spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials.
Crushed Stone
2
Crushed stone shall be used for structure bases where indicated on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer. Crushed stone shall be used for
manhole bases, as a drainage layer below structures with underdrains and
at other locations indicated on the Drawings.
Crushed stone shall be size No. 57 with gradation as noted in Table 1 of
Section 901 of Department of Transportation, Construction of Roads and
Bridges.
2.02 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
A. Unsuitable material is designated as highly organic soil ASTM D 2487 Group PT,
topsoil, roots, vegetable matter, trash and debris. All unsuitable material shall be
removed in it entirety as to provide adequate bearing capacity for proposed
structures, buildings, manholes, pipelines, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION PROCEDURES - GENERAL
A. Excavation shall be made to such widths as will give suitable room for
construction of the structures, for bracing and supporting, pumping and drainage;
and the bottom of the excavations shall be rendered firm and dry and in all
respects acceptable to the Engineer.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-5 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods that preserve the
undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soil that becomes soft, loose,
"quick," or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of
inadequate excavation, dewatering or other construction methods shall be
removed and replaced with structural fill as required by the Engineer at the
Contractor's expense.
C. Dewatering shall prevent boiling or detrimental underseepage at the base of the
excavation as specified herein. The Contractor shall install such means as
required to preserve the stability of the base of the operation.
D. Excavating equipment shall be satisfactory for carrying out the work in
accordance with the Specifications. In no case shall the earth be ploughed,
scraped or dug with machinery so near to the finished subgrade as to result in
excavation of, or disturbance of material below grade, the last of the excavated
material being removed with pick and shovel just before placing of concrete or
working mat thereon.
E. During final excavation to subgrade level, take whatever precautions are required
to prevent disturbance and remolding of the subgrade. Material that has become
softened and mixed with water shall be removed. Hand excavation of the final 3
to 6-inches shall be required to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed bottom. The
Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether the work has been accomplished
satisfactorily.
F. All structure areas shall be stripped, cleared and grubbed of all surface
vegetation and root laden top soils.
G. After stripping, the structure areas should be leveled sufficiently to permit
equipment traffic and then proof-rolled. Careful observations should be made
during proofrolling of the stripped subgrade area to identify any areas of soft
yielding soils that may require over excavation and replacement.
H. Compaction should continue until a minimum density of 95% of the maximum
modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with ASTM D-1557, is
achieved for a minimum depth of 2 feet below the subgrade surface.
3.02 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
A. Following satisfactory proof-rolling of the stripped subgrade, the structure areas
may be brought up to finished subgrade level. Structural fill shall be placed in
loose lifts not exceeding 12-inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95%
of the maximum modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with
ASTM D-1557. Density tests shall be performed in each fill lift to confirm
compaction before the next lift is placed.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-6 10/29/12
�
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B. Common fill may be used as backfill against the exterior walis of the structures,
including manholes and storm structures, or in other areas as designated by the
Engineer. Common fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12-inches and
should be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum modified Proctordry
density, as established in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Density tests shall be
performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is placed.
Common fill material in place shall be compacted with such mechanical
compaction equipment as approved by the Engineer.
C. Materials placed in fill areas shall be deposited to the lines and grades shown on
the Drawings making due allowance for settlement of the material and for the
placing of topsoil thereon.
D. The surfaces of filled areas shall be grades to smooth true lines, strictly
conforming to grades indicated on the paving and grading Drawings, and no sc�ft
spots or uncompacted areas will be allowed in the work.
E. No compacting shall be done when the material is too wet either from rain or from
excess application of water. At such times, work shall be suspended until the
previously placed and new materials have dried sufficiently to permit prop�r
compaction.
.22
23 3.04 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIAL
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
A. Unsuitable excavated materials and pavement shall become the property of the
Contractor and removed and disposed of by the Contractor off the project site.
B. Suitable excavated material may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
Specifications for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavat�d
materials so approved may be neatly stockpiled at the site, where there is an
area available that will not interfere with the operation of the plant or
inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If space limitations do not
permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be required to make
arrangements for off-site stockpiling. Transport of such material from and to the
immediate site, including any stockpiling agreements, shall be entirely at the
Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for additional payment.
C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes as
the Engineer may direct. All unsuitable material shall become the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed and disposed of by him off the project site.
3.05 GRADING
A. Grading in preparation for placing of final grade, topsoil, planting areas, paved
walks and drives, and appurtenances shall be performed at all places that are
indicated on the Drawings, to the lines, grades, and elevations shown and
otherwise as directed by the Engineer. Such work shall be performed in a
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-7 10/29/12
1 manner that the requirements for formation of slopes, lines, and grades can be
2 fo�lowed. All material encountered, of whatever nature, within the limits indicated,
3 shall be removed and disposed of as directed. During the process of grading, the
4 subgrade shall be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all
5 times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to
6 intercept or divert surface water which may affect the progress or condition of the
7 work.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
B. If, at the time of grading, it is not possible to place any material in its proper
section of the permanent structure, it shall be stockpiled for later use. No extra
payment witl be made for the stockpiling or double handling of excavated
material.
C. The Owner's and Engineer's rights are reserved to make minor adjustments or
revisions in lines or grades, if found necessary as the work progresses, due to
discrepancies on the Drawings or in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4-inches in their greatest dimensions will not
be permitted in the top 6-inches of the finished subgrade of all fills or
embankments.
r�
� J
E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred loose or
otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall •
be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and alignment shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
27 F. No grading shall be done in areas where there are existing pipe lines that may be
28 uncovered or damaged until such lines have been located and it has been
29 determined if such lines must be maintained are relocated, or where lines are to
30 be abandoned, all required valves are closed and remaining pipes are plugged.
31
32
33
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02220-8 10/29/12
r�
L_J
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
•
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 02221
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for pipelines
and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading, disposal of
surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces.
B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and
appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with pneumatic chisels along straight
lines before excavating.
C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports, and
shall remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may deem
unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry and in
all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be related closely to the
rate of installing pipe. All excavation shall be made in open trenches.
D. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of tN�e
manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant and strength
designation, as applicable. All pipe shall be laid with a 2-inch metallic ta�e,
appropriately color-coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12-inches belaw
final grade, directly above the utility for identification and ease of location. The
appropriate tape color codes are as follows:
Grey, Gravity Sewer
Green - Sanitary force main
Blue - Potable water
Lavender - Reclaimed water
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material, the
Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the material at least
ten calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material.
2. Materials shall be furnished as required from off site sources and hauled
to the site.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-9 10/29f 12
1
2
3
4
3. Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section.
B. Common Fill
5 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam,
6 wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be compressible
7 or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill shall not contain
8 stones larger than 10-in. in any dimension, broken concrete, masonry,
9 rubble, or other similar materials. It shall have physical properties such
10 that it can be readily spread and compacted during filling.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
C
n
2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during the
excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All material
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for reuse shall be
spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials.
Crushed Stone
Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer
below structures with underdrains and at other locations indicated on the
Drawings.
•
2. Crushed stone for pipe bedding shall be size No. 67 with gradation as •
defined in Table 1 of Section 901 of Florida Department of Transportation
Standard Specifications for Road & Bridge Construction.
Select Fill
Select fill shall be noncohesive, non-plastic material free of all debris,
lumps or clods. Fill material shall be clean earth fill composed of sand or
an approved mixture of clay and sand. Backfill material placed within one
foot of piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or rocks
larger than 2 inches in diameter, or 3/4-inch in diameter for PVC pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the trench
bank. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters shall be avoided as much as
possible. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling as
specified below.
44 B. Surplus excavated material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable for
45 use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled at a
46 satisfactory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required. •
47 Unsatisfactory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck, stumps
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-10 10/29/12
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
and other material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed of by the
Contractor.
C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from the
site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by the
Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been approved by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material.
D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to
the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided by the
Contractor. When required, it shall be rehandled and used in backfilling the
trench. No extra compensation will be made for rehandling material.
3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING
A. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing
required to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of ground which
could damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures. If the Engineer
is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been
provided, he may order additional supports placed at the expense of the
Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall
be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they
shall be immediately filled and rammed.
3.03 TEST PITS
A. The Contractor may be required to excavate test pits (pot hole) for the purpose of
locating underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise
location of new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired informa-
tion has been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a
satisfactory condition for travel until resurfaced as hereinafter specified.
B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and sh�ll
be done at the Contractor's expense.
C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be properly
barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the Engineer, in
accordance with State and Local laws.
3.04 DRAINAGE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform ali
incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system he proposes
for handling ground water or surface water encountered. He shall assume all
responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and equipment
employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is assured that the
proposed method will be satisfactory. The requirements for a stable subgrade
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-11 10/29l12
2
3
are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his drainage methods, if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the trench bottom is unsatisfactory.
4 B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly remove
5 and dispose of all water entering trench and excavation. The grade shall be
6 maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be constructed therein are
7 completed. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the trench,
8 pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
C. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after
being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after
placement.
D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until the
concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall prevent
flotation of the pipe by promptly placing backfill.
E. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish and
install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall furnish and
install afl pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water level
continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall be laid with open
joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of trench, and to a depth of
6-inches below the invert of underdrain.
F. The invert of underdrain shall be 12-inches below the normal subgrade. Pipe
underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the completion
of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall be limited as
conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete shall be
constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft. lengths of the underdrainage
system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after construction is completed.
All excavation below normal grade for the purpose of installing underdrains, the
crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall be considered a part of the drainage
work to be done under the pipe items. The Contractor shall continuously guard
against the loss of earth through subbase or the underdrain. Should loss of either
take place, the Contractor shall alter the stone size to provide a satisfactory
barrier or filter.
G
H.
Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor shall
furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities.
The Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer for submission to
the FDEP prior to commencement of work in accordance with the Environmental
Resource Permit.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-12 10/29/12
�
•
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches which are required for the installation of
pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures.
B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of sail,
and position of surface structures. The minimum ctear width of the trench,
sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be 1 foot
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum recommended clear
width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the pipe outside diameter plus
2 feet. If the maximum recommended trench width must be exceeded or if the
pipe is installed in a compacted embankment, then pipe embedment should be
compacted to a point of at least 2-1/2 pipe diameters from the pipe on both sidps
of the pipe or to the trench walls, whichever is less.
C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below the designated
subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no
more than slightly disturbed.
D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8-in. clearance around the bottom and
sides of the pipe being laid.
E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and uniform
support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided at each joint
to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench bottom
excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and should be compacted
as required to provide firm pipe support. When an unstable subgrade condition is
encountered that could provide inadequate pipe support, additional trench depth
should be excavated and refilled with suitable foundation material. Ledge rock,
boulders, and large stones should be removed to provide 4-inches of soil cushian
of all sides of the pipe and accessories.
33 3.06 PIPE BEDDING
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown on the
Drawings or as specified by the Engineer but shall be Type 4 minimum bedding
as defined by DIPRA. Regardless of the type of bedding used by the Contractor,
holes in the trench shall be provided to receive the pipe bell. The hole excavated
shall be sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all loads and yet provide support over
the total length of the pipe barrel.
B. Pipe shall be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal support
under the pipe. Backfill material should be worked under the sides of the pipe to
provide satisfactory haunching. All pipe bedding material should be select fill.
Sharp stones and crushed rock (larger than 3/4-in.), which could cause significant
scratching or abrasion of the pipe, should be excluded from the embedment
material. Proper compaction procedures should be exercised.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-13 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
C. Where required to provide a firm betlding for the pipe, and with the approval of
the Engineer, a crushed stone bedding shall be provided from a depth of 12"
below the pipe up to the pipe haunches.
3.07 BACKFILLING
A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined and bedded, backfilling
shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously.
B. Selected backfill material free from stones and other foreign material shall be
placed to a depth of 1-foot over the top of the pipe. Backfill shall be thoroughly
compacted by hand-tamping as placed. The remainder of the trench shall be
backfilled in loose 12-inch lifts of common or structural fill as applicable.
C. Any space remaining between the pipe and side of the trench shall be packed full
by hand shovel with selected earth, free from stones having a diameter greater
than 2-inches, and thoroughly compacted with a tamper as fast as placed up to a
level of one (1) foot above the top of the pipe.
D. The filling shall be carried up evenly on both sides with at least one person
tamping for each person shoveling material into the trench.
�
E. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as just described shall •
be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer may direct,
sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling.
f7
G
Backfill around manholes shall be selected material and thoroughly compacted.
All backfill shall be compacted, especially under and over pipes connected to the
structures.
All fill shall be placed in a dry condition.
3.08 COMPACTION
A. Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to exceed
8-inches in depth as measured before compaction. Each layer shall be
compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental compaction due to
traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward the required
minimum four (4) coverages.
B. Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12-inches and shall be compacted
to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density, as
established in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Density tests should be
performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is placed.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-14 10/29/12
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller or truck
shalt be compacted with approved hand guided mechanical compaction
equipment.
D. Backfill and compaction for manholes and drainage structures shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Section 02220.
E. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in the
condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material that is too wet
shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by harrowing if
necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to allow for proper
compaction as determined as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or
organic material shall not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be removed
from the trench and replaced with suitable fill material.
3.09 GRADING
A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, to
the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer and shall
be made in such a manner that the requirements for formation of embankmen�ts
can be followed. All unacceptable material encountered, or whatever nature
within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of as directed. During
the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained in such condition tha� it
will be well drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage
ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect the
progress or condition of the work.
B. The right is reserved to make minute adjustments or revisions in lines or grades if
found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the Drawings
of in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
C.
�7
Stones or rock fragments largerthan 4-inches in their greatest dimensions will not
be permitted in the top 6-inches of the subgrade line.
All fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and alignment
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose or
otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall
be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and alignment shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL
A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become the
property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project
site.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-15 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
Specification for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated
material so approved may by neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by
the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere with the
operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If
space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be
required to make arrangements for off-site stockpiling. Transport of such material
from and to the immediate site including any stockpiling agreements shall by
entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for additional
payment.
C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes as
the Engineer may direct.
3.11 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK
A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not
suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away to
spoil areas is to be replaced and approved surplus excavation obtained
elsewhere on the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill
material shall be made up with acceptable material from outside sources.
B. Rock may be used in fill only with the approval of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADfNG FOR PIPES
02221-16 10/29/12
•
•
u
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 02276
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work specified in this Section consists of designing, providing, maintaining
and removing temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as necessary.
B. Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, grassing, mulching,
netting, watering and reseeding on-site surfaces, spoil and borrow areas and
providing interceptor ditches at those locations that will ensure that erosion during
construction will be either etiminated or maintained within acceptable limits as
established by the Engineer, Owner and the permitting agencies.
C. Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to, silt dams, traps,
barriers and appurtenances, which ensure that sedimentation will be either
eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the Owner
and the permitting agencies.
D. The Contractor shall provide routine, daily maintenance of permanent and
temporary erosion and sediment control measures features until the project is
complete and all soil stabilized.
E. Contractor shall be required to comply with all permit conditions included as
attachments to these Contract Documents and as required by these
Specifications.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
�
:
Standard Building Code.
Environmental Resource Permit
�� '��•a�3�77�1��.�
2.01 EROSION CONTROL
n
'��
Loaming, seeding, sodding, and mulehing is specified in Section 02485.
Netting - fabricated of material acceptable to the Engineer.
2.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Bales — synthetic or clean, seed-free cereal hay type.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-1 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B.
C.
D.
E_
Netting - fabricated of material acceptable to the Engineer.
Filter stone - crushed stone conforming to Florida Department of Transportation
specifications.
Concrete block - hollow, non-load-bearing type.
Concrete - exterior grade not tess than one inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EROSION CONTROL
A. Type of erosion control barriers used shall be governed by the nature of the
construction operation, Contract Documents and all applicable permits.
B. Diversion ditches or swales may be required to prevent turbid storm water runoff
from being discharged to wetlands or other water bodies. It may be necessary to
employ a combination of barriers, ditches and other erosion/turbidity control
measures as conditions warrant.
C. Minimum procedures for grassing are:
E
3.
4
Scarify slopes to a depth of not less than 6 inches and remove large clods,
rock, stumps and roots all larger than 1/Z-inch in diameter and debris.
Sow seed within finrenty-four (24) hours after the ground is scarified with
either mechanical seed drills or rotary hand seeders.
Apply mulch loosely and to a thickness befinreen 3/4-inch and 1-1/2 inches.
Apply netting over mulched areas on all sloped surfaces.
5. Roll and water seeded areas in a manner which will encourage sprouting
of seeds and growing of grass. Reseed areas that exhibit unsatisfactory
growth. Backfill and seed eroded areas.
3.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Install and maintain silt dams, traps, barriers and appurtenances, as shown on
the Drawings and as described herein. Hay bales that deteriorate and filter stone
that is dislodged shall be replaced.
B. Existing storm water systems shall be protected at all times to prevent
sedimentation of the storm water system. Sedimentation prevention shall comply
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDlMENTATION CONTROL
02276-2 10/29/12
•
•
�
�J
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
•
C�
with or exceed "Best Management Practices" in accordance with the Southwest
Florida Water Management District.
Siltation accumulations greater than the lesser of 12 inches or one-hatf the depth
of the siltation control barrier shall be immediately removed and placed in upland
areas.
D. Where pumps are to be used to remove turbid waters from the construction area,
the water shall be treated to reduce turbidity to state water quality standards prior
to discharge to the wetlands. Treatment methods include, for example, turbid
water being pumped into grassed swales or appropriate vegetated areas (other
than upland preservation areas and wetland buffers), sediment basins, �r
confined by an appropriate enclosure such as turbidity barriers and kept�confined
until its turbidity level meets state water quality standards.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Should any temporary erosion and sediment control measures employed by the
Contractor fail to produce results, which comply with the requirements of the
State of Florida, the Contractor shall immediately take the necessary steps to
correct the deficiency at his or her own expense.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-3 10/29/'I 2
THI PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
S
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
02276-4
10/29/12
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 02444
C . _ ► � . �L�7PL ' � � el_��x•�?
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work described in this specification includes the layout, provision and
installation of all materials, labor, toots, transportation, equipment, accessories
and related items necessary for a complete installation of the chain-link fencing
and fence gates as specified herein and as shown on the construction drawings.
B. The proposed chain link fencing and gates shall not have barb wire installed.
C. Coordinate the work of this section with concrete paving work specified
elsewhere.
D. New chain link fencing and gates shall be installed at Lift Station 42 and new
chain link gates shall be installed at Lift Station 33 in as shown on the drawings
and specified herein.
L
F
Each gate at each location shall be supplied with 2 padlock style locks and finro
keys. The locks and keys shall match the City's existing lock and key system.
All gates at both locations shall be manually operated gates.
1.02 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Site Security
The Contractor shall maintain the site in a secured fashion throughout the project.
At no time shall the site be teft unsecured overnight.
B. Storage and Cleanup
All tools, materials, and equipment necessary to perform the work shall be stored
in a suitable, protected area specifically assigned. The area shall be maintained
in a clean, orderly fashion, and all precautions shall be taken against fire and
safety hazards.
At the end of each work day and at other times as specifically directed, the work
area shall be cleaned of all waste materials and debris.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
Provide layout of fences with dimensions, details, materials and finishes of all
components, accessories, and post foundations.
Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for metal
fencing, fabric, and accessories.
1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
�
Provide chain link fencing from a single source including necessary erection
accessories, fittings, and fastenings.
Perform work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. All material specified herein shall be full weight and first class in every respect.
All fittings necessary to produce a complete installation shall be included even
though not specifically called out.
1.05 REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
ASTM A 392, Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric
ASTM F 552, Definitions of Terms relating to Chain Link Fencing
ASTM F 567, Standard Practices for Installation of Chain Link Fence
ASTM F 626, Standard Specifications for Fence Fittings
E. ASTM F 668, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and other
Organic Polymer Coated Steel chain-Link Fence Fabric.
F
L
H
J
ASTM A 824, Metallic-Coated Marcelled Tension Wire for use with Chain Link
Fence Fabric
ASTM F 900, Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates
ASTM F 1043, Specification for Strength and Protective Coating Requirements
for Industrial Steel Fence Framework
ASTM F 1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F 1184, Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontaf Slide Gates
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-2 10/29/12
•
u
•
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
•
K. ASTM F 1664, Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Conforming
Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Tension Wire Used with Chain-Link Fence
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Products shall be manufactured and supplied by a qualified firm having a
minimum of five years experience manufacturing galvanized and vinyl coated
chain link fencing and shall meet the following specifications for design, size,
gauge of inetal parts and fabrication.
2.02 FINISH
A. All primary components and appurtenances of the fencing system including the
mesh fabric, rails, posts, and selvages shall be hot dipped galvanized including
cut ends, with not less than 0.4 oz. zinc per square foot of surface. All wire shall
be smooth finished with no protruding burrs or points from galvanizing process.
The hot dipped galvanized finish for all components and all surfaces including cut
ends shall be coated with Class 2b polyvinyl chloride (PVC) between 6 and 10
mils thickness. The PVC coating shall be fused and adhered onto the zinc-
coated surFace.
24 B. The PVC coating on atl components shall be green. The Contractor shall submit
25 actual samples of the coated mesh to the Engineer for approval and final color
26 selection.
27
28 2.03 CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC
29
30 A. Size: Helically wound and woven to height as indicated on Drawings, 2" diamond
31 mesh, 6 gauge, 80,000 psi steel wire.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Top and bottom selvages shall be knuckled.
2.04 FENCE POSTS AND RAILS
A. Pipe Framework: Line, corner and terminal post and top rail shall be welded or
seamless, steel pipe conforming to the latest edition of ASTM F-1083
Specification. Line posts shall be 2.5" NPS SCH 40, set 10'-0" on center
maximum. Terminal and corner terminal posts shall be 2.5" NPS SCH 40. Tap
rail shall be 1 5/8" NPS SCH 40 with 7" long outside sleeve couplings each joint.
Every fifth coupling shall have a heavy duty expansion/contraction spring. Top
rail shall pass through line post tops forming a continuous brace from end to end
of each length of fence and shall be fastened to terminal posts by heavy steel
brace bands and malleable rail end connectors.
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-3 10/29/12
:
2
3
Ali posts shall be provided with a moisture proof cap. Line post caps shail be
provided with a loop to receive a top rail.
4 2.05 GATE POSTS
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. Posts for swing gates shall be standard weight galvanized pipe confirming to
ASTM F-1083. These posts shall be sized per the manufacturers
recommendations but meet the following minimum requirements as outlined in
ASTM F900:
Pipe Weight Gate Opening Gate Opening
O.D. #/Ft. Sinqle Inclusive Double Inclusive
2.375 3.11 Up to 4'-0" Up to 8'-0"
2.875" 4.64 Over 4' to 10' Over 8' to 20'
4" 8.65 Over 10' to 18' Over 20' to 36'
B. All posts shall be supplied with a moisture-proof cap.
2.06 SWING GATES
A. Gate frames shall be a minimum 2-inch NPS SCH 40. The gate frames shall be
sized per the manufacturer's recommendations but meet the requirement of
ASTM F900 for swing gates. Gates shall be fabricated using welded construction
or heavy pressed steel or malleable corner fittings securely riveted. Gates shall
be properly braced and diagonally trussed to eliminate any possible sagging in
accordance with ASTM F 900 for swing gates. Hinges shall be of sufficient
strength and design to permit easy and trouble free operation. All gates shall be
equipped with a positive type latching device with padlock fitting. Coating and
finishes shall be as specified in Section 2.02.
2.07 WHEEL SUPPORTED SLIDING GATES
A. Wheel supported sliding gates designed to latch to and travel between a leaf gate
and the fence opening shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The gate
frame shall match the leaf gates in general construction and appearance. Frame
members shall be a minimum 2-inch NPS SCH 40, and sized per the
manufacturers recommendations but meet the requirement of ASTM F 1184
Type II Class 2. All frame members shall be welded to form a rigid one-piece
gate frame unit. Coating and finishes shall be as specified in Section 2.02.
B. Chain link fence fabric: Shall match fence fabric and be attached to the frame by
means of hook bolts and tension bars at all 4 sides. Fabric shall be attached
befinreen each internal upright with hook bolts spaced no more than 15 inches o.c.
as recommended by the manufacturer.
•
•
C. Trussing: Each bay shall be cross-trussed by means of'/4—inch galvanized cable, •
2,200 Ibs. rated breaking strength, and adjustable turnbuckles bolted to corner
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-4 10/29/12
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
gussets. Cable trussing will maintain the structural integrity of the gate while
allowing for expansion and contraction of aluminum during various conditions.
D. Wheel Carrier: A double wheel carrier shall be mounted to the bottom gate rail at
the latch end of the gate. The purpose of the wheel carrier is to elevate the gate,
support the weight of the latch side of the gate, and to keep the gate in line wi�h
the latch post. The wheel carrier rolls along the ground. The wheel carrier shall
be constructed of pressed or stamped galvanized steel and have two
attachments points to the bottom rail. The wheel carrier shall have two solid
rubber 6-inch diameter wheels and each wheel shall have finra sealed bearingis.
E. Rear Rollers: Two rear roller wheel assemblies shall be designed and installed to
support the post side of the gate. The purpose of the wheels is elevate the gate
above the ground and guide the gate throughout the full travel range. Each
assembly consists of a 3-inch diameter roller wheel mounted to the end gate post
gate and riding on a horizontal guide rail. The shape of the cross section of the
wheel shall be half round with a radius slightly larger then the radius of the
horizontal guide rail. The horizontal guide rail shall be a minimum of 1 5/8"
diameter, remain stationary and shall be mounted to the fence frame. The fiwo
assemblies shall be mounted on the inside of the fence frame, be parallel to each
other, and parallel to the top and bottom rail of the fence.
F
G
Hardware materials: Gate hangers, latches, brackets and guide assemblies sh�ll
be hot dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron shaped to suit gate size steel.
Latch: A positive latch device shall be provided with provisions for padlocking.
Latch shall permit operation from either side of gate.
Lock: Provide one padlock with (2) keys for each gate.
J. Gate posts: Sized per the manufacturer and at minimum be steel pipe ASTM F
1083 standard weight schedule 40; minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi. Hat-
dipped galvanized with minimum 1.8 oz/ft2 of zinc.
Post Size (Round) 4.00 in
Weight 9.11 Ib/ft
38 2.08 GATE HARDWARE
39
40 A. Hinges: Pressed steel or malleable iron to suit gate size, non-liftoff type, offset to
41 permit 180° gate opening. Provide one pair of hinges for each leaf.
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
f:�
C.
Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of
gate. Provide padlock eye as integral part of latch.
Keeper: Provide keepers for double leaf gates which automatically engages the
gate leaf and holds it in the open position until manually released.
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. Provide locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch for all
gates.
2.09 FENCE FITTINGS
A. All fittings and appurtenances shall be zinc coated pressed steel or malleable iron
with riveted or bolted fasteners. All connectors, wires and bands shall also be
zinc coated. Coating and finishes shall be as specified in Section 2.02.
2.10 TENSION/BRACE BANDS, TIE WIRES AND TENSION BARS
A. Chain link fabric shall be fastened to terminal, corner, pull, and gate posts. Install
stretcher bars at vertical edges and at top and bottom edges by 1/4" x 3/4" zinc
coated tension bars and heavy 9 gauge by 7/8" wide tension bands, with one
band for each foot of fence height.
Fabric shall be attached to line posts by 9-gauge tie wires, minimum spacing 15"
Fabric shall be tied to top rail by 9-gauge coated tiewires, minimum spacing 24".
Rail ends shall be attached to posts by heavy 9 gauge by 7/8" wide brace bands.
Coating and finishes shall be as specified in Section 2.02.
2.11 TENSION WIRE
A. All tension wire shall be 7 gauge, Type II, Class 2, steel marcelled wire with
tensile strength of 75,000 psi conforming to ASTM A-824 with finish to match the
fabric.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Miscellaneous hardware such as bolts, nuts, washers, clips, etc., shall be hot dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A90.
B. All steel materiats shall be of good commercial quality, full weight hot dipped
galvanized steel having a carbon content of not less than 0.10% and finished as
specified in Section 2.02.
C. Finish shall be smooth and relatively free of lumps, globs or points. Excessive
roughness, blisters, salammoniac spots, bruises or blecking will be a basis for
rejection.
u
r �
U
D. Concrete shall conform to requirements of ASTM C-94 using 3/4" maximum size
aggregate and having minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days.
Grout shall consist of one part Portland cement to 3 parts clean, well graded sand •
and the minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-6 10/29/12
��
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E. Chain link fence accessories: ASTM F 626, provide items required to complete
fence system. Galvanize and coat each ferrous metal item in accordance wrth
Section 2.02.
F. Post tops: Formed steel, cast malleable iron, weather tight closure cap for tubular
posts. Provide one through riveted top for each post. Provide tops to permit
passage of top rail.
G.
H
Top rail and brace rail ends: Pressed steel per ASTM F 626, for connection of rail
and brace to terminal posts.
Truss rods & tightener: Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16". Capable of
withstanding minimum tension of 2,000 Ibs.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All work required for the installation of all fencing, including the disposal of
surplus materials, shall be performed as part of the work included in this
specification.
B. The work shall consist of the construction of chain link fence and gates in
accordance with these specifications, and in close conformity with the lines and
grades shown on the plans or established by the Contractor.
C.
D.
E.
Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations.
Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established.
Install chain link fence accordance with ASTM F 567 and manufacturer's
instructions.
3.02 POSTS
A. All posts shall be set in 3,000 psi concrete to dimensions noted on the
construction drawings plumb and in alignment.
B. The concrete shall extend below finish grade as indicated on the construction
drawings. Concrete shall be troweled to a crown approximately 1" above the
surrounding grade. Concrete foundations shall be of such size and shape as
required to withstand any strain or shocks ordinarily brought to bear on the fence,
but not less than indicated on the construction drawings.
C. Posts shall be set plumb and the tops of the posts properly aligned.
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-7
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. Changes in vertical alignment more than 19 degrees or horizontal alignment more
than 9 degrees shall be considered as corners, and corner posts shall be
installed.
E.
F.
G.
3.03 RAI LS
Locations where the subject fence interfaces with an existing fence shall also be
considered as corners and corner a corner post shall be installed.
Space line posts uniformly at 10' maximum on center.
Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during
placement and finishing.
A. Top rails shall pass through the extension arms of line posts, forming a
continuous brace from end to end of each stretch of fence. Lengths of top rail
shall be joined by sleeve type couplings. Top rails shall be securely fastened to
terminal posts by pressed steel fittings.
B. Bottom Rails: Attach to line or end posts with galvanized steel boulevard clamps.
3.04 SPRING TENSION WIRE
A. Spring tension wires shall be placed six inches (6") from the bottom of the line
posts, corner posts, end posts and intermediate brace posts. The spring tension
wire shall be fastened to each line post with a No. 6 gauge galvanized steel clip.
B. The wires shall be fastened to end posts, corner posts and intermediate brace
posts with an end band and a minimum of five (5) turns around the spring tension
wire to end the installation.
C. Sufficient tension shall be applied to create a tension in the wire so that no sag is
visible. On completion of the installation, the spring tension wire shall be
attached to the fence fabric with hog rings of No. 11 gauge placed every twenty-
four inches (24").
3.05 BRACING
Q
:
Brace all end, corner, angle and gateposts. Brace line posts in both directions at
intervals not to exceed 500 feet.
Locate braces midway befinreen top rail and bottom tension wire and secure
brace to posts with suitable steel or malleable iron fittings.
.
�
U
C. Extend braces from the terminal post to the first adjacent line post, and truss back
to the base of terminal post with 3/8" diameter galvanized rod, complete with •
turnbuckle or truss tightener.
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-8
10/29/12
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
�
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. Stretcher bars: Provide one tension bar for each corner and end post. Thread
tension bar through or clamp to fabric 4" o.c. and secure to posts with metal
bands spaced 14" o.c.
3.06 FENCE FABRIC
�
�
Chain link fence shall be placed on the out side of the post.
The chain link fabric shall be placed approximately two inches (2") above the
finish grade and on a straight line between posts.
C. The fabric shall be stretched taut and securely fastened to the posts. Stretching
by motor vehicle will not be permitted. Fastening to end, gate, corner and
intermediate brace posts shall be with stretcher bars and fabric bands spaced at
one-foot intervals. The fabric shall be cut and each span attached independently
at all intermediate brace and corner posts. Fastening to post, top ring or spring
tension wire shall be with wire, metal bands or hog rings.
D. Chain link fabric shall be continuous befinreen gates. On site joint weaving shall
not be permitted.
3.07 GATES
A. The gate instaltation shall include gate frames, stretcher bars, filler fabric, latches,
stops, locking devices, padlock, hinges, gate posts with braces, tie rods,
turnbuckles, caps, guides, wheels, wheel supports, and all fittings and details for
gates and gate posts, all as specified and as shown on the plans and as required
to make a complete installation. All gates shall be carefully plumbed vertical and
horizontal. Where clamps are used for attaching hardware, they shall be made
up tight. The bottom of each gate shall clear the ground by at least 3 inches at all
points in its swing. The contractor shall modify the existing grade within the area
of swing, if necessary, to meet this requirement when directed. Direction of
opening/swing and location of gates will match the existing configuration as
indicated on the drawings, or as otherwise directed. Stops with latches, or other
approved means for holding the gate open, shall be provided for all gates and so
placed as to prevent damage to the gate or fence by over swing. Unless
otherwise instructed, stops shall be provided also to arrest the swing of a closed
gate at the centerline of the fence.
3.08 BARBED WIRE
A. Barbed wire shall not be used on this project.
END OF SECTION
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-9
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
•
�
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02444-10 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•47
48
SECTION 02485
SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES AND PARKING AREAS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
Q
Q
C
Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return all
construction areas to their original conditions or better.
Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete,
asphalt, planting, watering and maintenance until acceptance by the Owner.
Surface restoration at Lift Station 33 site shall be in strict accordance with FDEP
requirements and conditions specified in the project permitting documents.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements
It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor is obligated to deliver a
satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If necessary, the Contractor shall repeat
any or all of the work, including grading, fertilizing, watering, and seeding or
sodding at no additional cost to the Owner until a satisfactory stand is obtained.
B. Satisfactory Stand
For purposes of grassing, a satisfactory stand of grass is herein defined as a full
lawn cover over areas to be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive
and growing having no bare or ungrassed greater than one square foot in
acco'rdance with FDOT standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
�
L
Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or
installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with
Section 01300 and 01340.
Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to
determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer
SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES & PARKING AREAS
02485-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived
from organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying
with State and Federal fertilizer laws.
5 2. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on
6 laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B and approved by the
7 Engineer. For purpose of bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus
8 and 6% potash by weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain
9 no less than 3% water-insoluble nitrogen.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original
unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed
statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance
covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a
weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its
effectiveness will not be impaired.
4. Superphosphate shal{ be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as
commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than 20%
available phosphoric acid.
B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction or as approved by
the Engineer and shall be 99 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum
germination and 1 percent maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with U.S.
Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act in
effect. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or
storage shall not be acceptable.
C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall received vegetative
treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping plans.
Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover shall be
vegetated as follows:
Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine
Bahia or seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. The
blanket shall be the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North America
Gree or approved equal.
2. Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched.
D. Sodding
1. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth
and good root development, as approved. Sod installed within the City of
Clearwater shall be as required by the City of Clearwater.
SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES & PARKING AREAS
02485-2 10/29/12
•
•
�
L J
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
L
2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board Specifications,
absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other objectionable
vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind.
3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with the
final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform dimensions.
Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall correspond to
depth not less than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according to texture and
moisture content of mulch material.
F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during seeding
and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and until the work is
accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever arrangements may be necessary
to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs for his work. The
Contractor shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment, attachments and
accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted areas as may be
required.
G. Asphaltic concrete surFace shall consist of either Type SP-12.5 or Type SP-�.5
asphaltic concrete meeting the specified criteria outlined by the Florida
Department of Transportation Specifications, and Placement & Compaction
Procedures.
�
�
Base material shall consist of either limerock or shell material complying with
FDOT specifications and meeting a minimum LBR of 100.
Sidewalks and driveway replacement shall be in accordance with the C�ty
standard specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work an
lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free from soft
spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 Ibs. of 12-3-6 fertilizer per 1,000 sq. ft.
B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected against the traffic or other use by
placing warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas damaged
prior to actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the Contractor as
directed by the Engineer.
3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION
A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris and
the ground brought to an even grade as approved.
SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES & PARKING AREAS
02485-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8-inch depth.
C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square foot
and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 1000
square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross-disked into a
depth of 4-6 inches.
D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or other
foreign matter over 1-inch in diameter of dimension. The surFace shall conform
to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water-retaining depressions, the
soil friable and of uniformly fill texture.
3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
A. A one-foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except
fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement.
B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the
sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary
exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction and
planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and moisture.
C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be laid
tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and other
slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the slope.
Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a lawn roller
customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered.
D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub
areas. Top dressing with approved, clean, weed free, sand may be required at
no additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer.
3.04 PREPARATION OF PAVEMENT SUBGRADE
A. Subgrade material shall be stabilized using limerock or soil cement and be of the
same thickness (8") as the base. The subgrade shall be compacted utilizing a
heavy vibratory compactor to a minimum of 95% of the maximum modified
proctor dry density.
3.05 PREPARATION OF PAVEMENT BASE
A. The base layer shall be constructed to at least 8" thick and compacted to a
minimum of 98% of the maximum modified proctor dry density.
SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES & PARKING AREAS
02485-4 10/29/12
•
•
•
•
1 3.06 CLEANUP
2
3 A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be removed
4 promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times. Upon completion
5 of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones, and debris remaining
6 shall be removed from the construction areas.
7
8 3.07 MAINTENANCE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
•
A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the
Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer.
B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding,
cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection from
insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to ensure
normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Sodded areas shall
receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week.
C. The Contractor shall continue to maintain all grassed and restored areas until CO
days subsequent to substantial completion
3.08 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS
A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the
Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation, fertilizing, and
reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES & PARKING AREAS
02485-5 10/29/12
•
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
�
U
•
SURFACE RESTORATION, ACCESS DRIVES & PARKING AREAS
02485-6 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 02574
PAVEMENT/ROADWAY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: The Contractor shall perform all cutting, removing, protecting and
replacing of existing pavements and roadways of the various types encountered,
driveways, sidewalks, curb and combination curb and gutter and drainage
structures, piping and headwalls. All work shall be in strict accordance with
applicable Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Specifications.
B. Protection of Existing Improvements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the
protection of all pavements, sidewa►ks and other improvements. All damage to
such improvements resulting from the Contractor's operations, beyond the limits
of pavement replacement as described herein shall be repaired by the ContractQr
at no expense to the Owner.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
�
:
Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or
installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with
Section 01300 and 01340.
Submit representative samples of all materials for analysis by a private laboratory
to determine compliance with these specifications, if required by the Engineer.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials, including limerock base, bituminous prime and tack coat, concrete, asphaltic
concrete and preformed joint filter shall meet the requirements of the applicable FDOT
Specification.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 REMOVAL
A. Pavement Removal
1. Where existing pavement is to be removed, the surfacing shall be
mechanically saw cut prior to trench excavation, leaving a uniform and
straight edge, with minimum disturbance to the remaining adjacent
PAVEMENT/ROADWAY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
02574-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
surfacing. The width of cut for this phase of existing pavement removal
shall be minimal.
2. Immediately following the specified backfilling and compaction, a
temporary sand seal coat surFace shall be applied to the cut areas. This
temporary surfacing shall provide a smooth traffic surFace matching the
existing roadway and shall be maintained until final restoration. Said
surfacing shall remain for 10 days in order to assure the stability of the
backfill under normal traffic conditions. Following this period and within 15
days after application of said surfacing, the temporary surfacing shall be
removed and the existing pavement mechanically sawed, straight and
clean to the stipulated dimensions. Following the above operation, the
Contractor shall proceed immediately with final pavement replacement in
strict accordance with these requirements.
B. Concrete sidewalks, curbs, combination curb and gutter, walks, drive ribbons, or
driveways shall be removed by initially sawing the structure, with a suitable power
saw, as specified above for pavement. When a formed joint in the concrete
exists within 3 feet of the proposed saw cut and parallels the proposed saw cut,
the removal line shall be extended to the formed joint. After sawing, the material
shall be removed.
3.02 REPLACEMENT
A. General: Street or roadway pavement cut and removed in connection with trench
excavation shall be replaced or restored in accordance with FDOT requirements
for state roadways or applicable City/County standards, and as shown on the
Drawings. The Drawings indicate minimum requirements.
B. Rolled Asphalt Pavement Replacement: Replacement of existing pavement shall
be in accordance with the applicable provisions as specified herein. Asphaltic
concrete shall be Type SP-12.5. Thickness shall match the existing pavement,
but shall not be less than 1'/z-inch in thickness.
C. Rolled Asphalt Driveway Replacement: Driveway pavement that is base cut and
removed shall be replaced as specified above for street or roadway pavement,
except the new base course shall equal the existing base course in thickness,
except that in no case shall new driveway base course be less than 8 inches in
thickness. The asphaltic concrete shall be Type SP-12.5 and shall equal the
existing surface course in thickness, except that in no case shall it be less than
1'/2 inch in thickness.
D. Concrete Pavement Replacement: Rigid pavement shall be replaced in kind with
Class B concrete, using high early strength cement. The base course for rigid
pavement shall be replaced with limerock, or like kind, base material and
compacted to a thickness to match the existing base.
PAVEMENT/ROADWAY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
02574-2 10/29/12
•
•
•
�
1 E. Concrete Sidewalk, Walkway, Driveway, Driveway Ribbon And Curb
2 Replacement
3
4 1. Concrete sidewalks, walkways, driveways, driveway ribbons and curbs
5 required to be removed for the installation of facilities shall be replaced.
6 Class B concrete shall be used in all cases.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2. Replaced portions of these items shall conform to the lines, grades and
cross sections of the removed portions. Concrete sidewalks and
walkways shall be minimum 4-inch thickness; concrete driveways and
driveway ribbons shall be minimum 6-inch thickness with required
reinforcement. Replaced concrete curb and/or gutter shall joint neatly to
the remaining section.
15 3. Preformed joint fillers shall be replaced or replaced in kind and placed
16 every 30 feet in straight runs of walkways, at right angle turns and
17 wherever concrete butts into vertical surfaces, unless otherwise shown on
18 the Drawings.
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
��
�J
F. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Overlay:
The Work under this section includes asphaltic concrete surFace course
overlay paving as shown on the Drawings or where required by the
Owner. Where this paving is required it shall take the place of asphaltic
concrete pavement replacement as specified herein above. This surface
course overlay shall extend over the reconstructed base course and the
existing pavement to the limits as shown on the Drawings or where
directed by the Engineer which generally shall be full width of the roadway.
2. After the base course construction in the trench area has been completed
and primed, the surface shall be tack coated and a 1'/z inch compacted
thickness of Type SP-9.5 asphaltic concrete shall be constructed in
accordance with the requirements specified above for pavement
replacement.
G. Unsurfaced roads, streets, alleys and driveways shall be restored with compacted
base material placed in the top of the completed trench. Limerock base material,
minimum LBR of 100, shall be placed to a minimum compacted thickness of 12-
inches. The limerock base shall be compacted to 98% of Modified Proctor
(AASHTO T-180). Crushed concrete free from steel reinforcement may be used
if approved in writing by the Owner. Road surface shall be finished as noted on
the Drawings.
PAVEMENT/ROADWAY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
02574-3 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
H. Headwaiis, Drainage Structures and Piping:
1. Headwalls, drainage structures and piping to be removed for the
installation of facilities shall be replaced in strict accordance with
applicable FDOT Specifications.
2. Replaced portions of these items shall conform to the lines, grades and
cross-sections of the removed portions.
3.03 TEMPORARY RESURFACING
Prior to placing the temporary resurfacing, the foundation material underlying the
areas to receive surfacing shall be densified to the degree specified in the
Specifications.
2. The subgrade shall be uniformly and sufficiently watered to eliminate all dust, but
not to such extent as to form mud or pools of water. The street and surrounding
area shall be cleared of rubbish and debris. The street shall be swept and the
surrounding area thoroughly cleaned.
3. Limerock base material, minimum LBR of 100, shall be placed to a minimum
compacted thickness of 6 inches. The limerock base shafl be compacted to 98%
of Modified Proctor (AASHTO T-180). Crushed concrete may be used if
approved in writing by the Owner.
4. The temporary resurfacing shall then be spread over the prepared foundation
material and rolled with an 8-ton tandem roller in such a manner that after rolling
the temporary resurfacing shall present a smooth surface for traffic, shall not be
less than one inch in compacted thickness, and shall be maintained free from
bumps and depressions until permanent resurfacing is placed. The finished
surface of said temporary resurFacing shall be flush with the adjoining pavement
grade.
5. The Contractor shall stockpile enough temporary resurfacing material on the job
to ensure a ready supply at all times for necessary repairs to the temporary
resurfacing already placed.
Q
7.
The temporary resurfacing shall be left in place until permanent resurfacing is
constructed.
No separate payment will be allowed for temporary resurfacing, and all costs,
therefore shall be included in price bid.
END OF SECTION
PAVEMENT/ROADWAY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
02574-4 10/29/12
�
�
U
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 02626
TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. In order to perform portions of the Work, it will be necessary to isolate a section of
existing pipe while maintaining the downstream portion of the pipe in service. An
existing operating valve may be available to provide this isolation. Should the
valve not be found, or be found but not be operable, then the Contractor shall
furnish the temporary line stop specified herein to provide the required isolation.
B. Furnish and install temporary line stops at the location shown on the drawings.
The line stops shall remain installed while new valves are installed on the
depressurized side of the line stop. Remove the temporary line stop equipment
and plug the installation fitting after the new valve has been installed and tested.
The line stop installation fitting shall be subject to the same standards and testing
as other pipe fittings and shall provide a leak free connection to the host pipe for
the duration of the temporary operation and after the temporary equipment is
removed.
C. The line stop system shall include, but not be limited to, a compression type 316
stainless steel or ductile iron split sleeve tee with flanged connection, a gate valve
that bolts to the flanged connection, a drilling machine that bolts to the gate valve,
a stop device insertion machine that bolts to the gate valve, and the actual stop
device that is inserted into the existing piping using the insertion machine to
isolate the area of proposed work. The system shall include a permanent plug or
cap device to be installed upon removal of the line stop machine. The plug or
cap shall provide a leak free sealed connection to the gate valve.
D.. All work, materials, and incidentals necessary for the construction and testing of
the line stop system including scaffolding, excavation, excavation support
systems, shoring, dewatering, hauling, removal, and disposal of excess and
unsuitable material, test pit to locate the pipe section where the line stop sleeve
will be installed, providing and installing the sleeve on the existing pipe, suitable
backfill material, backfilling, compaction, furnishing all materials, cutting and
removal of existing pipe, testing, protection of existing surface features and
utilities, all miscellaneous materials, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals
necessary to complete the work per the requirements of the Specifications,
except as may be modified herein.
E. Line stop systems shall be as manufactured by Rangeline Tapping Services.,
TDW Services Inc., Hydra Stop, Inc., or approved equal.
TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM
02626-1 10129/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete information on the company that will install the temporary line
stop system. The Company shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the
design and installation of line stops on existing pipelines. The submittal shall
include a client list where line stops have been installed on ductile iron pipe of the
same diameter. The client list shall include the names and telephone numbers of
the client contacts.
L�
C
Contractor shall make all submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and
011340 of these Specifications.
Shop Drawings shall be required for all components of the line stop system.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality control shall be in accordance with Section 01640 of these Specifications.
1.04 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Existing utilities are as indicated on the Drawings based on the best available
information. The Contractor shall excavate test pits as required and verify the
horizontal and vertical location of the piping systems (sewage force mains) and
all existing and known conflicting utilities prior to construction. Existing utilities
and services shall be carefully investigated and protected by the Contractor.
Damage caused by the Contractor or the Contractor's work to existing utilities
shall be immediately reported to the Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor
shall be responsible for repairing the damage as directed by the Owner of the
utility.
B. The Contractor shall verify all materials of construction, pipe wall thicknesses,
roundness, and any other information needed for performing the line stopping
operation.
PART 2 — MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Line stop equipment shall be water tight with construction suitable for the internal
pressure of the RAS pumping system, and the mechanical load inflicted by the by
the wet tapping procedure. The line stop sleeve and valve shall be installed on
the force main piping and shall be rated for a maximum operating pressure of 150
psi.
2.02 SHELL CUTTER
•
•
A. The shell cutter shall be cylindrical design, with and O.D. (outside diameter) •
TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM
02626-2
10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
tolerance that will allow for the I. D. (inside diameter) of the valve. The cutting tips
will be constructed of carbide or high strength carbon steel to enable a complete
and smooth cut. The coupon section cut from the host pipe shall be removed and
submitted to the City.
2.03 PILOT BIT
A. The pilot bit shall be designed with a carbide or high strength carbon steel tip.
The pilot bit shall be constructed to ensure the retrieval of the coupon section of
pipe. The coupon section cut from the host pipe shall be removed and submitted
to the City.
2.04 TEMPORARY LINE STOP VALVE
A. The valve shall be supplied by the contractor for the duration of the line-stopping
procedure. Upon the completion of the project, the valve shall be removed by
contractor.
2.05 LINE STOP SPLIT SLEEVE, GASKET, AND FLANGE
A. The wet tapping sleeves shall be manufactured in two sections. The bottom
(back) section shall be solid and designed within an outside diameter range
specific to the pipe it is being installed on. The top (front) half shall be of full
encirclement design with a welded nozzle and flange outlet. Tapping Sleeves
shall be the high strength type having a wide body, made of a minimum material
strength of ASTM 285 Grade C, ASTM A-36 Steel, or equal that conforms to and
reinforces the pipe. The sleeve shall have a minimum 7/8" wide gasket of Nitrile
Butadiene Rubber (NBR, Buna-N) per ASTM D2000 with hydro mechanical
activated lip, captured in a recessed groove around the outlet; 3/4" corrosion
resistant alloy bolts (per ANSI 21.11 /AWWA C-111) and nuts (perA563) or equal,
and a 3/4" forged steel test outlet. Flanged outlet shall be AWWA C207 Class �,
ANSI 150 Ib. drilling, recessed for tapping valve per MSS-SP60. Minimum blind
flange thickness shall comply with AWWA C-207.
B. Finish: Line stop fittings and hardware that reaming after the temporary
equipment is removed shall be painted to match the color of the existing RAS
piping.
2.06 PLUGS
A. Completion plugs shall be manufactured from ASTM-36 grade material.
Completion plugs shall be designed with a groove for the placement of an O-Ring
that will aid in the permanent sealing of the line-stop fitting to permit the recovery
of the temporary valve used in the line-stop procedure.
TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM
02626-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A
B
C
D
Tapping the force main piping must be accomplished under pressure while the
force main pumping system is in operation.
The Contractor shall provide written notification to the City two weeks in advance
of performing the line stop procedure.
The line stop system shall be installed per the manufacturers' instructions and
recommendations.
Preparation of Main: The pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned being free of any rust,
dirt or debris.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM
02626-4
10/29/12
•
C�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 02740
POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentafs
required to design and install a porous flexible pavement system to the extent
shown on the drawings at Lift Station 33. The manufacturer of the system sh�ll
design all detaits of the system including the cell section, anchors, connectors,
tendons, and geotextile fabric underlay. The basis of design is described in
paragraph 2.01 of this specification.
B. The design and construction of the access road shall be in accordance with all
permits from State and Local regulatory agencies. It is intended that the design
of the access road porous flexible paving system shall provide for a stabilized and
permeable surface in the same locations as the existing access road.
D These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is
required, but do not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the
requirements of the application. It is, however, intended to cover furnishing, shop
testing, delivery, complete installation, field testing, of all materials, equipment
and all appurtenances for the porous flexible paving system as herein specified,
whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not.
E. The porous flexible paving system manufacturer shall design and furnish all labor,
materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide a system, complete with
accessories, hold downs, anchors and connectors, as shown on the drawings
and as specified herein.
F. The Contractor shall install the system in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations including stabilized sub-base and geotextile
fabric as shown on the Drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
-
Section 02220 Excavation and Backfill for Structures
Section 02276 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control
Section 02485 SurFace Restoration, Access Drives, and Parking Areas
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Sections 01300 and 01340 and shall
POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
02740-1 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
include at a minimum the following information.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's drawings including general laying
pattern and anchoring (site specific).
List of proposed materials with percent recycled content identified.
Certificates: Product certifications signed by the manufacturer certifying
that the system and the individual components meet the specifications.
ISO Certification of manufacturer's quality management.
15 6. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's printed installation instructions:
16 include requirements for maintaining Manufacturer's warranty.
17
18 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
19
20 A. Manufacturer's Material Certification: The system manufacturer shall provide
21 certification of compliance with all applicable testing procedures and related
22 specifications upon written request from the Engineer.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Product manufacturers shall have a minimum of 10 years experience producing
products for porous flexible pavement systems.
C. Manufacturer Quality Certification: ISO Certification certifying manufacturer's
quality management system for the proposed system is currently registered to
ISO 9001:2000 quality standards.
D. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a letter from the manufacturer that the
system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and that the system is ready for service. This letter shall be
provided before the system is accepted as being substantially complete.
E. The Contractor shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of
any changes to accommodate other systems. The Contractor shall also pay any
additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by the
Engineer.
F. Should a system that differs from these Specifications be offered and determined
to be the approved equal of that specified, such system will be acceptable only on
the basis that any revisions in the design, construction, and permitting of the
substitute system shall be made at no additionaf cost to the Owner or the
Engineer and be as approved by the Engineer.
POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
02740-2 10/29/12
�
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
�
:
C
Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers
and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
Storage: Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and aut
of direct sunlight.
Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.
1.06 LIMITED WARRANTY
A. The Contractor and the system manufacturer shall warrant the system in
accordance with Section 01740. In addition, the manufacturer shall provide for
the replacement of any unit that proves to be defective under normal use and
service during the 10-year period beginning on the date of acceptance by the
Owner.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A, The basis of design is the 6-inch perforated GEOWEB system as manufactured
by Presto Geosystems designed for periodic H20 loading and installed to the
limits shown on the Drawings. System anchors, interconnectors, and tendons
shall be as required for hold down and stability purposes under flooded
conditions. The individual cells shall be filled with #57 stone and a 2-inch layer of
#57 stoned shall be constructed on top of the system.
2.02 GEOWEB CELLULAR CONFINEMENT SYSTEM
A. Materials: Polyethylene Stabilized with Carbon Black
1. Material: Up to 97 percent recycled polyethylene.
2. Density: ASTM D 1505: 58.4 to 60.2 pounds per cubic foot.
3. Environmental Stress Crack Resistance (ESCR): ASTM D 1693: 3,000
hours.
4. Carbon Black for Ultraviolet Light Stabilization: 1.5 to 2.0 percent by
weight.
B. Perforated Textured Strip/Cell:
1. Strip Sheet Thickness, ASTM D 5199: 1.27 mm (50 mil), minus 5 percent,
plus 10 percent. Determine thickness in the flat, before surface disruption.
2. Textured Sheet Thickness: 1.52 mm plus or minus 0.15 mm (60 mil plus
or minus 6 mil).
3. Polyethylene Strips: Textured surtace with a multitude of rhomboidal
POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
02740-3
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C
U
(diamond shape) indentations and
10 mm (0.4 inch) diameter holes.
4. Indentation Surface Density: 22 to
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
perforated with horizontal rows of
31 per cm2 (140 to 200 per square
inch).
Perforations Within Each Row: 19 mm (0.75 inch) on-center.
Horizontal Rows: Staggered and separated 12 mm (0.50 inch) relative to
hole centers.
Edge of Strip to Nearest Edge of Perforation: 8 mm (0.3 inch) minimum.
Centerline of Spot Weld to Nearest Edge of Perforation: 18 mm (0.7 inch)
minimum.
A slot with a dimension of 10 mm x 35 mm (3/8 in x 1 3/8 in) is standard in
the center of the non-perforated areas and at the center of each weld.
Cel{ Section Assembly
1. Fabricate using strips of sheet polyethylene each with a length of 3.61 m
(142 inches) and a width equal to cell depth.
2. Connect strips using full-depth, ultrasonic spot-welds aligned
perpendicular to longitudinal axis of strip.
3 Weld Spacing and cell size for the cell sections shall be per the
manufacturer's recommendations for the specified loading.
4. Ultrasonic Weld Melt-Pool Width: 25 mm (1.0 inch) maximum.
5. Individual cells shall be uniform in shape and size when expanded.
Tendons, Load Transfer Pins, and Anchors
1. Material for these components shall not be constructed of ferrous metals,
galvanized metals, wood, or wood byproducts.
2. The system manufacturer shall be responsible for the design and required
placement of these components.
2.03. RELATED GEOSYNTHETIC COMPONENTS
A. The cellular confinement system shall rest on a geotextile fabric as shown on the
Drawings and specified by the system manufacturer. The geotextile fabric shall
comply with AASHTO M 288 and shall be a permeable member of the system.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade Preparation: Excavate and shape the access road area to grades,
elevations, and dimensions shown on the Drawings allowing for unit thickness
and the base depth. Compact and prepare the subgrade as shown on the
Drawings and specified in Section 02220. The intent is to obtain a finished
surface conforming to the grades, elevations and dimensions of the existing road.
POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
02740-4
10/29/12
��
•
•
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
•
B. Instali the geotextile underlayer on the prepared surface ensuring required
overlaps are maintained and the outer edges of geotextile are buried a minimu�m
of 6 inches.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Expand the system sections into position and dimensioned as indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Hold individual sections in their expanded positions with non-ferrous stretcher
frames, anchors, J-pins, tendons or other suitable devices positioned inside
selected outer cells.
C. Confirm each section is expanded uniformly to required dimensions and the outer
cells of each layer are correctly aligned. Interleaf or overlap edges of adjacent
sections as appropriate. Ensure upper surtaces of adjoining sections are flush at
joint and adjoining cells are fully anchored.
❑�
L
F
OverFill cells with #57 stone. Level the surface approximately 2 inches above the
cell walls. Maintain sufficient cover above cell walls to prevent damage.
Compact infill to a minimum of 95 percent SPDD. A two-inch cover of fill materi'al
over cells shall be required as a wear course.
Shape compacted surface to required elevation and grade as indicated on the
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
02740-5
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTION
ALLY LEFT BLANK •
POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING
02740-6
10/29/12
u
•
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
•44
45
46
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART I — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install all
concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Cast-in-place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Sections 01300 and 01340, shnp
drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of
installation for:
1. Reinforcing steel. Placement drawings shall conform to the
recommendations of ACI 315. All reinforcement in concrete placement
shall be included on a single placement drawing or cross referenced to the
pertinent main placement drawing. The main drawing shall include the
additional reinforcement (around openings, at corners, etc) shown on the
standard detail sheets. Bars to have special coatings and/or to be of
special steel or special yield strength are to be clearly identified.
2. Fiber Reinforcement. Submit product information for synthetic fibers and
amount to be used (based on weight) within selected mix design.
1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the materials herein
specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed
organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is made
to a standard of one of these or other organizations the version of the standard in
effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C.
C
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
12
A184 - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement.
A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement
A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement
A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for
Concrete Reinforcement
A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
A616 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
A617 - Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
A706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
A767 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
A884 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Fabric for Reinforcement.
13. A934 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel
Reinforcing Bars.
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. 301 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
2. 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
3. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
4. SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-2 10/29/12
•
•
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
E
1. Manual of Standard Practice
American Welding Society (AWS)
1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide services of a manufacturer's representative, with at least 2 years
experience in the use of the reinforcing fibers for a preconstruction meeting and
assistance during the first placement of the material.
1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Reinforcing steel shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, or
other foreign matter.
B. Reinforcing steel shall be shipped and stored with bars of the same size and
shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with
waterproof markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown an
the submitted Placing Drawings.
C. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground, protected from moisture and kept
free from dirt, oil, or other injurious contaminants.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G
H.
Materials shall be new, of domestic manufacture and shall comply with the
following material specifications.
Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars.
Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Field Bent or Welded:
ASTM A706.
Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets.
Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497.
Welded Plain Bar Mats: ASTM A704 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 plain bars.
Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 and ASTM A615 Grade 60
deformed bars.
The following alternate materials are allowed:
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
J
1. ASTM A615 Grade 60 may be used forASTM A706 provided the following
requirements are satisfied:
a. The actual yield strength of the reinforcing steel based on mill tests
shall not exceed the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi.
Retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3000
psi.
b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile
yield strength of the reinforcement shall not be less than 1.25.
c. The carbon equivalency (CE) of bars shall be 0.55 or less.
Reinforcing Steel Accessories
1
E
Plastic Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 1
- Maximum Protection.
Stainless Steel Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications,
Class 2 - Moderate Protection.
•
3. Precast Concrete Block Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, •
Precast Blocks. Blocks shall have equal or greater strength than the
surrounding concrete.
Tie Wire
1. Tie Wires for Reinforcement shall be 16-gauge or heavier, black annealed
wire.
K. Mechanical reinforcing steel butt splices shall be positive connecting taper
threaded type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar splices as
manufactured by Erico Products Inc., Solon, OH or equal. They shall meet all
ACI 318 Building Code requirements. Bar ends must be taper threaded with
coupler manufacturer's bar threader to ensure proper taper and thread
engagement. Bar couplers shall be torqued to manufacturer's recommended
value.
1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical tension splices shall
be designed to produce a splice strength in tension or compression of not
less than 125 percent of the ASTM specified minimum yield strength of the
rebar.
2. Compression type mechanical splices shall provide concentric bearing
from one bar to the other bar and shafl be capable of developing the •
ultimate strength of the rebar in compression.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-4 10/29/12
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
L. Fiber Reinforcement
Synthetic reinforcing fiber for concrete shall be 100 percent polypropylene
collated, fibrillated fibers as manufactured by Fibermesh Company of Synthetic
Industries Inc., Chattanooga, TN - Fibermesh or equal. Fiber length and quantity
for the concrete mix shall be in strict compliance with the manufacture�'s
recommendations as approved by the Engineer. Fiber reinforcement should be
added to the specified mix design at a minimum rate of 0.1 % by volume and shall
be coordinated with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of
Standard Practice.
Bars shall be cold bent. Bars shall not be straightened or re-bent.
Bars shall be bent around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than
that recommended by the ACI 318.
D. Bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in
metal, or threaded, shall have the applicable end(s) saw-cut. Such ends shall
terminate in flat surfaces within 1-1/2 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the
ba r.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. SurFace condition, bending, spacing and tolerances of placement of
reinforcement shall comply with the CRSI Manuaf of Standard Practice. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing an adequate number of bars
and maintaining the spacing and clearances shown on the Drawings.
B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the minimum concrete cover of
reinforcement shall be as follows:
1
2.
3.
Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 inch.
Concrete exposed to soil, water, and/or weather: 2 inch, including bottom
cover of slabs over water.
Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather:
a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells and folded plate
members 1 inch.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-5
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
b. Beams and columns (principal reinforcement, ties, spirals and
stirrups) - 1-1/2-in
C. Reinforcement which will be exposed for a considerable length of time after being
placed shall be coated with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry.
D. No reinforcing steel bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection
unless specifically shown on the Drawings or specified herein, or unless prior
written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. All bars that have been
welded, including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately
removed from the work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called for,
it shall comply with AWS D1.4.
E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits or
embedded items may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar
diameter, whichever is greater. Greater displacement of bars to avoid
interference shall only be made with the approval of the Engineer. Do not cut
reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings or other items
without the prior approval of the Engineer.
F. Securely support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete
placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete.
G. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be field bent except where shown on the
Drawings or specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. If authorized, bars
shall be cold-bent around the standard diameter spool specified in the CRSI. Do
not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. If the reinforcing
steel is damaged, replace, Cadweld or otherwise repair as directed by the
Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete.
3.02 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS
34 A. Unless specific additional reinforcement around openings is shown on the
35 Drawings, provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening
36 equivalent to one half of the cross-sectional area of the reinforcing steel
37 interrupted by an opening. The bars shall have sufficient length to develop bond
38 at each end beyond the opening or penetration.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.03 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT
Q
�
Splices designated as compression splices on the Drawings, unless otherwise
noted, shall be 30 bar diameters, but not less than 12-in. The lap splice length for
column vertical bars shall be based on the bar size in the column above.
•
•
Tension lap splices shall be provided at all laps in compliance with ACI 318. •
Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. Class A splices may be used when
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-6 10/29/12
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
50 percent or less of the bars are spliced within the required lap length. Class B
splices shall be used at all other locations.
C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, splices in circumferential
reinforcement in circular walls shall be Class B tension splices and shall be
staggered. Adjacent bars shall not be spliced within the required lap length.
D. Splicing of reinforcing steel in concrete elements noted to be "tension members"
on the Drawings shall be avoided whenever possible. However, if required for
constructability, splices in the reinforcement subject to direct tension shall be
welded to develop, in tension, at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength
of the bar. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset the distance of a Class B
splice.
E. Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Wire fabric from rolls shall be
rolled flat and firmly held in place. Splices in welded wire fabric shall be lapped in
accordance with the requirements of ACI-318 but not less than 12-in. The spliced
fabrics shall be tied together with wire ties spaced not more than 24-in on center
and laced with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire fabric. Do not
position laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams af
continuous structures. Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent continuous
splices.
F. Mechanical reinforcing steel splicers shall be used only where shown on the
Drawings. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset by at least 30 bar diameters.
Mechanical reinforcing splices are only to be used for special splice and dowel
conditions approved by the Engineer.
3.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Determine, provide and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars and the like
in sufficient quantities and strength to adequately support the reinforcement and
prevent its displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the
placement of concrete.
B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over
soil.
C. Stainless steel bar supports or steel chairs with stainless steel tips shall be used
where the chairs are set on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to
weather, high humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing
areas). Use of galvanized or plastic tipped metal chairs is permissible in all other
locations unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified herein.
D. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels
supported on the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom
and top mats, may be used if approved by the Engineer.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3.05 INSPECTION
A. In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the
installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing and position of the
reinforcement has been observed by the Engineer and the Engineer's release to
proceed with the concreting has been obtained. The Engineer shall be given
ample prior notice of the readiness of placed reinforcement for observation. The
forms shall be kept open until the Engineer has finished his/her observations of
the reinforcing steel.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-8
10/29/12
•
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
�22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor and materials required to install cast-in-place concrete complete
as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field.
2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
4. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
6. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete
7.
8.
9.
10
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C?
C
11.
12.
13.
14.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete.
ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
American Concrete Institute (ACI).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
ACI 350R - Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at
the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals and product data shall comply with sections 01300 and 01340.
B. Where conduits are to be encased within slabs or walls, the Contractor shall
submit details to the Engineer showing the number and size of conduits,
proposed spacing, slab/wall thickness and rebar. Said details shall be approved
by the Engineer prior to construction of the subject system.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318, the recommendations of ACI
350R and other stated requirements, codes and standards. The most stringent
requirement of the codes, standards and this Section shall apply when conflicts
exist.
B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one structure.
Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-2 10/29/12
�
C�
•
�
��
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C. Well in advance of placing concrete, discuss with the Engineer the sources of
individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss placement
methods, waterstops and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold weather
concreting as required.
D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the
required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer
may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be
necessary to secure the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be
made at the Contractor's expense.
E. If, during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally
accepted change in characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense,
make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes.
F. Testing of the following materials shall be furnished by Contractor to verify
conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards.
1
�
3.
��
5.
Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis, physical
properties, and deleterious substances.
Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis,
physical properties, and deleterious substances.
Cements for conformity with ASTM C150 - chemical analysis and physical
properties.
Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618 - chemical analysis and
physical properties.
Proposed concrete mix designs - compressive strength, slump, and air
content.
G. Field testing and inspection services will be provided by the Owner but
coordinated and scheduled by the Engineer. The cost of such work, except as
specifically stated otherwise, will be paid by the Owner. Testing of the following
items will be by the Owner to verify conformity with this Specification Section.
1
2
Concrete placements - compressive strength (cylinders), compressive
strength (cores), slump, and air content.
Other materials or products that may come under question.
H. All materials incorporated in the work shall conform to accepted samples.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local
requirements.
B. Cement: Domestic portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining
cements shall not be used. Cement brand shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following
cement type(s) shall be used:
1. Class A, B, C Concrete - Type II with the addition of fly ash resulting in
C3A being below 5 percent of total cementitious content, Type I I I limited to
5 percent CsA or Type V.
C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of
ASTM C33.
D. Coarse Aggregate: Well-graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to
the requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in ASTM
C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of
Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed in
ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the concrete
mixes shall be as shown in Table 1 herein.
E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
organic matter, or other deleterious substances.
F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those
attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a
concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures
shall be compatible with the concrete mix including other admixtures.
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260.
Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Water-Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494,
Type A. Proportioning and mixing sha{I be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not
be used without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the
admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water reducing or high range
water reducing admixtures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-4 10/29/12
�
•
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
r�
�J
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash). Pozzolan shall be Class C or Class F fly ash complying with
ASTM C618 except the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3 percent
maximum.
H. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white
burlap-polyethylene sheeting all complying with ASTM C171.
Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane-forming curing compound shall
comply with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1-D (clear or translucent with
fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil.
2.02 MIXES
A. Development of mix designs and testing shall be by an independent testing
laboratory acceptable to the Engineer engaged by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits
specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability, durability,
strength, appearance and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to
produce a homogenous mixture which will readily work into corners and angles of
forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or
allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface.
C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of prior mixes with
essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data is not
available, be developed by a testing laboratory, acceptable to the Engineer,
engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Acceptance of mixes based
on standard deviation shall be based on the modification factors for standard
deviation tests contained in ACI 318. The water content of the concrete mix,
determined by laboratory testing, shall be based on a curve showing the relation
befinreen water cementitious ratio and 7 and 28 day compressive strengths of
concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves shall be determined by
four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three test
specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient to
yield the desired data, including the specified design strengths as modified below,
without extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as
determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16 percent greaterthan
the specified design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the
limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum
cementitious content as specified in Table 1.
D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to
demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in
conformity with the above paragraph.
E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-5
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F
G
- in he mix re uires testin •
1. If the air entraining agent proposed for use t q g
methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make
special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal.
Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143, shall be as shown in Table
1. If a high-range water-reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall be
that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a
slump ranging from 7 to 10-in.
Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or
more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the
admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on
the concrete or on the properties of each other.
TABLE 1
CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS
Design Fine Coarse Cementitious
Class Strength Cement Aggregate Aggregate Content
i�) c2) c2) c3) c4)
A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min.
0
C�?
3000 C150 Type II C33
4000 C150 Type II C33
W/C AE
Class Ratio Fly Ash Range WR HRWR
�5) �6) �7) �$)
A 0.62 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes No
B 0.54 max. 25% 3.5 to 5 Yes No
C 0.44 max. 25% 3.5 to 5 Yes No
NOTES:
(1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days
(2) ASTM designation
(3) Size Number in ASTM C33
(4) Cementitious content in Ibs/cu yd
(5) W/C is Water-Cementitious ratio by weight
(6) AE is percent air-entrainment
(7) WR is water-reducer admixture
(8) HRWR is high-range water-reducer admixture
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-6
57 480 min. •
57 560 min.
Slump
Range
Inches
1-4
1-3
3-5
10/29/12
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS
A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate, water and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant
acceptable to the Engineer. All constituents, including admixtures, shall be
batched at the plant.
B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and
within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales
shall have been certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures within 1
year of use.
C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3 percent with a
moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates.
Record the number of gallons of water as-batched on printed batching tickets.
D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or
measuring tanks, or by means of an automatic dispenser approved by the
manufacturer of the specific admixture.
Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution
using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device.
2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence.
3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING
A. Concrete shall be ready-mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to
the Engineer. No hand-mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck
drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching
plant. Equip each transit-mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution
counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds.
B. Ready-mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer
trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate.
C. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. No water may
be added onsite without prior approval of the Engineer. Added water shall be
incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. All added water shall
be metered and the amount of water added shall be shown on each delivery
ticket.
D. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI
318 and ASTM C94.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-7
10/29/'� 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
E. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the
delivery end. Metal or metal-lined non-aluminum discharge chutes shall be used
and shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1
vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20-ft long and chutes not meeting
slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before
distribution.
F. Re-tempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of
concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted.
11 G. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while
12 providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks
13 from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is
14 required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in
15 placing successive tayers of concrete in the forms.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
H. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck
arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and
each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for
zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the
weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in each batch, the
quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of
the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck.
Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck mixer.
Temperature and Mixing Time Control
In cold weather, do not allow the as-mixed temperature of the concrete
and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop
below 40 degrees F.
2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in
the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of
water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than
90 degrees F.
3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of
the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 90 degrees F. If
necessary, substitute well-crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water.
4. The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and/or
cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not
exceed the values shown in the following Table 2:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-8
10/29/12
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
� 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
TABLE 2
MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE
Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is hiqher) Maximum Time
80 to 90 Degree F(27 to 32 Degree C) .........................................45 minutes
70 to 79 Degree F(21 to 26 Degree C) .........................................60 minutes
40 to 69 Degree F(5 to 20 Degree C) ...........................................90 minutes
If an approved high-range water-reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized
concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes.
3.03 CONCRETE APPEARANCE
A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse
aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition, tk�e
concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit, but excessive
bleeding, poor workability, or poor finish-ability are observed, changes in the
concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of the following:
1.
2
�3
The gradation of aggregate.
The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate.
The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits.
B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when
hardened, will have the required strength, durability and appearance. Mixtures
and workmanship shall be such that concrete surFaces, when exposed, will
require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when
viewed in good lighting from 10-ft away, shall be pleasing in appearance, and at
20-ft shall show no visible defects.
3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTING
A. Placing
1. Verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is
securely braced prior to concrete placement. Remove ice, excess water,
dirt and other foreign materials from forms. Confirm that reinforcement
and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a competent
workman at the location of the placement who can assure that reinforcing
steel and embedded items remain in designated locations while concrete
is being placed. Sprinkle semi-porous subgrades or forms to eliminate
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-9
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely porous subgrades in an
approved manner.
2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation
due to re-handling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate which
ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do
not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been
contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete which has hardened
sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the
section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction
joints as specified or as approved.
3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate
sizes suitable for pumping and submit for approvat.
4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer
useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only
when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approvaf has been
obtained.
5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously
placed in the supporting element (columns, slabs and/or walls) has
reached adequate strength.
6. Where surFace mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces
designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a
suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form.
Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids.
7. Slabs
a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds and jointing materials have been
positioned, the concrete shall be placed continuously befinreen
construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edge form, or corner.
Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the previously placed
concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation.
b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete
placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated
at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete
shall then be brought to correct level and struck off with a
straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to smooth the
surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows.
.
��
U
c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them,
place the walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to pass •
between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-10
10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
Q
consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the wall
moist so as to prevent cold joints.
8. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent
segregation. Bottom of tremie tubes shall preferably be in contactwith the
concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than
4-ft. Place concrete for walls in 12 to 24-in lifts, keeping the surface
horizontal. If plasticized concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may
be increased to 7-ft and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not
exceed 15-ft.
9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the
recommendations of ACI 304R. The tremie system shall be used to place
underwater concrete. Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to 12-in in
diameter and be spaced at not more than 16-ft on centers nor more than
8-ft from an end form. Where concrete is being placed around a pipe,
there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of each pipe. Where
the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped concrete for underwater
placement may be used subject to approval of the system including details
by the Engineer.
Compacting
Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding orforking so
that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items
and openings and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc, shall be
continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to eliminate
air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting or planes of
weakness.
2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators.
The number, type and size of the units will be approved by the Engineer in
advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until
sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order) are
on the job.
3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators.
Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30-in apart. At each
insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to
15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare
vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations.
4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8-in thick shall be
consolidated with vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12-in thick shall be
compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds.
Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and shall not be
laid horizontally or laid over.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-11
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall be
used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each
vibrator needed to melt down the batch at the point of discharge, one or
more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize and
perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at regular
intervals, through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if
any.
6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly
placed concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in the
forms. Vibration shall continue until:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Frequency returns to normal.
Surface appears liquefied, flattened and glistening.
Trapped air ceases to rise.
Coarse aggregate has blended into surface, but has not
disappeared.
3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION
�
L
Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of
any nature during construction operations.
Curing Methods
Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture
and maintain specified temperature at the surface for a minimum of 7 days
after placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows:
a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding,
continuous sprinkling or covered with saturated burlap. Begin wet
cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet cure
24 hours a day.
b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material.
Securely anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the
sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet
as soon as initial concrete set occurs.
•
•
c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface
except for surfaces to receive additional concrete. Curing compound
shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where additional •
concrete is to be placed, where concrete sealers or surface coatings
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-12 10/29/12
•
C�
i 1
�_J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C
C�7
2.
are to be used, or where the concrete finish requires an integral floor
product. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the free
water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible,
but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be
absorbed into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
Specified applications of curing methods.
a.
b.
c.
Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only.
Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water
curing, sheet material curing or liquid membrane curing.
Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or
liquid membrane curing.
d. Horizontal Surfaces which will Receive Additional Concrete,
Coatings, Grout or Other Material that Requires Bond to the
substrate: Water curing.
e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7
days. Water cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or liquid
membrane cured if forms are removed prior to 7 days. Exposed
horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be water cured
for 7 days or until next placement of concrete is made.
f. Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured.
Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun to
prevent checking and crazing.
Cold Weather Concreting:
1. "Cold weather" is defined as a period when for more than 3 successive
days, the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 degrees F.
The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the
highest and the lowest temperature during the period from midnight to
midnight.
2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional
requirements specified herein. Temperatures at the concrete placement
shall be recorded at 12 hour intervals (minimum).
3. Discuss a cold weatherwork plan with the Engineer. The discussion shall
encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during cold
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-13
10/29/12
1 weather including the production, transportation, placement, protection,
2 curing and temperature monitoring of the concrete. The procedures to be
3 implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment
4 failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather concreting shall not begin
5 until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E
4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide
continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required)
for a total of at least 350 degree-days of curing.
5.
�
a. Degree-days are defined a
multiplied by the weighted
surface of the concrete (e.g.:
350 degree-days).
s the total number of 24 hour periods
average daily air temperature at the
5 days at an average 70 degrees F=
b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly
measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the surface of
the concrete taking any measurement less than 50 degrees F as 0
degrees F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24 to obtain the
weighted average temperature for that day.
Salt, manure or other chemicals shall not be used for protection.
The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be
terminated during cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing
has been terminated.
Hot Weather Concreting
"Hot weather" is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low
relative humidity and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation
estimated in accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or exeeeding 0.2
Ibs/sq ft/hr).
2. Concrete placed during hot weather, shall be batched, delivered, placed,
cured and protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305R
and the additional requirements specified herein.
a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90 degrees F
and every effort shall be made to maintain a uniform concrete mix
temperature below this level. The temperature of the concrete shall
be such that it will cause no difficulties from loss of slump, flash set
or cold joints.
�
•
b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to promptly deliver, to
promptly place the concrete upon its arrival at the job and to provide •
vibration immediately after placement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-14
10/29/12
r-�
U
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover plasiic
concrete with sheet material.
3. Discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and
procedures proposed to use for concrete placement and curing during hot
weather periods. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the work
plan is acceptable to the Engineer.
3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be
removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 percent of its
specified design strength, nor before reaching the following number of
day-degrees of curing (whichever is the longer):
TABLE 3
MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL
Forms for
Beams and slabs
Walls and vertical surfaces
Deqree Davs
500
100
(See definition of degree-days in Paragraph 3.05 D above).
B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 60 percent of
its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own
weight and construction live loads.
3.07 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING
A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing and curing of concrete shall be subject
to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall advise the
Engineer of his/her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours prior to each concrete
placement. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for concreting including
the preparation of previously placed concrete, the reinforcing steel and the
alignment, cleanliness and tightness of formwork. No placement shall be made
without the inspection and acceptance of the Engineer.
B. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be taken by the Engineer cor
inspector) during the progress of the work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The
number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed
each day shall not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each
150 cu yds of concrete nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surFace area
for slabs or walls.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-15 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. A"set" of test cylinders consists of four cylinders: one to be tested at 7
days and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The
fourth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28
days if 28 day test results are low.
Z. When the average 28 day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set
falls below the specified design strength or below proportional minimum 7
day strengths (where proper relation befinreen seven and 28 day strengths
have been established by tests), proportions, water content, or
temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the required
strengths.
C. Cooperate in the making of tests by allowing free access to the work for the
selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens,
affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the operations
and furnish material and labor required for the purpose of taking concrete cylinder
samples. Alt shipping of specimens will be paid for by the Owner. Curing boxes
shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
D. Slump tests will be made in the field immediately prior to placing the concrete.
Such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. If the slump is greater
the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected.
E. Air Content: Test for air content shall be made on a fresh concrete samples. Air
content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be
made in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231
or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173. If lightweight
aggregates or aggregates with high absorptions are used, the latter test method
shall be used.
F. The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete
work such as construction joints and other locations as required for determination
of concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for
acceptance, rejection or determining the continuation of concrete work.
G. Cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and permitting
the use of ladders, scaffolding and such incidental equipment as may be
required. Repair all core holes. The work of cutting and testing the cores will be
at the expense of the Owner.
3.08 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS
•
•
A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in
compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1,
the Engineer will have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to apply •
to the remainder of the work. Furthermore, the Engineer will have the right to
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-16 10/29/12
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test
specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be at the
Contractor's expense. In the event that such additional curing does not give the
strength required, as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the Engineer will haue
the right to require strengthening or replacement of those portions of the structure
which fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such core borings
and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required
because strengths of test specimens are below that specified, shall be entirely at
the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet strength
requirements the Contractor and Engineer will confer to determine what
adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with Sections titled "Strength" and
"Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The "purchaser" referred
to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this Section.
B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified strength,
the Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical
cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. In the
case of cores not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer, in addition to other
recourses, may require, at the Contractor's expense, load tests on any one of the
slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such concrete was used. Tests
need not be made until concrete has aged 60 days.
C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60 percent of the required
minimum 28 day strength, the concrete will be rejected and shall be removed and
replaced.
3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. It is the intent of this Section to require quality work including adequate forming,
proper mixture and placement of concrete and curing so completed concrete
surfaces will require no patching.
B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer shall
be repaired.
C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed, fins
and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of form ties
shall be filled; and surface defects which do not impair structural strength shall be
repaired. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by
leakage of concrete, to approval of the Engineer.
D. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties.
Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows: Moisten the hole with water,
followed by a 1/16-in brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of
a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and
concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch Qust short of "balling"). Hammer
the grout into the hole until dense, and an excess of paste appears on the surFace
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-17 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
E
in the form of a spider web. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid
burnishing.
When patching exposed surfaces the same source of cement and sand as used
in the parent concrete shall be employed. Adjust color if necessary by addition of
proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone at
an age of 1 to 5 days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent
concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the
surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter.
3.10 SCHEDULE
A. The following Table 4 describes the general applications for the various concrete
classes and design strengths:
Design
Strength
Class si
A 2, 500
B 3, 000
C 4, 000
TABLE 4
CONCRETE SCHEDULE
Description
Concrete fill and duct encasement
Concrete overlay slabs and pavements
Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and beam systems,
columns, grade beams and all other structural concrete
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-18
10/29/12
i
•
�
LJ
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
SECTION 03350
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Description:
.
C
❑�
This section covers all workmanship, materials safety and quality requirements
for concrete resurfacing and lining work. Provide and apply concrete and
polyurea materials as specified and as indicated on drawings.
A general description of the work to be performed is listed below:
• Power wash the interior surface of the manhole to remove grease and
contaminants.
• Sand blast the interior surface of the manhole to obtain the correct surface
profile and surface mechanical grip properties.
• Power rinse the interior surface of the manhole to remove sand blasting
debris, dust, and particles.
• Apply polymer modified mortar to the entire interior surface of the bricks using
a bonding agent.
• Patch the interior surface of the precast concrete with the same polymer
modified mortar and bonding agent.
• Apply a spray-on type polymeric multi-layered lining system to the entire
interior of the manhole. The lining system shall be specifically developed far
the corrosive wastewater environment.
The existing brick surface must be entirely covered with polymer-modified
portland cementitious mortar before applying the lining system.
Cracks and Joints that require additional materials shall be injected with
hydrophilic polyurethane grout.
1.02 RELATED WORK:
Division 1 - General Requirements
1.03 REFERENCES:
A. This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a part
of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict befinreen the
requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the more stringent
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-1 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
:
of the requirements shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents
in effect at the time of receipt of Bids.
C. Referenced publications found within this specification shall be the latest revision
unless otherwise specified; and applicabfe parts of the referenced publications
shall become a part of this specification as if fully included.
Reference Title
ASTM (American Society of Testing and Materials)
ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 3960 Practice for Determining Volatile Organic
Content of Paints and Related Coatings
ASTM D 4259 Practice for Abrading Concrete
Compound (VOC}
ASTM E 337 Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a
Psychrometer
Federal Standard Colors
F 595 B Federal Standard Colors
Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for
Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays
ICRI (International Concrete Restoration Institute)
Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for
Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays
NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers)
Publication 6D-173 "A Manual for Painter Safety"
Publication 6G-164 "SurFace Preparation Abrasives for Industrial Maintenance Painting"
Publication TPC2 Coatings and Linings for Immersion Service:
Chapter 1 Safety
Chapter 2 SurFace Preparation
Chapter 3 Curing
Chapter 4 Inspection
Publication 6F-163 "Surface Preparation of Steel or Concrete Tank Interiors."
RP0892-92 Standard Recommended Practice, Lining over Concrete in
Immersion Service
RP0288-88 Standard Recommended Practice, Inspection of Linings on Steel
and Concrete
SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council)
SSPC-SP 12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by
High and Ultrahigh Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating
SSPC-SP 13 Surface Preparation of Concrete
SSPC-PA-3 "A Guide to Safety in Paint Applieation"
SSPC-Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Project
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-2 10/29/12
�
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
OSHA (Occupationai Safety and Health Administration)
1915.35 Standards – 29 CFR – Painting
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
ANSI/ASC 29.4 Abrasive Blasting Operations — Ventilation and Safe Practice
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer and/or applicator of the liner system shall be a company that
specializes in the design, manufacture or installation of corrosion protectian
systems for manholes. The applicator shall be completely trained in leak repair,
surface preparation and corrosion materials application in manholes.
:
C
n
The applicator shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer for the handling,
mixing, application and inspection of the liner system as described herein.
To ensure total unit responsibility, all materials and installation thereof shall be
furnished and coordinated with/by one supplier/applicator.
Requirements:
2.
3.
4.
5.
Q
7
Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials f�or
resurfacing. Do not use materials from previously opened containers.
Use only products of the approved Manufacturer(s). Use products of one
manufacturer in any one resurfacing system with compatible materials.
Provide same material product for touch-up as for original material.
If any requirements of this specification conflict with a referenced
standard, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
Make all locations and phases of the work available for access by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide ventilation and egress to safely
access the coating work areas for construction and inspection.
Conduct work so that the resurfacing system is installed as specified
herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that the resurfacing system is
installed as specified herein. The Contractor shall inspect the work to
determine conformance with the specifications and referenced documents.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the progress and the quality
of the work through daily reports as specified below. Any nonconforming
coating system work shall be corrected as specified herein or as
recommended by the Manufacturer.
Summarize test data, work progress, areas covered, ambient conditions,
quality control inspection test findings, and other information pertinent to
the resurfacing system installation in daily reports to be submitted to the
Engineer.
The methods of construction shall be in accordance with all requirements
of this specification.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
8. Employ only trades people who have at least five years of experience
performing resurfacing work of similar size and complexity as the work
specified in this Section. Submittals to verify these qualifications are to be
made within thirty (30) days of the Notice-to-Proceed and are subject to
approval by the Engineer.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following prior to commencing with any phase of the work covered by
this Section:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Manufacturer's current printed recommendations and product data sheets
for all coating system products supplied under this section including
performance criteria, surface preparation and applications, volatile organic
compound (V.O.C.) data, and safety requirements.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materiafs brought on-site
including all resurfacing system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast
media.
Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation for
resurfacing system materials.
Manufacturer's requirements, including application procedures for
resurfacing materials shall be in writing and shall be followed in detail. All
safety precautions recommended by the Manufacturer shall be strictly
adhered to at all times when work is in progress.
Color samples for all surfaces to be resurfaced that have been field-
matched to existing colors.
Submit applicators' certification that resurfacing materials comply with
Federal, State, and Local regulations for VOC (Volatile Organic
Compounds).
Submit daily reports that contain the following information: Substrate
conditions, ambient conditions, application procedures, work completed
and location thereof. Mark-up drawings that show location of work.
Submit letter(s) with associated product data signed by Manufacturer
certifying that submitted products are suitable for application on the
surfaces to be resurfaced and for the service conditions.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. All patch or filler concrete used below the lining coating shall be warranted for a
period of 5 years.
B. The Contractor shall warrant the lining coating for a period of 10 years. A coating
failure will have occurred if the lining fails to prevent damage or corrosion to the
structure, bubbles out from wall or metal, or fails to adhere to concrete or metal.
Failure does not include mechanical or chemical abuse. If coatings are deemed
to have failed the Contractor shall at his expense completely repair the damaged
area including an expanded area of a minimum of 6-inches in any direction.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-4 10/29/12
�
•
�
U
•
2 1.07 DELIVERIES AND STORAGE
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A. Materials shall be stored in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations in
enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and adverse
temperature conditions. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with
state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the
manufacturer shall be removed from the site.
B. Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the Engineersolely forth�is
purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, clean-up and associated operations, and
storage of materials-related debris before authorized disposal, to these areas. All
materials are to be stored on pallets or similar storage/handling skids off the
ground in sheltered areas in which the temperature is maintained between 70��F
and 90°F.
17 C. Mix all resurfacing materials in a mixing area supplied by the Contractor. This
18 enclosed area must protect the mixing operation and materials from direct
19 sunlight, inclement weather, freezing, or other means of damage or
20 contamination. Protect all other concrete and metallic surfaces and finishes from
21 any spillage of material(s) within the mixing area.
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
D. Do not use floor drains, dikes or storm drains for disposal of resurfacing systems
materials.
E. The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures necessary
to avert potential hazards associated with the resurfacing system materials as
described on the pertinent Material Safety Data Sheets or container labels.
F.
G
Deliver all materials to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each
container shall bear the Manufacturer's name and label.
Labels on all material containers must show the following information:
a. Name or title of product.
b. Federal Specification Number if applicable.
c. Manufacturer's batch number and date of manufacture.
d. Manufacturer s name.
e. Generic type of material.
f. Application and mixing instructions.
g. Hazardous material identification label.
h. Shelf life date.
i. Storage requirements.
All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel safety hazards
associated with the use of or exposure to the materials.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-5 10/29l12
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
T
..
J
Ali materials shali be handled and stored to prevent damage or loss of label.
The Contractor shall provide resurFacing material storage and mixing areas.
Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, prematurely opened, diluted
materials, or materials which have exceeded their shelf life.
1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Work Areas:
:
The work areas on the job site will be limited to the immediate area around the
pump station and adjacent manhole or as designated by the Owner. The
Contractor's personnel shall not be permitted in any area other than those
expressly designated by the Owner.
Coordination
The contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and Owner regarding
availability of work areas, completion times, safety, access and other factors,
which can impact plant operations.
1.09 SAFETY
A. The work is inside a confined space. The Contractor's work forces shall comply
with all applicable documentation and safety requirements related to confined
spaces and all safety requirements referenced in Section 1.03.
B. The Contractor shall provide personnel with all safety equipment necessary to
protect them during any phase of the work. This shall include, but not be limited
to safety glasses, goggles, earplugs, hard hats, steel toed work shoes,
appropriate personal protective clothing, gloves, and plant approved escape
respirators (where required).
C. Keep any flammable materials such as cleaning solvents, thinners, or resurfacing
materials away from open flames, sparks or temperatures higher than 150°F.
Drums containing flammable materials will be grounded. No solvent in any
quantity shall be allowed inside containment enclosures or permitted confined
spaces at any time during resurfacing work.
D. Power tools are to be in good working order to avoid open sparking. No spark
producing tools shall be utilized in restricted areas as indicated herein.
E. The Contractor shall fireproof all work areas by maintaining a clean work area
and having Underwriter's Laboratories approved fire extinguishers on-hand. The
Contractor shall furnish these fire extinguishers.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-6 10/29/12
•
��
U
•
C�
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
F. Workers doing abrasive blasting operations shall wear a fresh air supplied
protective helmet and hood and personal protective clothing acceptable to
industry standards and all government regulations.
G. Dispose of rags used for wiping up resurfacing materials, solvents, and thinners
by drenching them with water and placing in a metal container with a tight fitting
metaf cover. Complete this disposal process at the end of each day. Final
disposal of these materials is the Contractor's responsibility.
H. Matches, smoking, flames, or sparks resulting from any source including welding,
must be remote from the work area during coating work. Smoking is permitted
only in designated areas of the plant.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service.
Equivalent materials by other manufacturers may be submitted upon written
approval of the Engineer. As part of the proof of equality, the Contractor shall
submit certified test reports from a nationally known, reputable and independent
testing laboratory conducting comparative tests between the product specified
and the requested substitution.
B. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for each product
giving name, product number, generic type, descriptive information, solids by
volume, recommended dry film thickness and certified lab test reports showing
results to equal the performance criteria of the products specified herein. In
addition, a list of five projects shall be submitted in which each product has been
used and rendered satisfactory service.
C�?
C
E
All requests for product substitution shall be made at least 10 days prior to the bid
opening date.
Any material savings shall be passed to the owner in the form of a contract dollar
reduction.
Approved manufacturers for this project include products of the Sika Corporation,
GML Coatings, and Spectrashield Liner Systems.
2.02 MATERIALS
Specific Products are listed below to establish a quality benchmark.
A. Polymer-modified Portland Cementitious Mortar (SikaTop 123 Plus)
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. Component A shail be a liquid polymer emulsion of an acrylic copolymer
base and additives with the following properties.
a. pH: 4.5-6.5
b. Film Forming Temperature: 73°F inax.
c. Tear Strength: 950-psi min.
d. Elongation at Break: 500% min.
e. Particle Size: less than 0.1 micron
2. Component A shall contain an organic, penetrating corrosion inhibitor,
which has been independently proven to reduce corrosion in concrete via
ASTM G3 (half-cell potential tests). The corrosion inhibitor shall not be
calcium nitrite, and shall have a minimum of 5 years of independent field
testing to document performance on actual construction projects.
3. Component B shall be a blend of selected portland cements, specially
graded aggregates; admixtures for controlling setting time, water reducers
for workability, and an organic accelerator.
4
5.
The materials shall be non-combustible, both before and after cure.
The materials shall be supplied in a factory-proportioned unit.
•
6. The polymer-modified, portland cement mortar must be placeable from •
1/8" to 1-1/2" in depth per lift for vertical applications and 1/8" to 1" in
depth for overhead applications.
7. Performance Criteria
a. Typical Properties of the polymer-modified, portland cement mortar:
• Working Time: Approximately 10 — 15 minutes
• Finishing Time: 20 - 60 minutes
• Color: concrete gray
b. Typical Properties of the cured polymer-modified, portland cement
mortar:
• Compressive Strength (ASTM C-928)
28 day: 6500 psi min
• Flexural Strength (ASTM C-348)
28 days: 1,180 psi min
• Bond Strength (ASTM C-882 Modified)
28 days: 1,650 psi min
c. The portland cement mortar shall not produce a vapor barrier.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-8 10/29/12
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
:
C.
Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive (Sika Armetec 110 EpoCem)
1. Component "A" shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable
viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether.
2. Component "B" shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine.
3. Component "C" shall be a blend of selected portland cements and sands.
4. The material shall not contain asbestos.
5. Performance Criteria
a. Properties of the mixed epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive.
• Pot Life: 90 minutes @ 73° F
� Contact Time: 95°F (35°C) 6 hours
68°F (20°C) 12 hours
50°F (10°C) 16 hours
40°F (5°C) 24 hours
• Color: dark gray
b. Properties of the cured epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive.
• Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109)
3 day: 4500 psi (31.0 MPa)
7 day: 6500 psi (44.8 MPa)
28 day: 8500 psi (58.6 MPa)
• Splitting Tensile Strength (ASTM C-496)
28 days: 600 psi (4.1 MPa)
• Flexural Strength (ASTM C-348)
1250 psi (8.6 MPa)
• Bond Strength ASTM C-882 at 14 days
Wet on Wet, 0-hr. open time: 2800 psi (19.3 MPa)
24-hr. open time: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa)
• Bond of Steel Reinforcement to Concrete (Pullout Test)
Minimum 508-psi (3.5 MPa)
• Plain Reinforcement 573 psi (3.95 MPa)
c. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a
vapor barrier.
d. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel
when tested under the procedures as set forth by the Federal
Highway Administration Program Report No. FHWA/RD86/193.
Proof shall be in the form of an independent testing laboratary
corrosion report showing prevention of corrosion of the reinforcing
steel.
Hydrophilic Polyurethane Grout (SikaFix HH Hydrophilic)
1. Nonflammable hydrophilic polyurethane resin.
2. Cures to from a flexible adhesive closed cell foam.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-9 10/29112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
3. The material shali not contain volatile solvents.
4. Performance Criteria
a. Properties of the uncured resin.
• Shelf Life : 1 Year @ 73° F
• Solids (ASTM D 2369 B) 83%
• Viscosity (ASTM D 2196 A) 650-800 csp
• Density (ASTM D 3574-95) 8.7-9.2 Ibs/gal
• Flashpoint F (ASTM D-92) 225
• Reaction Time 1:1 with Water 20 sec @ 68 F
b. Properties of the cured grout.
• Tensile Strength (ASTM D 3575-95) 380 psi
• Bond Strength 250-300 psi
• Elongation (ASTM D 3574-95) 400%
• Shrinkage (ASTM D 1042) less than 10%
2.03 MULTI-LAYERED LINING SYSTEM
A. Lining System
.
Only materials and products suitable for installation in a severe hydrogen sulfide
environment without any deterioration to the liner may be used. Materials •
specified herein are the only approved standard coating systems. The following
list specifies the material requirements for resurfacing systems. The approved
products are as follows:
Green Monster Liner or Spectrashield.
2.04 ABRASIVE BLAST MEDIA
A. Provide the material, size, gradation, and quality necessary to produce the
degree of cleanliness and surface profile required herein.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Hoisting, Scaffolding, Staging, and Planking:
Provide, set-up, and maintain all required hoists, scaffolds, and staging and
planking, and pertorm all access related hoisting work required to complete the
work of this section as indicated and specified. Scaffolds shall have solid backs
and floors to prevent dropping materials from there to the floors or ground below.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-10
10/29/12
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
:
C�l
C
E
Environmental Requirements:
Comply with the Manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions
under which resurfacing system materials can be applied. Do not apply
resurfacing system materials when dust is in work site. The Contractor shall
provide all temporary lighting during the work.
Protection:
Cover or otherwise protect finish work or other surfaces not being resurFaced.
Erect and maintain protective tarps, enclosures and/or maskings to contain debris
(such as dust or airborne particles resulting from surface preparation) generated
during any and all work activities. This includes, but is not limited to the use of
dust/debris collection apparatus as required.
Initial Inspection Of Surfaces To Be Coated:
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inspect and report unacceptable
concrete substrate surface conditions to the Engineer prior to the commencement
of surface preparation activities. Unacceptable surface conditions are defined as
the presence of cracked surFaces or concrete deteriorated to a depth of greater
than 1" or otherwise unable to withstand surface preparation as specified herein.
Thinners and Solvents:
The Contractor shall use only solvents and thinners as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION OF EXISTING PRE-CAST AND BRICK SURFACES
A. Surface preparation shall produce a cleaned, abraded and sound surface with
no evidence of laitance, loose concrete, brick or mortar, contaminants or
debris, and shall display a surface profile suitable for application of liner
system
B Prior to abrasive media blasting, loose materials, acid constituents, grease, oil,
and other contaminants shall be removed with a 2500-5000 psi powerwash using
potable water and an alkaline-based emulsifying detergent as recommended by
the resurfacing material manufacture.
B. All interior surfaces to be coated must be clean, sound, and free of contaminants.
All loose and deteriorated concrete, mortar and brick shall be removed by
mechanical means. Mechanically prepare the substrate to obtain a surface
profile of +/-1 /16" (CSP 5 or greater as per ICRI Guidelines) with a new exposed
aggregate surface for the precast. The area to be patched shall not be less than
1/8" in depth for the precast portion. The entire brick surFace shall be covered.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-11 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C. Where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is encountered, sandblast the steel
to a white metal finish to remove all contaminants and rust. Where corrosion has
occurred due to the presence of chlorides, the steel shall be high pressure
washed after mechanical cleaning. Prime steel with 2 coats of Sika Armatec 110
EpoCem as per the technical data sheet. (See Spec Component SC-201-0699)
D. Abrasive Blast Cleaning
E.
2
3
4
5
C:�
7
�
E
Sand blasting media shall be washed, graded and free of contaminants
that might interfere with the adhesion of the resurFacing materials. Used
or spent blast abrasive shall not be reused on work covered by this
section.
The compressed air used for blast cleaning will be filtered free of
condensed water or oil. Moisture traps will be cleaned at least once every
four hours or more frequently as is appropriate.
Oil separators shall be installed just downstream of compressor discharge
valves and at the discharge of the blast pot discharges. Oil separators
shall be cleaned at least once every four hours or more frequently as is
appropriate.
A paper blotter test shall be performed by the Contractor when requested
by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative to determine if the air is
sufficiently free of oil and moisture.
Regulators, gauges, filters, and separators will be in good working order
for all of the compressor air lines to blasting nozzles at all times during this
work.
An air dryer or drying unit shall be installed which dries the compressed air
prior to blast connections. This dryer shall be used and maintained for the
duration of surFace preparation work.
The quality, volume, and velocity of life support and ventilation air used
during surface preparation shall be in accordance with applicable safety
standards and as required to ensure adequate visibility and proper
dissipation of volatiles without impacting the prepared surface or the
health of the public or personnel working for the Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Representatives, or anyone who
may be affected by on-site maintenance coating work activities.
The abrasive blast nozzles used shall be the venturi or other high velocity
type supplied with a minimum of 100-psig air pressure and the necessary
volume to obtain the required blast cleaning production rates and specified
degree of cleanliness.
The Contractor must provide adequate ventilation for airborne particulate
evacuation and lighting (meeting all pertinent safety standards) to optimize
visibility for both blast cleaning and observation of the substrate during
surface preparation work.
•
•
After abrasive blasting, the interior surFace shall be power rinsed with potable •
water to remove all loose materials and other contaminants.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-12 10/29/12
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
3.03 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS POLYMER-MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENTITIOUS
MORTAR
A. Mechanically mix in an appropriate sized mortar mixer or with a mud paddle and
low speed (400-600 rpm) drill. Pour approximately 4/5 gal Component A into the
mixing container. Add Component B while continuing to mix. Mix to a uniform
consistency for a maximum of three minutes. Add remaining Component A to
mix for desired consistency.
B. Should smaller quantities be needed, be sure the components are measured in
the correct ratio and that the Component B is uniformly blended before mixing the
components together. Mix only that amount of materia� that can be placed in 10 -
15 minutes. Do not re-temper material.
C. Placement Procedure: At the time of application, the substrate shall be a
saturated surface but with no standing water. Mortar must be scrubbed into
substrate filling all pores and voids. While the scrub coat is still plastic, force
material against edge of repair, working toward center. If repair area is too large
to fill while scrub coat and is still wet use Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem in lieu of
scrub coat. (See spec component SC-200-0699). After filling, consolidate then
screed. Allow mortar to set to desired stiffness then finish with trowel for smooth
surface. Wood float or sponge float for a rough surface. Areas where the depth
of the repair area to sound concrete is greater than 1-1/2", the repair shall be
made in lifts of 1-1/2" maximum thickness. The top surFace of each lift shall be
scored to produce a rough surface for the next lift. The preceding lift shall be
allowed to reach final set before applying fresh material. The fresh mortar must
be scrubbed into the preceding lift.
D. As per ACI recommendations for Portland cement concrete, curing is required.
Moist cure with wet burlap and polyethylene, a fine mist of water or a water-
based* compatible curing compound. Moist curing should commence
immediately after finishing and continue for 48 hours. Protect newly applied
material from rain, sun, and wind until compressive strength is 70% of the 28-day
compressive strength. To prevent from freezing cover with insulating material.
Setting time is dependent on temperature and humidity. Pretesting of curing
compound is recommended.
L�
F
Adhere to all procedures, limitations and cautions for the polymer-modified
Portland cement mortar in the manufacturers' current printed technical data sheet
and literature.
Exposed rebar steel surfaces shall be abraded to produce a minimum surface
profile of 3 mils. Before preparing steel, remove oil, grease and/or all other types
of contaminants.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-13 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.04 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS ITYDROPHILIC POLYURETHANE GROUT
A. Prepare materials per Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Drill injection ports at a 45° degree angle to intersect the crack at approximately
'h the depth of the structure. Spacing of the injection ports depends on crack
width, but normal spacing varies from 6" to 24". It is necessary to flush the drilled
holes with water to remove drill dust from the holes and cracks, and insure that
the crack is wet enough to react with the grout when introduced to the crack. On
structures open on both sides, provide ports on opposite sides at staggered
elevations. Install the injection ports in the holes.
C.
�
Inject first port with clean water at 250-psi minimum until air and water begin to
flow out of the crack and the other ports. Complete this step for every port.
Limitation times and related temperature range restrictions befinreen successive
lifts for all products specified herein per Manufacturer's stated requirements.
E. Inject the prepared cracks with a minimum of 250 psi in order to achieve
maximum filling and penetration without the inclusion of air pockets or voids in the
polyurethane chemical grout. Begin the pressure injection at the lowest packer
and continue until there is the appearance of the polyurethane chemical grout at
an adjacent packer, thus indicating travel. When travel is indicated, a decision to
discontinue or continue the pressure injection from that packer should be made
by the contractor, based on his experience, with the approval of the engineer.
Continue the procedure until all applicable cracks have been filled.
F. Pump polyurethane chemical grout for 45 seconds and then pause to allow the
material to flow into all of the cracks and crevices. Watch for material flow and
water movement to appear on the surFace. When movement stops, begin
injection into the next packer. When sealing vertical cracks, begin injecting at the
bottom of the crack and work vertically. If site temperature are extremely low,
heat bands or heated water baths may be used on the pails, before and during
use to maintain the products temperature. Re-inject to assure that all voids are
properly sealed off.
G. If penetration of any cracks is impossible, consult the engineer before
discontinuing the injection procedure. If modification of the proposed procedure
is required to fill the cracks, submit said modification in writing to the engineer for
acceptance prior to proceeding.
H. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the polyurethane chemical grout as
stated in the manufacturer's current printed literature.
Caution: Expanding chemical grout is exerting oufinrard high pressures and review
of drawings of the area to be repaired is recommended.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-14 10/29/12
u
u
•
•
1 J. All equipment and procedures used for polyurethane resin injection system
2 application shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. Unless specified
3 elsewhere herein, the Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer's mast
4 recent written instructions.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
3.05 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS MULTI-LAYERED LINING SYSTEMS
�
:
General:
Application procedures shall conform to recommendations of the manufacturer,
including materials handling, mixing, environmental controls during application,
safety and spray equipment.
Spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the
liner system.
C. Application of multi-component liner system shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation. Finished thickness of the spray on multi-
layered lining system shall be a minimum of 125 mils thick. A permanent
identification and date of work performed shall be affixed to the structure in a
readily visible location.
All specified surface preparation shall be performed in accordance with the
latest version of the SSPC, NACE, ICRI and other standards referenced in
this section.
2. The newly applied mortar and the existing concrete surfaces shall be
abraded to produce a minimum surface profile of equal to 40-grit
sandpaper with no loose concrete remaining by abrasive blast cleaning.
This preparation will be followed by vacuum cleaning to remove all dust,
dirt or friable substances leaving clean, dust free surfaces for resurfacing.
3. Verify that the pH of the concrete surfaces to be coated is within the range
of 9 to 11. Application of coating materials outside this range will not be
permitted without written approval from the Engineer.
B. All phases of surface preparation work specified herein must be inspected by the
Engineer before the Contractor proceeds with the subsequent phase of surface
preparation.
C�
�
Observe limitation times and related temperature range restrictions befinreen
successive lifts for all products specified herein per Manufacturer's stated
requirements.
The multi-layer systems shall have a minimum of two coats each of different
color. Coatings must be inspected after application for pinholes.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-15 10/29/4 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E. All equipment and procedures used for the resurfacing system application shall
be as recommended by the Manufacturer. Unless specified elsewhere herein,
the Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer's most recent written
instructions with respect to the following:
F
G
�
a. Mixing of All Materials
b. � Protection and Handling of All Materials
c. Recoat Limitation and Cure Times
d. Minimum Ambient and Substrate Temperatures
e. Substrate's Degree of Dryness
f. Relative Humidity and Dew Point of Air
g. Application.
h. Final Curing.
i. Use of Proper Application Equipment.
Curing of ResurFacing System:
The applied lining system shall be protected from damage during curing and shall
be cured as recommended by the Manufacturer. Ambient conditions shall be
controlled by the Contractor during curing to ensure the minimum air temperature
and minimum relative humidity as required by the Manufacturer are maintained.
Chemical Resistant Lining
General Note: The Contractor is advised that with all thick-film, quick curing
materials applied to concrete surfaces, outgassing of the concrete can occur.
Possible remedies include applying materials when the temperature of the
concrete surfaces are descending, or applying a thin (1 /8") layer of the specified
surfacing material. Other remedies may exist, and may be submitted for the
Engineer's approval.
Safety And Ventilation Requirements:
Requirements for safety and ventilation shall be in accordance with SSPC Paint
Application Guide No. 3.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection by the Engineer or others does not limit the Contractor's
responsibilities for quality control inspection and testing as specified herein or as
required by the Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform the quafity control procedures listed below in conjunction with the
requirements of this Section.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-16 10/29/12
•
L�
•
\ J
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
C�l
�
E
2
Inspect all materials upon receipt to ensure that all are supplied by the
Manufacturer.
Provide specified storage conditions for the resurfacing system materiabs,
solvents, and abrasives.
3. The pH of the concrete substrate will be measured using pH-indicating
papers. pH testing is to be performed once every 50 sq. ft. Acceptable pH
values shall be between 9.0 and 11.0 as measured by a full range (1-12)
color indicating pH paper with readable color calibrations and a scale at
whole numbers (minimum). Use Hydrion Insta-Check Jumbo 0-13 or 1-12
or equal. The paper shall be touched to the surface once using moderate
gloved finger pressure. The surface shall not be wiped or moved IateraNly
to disturb the surface during pH testing. Following the one touch, lift the
paper vertically to not "wipe" the surface. Compare the color indicated
with the scale provided and record the pH.
4. Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern). Surfaces shall be
abraded, as a minimum, equal to the roughness of 40 grit sand paper.
5. Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of
each shift using a thermometer and measure and record substrate
temperature once every two hours using a surface thermometer.
6. Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift using a
sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337.
Provide correct mixing of resurfacing materials in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instructions.
Inspect and record that the "pot life" of resurfacing materials are not exceeded
during installation.
Verify curing of the resurfacing materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Upon full cure of the mortar and lining material, the installed system shall be
checked by high voltage spark detection in accordance with NACE RP0188-88BN
to verify a pinhole-free surface. Voltage shall be set at 11,000 volts. Areas,
which do not pass the spark detection test, shall be corrected at no cost to the
Owner and rechecked.
G. Upon completion of the lining system installation the lined area shall be cleaned
and prepared to permit close visual inspection by the Engineer or the Engineer's
Representative. Any and all deficiencies or defective work (not in compliance
with this section or related sections) will be marked for repair or
removal/replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-17 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
-28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.07 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. Acceptance Criteria for Surface Preparation Work: All surFaces shall be prepared
in accordance with the specification and referenced standards herein.
B. Acceptance Criteria for Coating System Application Work: Acceptable coating
work will be based upon the following:
1. No pockmarks, trowel marks, depressions, unconsolidated areas,
waviness or ridges, pinholes or holidays in either size or frequency.
2. No inter-coat bond failures between lifts.
3. Proper curing of coatings.
C
�❑
Resurfaced areas shall pitch to drains. There shall be no areas that puddle when
flood tested.
The Engineer or Engineer's Representative shall, at their discretion, inspect the
following:
1. Profile and degree of cleanliness of substrate.
2. Thickness of materials/coverage rate confirmation.
3. Ambient temperature and humidity requirements,
temperature.
4. Curing and recoat times.
5. Proper curing of the resurfacing materials.
and substrate
E. Rework required on any holidays or any other inadequacies found by the
Engineer or the Engineer's representative in the quality of the coating work
should be marked. Such areas shall be recleaned and reworked by the
Contractor according to these specifications and the manufacturer's
recommendations at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. The Contractor is responsible for keeping the Engineer informed of all progress
so that inspection for quality can be achieved.
G. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the quality performance of the applied
materials and workmanship. Inspections by the Engineer or the Engineer's
Representative do not limit this responsibility.
3.08 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Perform a final inspection to determine whether the resurfacing system work
meets the requirements of the specifications. The Engineer and the Engineer's
Representative will conduct final inspection with the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
MULTI-LAYERED MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS
03350-18 10/29/12
•
r �
�
•
�
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 03600
C��1��
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install graut
complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
�
0
Submit to the Engineer, shop drawings and product data showing materiats of
construction and details of installation for:
1. Commerciatly manufactured non-shrink cementitious grout. The submittal
shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product
life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to
required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet.
2. Commercially manufactured non-shrink epoxy grout. The submittal shall
include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life,
working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to
required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet.
3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the
cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any proposed
admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout.
4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent
quantities per cubic yard, the water/cement ratio, and fiber reinforcement.
Laboratory Test Reports
1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer.
C. Certifications
1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout products
and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potabfe
water after 30 days curing.
D. Qualifications
1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation thatthey have at feast 10
years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts to be
GROUT
03600-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
supplied.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
�
:
C
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient
of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and
Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes
2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and
Polymer Concretes
3.
4
ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD)
1. CRD C-621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at
the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
L�
C
1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the
production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work.
Pre-installation Conference
1. Well in advance of grouting, hold a pre-installation meeting to review the
requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing and curing
procedures for each product proposed for use. Parties concerned with
grouting shall be notified of the meeting at least 10 days prior to its
scheduled date.
Services of Manufacturer's Representative
•
�
1. A qualified field technician of the non-shrink grout manufacturer,
specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the •
pre-installation conference and shall be present forthe initial installation of
GROUT
03600-2 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
ri:
each type of non-shrink grout. Additional services shall also be provided,
as required, to correct installation problems.
Field Testing
1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the
Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall
provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The methods
of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled
with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and printed
instructions.
B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be limited
to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, whichever is less.
C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately
removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional cost
to the Owner.
L�7
E
Non-shrink, cement-based grouts shall be delivered as pre-blended, prepackaged
mixes requiring only the addition of water.
Non-shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre-measured, prepackaged, three
component systems requiring only blending as directed by the manufacturer.
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A. Non-shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink in
either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state
and bonds to a clean base plate.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the
purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired.
Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to
provide standardization of appearance.
GROUT
03600-3 10/29/'12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Non-shrink Cementitious Grout
Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of
ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C-621. Grouts shall be Portland
cement based, contain a pre-proportioned blend of selected aggregates
and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only the addition of
water. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive cement
or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no shrinkage when tested in
conformity with ASTM C827.
13 2. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
14 standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set
15 Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill &
16 Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout
17 Corp. or equal.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
C�
❑�
3. Flowable (Precision) non-shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master Builders,
Inc.; Hi-Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika
Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout
Corp. or equal.
Non-shrink Epoxy Grout
Non-shrink epoxy-based grout shall be a pre-proportioned, three
component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin,
hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength of
14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and have
a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10-6 when tested in conformity with
ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by Master Builders Inc.;
Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak by Sika
Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co. or equal.
Cement Grout
1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part portland cement conforming
to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to
ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content
shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the degree
that it will allow the grout to flow.
Concrete Grout
•
C�
Concrete grout shall proportioned with cement, [pozzalan,] coarse and fine •
aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to produce a
GROUT
03600-4 10/29/12
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
E
mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 2500 p�si
nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be [3/8] (1/2]-in maximum.
Slump should not exceed 5-in and should be as low as practical yet s�ill
retain sufficient workability.
2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at the
rate of 1.5 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be added from
the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the
manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete
dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the concrete
grout.
Water
Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, orgar�ic
matter, or other deleterious substances.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
20 3.01 PREPARATION
21
22 A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design
• 23 strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
24
25 B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost,
26 dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints and free of all loose
27 material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the grout.
28
29 C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical
30 means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken
31 concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if
32 they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
'�
Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the
oil-less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil fram
being blown onto the surFace.
Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal
embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout.
E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24
hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be
achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker
hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Upon
completion of the 24 hour period, visible water shall be removed from the surface
prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of surface
saturation shall only be used when approved by the Engineer for each specific
GROUT
03600-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F
location of grout installation.
Epoxy-based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate.
Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting.
G. Construct grout forms or other leak-proof containment as required. Forms shall
be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer.
Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place and shored to
resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement.
Forms for epoxy grout shalf be designed to allow the formation of a
hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms.
H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with the
structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer.
Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by shims,
wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and blocking
devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond
breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
�
I_:3
Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and this Section.
Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous
mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at
hand.
C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout
befinreen 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours thereafter
or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Take
precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and grout
during the curing period.
D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as
recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the
temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 90
degrees F range.
E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements on
either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or
control joint.
GROUT
03600-6
10/29/12
�
Iri
U
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints through
the grout.
3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUiS
A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement,
sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer.
B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is
recommended. Pre-wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured
amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum
amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum
additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's
maximum recommended water content.
C. Placements greater than 3-in in depth shall include the addition of clean, washed
pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to be
added.
D Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation ar
entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the
material. Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of all
spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces.
Provide grout holes as necessary.
E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement
grouts in Iayers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial
stiffening.
F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a
45 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish.
G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout
moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24
hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate
the grout surFace by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or other approved
means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a
given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer
a problem or curing is finished.
3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS
A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do
not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the
grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper proportions
GROUT
03600-7 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
of resin, hardener and aggregate.
B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for
special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 90
degrees F.
C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air.
Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide fufl contact
befinreen the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary.
D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). In
no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout thickness.
E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish.
Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water. Maintain
the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature range for at
least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the manufacturer.
3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT
A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the
surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface
clean until placement of concrete grout.
B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt
and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water.
Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted.
C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the
concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker
hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water
just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately
ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed.
Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately
1/16 to 1/8-in thick cement paste. A bonding grout composed of 1 part portland
cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, an approved bonding admixture and water, mixed to
achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be substituted for the cement slurry.
D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for
surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless
specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper
mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed.
E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings.
GROUT
03600-8
10/29/12
u
•
•
i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
�
U
F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast-in-place concrete.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used:
General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations
where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates
greater in area than 3-ft wide by 3-ft long and except for the setting of
anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete.
2. Flowable non-shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates greater
in area than 3-ft by 3-ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive flowable
non-shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her option and
convenience, may also substitute flowable non-shrink grout for general
purpose non-shrink cementitious grout.
3. Non-shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts
and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated
to receive epoxy grout.
4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental base
plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for
platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used when nonshrink
grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for grouting of primary
structural steel members such as columns and girders.
5. Concrete grout:
mechanisms of
grade.
Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper
clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface
END OF SECTION
GROUT
03600-9
10/29l12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
GROUT
03600-10
10/29/12
�
•
�
•
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 03740
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut, remove,
repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or appurtenances
as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work under this Section shall
also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer, a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of
demolition to be used at each location.
B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for use,
to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's
installation and/or application instructions.
C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are
proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to
the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding
Systems for Concrete.
ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin
Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer.
ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of
Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete.
ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
�
E:3
Punch Tool.
ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at
the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise
altered until authorization is given by the Engineer.
B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary
barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be erected to
prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work,
protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the structures or
contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown or
specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
�
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall
have a minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture of such products and •
shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically supporting
the Contractor's personnel.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
�
�,
Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the
manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers.
Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local regulations.
B. Epoxy Bonding Agent
General
a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a finro-component, solvent-free,
asbestos-free moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to •
bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-2 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
C
requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional
requirements specified herein.
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum at
28 days.
Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14
days.
Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 6,300
psi minimum at 14 days.
Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14
days.
Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One percent
maximum at 14 days.
Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500 psi
minimum at 14 days moist cure.
Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test.
Color: Gray.
3. Approved manufacturer's include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ -
Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive Liquid
(LPL) or equal.
Epoxy Paste
1. General
a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two-component, solvent-free, asbestos free,
moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond dissimilar
materials to concrete such as setting railing posts, dowels, anchor
bolts and all-threads into hardened concrete and shall comply with
the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 3 and the
additional requirements specified herein. tt may also be used to
patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 1/8-in or less..
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-3
10/29�12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material:
1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi
minimum at 28 days.
2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14
days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum.
3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
3,700 psi minimum at 14 days.
4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14
days.
5)
6)
WaterAbsorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at 7
days.
Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist
cure.
7) Color: Concrete grey.
3. Approved manufacturers include:
a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur
Hi-mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive
1438 or equal.
b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi-mod LV 32; Master
Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal.
D. Non-Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Cement Grout, Non-Shrink
Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600
GROUT.
E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive
Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall
consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a polyester
or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate
vial within the capsule.
F
Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive
1. General
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-4 10/29/12
.
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a finro-component,
solvent-free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable fnr
crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be formulated far
the specific size of opening or crack being injected.
b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be
treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive
injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy coating
approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable water.
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material
1)
2)
Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi
minimum at 28 days.
Tensite Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14
days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent.
3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi minimum
at 14 days (injection)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at '�4
days.
Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent
maximum at 7 days.
Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 2,000
psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist.
Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test.
3. Approved manufacturers include:
a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ -
Sikadur Hi-Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concressive
1380 or equal.
b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ -
Sikadur Hi-Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH -
Concressive 1468 or equal.
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-5 10/29/12
1 PART 3 — EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 GENERAL
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing
structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or
necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements,
sealants, etc, are specified in respective Sections. All work shall comply with
other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the Drawings.
B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and
applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or
control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation befinreen
components on either side of the joint.
D. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall stop
if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location shall be
relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval by the
Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to drilling using
"rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar
interference.
3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL
A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by line drilling at limits followed by
chipping or jack-hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken
out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing
reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place equipment is not damaged.
Saw-cutting at limits of concrete to be removed shall only be done if indicated on
the Drawings, or after obtaining written approval from the Engineer.
B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting/core drilling and no new
material is to be placed on the saw-cut surface, a coating or surface treatment of
epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 1/4-in.
C. In all cases where the joint befinreen new concrete or grout and existing concrete
will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, the
edge of concrete removal shall be a 1-in deep saw cut on each exposed surface
of the existing concrete.
�
E
Concrete specified to be left in place that is damaged shall be repaired by
approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additiona!
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-6
10/29/12
�
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by such
other methods as may be appropriate.
3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas
requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified
herein, or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting
materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. - sandblasting, grinding,
etc, as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than 1/2-in in
depth. Irregular voids or surFace stones need not be removed if they are sound,
free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject to the
Engineer's final inspection.
C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all
contaminants, rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of
the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped
behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1/2-in. Reinforcing to be saved shall not
be damaged during the demolition operation.
D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be incorporated
in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove all loose
material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair. It shall be
cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and provided
with 1-in minimum cover all around.
E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used
where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the Engineer.
Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been
roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with
water. Brush on a 1/16-in layer of cement and water mixed to the
consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement
paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings.
2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened ar�d
cleaned, apply epo�ry bonding agent at connection surface. The field
preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply
strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. P(ace new concrete or
grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints
recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond.
3. Method C: Drill a hole 1/4-in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The
hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing
epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with epoxy paste and
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
dowels/bolts shali be buttered with paste and then inserted by tapping.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be drilled
and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled
and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the Drawings,
the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and spacing of dowels.
4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C.
5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by
drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear
strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system
shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized
as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall be
tipped with a double 45 degree chamfered point, securely fastened into
the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the capsule
filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical and
overhead positions.
3.04 GROUTING
A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600.
3.05 CRACK REPAIR
A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant
into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16-in
in thickness they shall be pressure injected.
B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant
through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per
manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-8 10/29/12
•
��
�
U
•
r �
LJ
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
i � � �Y�Z�1 T��I � �i� I �] :7 :/
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
miscellaneous metals as shown on the Construction Drawings and as specified
herein. The miscellaneous metal items include but are not limited to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7,
All metal frames, ladders, stair rails, floor opening frames including
gratings and supports.
Prefabricated access hatches and frames.
Anchors and anchor bolts except those specified to be furnished with all
equipment.
Railings, posts and supports both interior and exterior.
Cast iron frames, covers, grates, drain leaders and drains.
Stair nosings, steel plates, overhead steel door frames, angle frames,
plates and channels.
Guardrails
1.02 COORDINATION
A. The work in this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other
Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades
adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of iter�ns
herein specified.
B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be
built into the work of all other Sections.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Detail Drawings, as provided for in the General Conditions, showing sizes of
members, method of assembly, anchorage, and connection to other members
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-1 10/291� 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
:
C.
�
For each fabricated item include drawings, elevations, and details. Show the
following:
1. Details of Sections
2. Jointing and Connections
3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS symbols; indicate net
weld length.
4. Reinforcing
5. Fasteners and Anchors
6. Accessories
7. Location of each finish
Manufacturer's specifications, details and installation instructions. Submit for:
1. All manufactured products used in fabrications.
Samples shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer for concurrent review
with shop drawings.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement indicated
dimensions and to insure proper fitting of all items.
B. Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete and
masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation, together
with all coordination Drawings and installation instructions required. Provide
temporary bracing or anchors in formwork where required for installation in new
concrete or other adjacent work.
1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the materials herein
specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed
organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is made
to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the standard in
effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A53
Gray Iron Castings ASTM A48 (Class 30)
Galvanizing, general ASTM A123
Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153
Galvanizing, assemblies ASTM A386
Stainless Steel Bolts, Fasteners AISI, Type 316
Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet Wire AISI, Type 316
Welding Rods for Steel AWS Spec. for Arc Welding
ANSI/AWS D1.1-88 -- Structural Welding Code -- Steel; 1988.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-2
10/29/12
•
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
ANSI/AWS D1.3-81 -- Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel; 1981
ASTM A 36/A 36M-88d -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel;
1988.
ASTM A 307-88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and
Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1988.
ASTM A 501-88 -- Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1988.
ASTM A 563-88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts; 1988.
ASTM B 221-85a -- Standard Specification forAluminum and Alumi-num-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes; 1985.
FS FF-S-92B -- Screw, Machine: Slotted, Cross-Recessed or Hexagon
Head; 1974 (Amended 1975).
FS FF-W-84A -- Washers, Lock (Spring); 1967 (Amended 1980).
FS FF-W-92B -- Washer, Flat (Plain); 1974.
SSPC-PA 1-- Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting; Steel Structures
Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-Paint 12 -- Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film); Steel
Structures Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-Paint 13 -- Red or Brown One-Coat Shop Paint; Steel Structures
Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-SP 1-- Solvent Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-SP 3-- Power Tool Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council;
1982.
SSPC-SP 5-- White Metal Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
SSPC-SP 6-- Commercial Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
SSPC-SP 8-- Pickling; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-SP 10 -- Near-White Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES
A. Anchors, bolts, etc., shall be furnished as necessary for installation of the work of
this Section.
B. Compound masonry anchors shall be of the type shown or required and shall be
equal to Star Slug in compounded masonry anchors manufactured by Star
Expansion Industries, equal by Phillips Drill Co., Rahlplug, or equal. Anchars
shall be minimum "two uniY' type.
C. The bolts used to attach the various members to the anchors shall be the sizes
shown or required. Stainless steel shall be attached to concrete or masonry by
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
means of stainless steel machine bolts and iron or steel shall be attached with
steel machine bolts unless otherwise specifically noted.
D. For structural purposes, unless otherwise noted, expansion bolts shall be Wej-it
"Ankr-Tite", Phillips Drill Co. "Wedge Anchors", or Hilti "Kwik-Bolt". When length
of bolt is not called for on the Construction Drawings, the length of bolt provided
shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1-inch
behind the reinforcing steel within the concrete. Material shall be as noted on the
Construction Drawings. If not listed, all materials shall be stainless steel.
E. All bolts, anchors, and threaded hardware shall be proper length. No field cutting
or snapping of threaded hardware and fasteners shall be permitted unless
threads are properly restored.
2.02 ALUMINUM ITEMS
A. Aluminum gratings shall be of serrated I-Bar Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6, and shall
be Thompson Fabricating Company, Aluminum I-Bar Grating; or equal. Bearing
bars shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum. Grating to be of sufficient strength to carry a
uniformly distributed live load of not less than 200 pounds per square foot with
maximum deflection of 1/4" of the span length. Provide bearing angles, anchors,
and bolts constructed of aluminum or stainless steel and as detailed. Grating
shall be removable type with standard removable fasteners. Aluminum surfaces
in contact with concrete surfaces shall be protected with a special protective
lacquer or bituminous coating or other approved coating in order to keep stains to
a minimum. Top surface of all bars shall be flush; ends of gratings shall be
provided with binding strips of same depth and thickness as the main bars
welded thereto. All openings 2 inches and greater in diameter shall be banded
with a bar of the same depth and thickness as the main bearing bars of the
grating, or furnished with continuous cross bridges. Each cut bar shall be welded
to the band if banding is utilized. The ends of all grating sections shall be
likewise banded. Clamps and bolts used for attaching grating to supporting
members shall be stainless steel. All grating shall be clamped unless noted
otherwise. Clamps shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Stair treads shall be as specified above for grating and shall have abrasive
nonslip nosing.
C. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be an extrusion of 4-inch minimum width
with abrasive filled and shall be Wooster Products, Inc., Alumogrit Treads, Type
116; equal by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco; or equal. Embedded
anchors shall be furnished with a minimum of three anchors per tread.
�❑
E.
Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated to the dimensions and details and installed
as shown on the Construction Drawings.
Aluminum Handrails, Mechanically Fastened Type:
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-4
10/29/12
�
•
•
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
2
All aluminum mechanically fastened type pipe handrails and guardrails
shall be clear anodized aluminum finish and installed as specified herein
and indicated on the Construction Drawings. Handrails shall be made of
nominal 1-1/2 inches inside diameter pipe (schedule 40 for rails, schedule
80 for posts) fabricated of seamless 6105-T5 or 6061-T6 alloy, ASTM B-
429 or ASTM B-221. The supplier of the handrail system shall supply �II
necessary fittings, rackets, transition, corner and connector pieces,
toeboards, protective gaskets, etc., for a complete job at the locations
indicated on the Construction Drawings. All mounting hardware including
bolts, studs, nuts, etc., shall be stainless steel Type 316. Bends shall be
smooth and accurate to the details shown. The handrail systems shall
comply with all OSHA codes and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building
Code. Railing systems incorporating pop-rivets or glued fittings shall no
be allowed.
Handrailings and components shall be as manufactured by Thompson
Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama, or approved equal.
3. Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 Ib
concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail.
Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a load of 50
Ib/ft. applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200 Ib load will not be applied
simultaneously with the 501b/ft. load. In addition, the handrails shall be
designed to withstand a load of 1001b/ft. applied vertically downward to the
top rail and simultaneously with the 501b/ft. horizontal load. The 1001blft.
vertical load does not apply to stair rails.
4. Spacing of posts where posts are required shall be as noted on shop
drawings, but in all cases shall be uniform and shall not exceed the
requirements of OSHA and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building Code.
Shorter spacing may be used where required to maintain the maximum
spacing. The fabricator of the aluminum handrail and guardrail system
shall be responsible for the design and preparation of shop drawings and
design calculations (signed and sealed by Florida Registered Engineer) to
meet OSHA requirements and Section 1208.2 of Standard Building Code.
5. All railings shall be erected in line and plumb. Field splicing and
expansion compensation shall be accomplished using internal splice
sleeves. Make provisions for removable railing sections, as detailed and
where shown on the Construction Drawings.
6. Where handrail or guardrail posts are set in concrete, as per the
manufacturer's requirements, the posts shall be set into aluminum sleeves
cast in the concrete and firmly cemented with 1651 epoxy resin by E-Bond
Epoxies, Oakland Park, Florida, or Moulded Reinforced Plastics, Inc., Fort
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-5 10l29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F
G
H.
Lauderdale, Florida or equal. Collars shall be placed on the posts and
fastened in place, as shown and as detailed on approved shop drawings.
7. Where handrail is supported from structural members, it shall be done by
the use of approved sockets, flanges, brackets, or other approved means,
which will provide neat and substantial support for the pipe railing.
8. All railing shall be properly protected by paper, plastic or by an approved
coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar, paint, or other
defacements during transportation and erection and until adjacentwork by
other trades has been completed.
Toeboards:
Contractor shall furnish and install aluminum toeboards conforming to
latest OSHA requirements on all railings and other locations where
indicated on the Construction Drawings.
2. Toeboards shall consist of an extruded 6063-T6 aluminum shape bolted
by means of a pipe clamp to the railing posts without requiring any drilling
or welding of the toeboard to the railing posts as manufactured by
Thompson Fabricating Company, or approved equal. Toeboards shall
have pitched top and tear drop bottom to prevent accumulation of dirt, or
other material.
3. Toeboards shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6. All fastening hardware shall
be Type 316 stainless steef.
Kickplates, if required, shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the
Construction Drawings.
Aluminum safety gate shaJl_ be fabricated of extruded aluminum.
Prefabricated checkerplate aluminum floor hatches shall be Type "JD", or "KD" as
manufactured by Bilco Co., equal by Babcock-Davis Associates, Inc.; Type "AM"
Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Co., Milcor Division; or equal, sized as
shown. Hatches with either dimension over 3 feet-6 inches shall be double leaf
type. Hatches shall be designed for a live load of 300 pounds per square foot.
Hatches shall be watertight.
J. Ship ladders shall be of all aluminum construction as detailed. Treads shall have
abrasive nosing as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company,
Birmingham, Alabama.
K. Checkplate aluminum cover plates shall be fabricated to the details shown and
installed at the locations shown.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-6 10/29/12
•
•
•
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
L. Structural aluminum angle and channel door frames shall be provided as shown
on the Construction Drawings and shall be anodized. Frames shall be fabricated
with not less than three anchors on each jamb.
M. Miscellaneous aluminum shapes and plates shall be fabricated as shown. Angle
frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc., shall be furnished complete with welded
strap anchors attached. Furnish all miscellaneous aluminum shown but not
otherwise detailed. Structural shapes and extruded items shall conform to the
detail dimensions or the Shop Drawings within the tolerances published by the
American Aluminum Association.
2.03 STEEL ITEMS
A. Sleeves shall be steel or cast iron pipe in walls and floors with end joints as
shown on the Construction Drawings. All pipe sleeves shall have center anchQr
around circumference as shown.
B. Miscellaneous steel pipe for sleeves and lifting attachments and other uses as
required shall be Schedule 40 pipe fabricated according to the details as show�
on the Construction Drawings.
C. Miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the
Construction Drawings and shall include: beams, angles, support brackets,
closure angles in roof at edge of T-beam; base plates to support ends of
T-beams; door frames; splice plates, anchor bolts (except for Equipment
furnished in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15); lintels and any other miscellaneous
steel called for on the Construction Drawings and not otherwise specified.
D. Guardrails shall be of a standard FDOT W-Beam design with reflectors. pll
mounting hardware including bolts, washers, nuts shall be galvanized.
2.04 CAST IRON ITEMS
A. Outside pipe clean-out frames and covers, when and where shown on the
Construction Drawings, shall be heavy duty, R-6013-R-6099 series as
manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. All outside pipe clean-outs shall
be 6-inch diameter.
B. Frames, covers and grates for manholes, catch basins and inlets shall be of a
good quality, strong, tough even grained cast iron and capable of supporting an
H-20 loading. Castings shall be as manufactured by the U.S. Foundry, Neenah
Foundry, Mechanics Iron Foundry or equal. Sizes shall be as shown on the
Drawings. Covers to have letters "WATER", "SEWER" or "DRAIN", as
applicable, embossed on top.
C. Electric and telephone manhole frames and covers, when and where shown an
the Construction Drawings, shall be ductile iron castings conforming to all
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-7 10/29/12
1 requirements of ASTM A536. The covers shall be watertight and shall have the
2 letters "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL," "TELEPHONE," as
3 applicable, embossed on top in letters 2 inches high. The ctear opening shall be
4 36-inches.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2.05 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS
A. Stainless steel plates, when and where shown on the Contract Drawings, shall be
manufactured using 316 stainless steel.
2.06 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS
A. Use fasteners of suitable size and length for the materials being fastened and for
the type of connection required.
1. For concealed interior and exterior use or built into exterior walls:
Nonferrous stainless steel and zinc coated.
2. For embedded anchor that will be protected from the elements, use
fasteners of the same material as the miscellaneous stem being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight,
sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and
free from defects impairing strength or durability.
B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand
stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Steel accessories and
connections to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless otherwise specified.
Threaded connections shall be made so that the threads are concealed by fitting.
C. Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded or spot welded as specified
or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Exposed joints
shall be c(ose fitting and jointed where least conspicuous.
D. Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc and Gas
Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and shall only be done where
shown, specified, or permitted by the Engineer. All welding shall be done only by
welders certified as to their ability to perform welding in accordance with the
requirements of the AWS Code. Component parts of built-up members to be
welded shall be adequately supported and clamped or held by other adequate
means to hold the parts in proper relation for welding.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-8 10/29/12
�
•
�
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
E. Welding of aluminum work shall be on the unexposed side as much as possible
in order to prevent pitting or discoloration.
F. AI{ aluminum finish exposed surfaces, except as specified below, shall have
manufacturer's standard mill finish. Aluminum handrails shall be given an anodic
oxide treatment in accordance with the Aluminum Association Specificatian
AA-C22-A41. A coating of inethacrylate lacquer shall be applied to all aluminum
before shipment from the factory.
G. Castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even-grained, smooth, free from
scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of any kind which render them
unfit for the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be thoroughly
cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field by the Engineer.
All finished surfaces shown on the Drawings and/or specified shall be machined
to a true plane surface and shall be true and seat at all points without rocking.
Allowances shall be made in the patterns so that the thickness specified or shown
shall not be reduced in obtaining finished surfaces. Castings will not be
acceptable if the actual weight is less than 95 percent of the theoretical weight
computed from the dimensions shown. The Contractor, if requested by the
Owner or Engineer, shall provide facilities for weighing castings in the presence
of the Owner or Engineer showing true weights, certified by the supplier.
H. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose
mill scale, rust, and foreign matter before shipment and shall be given one shop
coat of primer compatible with finish coats specified in Painting Section after
fabrication but before shipping. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall
be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open
spaces. Abrasions in the field shall be touched up with primer immediately after
erection. Final painting is specified in Painting Section 09900.
J
�
Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot-dip zinc process after fabrication.
Following all manufacturing operations, all items to be galvanized shall be
thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely immersed in a bath of molten
zinc. The resulting coating shall be adherent and shall be the normal coating to
be obtained by immersing the items in a bath of molten zinc and allowing them to
remain in the bath until their temperature becomes the same as the bath.
Coating shall be not less than 2 oz. per sq. ft. of surface.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; use anchors of same material and finish
as item except where specifically indicated otherwise.
Fabricate to prevent water intrusion or migration.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install all items furnished except items to be imbedded in concrete or other
masonry which shall be installed under Division 03. Items to be attached to
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-9 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in
accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not
be permitted. All dimensions shall be verified at the site before fabrication is
started.
B. All steel surfaces to come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall
receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic
applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.
C. Where aluminum is embedded in concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved
bitumastic troweling mastic in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions
prior to installation.
D. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, provide a 1/32-inch neoprene
gasket befinreen the aluminum and the concrete or masonry.
E. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of
zinc-chromate primer and provide a 1/32-inch neoprene gasket befinreen the
aluminum and the dissimilar metal.
F.
G
H
�
�
Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and
masonry paint to the wood.
Anchor metal fabrications to substrata indicated; set all fasteners required.
Cut, drill and fit items as required for installation.
1
�
Fit exposed connection together accurately to form tight hairline joints.
Weld joints as indicated.
a. Comply with AWS code for welding procedures, for appearance
and quality of welds, and for corrective methods.
b. Grind exposed joints smooth.
Set items accurately in location, alignment and elevation; level, true and free of
rack, measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing as required.
3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
Q
Touch up shop paint immediately after erection.
1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded surfaces.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-10
10/29/12
�
•
\J
•
�
•
1 2. Paint with same material used for shop painting, minimum 2 mils dry film
2 thickness.
3
4
5 END OF SECTION
6
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-11 10/29/� 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-12 10/29/12
�
�
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 09865
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface
preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete this Contract
in its entirety.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications
and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface preparation, applicatian
procedures and dry mil thickness.
B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by
the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
�
:
C
Submerged Services:
1. Shop primer for ferrous metals that will be submerged or that are subject
to splash action or that are specified to be considered submerged service,
shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 at 3.0-5.0 mils
(D.F.T.), PPG Pitt-Guard Epoxy Coating 97-145 at 4.0-6.0 mils (D.F.T.),
Sherwin Williams Galavapac at 2.5-3.5 mils (D.F.T.), or approved equal.
2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces shall be filled with Tnemec
Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) orTnemec Series 219 (1/4" to 1'/2" deep) or
approved equal recommended by manufacturer of approved paint system.
Non-submerged Services:
1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by Paragraph
2.01 A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy Fast Dry
Primer 94-109 (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.), Sherwin Williams Galavapac at 2.5-
3.5 mils (D.F.T.), or approved equal.
Non-primed Surfaces:
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
❑�
1. Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces that are obviously not
to be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable
rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to
prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be
satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test.
Compatibility of Coating Systems:
1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the
manufacturer to be compatible with the corresponding primers and finish
coats specified in Section 09900 for use in the field and that are
recommended for use together.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. SurFace Preparation and Priming:
•
1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above,
shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, Commercial
Grade, immediately prior to priming. Submerged components scheduled
for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in accordance •
with SSPC-SP-10 Near-White, immediately prior to priming.
2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill
scale, and other foreign material before priming. Concrete surfaces shall
be prepared in accordance with ICRI CSP 4-6.
3
4
5
.,,
�
Shop prime in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's
recommendations.
Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion has
occurred and within 24 hours.
Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for
moisture by plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263).
Existing coated surfaces scheduled for re-coating shall be cleaned as
necessary for compatibility with the proposed coating system, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865-2 10/29/12
•
�
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
. 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 09900
'� ► �
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment and
incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete this
Contract in its entirety.
B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled,
exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and all
other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor
items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this Section
where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein.
C. The fol�owing surfaces or items are not required to be painted:
1. Portions of inetal, otherthan aluminum, embedded in concrete. This does
not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or masonry
surFaces that shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to be embedded
in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated to prevEnt
electrolysis.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
Stainless steel.
Fencing
Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces.
Acoustical ceilings.
Tile.
Fiberglass other than piping.
Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of inechanical
equipment.
Electrical switchgear, motor control centers, lighting and power panels,
and control panels.
Polyethylene chemical storage tanks.
PAINTING
09900-1
10/29l12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1.02 REFERENCES
�
�
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
G. SSPC-SP-1 through SSPC-SP-10 Surface Preparation Specifications
International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI)
A. ICRI CSP — 3 through ICRI CSP — 6 Concrete Surface Preparation
Standards.
12 1.03 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
15 shop drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's
16 specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surFace
17 preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections.
C. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer for review and approval
a complete Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and properly
notify and coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting operations
with these Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each surface to be
painted, the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the coverage and the
number of coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to achieve the specified
dry film thickness, and color charts. When the Schedule has been approved,
apply all material in strict accordance with the approved Schedule and the
manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gages shall be made available
to the Engineer to verify the proper application while work is in progress.
1.04 SPARE MATERIAL
A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used.
1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall submit a list of projects successfully completed during the past 3
years of similar projects. Contractor shall also supply record of Certificates of
Approval from Manufacturers to show they have completed technical product and
application training. Contractors shall submit a list of surface preparation and
application equipment sufficient to mix and apply the products specified.
PAINTING
09900-2 10/29l12
��
U
r �
�J
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
`22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the Tnemec
Company Inc., Carboline, PPG/Porter Coatings, and Sherwin Williams. The
painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of these products and
recommendations for applications. No brand other than those named will be
considered for approval, unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each
item in the following schedule, together with sufficient data substantiated by
certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to demonstrate its equality
to the paint(s) named, is submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval within
30 days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The type and number of
tests perFormed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken
containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch
number, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned,
and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable
materials and surFace and with the Engineer's approval before using.
C
C
Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer
to be compatible with the finish paints to be used.
No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil.
E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all
painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of
pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the buildings
shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing fixture shall be
used for this purpose.
F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and safety
of workmen shall be followed.
2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS
A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for structural
steel shall match that of existing connected structural steel.
B. The following surFaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied at
the dry film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting
systems listed below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require an
additional coat beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color coverage.
Non-submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings:
PAINTING
09900-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3Q
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
�
3
a
L�
Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 miis D.F.T.)
Carboline
1st Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Wifliams
1 st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
Submerged Concrete
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 — 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949
Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
d. Sherwin Williams
1St Coat : Cor Cote FRE (80-100 mils D.F.T
Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions)
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series 54-660- (80-100 sq. ft. per gal.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
3`d Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Sanitile 600/600TG (60-80 sq. ft. per gal.)
2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97-685/686 (40 to
80 sq. ft. per gal @ 12.0-24.0 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-4
10/29/12
i
•
•
�
�
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
�
�
..,
�
2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi-Gloss Polyamide Epoxy
Coating 97-130 Series. (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
Interior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted)
a. Tnemec
Regular CMU
2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75-100 SF/gallon/coat
Split face CMU
2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65-80 SF/gallon/coat
b. Carboline
CMU
1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB @ 60-80 SF/gallon
Split Face CMU
2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1 st coat @ 40-60 SF/gallon & 2nd
coat @ 80-120 SF/gallon
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: PPG/HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF per
gallon.
Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 —6.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0-12.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils D.F.T.)
Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series 104-1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy
Coating (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 104-Color High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy
Coating (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
'I 3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
7
0
�
Carboline
1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949
Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949
Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Cor-Cote HB 6.0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Cor-Cote HB 6.0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
Exterior non-submerged ferrous metals:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gtoss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0-4.0 mils (D.F.T.)
Interior non-submerged ferrous metals:
a
�
c.
Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
P PG/H PC
1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-6
10/29/ 12
•
•
�
U
�
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
�7'
10.
11
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mi(s
D.F.T.)
Exterior galvanized and non-ferrous metal:
a.
Q
Tnemec
1 st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline:
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Witliams
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: H-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mills D.F.T.)
Interior gatvanized and non-ferrous metals:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline:
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat:
D. F.T.)
2nd Coat:
D.F.T.)
Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
Galvanized and non-ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing:
:�
�.!
Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-7
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
12
13
14
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
2nd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
3rd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250°F:
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0.7 — 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2"d Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0.7 — 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450°F (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
or
1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400-1000°F (2.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: Speedhide InUExt Aluminum Paint 6-230. (1.0 -1.3 mils
D.F.T. per coat)
Insulated Pipe:
a.
b.
Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.}
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: PITT-TECH Interior/Exterior Satin DTM Industrial
Enamels 90-474 Series.(2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals:
a
Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-8
10/29/12
u
�
•
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
15
16
17.
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
Plastic Piping - Interior:
a
C
c.
Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 m�ls
D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
Plastic Piping - Exterior
�
0
Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mNls
D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mNls
D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Hi-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Hi-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T)
Interior Drywall and Plaster-Industrial Areas
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-9
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
18.
i�
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils DFT)
3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
Interior Drywall and Plaster-Office Areas
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 — 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
3�d Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
L �
c. PPG/HPC •
1St Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 6-2 (1 mil DFT)
2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6-411 (2 mils D.F.T. per
coat)
Interior Concrete Floors
a
Tnemec
1S' Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T>)
2"d Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 —10.0 mils D.F.T.)
Note: Apply 50 — 70 mesh silica sand at 5 Ibs. per 150 sq. ft.
between
1 st and 2"d coat to provide non-slip surface.
b. Carboline
1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
Note: Utilize 40-60 mesh silica sand to provide non-slip surface.
Consult with Carboline for application details.
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99-6639 (5.0 — 7.0 mils
D.F.T)
PAINTING
09900-10 10/29/12
•
C�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•47
48
��7
21
2nd Coat: Megaseal Self-Leveling Epoxy 99-6680 (10.0-12.0 mils
D.F.T.)
Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating
a. Tnemec
1 st Coat:
2nd COat:
Tnemec Series 434 Perma-Shield HZS (125 mils D.F.�'.)
Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze (12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat: Pfasite 5371 (125 mils)
2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Concrete Headworks)
1 st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils)
3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils)
C�
PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Manholes/Lift Stations-Force & Gravity Mains)
1 st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils)
3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils)
PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Concrete Headworks)
1 st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT)
2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT)
3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT)
PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Manholes/Lift Stations-Force & Gravity
Mains)
1 st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT)
2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT)
3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT)
Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: CorCote FRE (80-100 mils D.F.T)
Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive Environment
Special Coating
a
C
c
Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Shield H2S (30 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0-40.0 mils D.F.T.)
PPG/HPC/Polyspec
1 st Coat:
PAINTING
09900-11
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
22
23
2nd C08t:
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D.F.T)
Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite
a. Tnemec
1 st Coat:
2nd C08t:
Series 61-5002 Tenemeliner (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
Series 61-5001 Tenemeliner (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 st Coat: Semstone 800 primer
Finish Coats: Semstone 870
(Reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details)
c. PPG/HPC/Polyspec
1 st Coat:
Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating)
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
2"a Coat: Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
b. Carboline
1St Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
2"a Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
c. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Tar-Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Tar-Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T)
C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically excepted
shall be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with materials
consistent with these Specifications. The Engineer shall select which of the
manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or not, shall be
used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be made for this
painting.
2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT
•
�
A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed
conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquid and semi-
liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings,
junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating accessories that are •
integral to be whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit system.
PAINTING
09900-12
10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4Q
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color Coding Schedules attached at the
end of this Section.
B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and
with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to,
but not including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the
flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe system
is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shalf be painted the same color as
the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color
Coding Schedute.
C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating fram
the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted
befinreen and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the
equipment.
2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES
A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each pipeli�e
and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids. Titles shall
be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be located more than
twenty (20) linear feet apart and shall also appear directly adjacent to each side
of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side of the valve regulatar,
flowcheck, strainer clean-out, and all pieces of equipment.
B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title locations
shall be determined by the Engineer but, in general, they shall be placed where
the view is unobstructed and on the finro lower quarters of pipe or covering where
they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from operating positions
especially those adjacent to control valves.
C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible, or
at the uppermost broad vertical surFace of low equipment. Where more than one
piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered
consecutively, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as directed by the
Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles shall be composed
and justified on the left hand side as follows: Pump No. 1.
D. Application of titles.
The color of the titles shall be black or white, as approved, to best contrast
with the color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil applied.
2. Stencil text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the
Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line.
PAINTING
09900-13
10/29112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
3. Letter sizes.
Outside Diameter
of Pipe or
Coverinq (inches)
3/4 to 1-1 /4
1-1 /2 to 2
2-1 /2 to 6
8 to 10
More than 10
Size of Legend
Letters (inches)
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
2-1/2
3-1/2
Equipment titles are to be two inches high.
4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or
covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2"a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow
head shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a." Maximum "a"
dimension shall be 6 inches.
5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers
and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a
double-headed directional flow.
2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and
shop or field finished.
B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material prior
to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall have been
improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications shall have been
used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white metal and re-primed
in accordance with these Specifications.
C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance
with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in accordance with these
Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified prime coat at no additional
cost to the Owner.
D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots
retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint
coats in the field.
E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect the
shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other cause.
PAINTING
09900-14
10/29/12
•
•
�
U
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
F. A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a field
applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat does not
give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar nature,
prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed by the
Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. Subnnit
to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is compatible with the
specified finish coat.
G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all motors,
drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to
contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Sectian
09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given to
thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks befare
application of finish.
B. All metal wefds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in accordarnce
with SSPGSP-3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by hand cleanir�g
in accordance with SSPC-SP-2. All pits and dents shall be filled and all
imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for paintirag.
All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed by use of approved
solvents, wire brushing or sanding.
C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Repart
unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of dust,
oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surFaces shall have
any laitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings usimg
captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface tensile
strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D-4541 standard. Testing is required to
confirm this strength using ASTM D-4541 standard and methods. Surface profile
shall be CSP-3 to CSP-6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete Repair Institute)
standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing an anchor profile
equal to 60-grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete surfaces by mechanical
(captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired profile. Moisture Vapor
Transmission should be 3 pounds or less per 1,000 square feet over 24 haur
timeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride test as per ASTM E-1907.
Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM F-2170, should confi�rn
concrete RH results < 75%. Application of coatings and linings should be made
when out gassing of concrete is declining during periods when surface
temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface thermometer to
determine when surface temperatures are falling is required. When in doubt,
double priming may be required. All surface irregularities, cracks, expansion
PAINTING
09900-15 10/29/12
1 joints and control joints should be properly addressed prior to application of
2 coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and contaminated surface layers
3 prior to application of coatings and linings.
4
5 D. Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence,
6 chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E.
F
All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting.
Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surFace. All encrustations
shall be removed.
G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed locations.
Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in accordance
with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is inadvertently
installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before priming and
painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall have the gap
between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component polysulfide sealant to
prevent rust stains.
.
H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated
surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All nonferrous
metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be done in �
accordance with SSPC-SP-1, Solvent Cleaning.
Shop-Finished Surfaces: All shop-coated surfaces shall be protected from
damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas
immediately upon detection. Abraded orcorroded spots on shop-coated surfaces
shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same materials as the
shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, discolored, or which
require more than minor touch-up, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall receive
new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut edges of galvanized sheets
and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized piping, electrical conduit and
metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished painted, shall be "Solvent Cleaned"
and primed with zinc dust-zinc oxide metal primer.
J. Galvanized and Zinc-Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted shall
be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such surfaces not to
be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per SSPC-SP7
galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion.
K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one shop
coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt
paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC-SP7 of galvanized surfaces to insure optimum
coating adhesion.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
PAINTING
09900-16
10/29/12
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
. 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
A. General:
Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surFace shall, in general, be
as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint
manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition will
be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted areas
on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. Finished
repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee specified for
remainder of work.
2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in
strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all
painting shall be equal in quality to the approved samples. Finished areas
shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of
workmanship. Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the
satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not
satisfactory.
3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings and
accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations.
Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact
with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove
all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and
replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates and all
machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or spattered paint
shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is
being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage
during the operation and until the finished job is accepted.
4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the
manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If
material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the
coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted
material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the manufacturer
shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when
applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be
corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On masonry,
application rates will vary according to surface texture, however, in no
case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On
porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a
protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or
by applying additional coats of paint.
5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All paints
shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred while using.
No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added to any paint.
PAINTING
09900-17 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
:
C
C�
Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be
employed where required.
Field Priming:
Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and
other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not
require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be
painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather,
and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the painting
schedule.
2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked-on enamel finish or
with a standard factory finish shall normally be field painted unless the
prefinished equipment is specifically color selected and unless the finish
has not been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces that have
been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the shop coats or
coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and retouched
before any successive painting is done on them in the field. All such field
painting shall match as nearly as possible the original finish.
Field Painting:
All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting.
2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting
shall be done when the temperature is below 50°F, in dust-laden air, when
rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely
disappeared from the surface to be painted.
3. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily
distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the
approximate shade of the finished coat.
4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities.
Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00
sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even surface.
Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all exterior trim shall
be back-primed before installation.
5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly
manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry
paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by structure.
Materials subject to weathering shalt be prime coated as quickly as
possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after
erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.
PAINTING
09900-18 10/29/12
r�
��
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specificaNly
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
damage caused by overspray or drifting.
7. All surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting is
to be done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if
necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint
shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's
directions.
8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall be
cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer.
9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar or
asphalt-compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG/HPC PITT-
GUARDO Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95-2328 or equal before successive
coats are applied per the schedule. Tnemec recommends using 66
Hi-Build Epoxoline over tar, but a test patch must be run initially to test the
paint's compatibility with the tar. Carboline does not recommend
application of their coatings over tar. Instead, Carboline recommends
removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable coatings based an
the substrate and intended service application.
3.03 CLEANUP
3.04
A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste material
and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting
remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from and about
the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly specified.
B. Upon completion, remove all paint
splattered on all surfaces, including
leaving the work ready for inspection
where it has been spilled, splashed or
floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc.,
C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed
metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the
work, the entire job left clean and acceptable to the Engineer.
INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES
A. Inspection
All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to assure
proper performance and compliance with the specifications.
2. The Engineer shall be advised of the proper time to inspect surFace
PAINTING
09900-19 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
�
preparation, prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor shall
appty additional coats only after the previous coat has been approved by
the Engineer or Owner's representative.
Testing
The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing
equipment. Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order.
Equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers'
instructions or as directed by the Engineer.
a. Slinq Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings
shall be taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings
shall be taken at the start of the mornings work, mid day and
afternoon. Should environmental conditions change, additional
reading shall be taken to assure that coatings are being applied
under the conditions as outlined by the coatings manufacturer.
b. Surface Temperature Thermometer: SurFace temperatures shall be
taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface
temperature shall be that as specified by the coatings
manufacturer.
c. Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X-Course Replica Tape shall
be employed to determine the surface profile of blasted surfaces.
Surface profile shall be as specified.
d. Dry Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading
shall be taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's
instructions) Type 1(magnetic) or Type 2(electromagnetic)
instrument. Dry film thickness reading will be taken and recorded
in the in a frequency and manner as dictated by the Engineer.
e. Holidav Detection: After completion of immersion coating systems
on steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected in
accordance with ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection. Holiday
detector shall be a Tinker & Rasor Model M-1 or equal. Areas
found to have holidays shall be marked and repaired in accordance
with the paint manufacturer's instructions. The Engineer shall be
notified of time of testing so that he might be present to witness
testing. The Contractor shall provide ladders, rigging, etc. as
necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check paint thickness of
each coat.
3.05 PAINT
A. General Notes & Guidelines:
PAINTING
09900-20
10/29/12
�
�
CJ
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
E
All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors of
specified equal manufacturers may be substituted with approval of the
Engineer.
Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be
assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part of
the Contract.
3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall consist
of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through
lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids or semi-liquids,
including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings,
junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which
are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and etectrical conduit
systems.
4. The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows:
�
0
COLORS
White
Ivory
Red
L. Green
Green
D. Green
COLORS
L. Brown
Brown
Bronze
L. Gray
M. Gray
D. Gray
TNEMEC #
11WH
01 BR
06SF
52GN
09SF
08SF
TNEMEC #
06BR
84BR
86BR
31GR
33GR
34GR
COLORS
Tank Blue
Blue
D. Blue
L. Btue
Aqua
COLORS
Inter. Orange
Orange
Tan
Yellow
Safety Yellow
TNEMEC #
25BL
11SF
78BL
26BL
10GN
TNEMEC #
05SF
04SF
04BR
03SF
02SF
All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are
potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF.
All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards.
7. All in-line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall
be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be
painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached to
pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. Tanks shall be
painted the color of the piping system that they serve, unless the tank is
fiberglass or polyethylene.
8. All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface.
PAINTING
09900-21
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
�
10
Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish
Schedule, or as selected by the Engineer.
Control panels shall be factory finished.
3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION
A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of
the project.
B. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary date
and shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating system
shalf be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Should a
failure occur to 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior, the entire
surface shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with these specifications.
3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE
Pipinq and Leqend Color Bands
Backwash Waste Light Brown
Blower Air Green Orange
Coagulant Aqua
Compressed Air Dark Green Red
Drains Black
Fuel Red White
Potable Water Dark Blue
Process Sample Light Grey Red
Reclaimed Effluent Pantone Purple 522C
Return Activated Sludge Brown
Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow
Sprinkler Red
Thickened Sludge Dark Brown Orange
Wastewater Dark Gray
Waste Activated Sludge White
Equipment and Buildinq Color
Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans Match System
Interior Equipment and Pumps Match System
(including factory finished)
Structural Steel (Interior) White
Ceiling White
Cranes and Hoists Yellow
Ductwork Match Surface Mounted
Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment Match Surface Mounted
Valve and Gate Operators Match System
Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes Match SurFace Mounted
Submerged Concrete Black
PAINTING
09900-22
10/29/12
�
�
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
�
•
3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE
�
!:
All visible ferrous piping, valves, supports, and appurtenances shall be
painted in accordance with the specifications.
The generator radiator, support structure, exterior piping and associated
supports shall be painted in accordance with the specifications.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09900-23
10/29/12
�
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PAINTING
09900-24
10/29/12
U
u
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
SECTION 11307
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This specification is applicable to Lift Station 33 (LS 33), however portions of this
specification also pertain to LS 42. The Contractor shall comply with the
specifications pertinent to each LS, as applicable or as directed by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to construct and
install complete, automatic, underground pumping station with submersible
pumps and factory-built equipment installed in a fiberglass reinforced plastic
(FRP) wet well and shall furnish and install an FRP valve vault complete with all
pipe, valves, and fittings. The FRP wet well and valve vault shall be pre-piped
package units from a single vendor and shall include the items specified herein.
C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to design furnish,
install, startup, operate, and maintain a sewage bypass system as necessary
during the proposed construction. The bypass pumping system shall be as
specified in Section 13567.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any wastewater spills during the bypass
operation and pay any and all fines, fees, property damage, environmental
damage and cleanup costs that are associated with wastewater spills. The
Contractor is responsible for providing by-pass pumps that will not create a
nuisance.
E. Principal items of equipment to be included with the Submersible Wastewater
Pump Station include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. FRP pre-piped wet well, bolt on lid with access hatches and fall protectian;
2. FRP pre-piped valve vault with bolt on lid and access hatches;
3. Two installed pumps;
4. One spare pump;
5. Valves and piping;
6. Wet well water level sensor (4-20 mA pressure transducer);
7. Pump controller and RTU (DataFlow TCU);
8. Floats for backup pump control;
9. Flygt Pumps;
10. Flygt Control Panel;
11. DataFlow SCADA system; and,
12. DataFlow radio antenna and tower.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F. The pump station site shall have area lighting as specified and shown on the
electrical drawings. Lighting to be controlled by a switch located as designated
by the City. All area lighting shall be installed a minimum of ten (10) feet above
ground as designated by the City. Area aesthetics will be the primary
consideration for area lighting detail.
G. The pump station site shall be provided with appropriate access as shown on the
drawings.
1.02 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire installation, labor and materials for
eighteen (18) months after Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall repair or
furnish without charge any part or parts that prove to be defective within the
guarantee period.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including arrangement and erection
drawings of the equipment, and equipment operating characteristics. Include the
folfowing:
�
C.
•
1. Pump performance curves. Draw the curves for the specified conditions •
including those at reduced speed. Plot head, input kilowatts and overall
efficiency as a function of capacity from zero to maximum capacity.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General arrangement drawings of the pumping unit, base elbow and guide
rail system. Include equipment weight and anchor methods and materials.
Cross section drawing of pumping unit.
Parts list with materials of construction identified.
Motor performance characteristics.
Spare parts list.
Local Control Panel: Complete master wiring diagrams and control schematics
shall be furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture.
Operation and Maintenance: Submit the Operation and Maintenance manuals for
the pumping equipment.
1.04 SPARE PARTS
A. One (1) 24VDC power supply.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-2
10/29/12
•
•
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
.
�
Fuses: Ten (10) of each size and type used.
Relays: Ten (10) of each type used.
Spare parts shall be properly marked and protected for long periods of storage
and packed in a plastic box that is clearly identified with indelible markings as to
the contents.
PART 2 —PRODUCTS
2.01 FRP WET WELL AND VALVE VAULT
Q
:
C.
General
Fiberglass reinforced polyester wefinrell and valve vault shall be
manufactured from commercial grade polyester resin or vinyl ester resin,
with fiberglass reinforcements. The resin system shall be suitable for
atmospheres containing hydrogen sulfide and dilute sulfuric acid as well
as other gases typically associated with the wastewater collection and
pumping systems.
Materials
Resin: The resins used shall be a commercial grade unsaturated polyester
resin.
2. Reinforcing Materaials: The reinforcing materials shall be commercial
Grade "E" type glass in the form of mat, continuous roving, chopped
roving, roving fabric or a combination of the above, having a coupling
agent that will provide a suitable bond between the glass reinforcement
and the resin.
3. Surfacing Materials: If reinforcing materials are used on the surface
exposed to the contained substance, it shall be a commercial grade
chemical-resistant glass thatwitl provide a suitable bond with the resin and
leave a resin rich surface.
4. Fillers and Additives: Fillers, when used, shall be inert to the environment
and wetwell construction. Additives, such as thixotropic agents, catalysts,
promoters, etc., may be added as required by the specific manufacturing
process to be used. The resulting reinforced plastic material must meet
the requirement of this specification.
FABRICATION:
Exterior Surface: The exterior surFace shall be relatively smooth with no
sharp projections. Handwork finish is acceptable if enough resin is
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
❑�
present to eliminate fiber show. The exterior surface shall be free of
blisters, delamination and fiber show. For a UV inhibitor the resin on the
exterior surface of the manhole shall have gray pigment added for a
minimum thickness .125 inches.
2. Interior Surface: The interior surface shall be resin rich with no exposed
fibers. The surface shall be free of grazing, delamination, blisters,
wrinkles, and surface pits.
3. Fiberglass Reinforced Bottom: The bottom to be fabricated using the same
materials as the walls and installation to meet all physical requirements.
The bottom shall be custom fabricated to accept the pump base elbow.
The base elbows shall fit over integral stainless steel bolts/studs which
have been welded to a 1/4" thick stainless steel plate mounted on the
outside of the bottom. The plate shall be molded onto the bottom with
glass and resin such that the stainless steel is not visible from the outside.
The wet well shall meet ASTM.-D3299 specifications. When
reinforcement is necessary for strength, the reinforcement shall be
fiberglass channel laminated to wefinrell bottom per A.S.T.M.-D3299.
•
4. Integral Internal Fiberglass Fillet: The fiberglass wet well and valve vault
shall have an internal stoped fillet bottom. The fillet shall be constructed of
the same fiberglass material as the walls and the base and shalf be •
integral to the structure. The fiberglass fillet shall have a 1:1 slope and
shall not interfere with pump mounting.
5. Top: The top of the wet well and the valve vault shall be flanged and
drilled as required for bolting.
6. Pipe and Conduit Penetrations: Influent, pump discharge, force main,
drain line and conduit penetrations shall be integrally molded fiberglass
hubs and shall be factory installed. The hubs shall be sized and molded to
accept segmented rubber wall seals (Link Seal, or equivalent) suitable for
the materials and sizes of the penetrations and shown on the drawings.
The penetrations shall comply with ASTM - D3299 specifications.
DEFECTS NOT PERMITTED:
1. Exposed fibers: glass fibers not wet out with resin.
2. Resin runs: runs of resin and sand on the surface.
3. Dry areas: areas with glass not wet out with resin.
4. Delamination: separation in the laminate.
5. Blisters: light colored areas larger than 1/4 inch in diameter.
6. Crazing: cracks caused by sharp objects.
7. Pits or Voids: air pockets.
8. Wrinkles: smooth irregularities in the surface.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-4
10/29/12
•
�
�
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E.
F
�
_
Sharp projection: fiber or resin projections necessitating gloves far
handling.
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Load Rating: The wet well and valve vault shall have a minimum dynamic-
load rating of 16,000 ft-Ibs when tested in accordance with Section 2.01 F.
To establish this rating, the complete wet well shall not leak, crack, or
suffer other damage when load tested to 40,000 ft-Ibs and shall not deflect
vertically downward more than 1/4 inch at the point of load application
when loaded to 24,000 Ibs.
2. Stiffness: The wet well cylinder shall have a minimum pipe-stiffness value
shown in Table 1 when tested in accordance with Section 2.01 F.
TABLE #1 STIFFNESS REQUIREMENTS
LENGTH - FT
10to20
21 to 30
31 to 40
3. Physical Properties:
1. Tensile Strength (psi)
2. Tensile Modules (psi)
3. Flexural Strength (psi)
4. Flexural Modules (psi)
(no ribs - 48", 60", 72"}
(with ribs - 96", 144")
F/AY - PSI
2.01
3.02
5.24
HOOP
DIRECTION
18,000
0.8 x 106
26, 000
1.4 x 106
0.7 x 106
AXIAL
DIRECTION
5, 000
0.7 x 106
4, 500
0.7 x 106
0.7 x 106
TEST METHODS: Tests shall be performed as specified in ASTM - D3753, latest
edition, Section 8.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Pumps
1. The pumps shall be capable of handling raw, unscreened sewage. The
design shall be such that the pumps shall be automatically connected to
the discharge piping when lowered into place. The pumps shall be easily
removable for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts or other
fasteners to be removed for this purpose.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-5 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Each pump shall be fitted with a lifting lug, bracket, or other approved
device of adequate strength and length to permit raising the pump for
inspection and removal.
3. The starter casing, oil/air casing and impeller shall be of grey iron
construction and all parts coming into contact with sewage shall be
protected by a coat of rubber-asphalt paint. All external bolts and nuts
shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The impeller shall be protected by a
rotating stainless steel or bronze wear ring and stationary neoprene "O"
ring at the inlet of the pump. The impeller shall be of a single vane,
nonclog design, capable of passing solids, fibrous material, and heavy
sludge, and constructed with long throughway with no acute turns.
4. Each pump shatl be provided with a tandem double mechanical seal
running in an oil reservoir, composed of finro separate lapped face seals,
each consisting of one stationary and one rotating tungsten-carbide ring
with each pair held in contact by a separate spring, so that the outside
pressure assists spring compression in preventing the seal faces from
opening. The compression spring shall be protected against exposure to
the pumped liquid. The pumped liquid shall be sealed from the oil
reservoir by one face seal and the oil reservoir from the motor chamber by
the other, as required. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor
adjustment, and shall be easily replaced.
5. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pumping unit and
the pump casing shall have a machined angle connection with yoke to
connect with the cast iron discharge connection, which shall be bolted to
the floor of the sump and so designed as to receive the pump angle
connection without the need of any bolts or nuts. The anchoring of the
pump to the wet well floor shall include any pad or pedestal to allow
unimpeded flow to the impeller per the recommendation and detail of the
pump manufacturer.
6. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be
accomplished by a simple linear downward motion of the pump with the
entire weight of the pumping unit guided to and wedging tightly against the
angled discharge connection; no portion of the pump shall beardirectly on
the floor of the sump and no rotary motion of the pump shall be required
for sealing.
7. The pump motor shall be housed in watertight casing and shall have Class
F insulated moisture resistant windings. Pump motors shall have cooling
characteristics suitable to permit continuous operation in a totally, partially
or non-submerged condition. The pump shall be capable of running dry in
a totally dry condition for extended periods under full load without damage.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-6 10/29/12
�
•
�
U
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
Q
L
L�]
Pumps and Motors
All sewage pumps shall be Flygt CP-Series Model 3102 with flush valve
installed, with 230 volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle motors. Impellers shall be
capable of passing a three inch sphere and delivering 250 gpm at 26 feet
TDH using a maximum 5 HP, 1750 rpm motor.
Access Frame and Guide Bars
An aluminum access frame, complete with checkered aluminum doars
rated at three hundred (300) pounds per square foot, shall be furnished by
the wet well manufacturer unless conditions, i.e. vehicle loading, ettc,
require a higher load rating door. Stainless steel door hinges shall be
recessed and vandalproof; hasp will be fabricated of round bar stock
mounted vertically and drilled to accept a padlock. A fall prevention
system shall be incorporated into the access frame.
2. Doors over fifty (50} pounds in pull-weight shall be torsion bar loaded, with
a locking safety handle to hold them in the open position. In the open
position, valve pit and wet well doors shall provide a clear opening to allaw
for service and removal of equipment (including pumps with mix flush
valves). The upper guide and cable holder shall be furnished and securely
mounted to the opening using 3/8-inch x 2'/4-inch long 316 stainless st�el
wedge anchors. Two stainless steel pump guide bars (SAE 304, schedule
40) of a size shown on the drawings or recommended by the pump
manufacturer, shall be furnished for each pump and shall be of adequate
length to extend from the lower guide holders on the pump discharge
connection to the upper guide holder mounted on the access frame using
3/8" X 21 /4" long 316 stainless steel wedge anchors. Guide rails shall be
welded together and ground smooth at the joint(s) if more then one piece.
Valves and Piping
Valves shall be as specified in Section 15100 and as shown on the
drawings. Valves in vaults shall have flanged connections with a hand
wheel operator. Buried valves shall have mechanical joint connections
with a two-inch operating nut, supplied with a valve box, bronze
identification disk and concrete valve box collar.
2. Where shown on the drawings, discharge piping shall be Sch. 40 316L
flanged stainless steel.
3. Discharge piping shall have two 1/2-inch stainless steel ball valves
installed to permit pump performance testing. The ball valves shall be
installed upstream of the pump discharge check valves. 0-50 psi stainless
steel pressure gauges shall be installed downstream of the ball valves.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
4. All hardware (bolts/nuts) on flange-by-flange piping shall be 316 stainless
steel assembled with a metal specific anti seize compound.
E. LS-33 Control Panel Specifications
The control panel enclosure shall be 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X with a
polished aluminum dead front inner door. The dead front shall be
mounted on a stainless steel continuous hinge (piano) mounted with pop
rivets, with a positive mechanical quarter-turn handle catch and shall open
at least ninety (90) degrees. A method of holding the dead front door in
the open position shall be provided. A method of securing a standard
padlock for locking the cabinet outer door shall be provided. All panels
shall be equipped with stainless steel wire terminals.
2. The dead front door shall contain the following labeled components and
indicators as shown on the Drawings and as specified below:
18 LED Level Indicator Readout Display
19 Overload Reset Pushbuttons
20 Pump Fault Red Alarm Pilot Lights
21 Alarm Horn Silence Pushbutton
22 Phase Monitor Test Switch
23 Green Watchdog Activated Pilot Light
24 20 amp GFI receptacle
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
3. The dead front door shall be modified for installation of the DFS TAC PAC
RTU specified in Section 13600. The Contractor shall be responsible for
furnishing and installing all I/O and components required to provide the
controls as specified herein and in Section 13600.
4. The Control Strategy for LS-33 shall be a"pre-packaged" control algorithm
for a duplex tift station using lead/lag pump controls from the DFS TAC
PAC. The starting and stopping of the pumps shall be via a 4-20mA level
pressure transducer provided by the pump manufacturer. Floats shall be
furnished and wired to provide the control described in Section 13600.
5. Any ancillary software programming required for a complete and
operational system shall be furnished by DFS at no additional cost to the
Owner.
6. A male Russell Stoll FCF 3144R 480V 200A generator receptacle shall be
mounted on the side of the control cabinet in the down position. Main
circuit breaker and Emergency generator circuit breaker shall be
interlocked to prevent back feed. All circuit breakers shall be Square D
FAL series or larger as required, and sized for the available power
company fault current. Where a"high" leg service exists, it shall be
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-8 10/29/12
�
U
�
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
connected to the "B" phase of the main breaker. Most applications will be
duplex pumps unless otherwise specified.
7. The motor starter sub panel shall contain Square D Model #8536 (Type P
starters are not acceptable) across-the-line NEMA-rated magnetic starters
with individual thermal overload protection on each leg and one hundred
120 volt coil control. "i-line components" are not acceptable. All control
wiring shall be surface mounted, void of splices, have appropriate color
coded or numbered terminal ends, sized 14 minimum, type THHN or
equivalent, rated for six hundred (600) volts, stranded tinned copper
conductor colors are as follows:
a. 120V-A/C
Blue-Hot
White — Neutral
b. 24V-A/C
Orange — Hot
Grey — Neutral
c. 12V D/C
Red — Positive
Black — Negative
d. Green — Ground
e. Diversified Electronics - Pump Alternator Only
Brown — 1 Input
Yellow — Common Input
RTU colors are per the City standards.
8. Control relays shall be 8 pin plug-in type with a LED pilot light to indicate
when energized. Relay sockets shall be surface mounted. 120V to 24
volt step down transformers shall be rated 0.075KVA, minimum, and
primary and secondary fused. Alternators shall be Diversified Electronics
solid state 8 pin plug-in type with indicator LED's, a switch to select
automatic or lead pump operation, and a test switch_ A battery alarm
system (Sta-Con B.O.A.C.) shall be provided in the panel. A red-flashing
light and an audible alarm (wheel-lock model #EH-EL2) compatible with
the Sta-Con alarm system. Alarm horn and light shall be mounted on site
for optimum placement. An outside horn cancel button shall be installed to
annunciate on power failure.
9. All three-phase panels shall have an electronic solid state phase monitor
and use pin wiring configuration as follows: 240 volt systems shall use the
Diversified Electronics 8 pin plug-in type; 480 volt systems shall use
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-9 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
hardwired surface mounted unit. The loss of any phase shall actuate the
battery alarm and open the 120 volt neutral. This phase loss shall
disconnect the 120 volt neutral from the 120 volt control section.
10. Control circuitry shall be designed as per Clearwater Utilities standards. A
solid state lightning surge protector with a clamping time of ten (10)
nanoseconds shall be Innovative Technologies XT40 (230V, 1 Ph), XT40
(230V, 3ph) or XT40 (480V, 3ph) or EQX80 and be weatherproof for
external mounting. The surge protector shall be mounted on the outside
of the disconnect control panel on the load side. A NEMA 4X stainless
steel, fusible, horsepower rated disconnect switch shall be provided and
drilled for padlock security in the "OFF" position. The disconnect switch
shall isolate the non-fusable utility power from the control panel. A second
disconnect of same type and size shall be furnished and installed before
the meter. An 11" x 17" schematic and pump data sheet shall be
permanently affixed to the interior of the enclosed door. Lamination shall
be provided to protect the data sheet. A stainless steel NEMA 4x junction
box (minimum 14" x 12" x 6" and a minimum 24" x 24" x 8" for 20 H.P. and
larger) with bottom or side hinged cover shall be installed between the
control panel and the wet well. It shall house the terminal strip, which shall
be stainless steel, mounted on an aluminum din rail, for pump, float, RTU
and sensor connections (24). There shall be twelve (12) inches minimum
clearance between the bottom of the junction box and slab top elevation.
11. The control panel and the junction box shall be connected by means of a
1-1/2-inch (minimum size) conduitwith appropriately sized in-line gas seal-
off. Myers Hub or other similar, reusable, water-proof fitting shall be
installed where any conduit enters the top or side of any box. The junction
box shall have one 2-inch PVC (minimum size) conduit for each pump,
and two 2-inch PVC (minimum size) conduits for the floats. All conduits
between the junction box and the wet well shall be sealed with duct seal or
approved equal. Re-usable butterfly clamps shall be used in the junction
box to secure motor, float and level controller leads. The control panel and
disconnect switch shall be mounted plumb on finro 6" x 6" x 10' (minimum)
pre-cast concrete posts buried three feet in the ground. The overall length
of the post shall be determined by the size of the panel and the three feet
minimum distance required between the bottom of the panel and slab top
elevation. All mounting hardware shall be of 316 stainless steel
construction. If UNI-STRUT is used, it shall be of 316 stainless steel
construction. Larger than 20 H.P. applications shall have conduit for pump
cable sized so that the cable does not occupy more than twenty-five (25)
percent of the conduit.
12. All stand alone (pedestal mounted) panels shall have 304 stainless steel
Uni-strut welded to the rear of the panel to support meter can, fusible
disconnect, and junction box. In addition the pedestal mounted panel shall
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-10 10/29/12
•
•
•
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•
be securely anchored to a six inch thick, 3500 psi concrete slab that is
reinforced with #4 bars at eight inches on center, each way.
13. All grounding grids (delta) shall consist of a minimum of three each 5/8-
inch, copper-clad steel sectional ground rods, which are compression-
coupled. The depth of all ground rods will be determined by a using IEEE
"Fall of Potential Method" and shall be so noted on a Certified Ground
Test Document, which shall be provided by the instatler. Ground
resistance shall test at or below 10 OHMS, un-bonded. All conductors
shall consist of copper ropelay cable composed of a minimum of twenty-
eight (28) strands of 14 gauge wire weighing not less than 375 pounds per
1,000 feet.
14. All ground grid system connections shall be made using the exothermic
process, CADWELD, or other approved equal manufacturer. All
underground connections shall be via exothermic welding. All structures
shall be bonded to the closest electric service ground via the main size
conductor and/or a water service pipe. The bonding shall be
accomplished to achieve equal potential of all grounds. Delta grids shall
be tested without the service and water main connection, and documented
as such, and then connection to service and water main can be made.
The ground resistance of the completed system shall be measured, arid
listed on the Certified Ground Test Document.
15. All conductors, other than those supplied from the power company, shall
be 600 volt rated stranded copper THHN insulation or equivalent and be
run in PVC conduit or as per code requirements. The service conductors
shall have amp ratings that meet or exceed the main breaker amp rating.
All utility services, not supplied by the power company, shall be supplied
by the contractor and shall be underground in conduit.
16. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify power company requirements
prior to ordering equipment and beginning any work. All workmanship
shall be done in a professional manner and will meet all NEC and NEMA
codes. The enclosure and components shall be UL approved.
17. A minimum of twenty four (24) din rail mounted RTU terminals shall be
supplied and mounted vertically as close to bottom center of cabinet as
possible. Above the terminals shall be seven RTU relays mounted and
wired as per the supplied prints.
18. RTU requirements shall be the standard City of Clearwater Pump Statian
DataFlow Telemetry Control Unit (TCU) with an antenna.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-11 10/29/'R 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F
G.
T
�
Level Transducer
A submersible level transmitter shall be provided to sense the liquid level
of the wetwell at the location as shown on Drawings and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. One (1) level transducer shall
be furnished and installed at LS 33 and one (1) level transducer shall be
furnished and installed at LS 42.
2. The transducer housing shalf be fabricated of PVC with a 2.5" diameter
Teflon diaphragm. Silicone oil shall be used as a hydraulic fill. The
sensor shall be mounted using its signal cable and have 3/4" NPT pipe
threading for pipe mounting. The internal air pressure of the sensor
assembly shall be relieved to atmospheric pressure through a sealed
breather system. The cable length shall be of sufficient length to connect
to the level transducer to the control panel.
3. The transmitter shall be a 4-ZO mA DC, 2 wire, 10-30 VDC loop-powered
type, with its output signal directly proportional to the measured level
excursion. The transducer shall be UL 508 listed. The sensor shall be UL
913 listed as intrinsically safe. The transducer shall be a CONTEGRA
Model SLX 130-MIS with the optional breather system included. Stainfess
steel cable/cord grip assemblies shall be provided to allow installation of
transducer to be hung on a hook.
4. For each level transmitter, furnish and install a LED Readout display to
display level in wet well. LED readout display shall be as manufactured by
Red Lion or equal.
5. Provide a 24DC power supply as manufactured by Phoenix Contact Quint
series, for any instrumentation requiring 24VDC power.
6. For all 4-20mA field instruments, the Contractor shall provide
transient/surge protectors as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, Inc
Surgetrab series or Phoenix Contact, Inc PT series in panels.
Float Switches
The Contractor shall furnish and install four (4) float switciies for LS 33
(lead on, lag on, high alarm, all pumps offl and five (5) float switches (lead
on, lag on, lag-lag on, high alarm, all pumps off ) for LS 42.
2. Float switches shall be as manufactured by Flygt model ENM-10.
MixinglFlushing
•
��
U
A mixing and/or flushing capability shall be installed such that the wet well �
is mixed every time a pump comes on.
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-12 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
Wiring
The pump station shall be factory wired for the electric service to the
central control panel and either a 100 amp or 200 amp (sized as required)
fusible disconnect switch in a stainless steel rain tight enclosure to be
located befinreen the electric meter and the control panel of all 230 volt
electrical services and a stainless steel rain tight enclosure to be located
on each side of the electric meter of all 460 volt electrical services. A
stainless steel junction box with stainless steel terminal strip shall be
furnished and installed between the control panel and wefinrell. All wiring
shall be copper. All conductors shall be color coded 4 AWG or larger 600
volt type THW and shall be run in PVC conduit.
J. Painting
Surfaces shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900.
K. Startup Testing
The completed pump station shall be started and tested in accordanre
with Section 01625. A written report of the actual test shall be provided
showing pump capacities, control settings, motor amperage and voltage,
accessory operation and thorough visual inspection noted herein.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
�
:
At LS 33 all pipe penetrations shall be of integral fiberglass hub designed for use
with a link seal.
LS 33 Wet Well and Valve Vault Installation
1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary
or incidental to the installation of the pump station and wet well, including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Clearing, topsoil removal, disposal of excess excavation, supplying
of any borrow replacement of topsoil and sod.
Shoring and bracing where necessary.
Keeping the excavation dry at all times.
Providing any ballast concrete that may be required.
e. Backfilling by compacting twelve inch layers of approved materials
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-13 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
f
Q
h
simultaneously on all sides of the structures.
Providing electrical service feeders with NEMA 4X fused main
disconnect located per code requirements.
Grading, restoration, and access road preparation shall be required
for the entire pump station site.
The access road shall be prepared as shown on the drawings.
Installation of all equipment and materials shall be in accordance
with manufacturer's requirements.
k. All gravity inflow pipes shall be installed with a PVC Bowl Drop
facing downward with a drop pipe to a depth specified during the
plan review process.
Pipe Penetrations: Penetrations through the wefinrell and valve vault
walls shall be integral to the structures and installed at the factory.
3.02 INITIAL START-UP AND OPERATOR INSTRUCTION
n
�
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory-trained service technician •
for one day of initial start-up and operator instruction.
END OF SECTION
SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMPING STATION
11307-14 10/29/12
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 11516
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to design, install,
place in operation, and field test one (1) fully integrated and operational biological
odor control system as specified herein to perform the intended function of
controlling odors in a domestic wastewater lift station.
B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is
required, but do not cover all details, which will vary in accordance with the
equipment supplied. It is, however, intended to cover furnishing, shop testing,
delivery, complete installation, and field testing of all materiats, equipment and
appurtenances for the complete odor control system as herein specified, whether
specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not.
C. The odor control system Manufacturer shall design and furnish all labor,
materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide a system, complete with
controls and accessories, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
�❑
E
The Contractor shall install the equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
The Contractor shall test the system to ensure full conformance to the
specifications.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for operating and maintaining the equipment
until such time as the Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of tp�e
Engineer that the system has met the stated removal efficiencies identified in
these specifications for not less than not less than fourteen (14) consecutive
days. The Owner will supply all utilities required to operate the system during this
time. The Contractor shall be responsible for all other operations, maintenance,
and testing expenses during this time.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. The odor control system shall include, but not be limited to, a complete,
packaged, finro-stage, biological absorption/adsorption system of unitary
construction that shall inc{ude, but not be limited to, an FRP vessel, a spray water
system including nozzles, two independent stages of inorganic treatment media,
moisture controls, a nutrient supply system, an air supply fan, interconnecting
ducting, instrumentation, a control panel, and all necessary accessories to
provide a complete functioning system.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-1 10/29l12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
B. The system shall be a once-through, pre-piped, pre-wired, and packaged unit
with two integral treatment stages, incoming foul air fan, valves, fittings, ducfinrork,
and all other equipment and accessories as specified to provide a complete and
functioning system. The biological treatment stage shall utilize an inorganic
expanded clay media to facilitate absorption and adsorption of odorous
compounds. The polishing stage shall utilize a virgin activated carbon polishing
media that shall be specifically designed to adsorb odorous compounds with the
ability to support biological degradation of the compounds. The first stage shall
operate with an independently controlled irrigation system to maintain optimum
wetted conditions to support unique microbial growth for biological destruction of
the odorous compounds and removal of toxic metabolites. Systems using
organic media and systems using a single inorganic media shall not be
acceptable.
C. The scrubber system shall be designed and manufactured by Siemens and shall
be a ZABOCS Biofilter odor control system, sized correctly for this application, or
approved equal providing the same treatment techniques.
1.03 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. The Drawings and these specifications were prepared based upon the ZABOCS
equipment by Siemens. The Contractor shall include in the Bid and shall be
responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment,
including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. The
Contractor shall also pay any additionaf costs necessary for revisions of Drawings
and/or specifications by the Engineer.
B. The system shall be designed for continuous operation and shall perform in
accordance with the basis of design as outlined in this section. The system shall
be designed to remove hydrogen sulfide from the foul air stream.
C. The basis of design for the scrubber shall be the criteria outlined in the table
below:
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-2
10/29/12
�
�_J
� �
U
•
�
1
2
3
4
• 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
•29
30
Basis of Design:
Number of Sta es Two 2
Number of Vessels One 1
Nominal Air Fiow CFM 470
Inlet Air Tem ., °F Ambient u to 120
Maximum Pressure Drop, in. w. . 5-inches
Forced or Induced Draft Forced
Wind S eed, MPH 120 MPH
Avg. Inlet Hydrogen Sulfide 35 parts per million
Concentration
Peak Inlet Hydrogen Sulfide 200 ppm
Concentration
Outlet HZS Level 0.1 ppm for inlet levels
befinreen 1 and 10 m
% Removal Efficiency H2S 99%, For inlet levels
above 10 ppm
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The system shall comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
latest version of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified.
1. OSHA, Safety standards concerning personnel protection against
machinery and the handling of dangerous chemicals.
2. Instrument Society of America, ISA
3. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM
4. Joint Industrial Council, JIC
5. National Electric Manufacturer's Associations, NEMA
6. National Electrical Code, NEC
7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE
8. American Welding Society
9. American National Standards Institute, ANSI
10. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)
11. Standards of American Water Works Association (AWWA)
12. (UBC) Uniform Building Code
13. (NFPA) National Fire Protection Association Code
14. (IEC) International Electro Technical Commission
15. (NEMA) National Electrical Manufacturers Association
16. ASTM C582 Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced
Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment
17. ASTM D4097 Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks
18. ANSI/AWS G.1.10 Thermoplastic Welding Standards
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-3 10/29/'q 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
19. PS 15-69: National Bureau of standards Voluntary Product Standard
"Custom contact molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical Resistant
Process Equipment".
20. ASTM D-883: "Definition of Terms Relating to Plastics"
21. ASTM D-2583: "Test for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means
of Barcol Impressor."
22. ASTM D-2563: "Recommended Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in
Glass Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts."
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. To assure unity of responsibility, the odor control system, all materials,
equipment, and incidentals, whether or not shown or specified herein, shall be
furnished and coordinated by the equipment Manufacturer. The Contractor shall
assume full responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the
entire odor control system as specified.
B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused and
shall be the standard product of a manufacturer functioning as a system supplier
and having a successful record of design, manufacturing, supplying, and
servicing the odor control system specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years.
C. Should equipment which differs from these Specifications be offered and
determined to be the approved equal of that specified, such equipment will be
acceptable only on the basis that any revisions in the design and/or construction
of the structures, piping, appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc., required to
accommodate such a substitution, shall be made at no additional cost to the
Owner and be as approved by the Engineer.
D. The Engineer reserves the right to reject delivery of any or all pieces of equipment
found, upon inspection, to have any or all of the following: blisters, chips, crazing,
exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots, foreign matter, surface porosity,
sharp discontinuity or entrapped air at the surface of the laminate.
36 E. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment and each system
37 shall be tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration,
38 overheating, etc. All equipment must be adjusted and checked for misalignment,
39 clearances, supports, and adherence to safety standards.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of each
odor control facility and shall provide all necessary facilities, manpower, tools,
instrumentation, and laboratory testing services required during this phase of the
work. The contractor shall also be responsible to operate and maintain the
equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as outlined in
Section 1.01 F of this Specification.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-4 10/29/12
•
�
U
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Copies of all materials required to estabtish compliance with the specifications
shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01340.
B. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified shop and erection drawings showing all
important details of construction, dimensions, and materials of construction for all
components.
C. Submit model numbers, dimensions, operating weights, operating parameters
and ranges, performance curves, anchor bolt templates, bolt hole patterns of infet
and outlet connections, and installation instructions.
D. Submit process and instrumentation diagrams, piping schematics and layout
drawings, electrical interconnection and single line diagrams, schematic control
diagrams, loop diagrams for instrumentation, and detailed description of control
system function and sequence of operation.
E. Submit control panel submittals shall include the tag number and functional name
of each item that is in or on the panel; nameplate legends (text, letter size, color);
mounting and installation details; color coding; static inspection checklist; loop
check and point-to-point functional test procedures.
F. Submit calculations indicating the basis of design for the system demonstrating
that the equipment is structurally sound and that it will perform as specified.
Performance calculations shall include total elimination capacity of the media,
pressure drop across the packing, and removal efficiency for the compounds of
concern. Structural design and performance calculations shall be reviewed and
certified by a Licensed Professional Engineer (PE stamped).
G
.,
�
Submit descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment.
Submit a complete, totaf bill of materials for all equipment as part of tN�e
Operations and Maintenance manual.
A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's
current price for each item. Afl spare parts shall be properly protected for
prolonged periods of storage and packed in suitable containers which are clearly
identified with indelible markings as to contents
Motor Data: For each motor furnish a certified motor data sheet for the actual
motor or for a previously manufactured electrically duplicate motor which was
tested.
K. Complete copies of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be furnished in
accordance with Specification 01730. The Manuals shall be prepared specifically
for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists,
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-5
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
descriptions, troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules,
etc. that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar
with such equipment.
L. A fan performance curve shall be submitted by the fan manufacturer showing the
specified design criteria and showing that the motor shall not be overloaded ant
any point on the fan operating curve.
M. Submit a mechanical drawing of the overall equipment with all parts labeled and
part number identified. An exploded view of all mechanical equipment and
subassemblies with all parts labeled and part numbers identified.
1.07 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish one (1) set of all special tools recommended by the manufacturer for
normal operation and maintenance.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. In order to assure the proper performance and compatibility of all equipment
supplied within the intent of this Specification, the equipment furnished shall be
warranted by the same equipment Manufacturer.
B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design
and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period,
it shall be replaced on-site and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the
Owner.
C. The Manufacturer shall warrant the entire odor control system being supplied
against defects in workmanship and materials under normal use, operation, and
service for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion.
D. The equipment supplied shall be resistant to chemical attack by compounds
present in this application and shall carry a warranty against corrosion-induced
failure for eighteen (18) months after initial start-up.
1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur
during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed
and the units and equipment are ready for operation.
0
C.
All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a
prolonged period at the site.
All surfaces shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-6
10/29/12
•
r�
LJ
•
�
L�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 OVERALL SYSTEM
A. The odor controi system shall be a finro-stage system treating foul air in a single
pass. The system shall be designed for continuous, automatic operation and also
be capable of manual operation. Access manways shall be provided to altow
access to the internals of the system. A portion of the system top shall be
removable for access to the top of the second stage. The module and all
accessories shall be factory mounted, piped, and wired to the maximum exte�t
possible.
B. The system shall consist of one biological gas conditioning/treatment stage and
one vertical gas polishing stage, arranged in series. The first stage shall facilitate
biological destruction of odor compounds absorbed by the liquid in the system
and adsorbed on the inorganic media. The biological section shall include a
spray header to distribute liquid evenly over the media. The complete treatment
vessel shall be fabricated of premium grade FRP. The total media depth shall be
a minimum of 48 inches.
C. The first treatment stage shall contain inorganic expanded clay media, specificaNly
designed to support biological growth for degradation of odor compounds. This
stage shall provide absorption of odors from the air stream. The first stage af
media shall be wetted with fresh potable or reclaimed make-up water.
D. The second stage shall be a polishing stage and shall contain coal-based virgin
carbon media specifically designed to adsorb odorous compounds and to suppart
biological degradation of those compounds. This stage shall provide final
removal of odors to the specified level.
E. The system shall be complete with all piping, valves, internals elements, and
controls. All components and subassemblies shall be pre-mounted and piped on
the unitary constructed system. The system shall be shipped as a single piece.
F. An automatic makeup water control system shall be furnished integral with the
system.
G. All materials of construction as well as miscellaneous hardware shall be resistant
to attack by the compounds being treated and by the scrubbing solutions. All
fastening and connecting hardware shall be 316 stainless steel.
2.02. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. The vessel and accessories shall be contact molded fiberglass manufactured in
accordance with NBS PS 15-69, ASTM D 4097 for contact molding.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-7 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Resin used in the system liner shall be a premium vinyl ester type such as Hetron
922 by Ashland Chemicals, Derakane 411 by Dow Chemical, Vipel F010 by AOC,
or approved equal. The resin shall be reinforced with an inner veil of a suitable
synthetic organic fiber such as Nexus 111-00010.
C. Glass fiber reinforcement shall be used and shall be commercial grade corrosion
resistance borosilicate glass. All glass fiber reinforcement shall be Type C,
chemical grade. The surfacing veil shall be 10 mil Nexus 111-00010 or equal.
The mat shall be 1 1/2 oz. per sq. ft with a nominal fiber length of 1.25 ± 0.25
inches, with a silane finish and styrene soluble binder. Continuous glass roving,
used in chopper gun spray-up applications shall be type "E" grade with chrome or
silane coupling agent.
!7
E
Fasteners and Hardware: Unless otherwise specified, all fasteners, hardware,
and metal attachments, such as anchors, brackets etc shall be ANSI 316SS.
Gaskets: Unless otherwise specified, all gaskets shall be EPDM.
2.03 FABRICATION
�
A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with NBS PS 15-69, ASTM D 3299 and ASTM
D-4097. All non molded surfaces shall be coated with resin incorporating paraffin
to facilitate a full cure of the surface. All cut edges, bolt holes, and secondary •
bonds shall be sealed with a resin coat prior to the final paraffinated resin coat.
All voids to be filled with a resin paste.
B. Corrosion Liner: The inner surface of all laminates shall be resin rich and
reinforced with NEXUS 111-00010 at a minimum thickness of 10 mils. The
interior corrosion layer shall consist of two layers of 1 1/2 oz. per sq. ft. chopped
strand mat. If the application is by chopper gun spray up the glass fiber shall be
1/2 to 2 in length. The total corrosion liner thickness shall be a minimum of 100
mils and have a resin to glass ratio of 80/20. All edges of reinforcement to be
lapped a minimum of one inch.
C. Structural Laminate: Structural laminates shall consist of alternating layers of 1-
1/2 oz per sq. ft mat or chopped glass and 24 oz per sq. yard woven roving
applied to reach the designed thickness. Actual laminate sequences shall be per
the laminate tables shown on fabrication drawings. The exterior surface shall be
relatively smooth and shall have no glass fibers exposed. The exterior shall be
surFace coated with gel coat containing ultra violet light inhibitors.
D. Accessories: Air inlet, air outlet, spray headers, baffles, media support, drain and
all connections shown on the Drawings shall be provided by the Manufacturer.
Tie down lugs shall be integrally molded into the walls of the vessel. All external
bolts shall be 316SS and designed forthe specified loads. Interiorfasteners shall
be of corrosion resistant materials such as PVC or FRP.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-8
10/29/12
�
U
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
E.
2.04 FAN
Neoprene Pad: A 1/4-inch thick, 60 durometer neoprene rubber sheet shall be
provided and placed underneath the vessel during installation.
A. All components normally in contact with the foul air stream shall be FRP or 316
stainless steel. The fan shall be centrifugal design manufactured of FRP. The
wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan inlet shall be slip type
and the fan outlet shall have a flanged nozzle. The fan shall be provided with a
double lip type shaft seal.
B. Fan shalt be supplied with a TEFC motor with 1.15 service factor suitable for
three-phase, 60Hz, 480 volt service and shall be non-overloading at all points on
the shop tested fan curve. The fan shall be direct driven. The motor shall be
inverter-duty.
C. Performance. The fan shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA and
shall bear the AMCA seal. The fan shall be designed for the following
specifications:
• Air Flow Rate, cfm 470
• Static Pressure at Inlet w.c. 2 inches
• Total Pressure Drop w.c. 3 inches
• Motor HP 3
D. Fan shall be manufactured by New York Blower, Hartzell, or equal.
2.05 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. A control panel shall be provided to control the exhaust fan and water additian
system. A 480 VAC, 3-phase power supply shall be supplied to the panel to
power the system.
B. The control panel enclosure shall be of fiberglass construction and rated NEMA
3R with ventilation fan. The panel shall be mounted remote to the unit as shown
on the drawings and factory tested to full operation with all other components
prior to shipment.
C. The panel shall have the following components/capabilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
Fan switch (ON-OFF).
Fan VFD.
Push-to-test button for water valve.
Timer relay for on/off control of water valve.
Nutrient Pump (HAND-OFF-AUTO)
Outputs shall be provided to monitor the blower on/off status and general
system faults via the DFS RTU system.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-9
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. The water control cabinet shall be constructed from a NEMA 4X rated FRP
cabinet with all internal SCH 80 PVC piping. The cabinet shall be mounted to the
system assembly and shall contain the following components:
1. Isolation valve
2. Nutrient pump
3. Irrigation solenoid valve
4. Irrigation system pressure gauge.
5. Irrigation pressure regulator
6. Irrigation rotameter
E. Water Flow Control: The direct reading rotameter shall be a variable area type
with a Teflon float, EPR "O" rings, and PVC fittings. The rotameter shall have a
direct reading scale.
2.06 SUB ASSEMBLIES
A. Water Distribution System. The first media stage shall be equipped with an
independent water distribution system. The system shall be designed to irrigate
the top of the first media bed with complete and even coverage via spray nozzles.
The water distribution system shall be constructed of PVC.
Q
C
�
E
Nutrient Addition. A nutrient containment and metering system shall be provided
with the system.
All make-up water and drain piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC. A strainer shall be
installed on the water/nutrient piping upstream of the distribution system, outside
of the vessel.
A nutrient reservoir shall be integrated into the system sump. Loose external
tanks shall not be allowed.
The media support shall be of HDPE and FRP construction.
2.07 DUCT AND DAMPERS
A. Foul air ductwork and butterfly dampers shall be installed in the locations shown
on the Drawings. The dampers shall be finished in white Gel coat to match the
odor control unit and contain UV inhibitors. The metal components of the damper
and all duct hardware shall be 316 stainless steel.
B. The ducfinrork, fittings, and damper shall be manufactured to be compatible with
all gases and treatment chemicals that may reasonably be expected to come in
contact with the interior and exterior surFace.
C. Exterior ultraviolet stabilizers shall be added for the ducfinrork and the dampers.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-10 10/29/12
•
•
r �
U
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
D. All FRP connections shall be flanged.
E. Dampers shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with National Bureau of
Standards, Voluntary Product Standard PS 15-69, and Custom Contact-Molded
Reinforced Chemical-Resistant Process Equipment. Minimum physical
properties shall be in accordance with Table 1 of PS 15-69, and minimum duct
thickness and other dimensions shall be in accordance with Table 2 of PS 15-69.
G. The ductwork shall be supported in a manner that allows removal of any section
without the need for temporary support.
H. Two adjustable dampers shall be installed for each fan. The dampers shall be
installed on the suction side of the fan as shown on the Drawings and be of the
butterfly type, consisting of a single circular blade with an exterior positian
indicating stainless steel operator and a device to lock the damper in any
position.
I. The dampers shall be fabricated from FRP and have flanged connections. The
damper body shall be of one piece construction with a resin rich interior corrosion
barrier minimum 100 mils thick. The structural portion of the body shall consist of
alternate layers of chopped strand mat hand laid on a polished mold and woven
to conform to ASME/ANSI RTP-1 and PS15-69. The glass to resin ratio shall be
a minimum of 35% glass to 65% resin. Wall thickness, flange thickness drilling
pattern and width shall conform to PS15-69.
J. The damper blade shall be a one piece FRP disc constructed of the same
material as the body and shall have a resin rich surfacing veil on both sides.
Blade stiffeners shall be FRP or FRP encapsulated as required for stiffness.
K. The damper shaft shall be pultruded fiberglass or 316 stainless steel or 316
stainless steel encapsulated in fiberglass. Leakage shall not exceed 3 cubic feet
per minute per square foot at 12-inches water column. Teflon bearings shall be
mounted outboard to the damper body. The damper shall include a shaft seal. A
blade seal is not required.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The odor control unit shall be installed on a concrete equipment pad in
accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and accurately aligned in
orientation with related equipment as shown on the Drawings in order to insure
proper operation.
B. The Contractor shall supply all necessary anchor bolts, temporary lifting
equipment, power, labor and all other requirements for satisfactory installation.
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-11 10/29/12
2 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a factory representative of the
Manufacturer who has complete knowledge of proper installation, operation, and
maintenance of the system. The representative shall inspect the final installation,
supervise start-up of the system, and provide training to Owner personnel on
proper operations and maintenance of the equipment. A minimum of two (2)
days (16 hours) shall be allotted for this function.
B. The training period shall be scheduled at least twenty (20) days in advance with
the Owner and shall take place prior to start-up and acceptance by the Owner.
C. Final approved copies of operating and maintenance data as specified in Section
01730 shall have been delivered to the Engineer prior to scheduling the
instruction period with the Owner.
D. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a letter from the Manufacturerthat the
system has been installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations and that the system is ready for operation. This letter shall be
provided before the system is started up ancl tested.
3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Upon completion of the installation and submittal of the letter from the
Manufacturer, the Contractor shall start-up, operate, maintain, and conduct a
performance test of the system. The Contractor shall continue to be responsible
for operations and maintenance of the system until the perFormance testing is
complete and performance requirements will be deemed to have been met.
B. Performance testing shall consist of continuous operation with continuous inlet
and outlet hydrogen sulfide monitoring for 14 consecutive days.
C. During the perFormance testing the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
supplies, and test equipment as needed. Testing shall verify proper alignment,
operation, proper connection and satisfactory performance of the odor control
system. All test results including continuous monitoring results for the inlet and
outlet concentration of hydrogen sulfide shall be documented and provided to the
Engineer.
D. The performance requirements will be deemed to have been met when the
system produces hydrogen sulfide levels at or below the process guarantee
levels for 14 consecutive days.
E. In the event of improper installation or failure to meet the odor removal
requirements, the Contractor and the Manufacturer shall be responsible for
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-12 10/29/12
•
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
�
U
�
U
�
supervising the correction of the work and subsequent 14 consecutive day test
runs until the defects are corrected.
Deliver to the Engineer within 30 days after testing a report that demonstrates
satisfactory performance of the odor control system.
END OF SECTION
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-13
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK •
ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11516-14
10/29/12
�
LJ
r�
U
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 13567
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall design, furnish, install, startup, operate, maintain, and
coordinate continuous bypass pumping systems as required to perform the wark
at Lift Station (LS) 33 and LS 42.
B. The temporary bypass system at each location shall be disassembled and
removed after all work is completed, tested, and accepted ready for service.
C. The Contractor shall employ the services of a subcontractor specializing in the
design, furnishing and operation of temporary bypass pumping systems. The
bypass subcontractor shall provide 5 references for projects of similar size and
complexity as the proposed system for approval by the Engineer. The proposed
bypass pumping system shall meet the requirements of all codes and regulatary
agencies having jurisdiction.
D. A drawdown test was performed on LS 42 in July 2011. The results of the
drawdown test are shown below:
One Pump Running = 2369 gpm @ 39 feet TDH.
Two Pumps Running = 3380 gpm @ 47 feet TDH.
The LS 42 bypass pumping system shall be designed for a firm average pumping
rate of 2400 gpm and a firm peak pumping rate of 3400 gpm at the total dynamic
heads (TDH) identified above. Velocity in the temporary force main shall not
exceed 5 feet per second.
The LS 42 bypass pumping system shall be capable of variable speed operatian.
E. The LS 33 bypass pumping system shall be designed for 250 gpm at 32 feet TDH
and is not required to have variable speed capability. Velocity in the temporary
force main shall not exceed 5 feet per second.
F. The primary bypass pumping system shall employ a standby pump with a
capacity equal to the capacity of the largest pump installed (firm capacifiy),
completely piped and wired and ready to run should a primary bypass pump fail.
F. The Contractor shafl furnish and install temporary plugs in the existing sewer
pipes entering the wet wells.
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-1 10/29/'i 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.02 BYPASS PUMPING PLAN SUBMITTAL
A. The Contractor shall submit a written Bypass Pumping Plan (Plan) and attend a
meeting with the Engineer and the Owner to review the Plan. The Bypass
Pumping Plan shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01310 to the
Engineer for approval prior to beginning any work at the site.
B. The Plan shall consist of detailed descriptions and diagrams of the proposed
pumping system that describes equipment schedules, time schedules, locations,
power, controls, instrumentation, piping, and valves. Cut sheets for all equipment
and materials shall be submitted. All pumps and valves shall be enumerated and
shown on the diagrams.
C.
�❑
The Plan shall be detailed and specific for each location and for this project.
The Plan shall show at minimum the following information:
• Staging areas for all pumps
• Number, size, material, and location of suction and discharge piping and
valves
• Pump curves, sizes, capacities, size, power requirements, and rpm
operating range of each pump
• Fuel type, estimated consumption rate, on-site fuel storage and detailed
refueling plan
• Temporary pipe supports, pipe restraints, pipe anchors, and thrust blocks.
• Control system details
• Schematics showing the control circuits for each pump.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIRMENTS AND RESTRICTIONS
A. The bypass pumping system shall have dedicated suction and discharge piping.
The suction shall be taken from those manholes shown on the Drawings. The
discharge piping shall be connected to the existing pump out connections or force
mains as shown on the Drawings.
:
��
The bypass pumping system shall utilize fully automatic, self-priming pumps that
do not require foot valves.
The proposed bypass pumping system shall comply with local noise ordinances.
D. Fuel storage on site shall only be permitted in dedicated fuel tanks attached to
portable pumps and portable generators. No other fuel sources or auxiliary fuel
storage shall be permitted.
E. The existing emergency generator at LS 42 shall not be used for the bypass
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-2 10/29l12
•
•
r �
�_�
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
pumping system.
2.02 CAPACITY
A. The capacity of the bypass pumping systems is specified in Section 1.01.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for designing the bypass pumping systems to
have adequate flow and pressure capacity to maintain flow to and from each Nift
station without accumulation in the collection system.
2.01 REDUNDANCY AND RELIABILITY
A. The temporary bypass pumping system shall be designed to maintain continuous
uninterrupted service at all times.
B. The temporary bypass pumping system shall consist of a primary and a backup
pumping system. The primary and backup system shall be complete,
independent, and redundant and be capable of starting and operating
automatically based on a water level signal. The primary and backup system
shall each have dedicated power and control components.
•22 2.02 POWER AND CONTROLS
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
A. The bypass pumping system shall be controlled by a water level signal from the
supply suction manhole.
B. The Contractor shall design, furnish, and install temporary power and controls for
the bypass pumping system and shall pay all power or energy costs for the
bypass pumping effort.
C. If electric power is proposed for the temporary bypass pumping system, two
sources of power shall be provided. One of the sources may be from the Utility
Company. The second power source shall be a temporary portable generator of
sufficient size to power all the pumps running at the same time. The temporary
generator shall also be capable of supporting two pumps starting at locked rotor
conditions at the same time.
2.03 ALARMS
A. The temporary bypass pumping system shall have a high level/alarm based on
the water level signal in the suction manhole. Activation of this alarm shall cause
a visual and audible alarm to occur at the pump controls. The high level/alarm
shall also activate an auto dialer and temporary telephone service to notify the
Contractor and the Owner of the high level alarm. The Contractor shall be
responsible for responding to the alarms and shall provide the Owner with the
phone numbers and emergency contacts of response personnel capable of being
reached 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
u
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 STARTUP AND OPERATION
A.. The Contractor shall demonstrate, mechanical, electrical, control, and alarm
function integrity of the bypass pumping system to the Engineer and the City prior
to beginning any demolition work. The bypass pumping system must function
without failure for a period of 24 consecutive hours prior to beginning any other
site work.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the
temporary bypass pumping system 24 hours per day and shall not depend on the
Owner to perForm any operations or maintenance tasks.
C. If diesel or gasoline powered pumps are used, the Contractor shall be
responsible for operating the pumps 24 hours per day and for keeping the pumps
fue{ed and maintained. The Contractor shall pay all fuel costs for bypass
pumping if diesel or gasoline powered pumps are used.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any wastewater spills that occur as a
result of the bypass pumping operation and shall pay any and all fines, fees,
property damage, environmental damage, and cleanup costs that are associated •
with the wastewater spills.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-4 10/29/12
•
.
� SECTION 13600
2
3 REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
. 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
A. The specific attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that the Owner has
an existing TAC II SCADA System manufactured by Data Flow Systems (DFS) of
Melbourne, Florida (321/259-5009). For compatibility purposes, the Contractor
shall be required to furnish and install the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) as
specified herein from DFS.
B. For Lift Station 42 (LS 42), the Contractor shall furnish and install a complete
pump local control panel (LCP) equipped with a DFS TCU with RIO-032 I/O
device for monitoring and control of a triplex, variable frequency drive (VFD) lift
station and monitoring of a standby generator and an odor control systern.
Contractor shall also remove the existing antenna and replace with a DFS
compatible antenna. All I/O previously connected to the existing radio telemetry
system at the lift station shall be re-wired to the new TCU in the LCP specified
herein.
C. For Lift Station 33 (LS 33), the Contractor shall furnish and install a DFS TCU to
be mounted in the local control panel provided by the pump manufacturer
specified in Section 11307 for monitoring and control of a duplex, constant speed
lift station. Contractor shall also remove the existing antenna and antenna tower
assembly and replace with a DFS compatible antenna and antenna tower
assembly.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate tower and antenna requirements with DFS. A
complete radio survey shall be conducted by DFS to verify antenna requirements
at both locations.
E. All equipment furnished by DFS shall be housed in a NEMA 4X, 304 S.S.
enclosure, powder coated white. The panel shall be pre-engineered and pre-
assembled by DFS prior to delivery to the job site.
F. These specifications are intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the
delivery, complete installation and field testing of all equipment and
appurtenances for the complete RTU system herein specified, whether
specifically mentioned in the Specifications or not. This includes all discrete and
analog signal isolation necessary for interfacing with the Owner's existing
telemetry system.
G. For all units there shall be furnished and installed all necessary and desirable
accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in these
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
specifications or not. This installation shall include field-testing of the entire
installation and instruction of the regular operating personnel in the care,
operation, and maintenance of all equipment.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the Specifications
shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. Submittals shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer and submitted to the
Engineer for review prior to the manufacture of the equipment. The shop
drawings shall include outline dimensions and external connection
diagrams. A list of components, interface cables, specifications and a copy
of the manufacturer's warranty shall be included with the submitted data.
2. Operating Instructions: The Contractor shall submit operation and
maintenance manuals for the entire control system.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9�
General - equipment function, description and normal and limiting
operating characteristics.
Installation instructions - assembly procedures and alignment and
adjustment procedures.
Operation instructions - start-up procedures, normal operating
conditions, emergency and normal shutdown procedure.
Maintenance instructions.
Trouble-shooting guide.
Bill of Materials.
Drawings - cross sectional view, assembly and wiring diagrams.
Complete master wiring diagrams and control schematics shall be
furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture.
HMI Graphic screens in color, on 8.5"x11" sized paper.
1.03 SPARE PARTS
�
�:�
The following spare parts shall be furnished to the Owner.
Two (2) TAC Pack TCU (one for each lift station)
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-2 10/29/12
C�
L�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
C
D
E
F
One (1) RIO-032 I/O device
One (1) Power Supply
Fuses: Ten (10) of each size and type used.
Relays: Ten (10) of each type used.
G. Spare parts shall be properly marked and protected for long periods of storage
and packed in a plastic box that is clearly identified with indelible markings as to
the contents.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant all hardware and software provided under triis
contract against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the date of substantial completion. The TAC Pack TCU and RIO-032 shall
carry an additional 2-year return-to-factory warranty. The TAC Pack TCU
warranty shall also cover damage due to lightning.
1.04 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Complete copies of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be furnished in
accordance with Specification 01730. The Manuals shall be prepared specifically
for this installation and shall include atl required cuts, drawings, equipment lists,
descriptions, troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules,
etc. that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar
with such equipment.
B. Operations and Maintenance manuals for the DFS System shall also include:
I/O drawings showing locations of all. field I/O terminations onto 110
modules.
2. A printout of all operator adjustable and non-operator adjustable setpoints
(i.e. level, speed, and etc.) in the DFS System. The Contractor shall also
furnish to the Owner one (1) separate copy of the setpoints printed
8.5"x11" paper, laminated on both sides.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 TELEMETRY CONTROL UNIT
A. The Telemetry Control Unit (TCU) shall be a microprocessor-based multi-pump
controller device. The TCU shall provide local automatic control based on
transducer level input. All configurable operating parameters and alarms shall be
selectable from the RTU's operator interface via a menu selection. Special
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-3 10/29l12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
programming shall be provided by DFS for the VFD control application. The TCU
shall incorporate an integrated Radio Transceiver compatible with the Owner's
existing frequency. At a minimum, the TCU shall have the following features and
functions:
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) - The TCU shall incorporate a large 4-line x
20-character LCD, in conjunction with a 12-button keypad, to provide an
interface for configuring, viewing and resetting alarms, and analyzing
status information. The contrast of the LCD shall be controlled by an
onboard temperature sensor to ensure that the LCD screen is easy to read
in both high and low temperature conditions. The LCD shall provide the
elapsed runtime of each pump, the average runtime of each pump, the
flow of each pump, the flow of the station and the time of day.
2. 12-Button Keypad - The TCU shall incorporate a 12-button keypad to page
through its menu items, scroll through configuration options, and enter
numeric data. The keypad shall include the numbers 0-9, scrolling keys
(up, down, left and right), an ENTER key, and an ESC (escape) key.
Some buttons shall offer dual functionality. The decimal point and the
escape function (Esc) shall share the same button. The number two and
the up scrolling function shall share the same button. The function of the
button shall be dependent on the unit's mode.
3. For LS-42, the TCU shall be programmed for automated level control
utilizing any three (3) of the VFD's and an analog (4-20 ma) level
transducer. For LS-33, the TCU shall be programmed for automated level
control utilizing two (2) constant speed pumps and an analog (4-20 ma)
level transducer. Floats shall be wired as backup to the level transducer
for level control purposes in the even the TCU fails.
4. Integrated LED for visual pump on/off status of each pump. Pump run
status shall be reported back to the Central Command Center and
recorded with +-2 second accuracy.
5. Local manual control provided by any of its three (3) integral HOA
switches. Each HOA switch shall be fail safe and operate in the OFF and
HAND position even if the unit is failed or not powered. The TCU shall be
configurable to alarm if any HOA switch is left in the HAND or OFF
position, with user-selected delay period. HOA switch position alarms
shall be reported back to Central Command Center.
6. Remote control capability from the Central Command Center and/or
workstation PC(s) shall provide individual pump override control and
disable, station disable, alarm disable and alarm silence.
•
•
7. Pump alternation shall be an integral function with automated alternation •
around non-operational pump(s), out-of-service pump(s) or pump(s) in
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-4 10/29/12
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
OFF position from HOA. Alternation will operate based on the number r�f
pumps configured (1, 2 or 3).
8. Pump/Starter/Breaker Fault alarms shall be determined by the uriit
automatically and for each pump. The alarm shall be activated when a
pump is called to run, but fails to run, or if the pump is turned off, b�t
continues to run. A motor starter coil failure, a tripped overload contact, r�r
a tripped motor breaker shall also generate the alarm.
9. Integrated 3-phase power monitor for shall be provided. The phase
monitor shall be compatible with 240 and 480 VAC 3-phase power. The
phase monitor shall be transformer-isolated and detect loss of phase,
phase reversal, low phase and high phase faults. All phase monitar
adjustments shall be adjustable from the integrated 12-button keypad.
Phase voltages from phase A to B and from phase A to C shall be
transmitted to the Central Command Center.
10. Integrated Alarm Light output and Alarm Horn output, each capable of
driving 120 VAC loads to 0.5A. The unit shall incorporate an integrated
alarm silence button. A discrete input shall be reserved for use with an
external alarm silence button. Use of either, or both, shall be used �o
silence the Alarm Horn locally. The Alarm Horn shall be capable of being
silenced remotely from the Central Command Center and/or workstatian
PC(s).
11. Integrated 115 VAC Power Supply. The power supply shall be surge
protected. Power consumption shall not exceed 20 Watts. The power
supply shall provide a battery backed, isolated 24 VDC bias voltage
source. The 24 VDC bias voltage source shall be utilized to monitor the
high well float so as to make sure the alarm is detected and reported
�uring commercial power outages. The power supply shall keep the
backup battery at a float charge.
12. All inputs and outputs shall be optically or magnetically isolated and surge
suppressed. Input protection shall include M.O.V., Transorb, and Opto-
isolation. Analog inputs shall provide 12-bit accuracy and capable of
accepting 4-20mA at 250 ohm or 1-5V at 100K ohm signals. Discrete
inputs shall be capable of accepting 10-30V AC/DC and 31-600V AC/DC
with voltage reducers/resistors. Discrete outputs shall provide 120/2�0
VAC control and include at least (4) solid state and (2) contact closure
outputs. At least one digital pulse input shall be provided.
13. RS-232 service port shall provide local access to all the functions of the
TCU. The service port shall provide local monitoring of the radio
communications link with the Central Command Center. The service part
shall provide an automatic antenna alignment function.
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-5 10/29/112
1 14. A RS-485 serial connection shall be provided and utilized to connect to the
2 RIO-032 as required for additional I/O to meet the control and monitoring
3 requirements.
4
5 15. Ambient operating temperature shall be -10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F).
6 The uppertemperature limit is 50°C (122°F) when using a backup battery.
7 TCU shall be UL Listed and surge tested for EMI Susceptibility to IEC
8 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Tests.
9
10 16. All signal and power wiring shall be connected to the TCU through
11 removable terminal connectors. The TCU shall be easily removed /
12 replaced by disconnecting the wire terminal connectors. The use of tools
13 or re-wiring shall not be required to removed/replace the TCU.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2.02 RADIO TRANSCEIVER
A. The Radio Transceiver shall be an integral component of the TCU and shall not
require a separate power supply or power source. The radio transceiver shall
communicate with the Owner's existing Central Command Center. As a
minimum, the Radio Transceiver shall have the following features:
1. Surge protected radio power
2. On board communications and functional firmware
3. Watchdog timer
4. On board voltage regulation and radio power supply control
5. Access via the RTU's RS-232 service port
6. Utilize LEDs on TCU for transmit data and receive data indication
7. Test mode switch for radio service
8. Radio current, receiver sensitivity and operating temperature are
monitored for system diagnostics.
2.03 RAIL I/O DEVICE (RIO-032)
A. All existing I/O connected to the existing telemetry system at LS-42 shall be
rewired to the new TCU in the new LCP. For connection of all I/O, the TCU shall
be furnished with a DIN rail mounted, DFS RIO-032 I/O device(s) and meet the
following requirements:
Perform as an I/O component and include the following:
a. 8051-class micro controller
b. Minimum of 64K of Flash ROM
c. Minimum of 1 K of RAM
d. Capability to scan 8 digital and 8 analog inputs
e. Capability to control 8 digital and 8 analog outputs
f. Power consumption of less than 12 watts
g. Configuration button
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-6 10/29/12
•
•
�J
� J
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
�
�
4
5
6
7
8
9
The RIO-032 shatl have a total I/O count of 32 points. The 32 points shall
consist of the following:
a. Eight (8) digital monitor points
b. Eight (8) digital control points
c. Eight (8) analog monitor points
d. Eight (8) analog control points
I/O shall have the following characteristics:
a. All I/O shall be non-isolated.
b. Each analog input and output shall have 12-bit resolution.
c. All analog points shall be capable of being used as digital f/O when
not required as analog I/O.
d. All analog inputs and outputs shall be via a 4-20 mA signal. Any
resistors required to convert the 4-20mA signals to a signal
compatible with the RIO module shall be furnished and installed.
e. Analog inputs and outputs shall be processed at a rate of 1�J-
samples-per-second.
f. Analog outputs shall have an overafl accuracy of +/_ 1% of full scale.
g. Digital inputs shall be closure-to-ground for on and biased with the
10-15 VDC raw power through an onboard 5.6 Kohm resistor.
h. Digital inputs shall be processed at a rate of 120-samples-pe�r-
second with 100 mSec de-bouncing for on/off status.
i. Digital inputs shatl be sampled at the raw 120 sample rate for pulse
input accumulation. The maximum input pulse rate shall be 30 Hz.
j. Digital outputs shall be open collector with current capability �o
drive 12 or 24 VDC, 80 mA constant duty, 300mA in-rush current,
ice cube-type relays.
Two part screw termination 8-pin connectors capable of handling up to 16
gauge wire.
Compatible with 35mm symmetrical or 32mm asymmetrical DIN-rail.
10-15 VDC powered by separate power supply.
Moisture-free environment operation within a temperature range of 14°-
140° F (-10°-60° C).
One RS-485 serial interface. This RS-485 shall be used for connection to
the TCU and shall communicate with the TCU via Modbus ASCII protocol.
Removable address strap to enable the RIO-032 to be exchanged with
another (spare) without requiring readdressing either device.
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-7
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
i[�7
11
The RIO-032 shall have a learn mode that enables it to automatically
determine and learn communication parameters (e.g., baud rate, parity,
stop bits, and protocol) when the Configuration button is held down on
�' •'Sl�'L�i'�i:�
The RIO-032 shafl be supplied with a din-rail mountable power supply.
The Power Supply shall be DR-120-12 as manufactured by Mean Well.
12. Analog Inputs / Outputs connected to the RIO-032 shall have an Isolated
DC to DC Transmitter. The Isolated DC to DC Transmitter shall be Model
API-4380-G-D-U as manufactured by Absolute Process Instruments, Inc.
13. Discrete Inputs / Outputs connected to the RIO-032 shall be external relay
Isolated with dry-contact. Relay shall be model AAE201 as manufactured
by AA Electric with NDS-8 octal base.
2.04 TCU BACKUP BATTERY
A. The TCU shall include a 7.0 amp-hour backup battery. The battery shall provide
12V nominal voltage. The battery shall not be damaged by deep discharges.
2.05 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
A. All enclosures/local control panels furnished by DFS shall be NEMA 4X, 304 S.S.,
powder coated white. The width of the new local control panel (LCP) for LS-42
shall be no wider than 4" of the width of the existing control panel. Contractor
shall confirm size of existing control panel.
B. At LS-42, the LCP for the pump shall be the local control panel that is equipped
with the DFS TAC PAC RTU. The local control panel shall be equipped with a
hinged dead front. The dead front door shall have a cut-out suitable for the
installation of the DFS TAC PAC RTU to be installed behind the dead front.
C. The LCP for LS-42 shall include the following components as a minimum:
1. R10032 I/O Expansion Device
2. 7.0 Ah Battery w/shelf
3. 120V TCU Power Surge Protector
4. Transient Filter Shield
5. 3-Phase Surge Protector (240/480)
6. 120V DPDT Octal Relay w/Base
7. 12V DPDT Octal Relay w/Base
8. Meanwell Power Supply 12V DC
9. Edco DRS036 Din Rail Surge Protector
10. API Loop Isolator w/base
11. Miscellaneous Terminal Hardware
12. RF pigtail
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-8
10/29/12
•
CJ
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
13. Polyphaser Coaxial Surge Protector
14. LED Readout Display for displaying level in wetwell per Section 11307,
2.02, F. , 4.
15. Any other ancillary contacts, relays, or other control components,
hardware and soffinrare required for a complete pump control panel shall
be furnished and installed without additional cost to the Owner.
D. For LS-33, the Contractor shall furnish the DFS TAC PAC to be installed in the
local control panel provided by the pump manufacturer specified in Section 11307
for monitoring and control of the duplex, constant speed lift station. The following
components shall be provided by DFS for mounting in the local control panel
specified in Section 11307:
1. Snap-in Installation Kit w/ Wire Harness
2. RF pigtail
3. RTU Surge Protection Kit
4. 480 VAC, 3-Phase Surge Protector Kit
5. Polyphaser Coaxial Surge Protector
6. 7.0 amp hour backup battery
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating between the pump
manufacturer that is supplying the local control panel and DFS to furnish
and install all necessary other ancillary contacts, relays, or other control
components, hardware and software required for a complete pump control
panel without additional cost to the Owner.
2.06 ANTENNA SUBSYSTEM
A. A high gain directional antenna shall be used to transmit and receive data at the
RTU. It shall be supported on a mast/pole and have DC grounding for lightning
protection. The antenna mast/pole shall be hot dipped galvanized for corrosian
protection. All mounting hardware shall be made of stainless steel. The mast
shall meet or exceed the qua4ity and reliability of the AG20 manufactured lby
Rohn.
B. The coax cable shall be the type that utilizes an inert semi-liquid compound to
flood the copper braid. The coax cable shall be of the RG-8 construction type a�d
have the RF loss characteristic of foam flex. The coax cable shall be RTC 400 as
supplied by Data Flow Systems, Inc.
C. Type N connectors shall be utilized at both ends of the coax. The Type N
connectors shall be sealed with 3-inch sections of Alpha FIT321-1-0 sealant
shrink tubing. The coax cable shall be secured to the masUpole with E.V.A.-
coated 316 stainless steel cable ties. The cable ties shall meet or exceed tN�e
quality, reliability and performance ofAE112 cable ties manufactured by Band-It.
D. The antenna shall be an all welded aluminum elements. The antenna shall have
a single radiator element connected to a type N female connector. The antenna
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-9
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
shall be the RTA series as supplied by Data Flow Systems, Inc.
E. A coaxial surge protector model IS-B50LN-C2 as manufactured by Polyphaser
shall be supplied with the RTU.
F. For LS-33, a new antenna tower assembly/mast and antenna shall be furnished
and installed. The antenna tower assembly/mast shall be designed with a 125
mph wind rating.
G
H
J
For LS-42, a new antenna shall be furnished and installed on the existing
antenna tower.
All ancillary wiring, conduit, and connectors, as recommended by DFS shall be
furnished and installed between the antenna and the RTU, whether specified
herein or not.
The Contractor shall coordinate tower and antenna requirements with DFS. A
complete radio survey shall be conducted by DFS to verify antenna requirements
at both locations.
The Contractor shall install a reinforced concrete footing/foundation for the
antenna tower as recommended by DFS.
2.08 CENTRAL CONTROL CENTER (EXISTING)
A. The Central Control Center shall be modified to incorporate new HMI graphical
screens for the lift stations. The graphical screen shall be consistentwith existing
pump station screens.
:
C
The existing Map Overview graphical screen shall be modified to include a link for
the two lift stations.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner on 8.5"x11" sized paper the HMI
Graphic screens in color for review and approval.
2.09 VFD PUMP CONTROL STRATEGY (LS-42)
A. The VFD specified in Division 16 shall be equipped with an LOCAL-OFF-
REMOTE switch. In LOCAL, the pump shall be manually started/stopped at the
VFD. In REMOTE, the pump shall be controlled by the DFS TCU. The DFS TCU
shall include custom programming developed by DFS for the VFD control
application. The operator interface referenced herein is the TCU integrated LCD
& Keypad. The TCU shall provide the Control Strategy defined below. Any
ancillary software programming required for a complete and operational system
shall be furnished by DFS at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. When placed in the "Hand" position, the pumps are started and the speed
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-10 10/29/12
C�
•
•
��
��
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
manually controlled using the buttons on the key pad of the TCU.
C. In the "Auto" control mode, the pumps shall be controlled by the automatic
algorithm. The "Lead" VFD pump shall operate first, followed by the "Lag" pump.
The third pump is a Standby or shall be selectable to operate as a"Lag-Lag"
pump.
D. When in Auto, the pumps shall also be manually overridden to start, or be
disabled via the telemetry system. When a pump is manually overridden to start
the pump's speed command will be set to a predetermined speed pre-set in the
TCU. Any pump operating, including any pump operating under the automatic
algorithm, shall also be brought to this speed.
H. The control of the lift station shall be configured as a Constant Level Lift Statian
(i.e. Fixed Set Point). The Controller shall match the Process Control Variable
(PV) to the Process Set Point (Process Setpoint). So in this case the controller
would operate from the wet well transducer that controls the pumps staging (PV
from Analog 1 input (C1), VFD PV Xducer 1 in the Menu).
To achieve the above Constant Level Lift Station control, the VFDTCU shall vary
the pump speed befinreen the MIN and MAX SPD set points to maintain the PV as
defined by the operator adjustable Process Setpoint using a Proportional-Integral-
Derivative (PID) algorithm. The PID algorithm shall be tuned by DFS by adjusti�g
the P, I, and D set points.
J. VFD Speed Control. When in automatic the VFD speed control output will be
limited by the operator defined MIN and MAX SPD set points. The MIN and MAX
SPD set points are appticable during both automatic and manual operatian.
While operating under the automation programming afl pumps shall operate at
the same speed once ramping is complete.
K. Ramp Speed defines the acceleration of a pump when a VFD is initially called to
run. It will gradually increase speed from 0% to the desired control output in
increments defined by the RAMP SPD set point until the pump's speed equals the
process control output speed. Once the VFD ramp speed has met the control
output the ramp speed function is disabled. Ramp speed is applicable during
automatic operation and when placing a pump in HAND.
F. Pump Staging Controller. The VFDTCU shall be capable of finro modes of pump
staging controls, Level (XDUCER 1(C1)) and Speed. The staging of pumps shall
be via Speed as defined below.
43 G. When SPEED mode is selected, the VFDTCU will stage pumps on using their
44 LEAD, LAG ON level set points using XDUCER 1(C1). Staging of the pumps will
45 use a speed set point (Spd Setpt in the TCU's VFD menu options) in conjunction
.46 with the ON set points and the Min Run Timer value. Operation will be in the
47 following manner. The VFDTCU shall be programmed such that when the LAG
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-11 10/29/12
1 pump starts, the LEAD pump's speed shall begin to decrease in order to match
2 the initial start speed of the LAG pump. The initial start speed of the LAG pump
3 shall be set at a speed sufficient to keep the check valve on the LEAD open.
4 Once the both pumps' speed are equal, then the VFDTCU shall vary both pumps'
5 speed to maintain the level setpoint. The programming for starting of the LAG-
6 LAG pump shall be the same as the LAG pump.
7
8 H. The basic staging off operation will begin when the speed command to the pumps
9 is at or below the Spd Setpt. However, two additional criteria must also be met;
10 first the PV from XDUCER 1(C1) must be below the LEAD or LAG ON set point
11 for the pump being staged off, and the timer from the preceding pump being
12 staged off must have timed out. The Min Run Timer value is used in the staging
13 timer during the stop process when this method is used. The Min Run Timer
14 value is configurable in the TCU's menu.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2.10
Pump Alternation by Time. Alternation shall be triggered when the Lead pump is
called to Run. The VFDTCU shall also be capable of triggering the alternation using
a HOUR ALT set point. When used, pump alternation shall occur on the hour that is
programmed into the set point and Lead Pump run trigger is disabled. When the set
point is set to 24 the HOUR ALT function is disabled.
Manual VFD Control. When a pump is placed into the HAND position or
Overridden in Auto via telemetry, the pump shall be called to run at a fixed speed
determined by the operator defined OVRD SPD SET set point. Once called to
run the pump speed may be adjusted up by using the 1 key (+1%) and 2 key
(+5%) and down using the 7 key (-1 %) and 8 key (-5%). Any change made to the
manual pump speed will be stored in the OVRD SPD SET set point.
K. VFD TCU Set points. All set points residing in the TCU shall have default factory set
points when shipped. New set points values can be entered locally at the TCU via
the LCD screen, or remotely from the Central telemetry via the PLC/TCU editor,
default or custom screens. The new values shall be retained in the TCU in the event
of a power cycle.
L. The Contractor shall hardwire the level float switches to the VFD's such that the floats
shall operate as a backup should the level fransducer or the TCU fails. The
Contractor shall furnish alt wiring and conduit necessary from the level float switch to
each VFD whether shown on the Drawings or not.
M. One (1) manual "FLOAT BYPASS" toggle switch shall be located inside one of the
VFD enclosures to allow the operator to manually bypass the low level shutoff float
switch and operate the pumps in MANUAL mode, should the float switch fail. The
Contractor shall fumish and install all necessary wiring among the three (3) VFD's,
the low level shutoff float switch, and the toggle switch to provide this functionality.
PUMP CONTROL STRATEGY (LS-33)
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-12 10/29/12
•
•
u
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
�
21
22
23
24
25
• 26
27
A. The Control Strategy for LS-33 shall be a"pre-packaged" control algorithm for a
duplex lift station using lead/lag pump controls. The starting and stopping of the
pumps shall be via a 4-20mA level pressure transducer provided by the pump
manufacturer in Section 11307. Floats shall be hardwired to the pumps as
backup should the TCU fail.
B. Any ancillary software programming required for a complete and operational
system shall be furnished by DFS at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall hardwire the level float switches such that the floats shall
operate as a backup should the level transducer or the TCU fails. The Contractor
shall furnish all wiring and conduit necessary from the level float switch to each pump
whether shown on the Drawings or not.
2.11 NEW AND EXISTING I/O
A. A list of the existing I/O at LS-42 is as shown below. All existing I/O shall be
rewired to the new DFS TAC PAC.
B. Existing I/O (LS-42)
Modute A - DMM�tl2
_.,. . .____.�.� . . . _ __ _..._ ...
42A3 (UI) Pump #1
Status
42R2 (�DI) �ump #2
5tatus
42A3 {t'iI) �ump #3
S[2l[LS
A2A4 (DT) Power Fatf
42AS (UI) High Well
Levcl
42R6 (DI) Trip #1
42A7 {DI) Tri� �2
42R8 (OI) Tr{p #3
42A9 {t>I) Gero Status
42A10 (DT} Csere
Overcrank
42A! X (DI} Any 2 Vumps
Status
M�dule R - RINf005
42R11 {pi) UC 8tas
42Ri2 (DI� ftTU Power
C. NEW I/O (LS-42)
���` ftUt4NING
flFF R4JNP9YNG
O�F itUNNING
N00.N1AL. fA6L
N4�RMR�. HIGH
NCtRTAAI ALARM
NORMA4 At;A1tPt
NORMAI AIAftM
CVt)RNlAL. RtlNNING
NORMAL ALAitM
NQRMAC ALARt�!
FA(1.URE NORMAi.
FAiLURE NORMAL
KEY=PUMP, DFL4Nf
K£Y=PUMP.. DFLOW
KEY=PUMP, DFL(7W
AEARM=FAEL,
pEtAY=300. CJiIL
AtrARM�HlGH,
DELAY=60, GALL
ACARM1=AtARM,
DELAX=90�. CALI�
ALARM�=ALARM,
pElAY�900,CALL
RL/4RM °R!}titM,
DEtAY=300, CALL
AtARM7�RUfdfdlNC,. CA61
AtRRM�ALARM, CAL�
AtARM =At,�4RM, CAE.E.
Ak.ARM 4 FAI LURE,
DELAY=30d, CIILL
AtARM=FAiLUitE,
DELAY�300, GALL
1. At a minimum the following I/O shall be monitored and controlled by the
new DFS TAC PAC. Controls shall be available at the Central Control
Center. Any other additional I/O, including internal memory I/O, required
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-13 10/29/12
1
2
3
for a complete and operational system shall be furnished and installed.
Module A
3191A1
3191A2
3191A3
3191A4
3191 A5
3191 A6
3191A7
3191A10
Module B
3191 B 1
319162
3191 B3
3191 B4
3191 B5
3191 B6
3191 B7
3191 B8
319169
3191610
3191B11
3191612
Module C
3191C1
3191 C3
3191 C4
3191 C6
3191 C7
3191 C8
Module D
3191 D 1
3191 D2
3191 D3
3191 D4
3191 D5
3191 D6
3191 D7
3191 D8
3191 D9
3191D10
3191D11
3191D12
Module E
3191 E 1
3191 E4
Module F
3191F2
3191F3
3191F4
(DI) Pump 1 Status
(DI} Pump 2 Status
(DI) Pump 3 Status
(DI) Phase Monitor Bypass
(DI) Pump Off Float Input
(DI) Low Float Input
(DI) High Float Input
(DI) Pump Start Float Input
(DI) Pump 1 S/S
(DI) Pump 2 S/S
(DI) Pump 3 S/S
(DI) Auxiliary Out
(DI) Alarm Light Status
(DI) Alarm Horn Status
(DI) Alarm Silence Input
(DO) Station Disable
(DI) AC Power
(DI) DC Bias
(DI) Phase Sequence
(DI) Process
(AI) Well Level
(AI) Phase AB Voltage
(AI) Phase AC Voltage
(DI) Level Transducer
(DI) Phase Voltage
(DI) Configuration
(DO) Pump 1 Disable
(DO) Pump 2 Disable
(DO) Pump 3 Disable
(DO) Pump 1 Override
(DO) Pump 2 Override
(DO) Pump 3 Override
(DI) Pump 1 Starter
(DI) Pump 2 Starter
(DI) Pump 3 Starter
(DI) Pump 1 Stop
(DI) Pump 2 Stop
(DI) Pump 3 Stop
(AO) Remote Level
(AO) Well Level
(DI) Low Well Level
(DI) High Well Level
(DI) HOA 1
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-14 10/29/12
�
u
•
r�
U
��
��
2 D
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
•14
15
3191F5
3191 F6
3191F7
3191F8
3191F9
3191F10
3191F11
3191F12
Module G
3191G1
3191G2
3191G3
3191 G4
3191 G 5
3191 G6
3191 G7
3191 G8
Module H
3191H1
3191 H2
3191 H 3
Module 1
(DI)
(DI)
(DI)
(DI)
(DI)
(DI)
(DI)
(DI)
HOA 1
HOA 1
HOA 2
HOA 2
HOA 2
HOA 3
HOA 3
HOA 3
(DO) Aux Out Override On
(DO) Alarm Light Override
(DO) Alarm Horn Override
(DO) Aux Out Disable
(DO) Alarm Light Disable
(DO) Alarm Horn Disable
(DO) Pump Override Reset
(DO) Analog Updating
(AO) Pump 1 Speed
(AO) Pump 2 Speed
(AO) Pump 3 Speed
319111 (AI)
319112 (AI}
319113 (AI)
Module R
3191 R 1
3191 R11
3191 R12
RIO Module
3191 R101
3191 R102
3191 R103
3191 RI04
3191 RI05
3191 R106
NEW I/O (LS-33)
Pump1 Speed Control
Pump 2 Speed Control
Pump 3 Speed Control
(DO) Battery Test
(DI) Bias Voltage
(DI) TCU Power
(DI) Odor Control Blower Run/Off Status
(DI) Odor Control Unit Alarm 1
(DI) Odor Control Unit Alarm 2
(DI) Generator Run/Off Status
(DI) Generator Alarm 1
(DI) Generator Alarm 2
At minimum the following I/O shall be monitored and controlled by the new
DFS TAC PAC. Controls shall be available at the Central Control Center.
Any other additional I/O, including internal memory I/O, required for a
complete and operational system shall be furnished and installed.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
8)
Pump 1 Status
Pump 1 Start Fault
Pump 1 Stop Fault
Pump 2 Status
Pump 2 Start Fault
Pump 2 Stop Fault
Pump 1 HOA in HAND
Pump 1 HOA in AUTO
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-15 10/29>12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
9)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Pump 1 HOA in OFF
Pump 2 HOA in HAND
Pump 2 HOA in AUTO
Pump 2 HOA in OFF
Low Well Level Float
Off Well Level Float
Lead Weli Level Float
Lag Well Level Float
High Well Level Float
Float Sequence Fault
Well Levei Transducer (4-20 mA)
Weli Level Transducer Input Fault
Water Pressure Transducer (4-20 mA)
Water Pressure Transducer Input Fault
Auxiliary Discrete Input (discrete or pulse)
Phase Voltage Fault
Phase Sequence Fault
Phase AB Voltage
Phase AC Voltage
RTU Memory Fault
AC Power Fault
DC Bias Voltage Fault
Alarm Silence Button
Alarm Horn Status
Alarm Light Status
Pump 1 Control
Pump 1 Disable
Pump 2 Control
Pump 2 Disable
Total Station Disable
Alarm Horn Control
Alarm Horn Disable
Alarm Light Control
Alarm Light Disable
Auxiliary Output
Auxiliary Output Override
Auxiliary Output Disable
A. Install and place into operation a complete new RTU System at the Pump Station
site. This work shall include the new antenna system, all interconnecting wiring,
conduit, and circuitry necessary to provide the owner with a fully operable control
system/RTU.
•
•
B. Install and mount equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents,
manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. Rigidly support and mount
equipment level and plumb, and in such a manner as to provide accessibility; •
protection from damage; isolation from heat, shock, and vibration; and freedom
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-16 10/29/12
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
�22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
from interference with other equipment, piping, and electrical components.
C. Include the services of a factory trained, qualified service engineer of the
equipment manufacturer to inspect the complete equipment installation to assure
that it's installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, make
all adjustments necessary to place the system into trouble-free operation and
instruct the operating personnel in the proper care and operation of the
equipment furnished. Provide services at both the field installation site as well as
the central site.
D. All workmanship utilized in the manufacture and installation of this system sh�ll
be of the highest quality and performed in a manner consistent with all accepted
industry practices.
3.02 FIELD TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Field tests shall consist of installation check-out, and a field acceptance test, in
sequence. Each stage of testing shall not be commenced until the preceding
stage is substantially complete as determined by the Engineer.
B. Field Test: When the facility is complete and ready for operation, the RTU and
associated components shall be inspected and tested for compliance with the
Contract Documents. Testing of the equipment shall be made by the Contractor
in the presence of the Owner, Engineer, the Electrical Subcontractor, the
Instrumentation Subcontractor, and the equipment manufacturer's representative.
The test shall include, but not be limited to the following:
Electrical: CONTRACTOR shall record readings of the voltage ar�d
amperage on all electrical components at start and at steady state
operating conditions. The results of the tests, including the serial number
of the accessories tested, shall be given to the engineer.
2. Inspection: A thorough inspection of all mechanical and electrical
equipment and controls, fittings, brackets, mountings, seats, conduit,
painting, components, and features shatl be made while the facility is
being tested to determine performance and compliance with design
requirements and specifications.
3. Repairs, Adjustments, and Replacements: The Contractor shall make any
and all necessary repairs, adjustments, and replacements until
performance has been demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of any repair, adjustment, and
replacement.
C. Certifications: The Contractorshall furnish the Engineerwith a written certificatron
signed by the manufacturer or the manufacturer's representative that the
equipment has been properly installed, tested, calibrated, and operated under
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-17 10/29112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
typical operating conditions, and satisfactory operation has been obtained.
3.05. SERVICE
A. The manufacturer shall offer full factory support of the installed system through
the use of factory employees. Service representatives who are not direct
employees of the manufacturer, or who are not specifically trained in the service
of the Owner's existing SCADA System shall be unacceptable. The Owner shall
have 24 hour per day access to service personnel through the use of a pager.
B. Furnish the services of the equipment manufacturer for onsite start-up for a
minimum of eight (8) hours. Onsite startup shall inctude but not be limited to field
programming the TCU units to provide the controls as described in the control
strategy, setting of speed and level setpoints, and field verifying the controls.
C
Contractor shall furnish the services of the equipment manufacturer for Owner
training for eight (8) hours.
END OF SECTION
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT AND PUMP STATION CONTROL STRATEGY
13600-18 10/29/12
•
�
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specificatinn
sections apply to the work.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and
includes requirements common to more than one section of these specifications.
1.03 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access f�r
service and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the final
location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all parts that
may be replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible
location.
1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building
components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify final locations
for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual
equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other
building components to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured
in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of inechanical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning.
C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical
services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
Coordinate the installation of inechanical materials and equipment above ceilings
with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.
D. Coordinate connection of inechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing
regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide
required connection for each service.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010 - 1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated
mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number,
serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested
compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible
location.
1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION
A. All packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as a system
for its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in
accordance with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 and NFPA 70,
"National Electrical Code" (NEC), Article 90-7.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS-Not Used
PART 3— EXECUTION- Not Used
END OF SECTION
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010 - 2
10/29/12
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 15061
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The requirements of this specification 15061 supersede relevant articles in
Section IV.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and
appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in continuous
satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the locations and to the
elevations indicated, specified or required for the proper completion of al{ work.
C. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already
completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in every
detail. All such replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the
Engineer and the Owner.
D. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or detailed
on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only, and indicate
pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's responsibility to furnish all
materials, pipe and fittings required.
E. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation, complete in
every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction Drawings, or specified
herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all details, devices,
accessories, and special construction necessary to properly furnish, install,
adjust, test, place into continuous satisfactory service, and complete the Work i n
an acceptable manner.
F. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron pipe and
fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating compliance
with specified performance requirements shall rest with the Contractor, and
through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the Material Supplier. The
Engineer's approval of 1) the manufacture and installation of the ductile iron pipe
and fittings 2) the use of materials included in this Specification, and 3) alternative
materials offered by the Contractor, shall not relieve the Contractor and Supplier
of full responsibility for meeting all performance requirements and guarantees.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
L
All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for potable water piping shall
be NSF-61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the below
listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is
made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the
standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
C
�❑
1
2
B1.1 - Standard Specification for Unified Inch Screw Threads.
B16.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings and
other special Alloys.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
psi Tensile Strength.
C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine
Aggregate.
C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar.
C150 - Portland Cement.
D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
E8 - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials.
E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
G95 - Cathodic Disbondment Test.
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1
�
C104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water.
C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for
Water and Other Liquids.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-2
10/29/12
•
•
•
i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-iron Fittings. 3-inch through
48-inch for Water and Other Liquids.
C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings.
C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with
Threaded Flanges.
C150 - Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe.
C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water �r
Other Liquids.
C153 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3-inch through 16-inr,h
for Water and Other Liquids.
C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Thpir
Appurtenances.
C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
E. NSF fnternational, The Public Health and Safety Company
1
2
No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects.
No. 61 -Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings and
all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and Sections
01300 and 01340. The requirements of AW1NA C110, C150, C151 and the
following supplemental requirements are applicable:
1. Catalog-cut type dimensional drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings.
2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type a�d
thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; perFormance history; and
all other pertinent information required for the manufacture of the product.
3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets,
connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials where
shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and position
of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly reinforced to
withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and longitudinal, and
the external loading conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-3 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special castings indicating all pertinent
dimensions.
4. The Supplier of the pipe shall submit, through the Contractor, an
Certificate of Compliance that the pipe, fittings and other products or
materials furnished for this project comply with all applicable provisions of
these Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and
other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, as
specified in ANSI/AWWA C105, C110, C150, and C151; respectively, and
certified copies of the following supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and
specials:
The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn statement that
the inspection and all specified tests have been made and all results
thereof comply with the requirements of these Specifications.
C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the
preparation of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor.
C�
22 D. Approval of the Shop Drawings and the design report and acceptance of the
23 certifications by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility •
24 to ensure that the pipe is designed and installed in strict accordance with the
25 Contract Documents.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused
and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their
respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service
intended, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect, and
have the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in such work.
A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall be required.
C
C
The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and
regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements.
The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with AVWVA
C151 except as it may be modified herein.
E. Welders and welding methods shall be certified to a nationally recognized
welding specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the pipe and
fittings.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-4
10/29/12
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
F. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated
and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise specified r�r
required.
G
W
All pipe shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No manner of repair will h�e
accepted, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the testing
and recording that is required in these Specifications unless otherwise specified.
The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be reject�d
as defined in AW1NA C151 Section 5.7.1 "Determining Rejection."
1.06 SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar-lined by a
singte qualified Manufacturer at one location. Fittings may be fabricated and the
lining for force main pipe and fittings may be applied at a site other than where
the pipe is manufactured, however, all testing and application of cement mort�r
linings and coatings shall be performed where the pipe is manufactured and shall
be subject to inspection by the Owner, the Owner's Representative and/or the
Engineer. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years experience in work
similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on this project. The
Manufacturer shall be required to show experience in supplying pipe in
environments similar to those expected to exist on this project and that the pipe
supplied in those environments has functioned satisfactorily.
1.07 SHOP TESTS
A. All pipe shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104,
C110, C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this
Specification. Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer andlor
Owner, and/or the Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be
submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor for approval. No lot of pipe shall be
shipped to the site of the Work until acceptable shop tests are completed and
approved.
1.08 INSPECTION
A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design
testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials, shall be
subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and/or the Engineer in the
Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this plant
inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and/or the Engineer.
B. The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Enginee�'s
opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to the
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Project site.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All ductile iron pipe, including flanged, mechanical joint, push-on joint, restrained
joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AVWVA
Specification C 151/A 21.51. Minimum wall thickness of pipe shall be calculated
as specified herein.
B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings,
above ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be
mechanical joint, restrained joint or push-on joint, as required.
C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ANSI/AVWVA C 110/A
21.10 Section 10-9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall be marked in
accordance with Section 51-10, "Marking Pipe" of ANSI/AVWVA Specification C
151/A 21.51. In addition, each 18" diameter and (arger pipe shall be marked by
casting or stamping it with a unique identifying number that will allow the Owner
to correlate the pipe to shop tests pertaining to it and to allow the Contractor to
mark the laying schedule in accordance with the requirements of this
Specification.
D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided as
required by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as allowed
by AW1NA C151.
E. Shop cement-mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and
shall be free from fracture, excessive interior surFace crazing and roughness.
F_ Pipe joints shall not be bonded for electrical conductivity in accordance with these
Specifications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings and the
following schedule:
All blow-offs, air valve assemblies, and {ateral connections to or from the
pipe shall not be fitted with dielectric gaskets and/or couplings.
G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings,
gaskets, lubricants, grout, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with
and approved by the appropriate NSF Standard 60 or 61.
2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA
•
C�
A. The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, cement mortar or
epoxy lined and asphalt coated, with EPDM gasket joints. The pipe shall consist •
of a cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Portland cement mortar (potable water
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-6 10/29/12
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•
and reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main) and an exterior coating �f
asphalt.
B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked
according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified, shall
conform to ANSI/AWWA C104, C150, C151.
C. Where shown on the Drawings, or where required to meet the conditions shovun
on the Drawings, the pipe, fittings and specials wall thickness shall be as required
to meet the following parameters:
n
Water Main (All Sizes)
Working Pressure (Pw)
Force Main (All Sizes)
Working Pressure (Pw)
All Mains
150 psi
100 psi
Pt Surge Allowance
Pf Field Test Pressure
F Safety Factor
Wd Dead Load
Ww Live Load
Minimum Bedding Type
Hc Height of filt over top of pipe (feet)
w Weight of Soil (Ib/ft3)
100 psi
1.25 times Pw
2
wHcBc (see note 1)
AASHTO H-20
3
See Note 1
120 Ib/ft3
Note (1): All pipe of each size furnished under this project shall be designed
for a single condition representing the worst possible combination of dead load
(Wd) and live load (Ww). The dead load shall be computed using the greatest
depth shown on the drawings, and based on assuming a soil weight of 1201bs/ft3
and transition trench width conditions. The determination of live load shall be as
recommended by AASHTO in "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges."
Pipe supplied for this project shall be enclosed in a sealed polyethytene sleeve
supplied and installed to pipe manufacturer's specification.
E. Pipe supplied for this project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH
(approximately 7.0) treated wastewater effluent meeting FDEP Part IV water
quality standards (reclaimed water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or
chloraminated drinking water (potable water) as applicable.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-7
10/29/12
2
3
4
5 2.03
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 2.04
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
u
TABLE 1
Wall Thickness (in)
Average
Pressure Outside Casting
Diameter Class si Diameter in Nominal Tolerance
12 350 13.20 0.28 0.06
16 250 17.40 0.30 0.07
18 250 19.50 0.31 0.07
20 250 21.60 0.33 0.07
24 200 25.80 0.33 0.07
36 150 38.30 0.38 0.07
PIPE DESIGN
A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a nominal wall thickness as shown in Table 1, as
calculated according to AWWA C150.
B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pipe, the minimum thickness of •
the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not be less than the
minimum calculated thickness of the pipe including net thickness, casting
tolerance and service allowance.
C. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations
showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to the
design loads.
MATERIALS
A. All ductile-iron pipe shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AW1NA C 151/A21.51.
The interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the Hazen-Williams friction factor
will not be less than 130. Each length of pipe shall be hydro tested to at least
500psi by the manufacturer in accordance with ANSI/AVWVA C 151/A21.51.
Additionally, 30" and larger pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 75% of the yield
strength of the metal, based on the nominal thickness of the pipe.
B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell and
flange, flange and flange, flange and spigot, and flange and flare, shall meet the
requirements of ANSI/AVWVA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces may be
fabricated.
C
The exterior of exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be field •
coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.0 mils minimum dry film
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-8
10/29/12
•
1 thickness, a second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils per coat
2 minimum dry film thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to 4.5 mils per coat
3 minimum dry film thickness. Field coatings shall be applied in strict conformance
4 with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and Section 09900.
5
6 D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic outside coating
7 specified in ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 2.05
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
E. The weight and class designation shall be painted conspicuously in a contrasting
color on the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting after the shop coat
has cured.
F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy containing at least
20% ceramic quartz pigment by volume. The standard of quality is Proteco 401
Ceramic Epoxy or approved equal.
JOINTS
A. Flanges and flanged joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions
and requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where threaded flanges are used,
they shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of ANSI/AW1NA
Specification C 115/A 21.15. All flanged ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be rated
for 250 pound working pressure and shall be faced and drilled to match ANSI
B16.1 Class 125 flanges unless special drilling is called for or required. Where tap
or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped accordingly.
B. All pipe flanges shall be coated with a rust preventive coating, as specified in
ANSI/AW1NA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately afterthey have been faced
and drilled.
C. Flanged bolt holes on each end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately
straddle the same horizontal and vertical centerlines unless special drilling is
called for, or required.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe are
compatible with the flanges of the various components and/or appurtenances.
E. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches or less in length, shall have
flanges cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12) inches
in length may be of the threaded type. Pipe threads shall be of such length that,
with flanges screwed home, the end of the pipe shall project beyond the face line
of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be faced to give a flush finish to the
flange and the flange surface shall be normal to the axis of the pipe. Flanges shall
be of such design that the flanged neck completely covers the threaded portion of
the pipe to protect it against damage and corrosion.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-9
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F. Push-on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
requirements of ANSI/AVWVA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to
push-on joints.
G. Mechanical joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 111/A 21.11. Where stud bolts are
required, belts shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The Contractor shall
tighten joint bolts by the use of approved wrenches, to a tension recommended by
the pipe Supplier.
H. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the Contractor
shall paint a►I bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats of coal tar pitch and where
joints are buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall be wrapped with two
laps of 8 mil polyethylene film and sealed to the pipe with polyethylene adhesive
tape.
Restrained Joints:
1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping
system shall be restrained based on the pressures shown on the drawings
or specified elsewhere herein. Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be
restrained based on 30 psi of working pressure. Restrained joint length
indicated in the Tables included on the Drawings represents the length on
all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained.
As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained.
2. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line
pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure, but not less
than 200 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push-on joints or
restrained mechanical joints.
3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type utilizing
cast lugs, shop welded retainer lugs or retainer rings bearing against pipe
shoulders. Field installed joint restraint systems, such as Megalugs, as
manufacturered by EBAA Iron, or approved equal, may be used for
restraining mechanical joints. Field welding or grooving of the restrained
joint or components shall not be acceptable. Restrained joints shall be
capable of withstanding full bulkhead thrust that can be developed within
the pipeline due to the sum of the working and surge pressures.
4
5.
Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically identified on the
Drawings.
Joints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined
previously.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-10
10/29/12
�
•
•
C�
1 2.06
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24 2.07
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•47
48
FITTINGS
A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push-on joint shall be ductile
iron and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet the
requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 110/A 21.10 or C153.
:
C
C
Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI/AVWVA Specificatian
C110/A 21.10 shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1,
Class 125. Fittings shall be short radius type were possible.
All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as shown
in the current Edition of the "Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe" of the Ductile Iran
Pipe Research Association.
All fittings furnished underANSI/AVWVA Specification C110/A 21.10 or C153 shall
be ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating as the pipe to
which it is connected.
E. Special fittings, where required, shall be of an approved design and have the
same diameters and thickness as standard fittings, unless otherwise required, but
their laying lengths and other functional dimensions shall be determined by their
positions in the pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which thpy
connect.
INTERIOR LINING
A. Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping:
All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with standard single
thickness cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at the
point of manufacture, in accordance with ANSI/AVWVA Specification C
104/A 21.4. Portland cement for cement mortar lining shall be in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C150, Type II cement. Shop
cement-mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and
shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing,
disbondment, and roughness.
2. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the interior
lining and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3
4.
5.
Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review and
approval.
The use and type of any admixtures must be approved by the Engineer
prior to their use. All material batching shall be by weight.
The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be one with
which the manufacturer has experience and can demonstrate a successful
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-11 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45 2.08
46
47
�
history. The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable to the Engineer
so that it will provide a hard and durable lining with a minimum of cracks,
surface crazing and disbonded areas.
Epoxy Lining for Sanitary Force Mains
Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the protective
compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil,
grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be solvent
cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has been made
free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive the protective
compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit abrasive media.
The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media so that
all rust, loose oxides, etc., are removed from the surface. Only slight
stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the surface. Any area
where rust reappears before lining must be re-blasted.
2. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation, the
interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of
Protecto 401. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient
temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be
dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project, the
lining shall not be used on the face of the flange.
3. Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6
inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils
nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The Joint
Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should be
taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in the
gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and spigot
ends shall be done after the application of the lining.
4. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by the
lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied
above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining manufacturer
in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time between coats shall
be that time recommended by the lining material manufacturer. To
prevent delamination befinreen coats, no material shall be used for lining
which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself without roughening of the
surface.
5. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch-up or repair in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
EXTERIOR COATINGS
A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for underground
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-12
10/29/12
•
•
r 1
�J
•
1
2
3
4 2.09
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of manufacture, in
accordance with ANSI/A1NWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
PIPE APPURTENANCES
A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/AVWVA C115/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs for flanged pipe shall be
screwed on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the flange and
the end of the pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no leakage through
the pipe threads, and the flanges shall be designed to prevent corrosion of the
threads from outside. Flanges shall meet the requirements of ANSI B16.1, and
shall be faced and drilled to that standard, unless special drilling is called for or
required. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the
pipe are compatible with the flanges of the various components and/�or
appurtenances. They shall be faced accurately at right angles to the pipe axis,
drilled smooth and true, and the machined faces covered with zinc dust and
tallow or equivalent material. The back of the flanges and bolt holes shall be
coated with asphaltic coating meeting the requirements of ANSI/AVWWA
C151/A21.51, Section 51-8.1. Coating material shall be applied immediately after
facing and drilling. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be tapped.
All flanged joints shall be thoroughly bolted through, stud or tap bolts of required
size. All flanged joints buried underground shall also be protected as specified
under Section 2.08.
B. All bolts and nuts used in the finished work for flanges shall be of carbon steel
and shall conform to the ASTM A 307 Grade B. The ends of all bolts shall be
finished to the standard radius in an acceptable manner. All screw threads shall
be "American Standard, Coarse Thread (N.C.). Stud bolts shall be hexagonal,
cold pressed semi-finished and made of inedium open-hearth steel. All
dimensions shall be in accordance with "American Standard, Heavy." Bolts and
nuts shall be cadmium or zinc plated at the point of manufacture by an approved
process with a plating thickness of 0.0003 to 0.0005 inches. All bolts and nuts
furnished shall be delivered to the field free from grease, rust, and dirt.
C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried shal{
be painted with finro (2) heavy coats of an approved coat tar pitch, in accordance
with Section 09900.
D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced type EPDM gaskets one-eighth (1/8)
inch thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a Durometer of 75
to 85 or neoprene having a Durometer of 55 to 65. As an alternate, the
Contractor may supply the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's) gasket such as
American Cast Iron Pipe Company's "Toruseal" gasket or U.S. Pipe's "Flange
Tyte" gasket. Gaskets for bell and spigot joints shall be fabricated and tested in
accordance with AW1NA C111.
E. Subject to the Engineer's approval, welded outlets shall be allowed; however, the
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-13 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
welded-on outlet diameter shall not be greater than one quarter the diameter of
the main line.
2.10 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on the
Drawings, manufactured compression couplings equal to Style 38 or Style 39
where isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured by the Dresser
Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or an approved equal. The
compression couplings shall consist of finro (2) steel follower flanges, one (1) steel
middle ring with pipe stops removed, and sufficient rolled thread, track-head bolts
to properly compress the gaskets. After fabrication, the middle and follower rings
shall be cold expanded to size and dimension. Thickness of the middle ring shall
be suitable for the pressures specified, and the application, and in no case be
less than one-half (1/2) inch thick. All parts of the compression coupling shall be
galvanized or heavily cadmium plated at the point of manufacture and shall be
epoxy coated in accordance with AVWVA C210 or AWWA C203.
:
C
The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working pressure
plus surge pressure as a minimum.
The Contractor shall provide field coating for buried couplings in accordance with
AVWVA C203 and these Contract Documents.
D. Small deflections in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type
coupling joints, but such deflections shall not exceed three (3) degrees between
any two (2) adjacent pipe sections. Where changes in line and/or grade in
excess of three (3) degrees are required the deflections shall be made by
deflecting multiple joints or by using fittings approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
33 3.01
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the work,
the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accordance with
the provisions of applicable permits and easements.
B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be
provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie-down straps or padded banding.
In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be taken to
prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections. Such work shall
be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and under no condition
shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe shall not be allowed,
except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be protected during shipping by
covering or some other means acceptable to the Engineer to prevent
contamination of the pipe and to protect the lining from drying during transport.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-14 10/29/12
.
•
�
U
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
C. Ali pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage to
the lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free fall.
All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe handling
equipment shall consist of wide belt slings, padded cradles, or other devices
designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe or coatings. The use of
forks, chains, hooks, or other equipment that may damage the pipe or its lining �or
coating shall not be allowed.
D. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as possible
to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction. Pipe shall not
be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner that will
protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere.
Coated pipe shall be stored on padded skids, sand or dirt berm, sand bags, or
other suitable means so that coating will not be damaged. Coated pipe shall be
handled with wide belt slings. Pipe fittings and specials which are placed in
storage, streets or drives must be so arranged as not to cause undue
inconvenience to traffic and must be protected sufficiently to prevent any damage
including but not limited to the interior lining and exterior coatings. Chains, cables
or other equipment likely to cause damage to the pipe, fitting or special coating or
lining shall not be used. Pipe which has been improperly distributed and which
must be moved longitudinally along the trench shall be reloaded on a suitable car
or truck or lifted and swung by a derrick or moved by such means as may be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
E. If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any ductile iron pipe,
fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or connections,
such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's
expense.
F. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery all
pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings or
specials exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior cement mo�#ar
linings, joint ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at the Contractor's
expense immediately remove the same from the job site, or repair to the
Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials deemed not suitable for
installation shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at the Contractor's own
expense.
G. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no
damaged portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having
been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a
satisfactory manner, by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.
H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign
substance that may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being
placed in the trench. The openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be
closed during any interruption of the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-15
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6 3.02
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall
completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and any
other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints and any
necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline.
INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. Ductile iron piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Pipe shall be laid only after the trench has been excavated as
described Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench shall be laid to a
firm and even bearing for its full length. Precautions shall be taken against
flotation. The pipe shall be backfilled with selected fine excavated material as
shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted to one foot above the top of
the pipe and thereafter backfilled as specified in Section 02221.
B. Precautions shatl be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the
bedding material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding forms a
continuous and uniform support for the full length of the pipe except that the
grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackle. Bell holes shalf be
formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings.
Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field
joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations.
.
C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying •
schedule. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within plus or
minus one inch.
D. The maximum obtainable separation befinreen raw water, potable water,
reclaimed water ad sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal
separation of 3 feet, outside to outside, shall be maintained between raw water
lines, potable water mains and reclaimed water mains or a minimum of 6 feet
separation between sewage lines and either water or potable water lines. In
instances where water lines cross a potable water main or a sewage collection
line, a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches shall be maintained between the
invert of the upper pipe and the crown of the lower pipe. In instances where a
vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw water line and a potable water
main or a sewage collection line cannot be achieved, then the rawwater line shall
be placed in a cast iron sleeve or encased in concrete centered at the point of
crossing.
E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or
other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such
change shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of additional
fittings.
F. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engineer, pipe shall not be laid
uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill grade shall
be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following •
pipe to prevent movement.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-16 10/29l12
�
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of 36
inches of cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise indicated
on the plans. At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical separation between
pipes shall be maintained while also maintaining 36-inch minimum cover, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02221 of these
Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings.
Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between the trench bottom and
the pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be deposited on top of the pipe,
but alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on both sides.
J. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommended procedures. In general the procedure shall be as described
herein. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be thoroughiy
cleaned, and a clean gasket shall be placed in the bell groove. The spigot shall
be carefully cleaned and the bell containing the gasket and the spigot lubricated
with a vegetable-based lubricant. The spigot of the pipe section shall then be
aligned with the bell end and inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and
telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the
bell will not be permitted.
K. Restrained joints shalf be assembled in a similar manner as described above
except that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommended procedures.
L. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the field horizontal and field vertical
centerlines of the pipe. The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing
before installing flanged fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and nuts
by wire brushing.
M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and
progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to
the proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when tightening joints to
prevent any strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. After tightening all
bolts any stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it is not to be
buried.
N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset
or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the
joints. Flanged joints shall be watertight.
O. Pipe stulls, if recommended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until bedding
and backfilling operations have been completed. After the backfill has been
placed, the stulls shall be removed and shall remain the property of the
Contractor.
P. After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of the
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-17 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
pipe to verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent. The
frequency of checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no case shall be
less than the frequency of soil density testing.
Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2-inch metallic tape, appropriately color coded and
imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and directly above
the utility, for identification and ease of location. The appropriate tape color
codes are as follows:
1. Sanitary Force Main: Green
2. Potable Water: Blue
3. Reclaimed Water: Purple
R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the
opposite end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or fitting or
prevent pressure from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the gasket. The
pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while bolting. Bolts shafl be
gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate of gasket compression around
the entire flange.
S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at
any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the
bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be established that
the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and frost occurs.
T. Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have a 6-
inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller (except
pipes 3 inches and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8-inch minimum
concrete encasement for pipes larger than 24 inches up to and including 36
inches and 9 inches minimum concrete encasement for pipes larger than 36
inches. Concrete encasement shall extend a minimum of 12 inches past edge of
structure or slab.
U. All pipe and fitting joints occurring within restrained joint limits as required on the
Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to prevent thrust forces from
pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints shall be harnessed by using the
pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained joint arrangements conforming to these
Specifications. Where approved by the Engineer, joints may be restrained by the
use of rods and clamps. The rods and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be
installed utilizing lugged fittings and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear
against the pipe bells. Saddle clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend
on friction or set screws to prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The
pipe clamps, tie rods and their assembly shall meet the requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association Bulletin No. 24. After each tied joint is
connected up, all pipe clamps, bolts, heads, tie rods and nuts shall be coated as
recommended by the Supplier.
u
•
V. Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth continuous •
interior surface. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe and
remove any obstructions that may reduce the pipe's carrying capacity. Following
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-18 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 3.03
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26 3.04
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41 3.05
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
48
completion of pipeline progressively or in sections, including completion of inside
inspections, insofar as might be possible or practicable, the line shall be kept
partially filled with water.
W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a crark
exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining failures
that exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater than 12 inches
shall be cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not be more than one
patch on the lining of any one joint of pipe, fitting or special.
X. Wherever necessary and approved by the Engineer, patches shall be made by
the Contractor with a mortar of one part Portland cement and two parts clean,
sharp sand; all measurements to be by weight. No pipe requiring the lining to be
patched shall be installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus patched shall not
be instalted until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and approved
for laying by the Engineer.
CUTTING PIPE
A. Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a
satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis of the
pipe. Pipe cutting shall only be done by saws specifically designed for that
purpose. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled to the dimensions of
the Manufacturer`s specifications.
SLEEVE COUPLINGS
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will be in
contact with the gaskets.
B. The follower rings shall be placed over the pipe ends, then the Contractor shall
slip the gaskets that have been lubricated with an approved vegetable based
lubricant over the pipe ends. The Contractor shall place the middle ring over the
previously laid pipe then insert the end of the joining pipe into the middle ring, and
position both gaskets evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The Contractor
shall insert bolts in bolt holes of follower rings and tighten nuts in the sequence
and with the torque requirements of the coupling manufacturer. After tightening
all bolts the stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it is not to be
buried.
DRILLING AND TAPPING
A. Where shown on the Construction Drawings orwhere required, ductile iron pipe,
fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage outlets, air reliief
outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and/or chlorination. Holes shall
be drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or fitting.
B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as to require bosses or
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-19 10l29/12
1
2
3
4
5 3.06
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
3.07
3.08
reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall furnish
such outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled and tapped
as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
SURFACE PREPARAT(ON AND PAINTING
A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign
material by the use of soap and water or other solvent as may be required.
B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all steel bolts and nuts a
chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of primer
especially prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After this
pretreatment, the Contractor shall coat all bolts and nuts as follows:
C.
D.
E.
Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) coat of primer.
Paint all bolts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these
Contract Documents.
All piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as specified in
Sections 09865 and 09900.
SUPPLIER'S FIELD SERVICE
A. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe Manufacturer's
field representative to be on-site and provide instruction to each crew working
during the installation of a minimum of four push-on joints and four restrained
joints The Manufacturer's field representative shall certify that the installations
observed were satisfactorily completed and all pipe installation crews were
familiar with the proper methods and procedures for the pipeline installations.
FLUSHING AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matterfrom the pipeline as work
progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed, in a manner approved
by the Engineer, at each break or pause in pipe laying, and at the end of each
work day, so as to minimize the amount of materials that can enter the pipe.
B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24-inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to remove
all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be
less than 2 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing
property damage or violation of environmental regulations or permits.
C. Prior to pressure testing, all 30-inch and larger mains shall be televised. Afl dirt
and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be cleaned in a manner
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-20
10/29/12
.
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
•
C
approved by the Engineer. After cleaning, the mains shall be re-televised. Pre-
and post-cleaning videotapes shall be furnished to the Owner.
Testing of lines shall be as specified in Sections 01625.
END OF SECTION
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-21
10/29/'N 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLA �
NK
•
•
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-22 10/29/12
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
•
SECTION 15064
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install in the
locations as shown on the Drawings, the PVC piping, fittings and appurtenances
as specified herein.
B. The requirements of this specification 15064 supersede relevant articles in
Section IV.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
I1
�'3
Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings.
All pipe, fittings, valves, solvents and glue used for potable water piping shall be
NSF-61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All PVC pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single
manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture
of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and
installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply
with these Specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with
the General Conditions and shall include dimensioning and technical specification
for all piping to be furnished.
B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein.
1.05 TOOLS
A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for normal
installation shall be furnished with the pipe.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-1 10/29112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:
Class-rated PVC pipe and accessories four to twelve inches (4"-12") in
diameter, where shown or as specified on the Drawings, shall meet the
requirements of AVWVA Specification C900 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pressure Pipe." Pipe shall be Class 150, meeting requirements of
Dimension Ratio (DR)18 with ductile iron outside diameters. Each length
of pipe shall be hydro-tested to four (4) times its class pressure by the
manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C900. Reclaimed water (RCW)
piping shall be pipe Class 200 meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio
(DR) 14.
2. Class-rated fourteen inch (14") or larger PVC pipe and accessories for
force main use only shall meet the requirements of AVWVA Specification
C905, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe". Pipe shall be Class
235, meeting the requirements of DR 18 with ductile iron outside
diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydro-tested by the manufacturer
to two (2) times its class pressure in accordance with AVWVA C905.
3. Pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4-inch shall be 200 psi SDR-21
conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2241. Potable water main pipe
shall have EPDM gasket push-on joints conforming to ASTM F 477. Force
main pipe shall have SBR gasket push-on joints conforming to ASTM F-
477.
4. PVC pipe less than 4-inches in diameter, which is exposed to view or
buried, shall be ASTM D-1785 Schedule 80 pipe with UV inhibitors.
5. All PVC pipe shall be new, unused and manufactured for this project.
Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034, F794, and
D-1784 (PVC compound). The PVC pipe shall be manufactured by Johns-
Manville Corporation, Certain-Teed Corporation, or equal. All PVC sewer
pipe shall be green and conspicuously labeled with the manufacturer's
name, nominal pipe size, applicable material code or PVC cell
classification, standard dimension ratio number, product type, standard
specification designation, and production record code.
6. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provisions shall be
made for expansion and contraction at each joint with an elastomeric ring,
and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. PVC Class
pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe
Association Guide Specification UNI-B-3-76, and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-2 10/29/12
•
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
�46
47
:
7. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of approximately 20 feet, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe for potable water supply and
accessories shall bear the NSF inark indicating pipe size, manufacturer's
name, AVWVA and/or ASTM Specification number, working pressure and
production code. Pipe and couplings shall be made from Class 12454-A
or Class 12454-B virgin compound, as designed in ASTM D1784.
8. PVC pipe shall be color coded as follows: sanitary mains - green; potable
water mains - blue; reclaimed water mains — lavender, process piping —
brown. Specific colors shall match Owner's standard colors as applicable.
Joints:
Joints for PVC sewer shall be of the bell and spigot type conforming to
ASTM D-3212 using factory installed, flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets).
These gaskets shall be SBR and shall conform to ASTM F-477. Joints for
PVC water pipe shall be of the bell and spigot type using factory installed,
flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These gaskets shall be EPDM and
shall conform to ASTM F-477.
2. The PVC joints for buried pipe shall be of the push-on type unless other-
wise directed by the Engineer so that the pipe and fittings may be
connected on the job without the use of solvent cement or any specral
equipment. The push-on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint
designed to be assembled by the positioning of a continuous, molded
rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe or fitting socket and the
forcing of the plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, thereby
compressing the gasket radially to the pipe to form a positive seal. The
gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped so that the
gasket is locked in place against displacement as the joint is assembled.
The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal expansion or
contraction with a total temperature change of at least 75 degrees F in
each joint per length of pipe. The bell shall consist of an integral wall
section with a solid cross-section elastomeric ring which shall meet
requirements of ASTM D1869. The thickened bell section shall be
designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. Lubricant furnished for
lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not supportthe growth of bacteria,
shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or pipe material, and shall
not impart color, taste, or odor to the water.
3. PVC joints for exposed pipe shall be threaded or solvent welded joints
where called for on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Teflon thread tape or liquid teflon thread lubricant shall be used
on all threaded joints to serve as both a sealer and lubricant. Threaded
joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is hand tight a
strap wrench should be used to make up one to two (1-2) additional full
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4 C.
5
turns past the hand tight point. Do not use pipe wrenches or pump pliers
on plastic pipe or fittings.
Fittings:
6 1. Fittings for pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4-inches in diameter
7 shall be solvent welded Schedule 80 PVC and shall conform to ASTM
8 Specification D2464-69.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. The manufacturer of the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride
accessories as well as any adaptors and/or specials required to perform
the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Standard
double bell couplings will not be accepted where the pipe will slip
completely through the coupling.
2.02 RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. All buried piping shall be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table
provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping
system shall be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject to
gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure. Restrained
joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all sides of fittings
and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at
all fittings and valves shall be restrained.
B. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line pressures
25% percent above the working pressure but not less than 150 psi. The pipe and
fittings shall be restrained push-on joints or restrained mechanical joints.
C. PVC push-on pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni-Flange
Corp. Series 1390 Restrainer or approved equal. The restraining device and Tee
head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A-
536, Grade 65-45-12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of
corrosion resistance high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the
requirements of ASTM A-242.
D. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained with
the Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBAA Iron, Inc., Series 2000PV
Mechanical Joint Restraint Gland, or approved equal. The restraining device and
Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM
A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of
corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the require-
ments of ASTM A-242.
E. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-4 10/29/12
�
� J
•
�
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the
pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damaged pipe or fittings shall be
replaced.
B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being
laid or installed, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective.
C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid or installed, it shall be
removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional
expense to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned befo�e
laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and when installed or
laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required.
3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported
thrust anchors shall be provided where required. Each length of pipe shall be
cleaned out before erection.
B. Sleeves shall be installed of proper size for all pipes passing through floors or
walls as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or required
for liquid or gas-tightness the pipe be sealed with a mechanical seal equal to
Link-Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan.
C. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in the
concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall in accordance with the requirements of
the piping layout and jointing method and their locations shall be verified from
approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. Pipe hangers and
supports are specified in Section 15094 of these specifications.
D. All valves, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances needed upon the pipelines
shall be set and jointed as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Valves and
appurtenances are included in Section 15100 of these specifications. All pipe
and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner
as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers
have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their
equipment, a certification shall be submitted stating that such requirements have
been complied with.
3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING
A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other
foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2 feet per
second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. The
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance or
property damage.
B. Complete PVC piping systems shall be field pressure tested after installation and
including all components to the required pressure for 2 hours. Any leaks
discovered during testing shall be repaired. The repaired companent or portion
must be retested until the entire system passes the pressure testing.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
A. All piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surFace prepared and be
painted as specified in Sections 09865 and '09900 of these specifications.
SurFace preparation and shop priming is a part of the work of this Section. Pipe
marking is included in Section 09900, but it shall be part of the work of this
Section to assist as required by the Engineering in identifying pipe contents,
direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe.
END OF SECTION
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-6 10/29/12
•
•
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
SECTION 15065
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This specification covers the preparation of detailed shop drawings and the
fabrication; inspection and testing of stainless steel process piping systems.
The specific piping systems covered include the following:
1. Pump discharge pipes and fittings.
B. All work shall be done in accordance with applicable standards as listed herein
unless otherwise stated in the purchase order and/or attached addenda to this
specification. Sound engineering practices shall be followed in the absence af
specified standards or specifications.
C. Fabrication of piping subject to the requirements of the ASME boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section I, "Power Boilers," is not covered in this
specification.
1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. ANSI and/or ASME Standards
:
C
B1.1
B1.20.1
B16.5
B16.9
B16.11
B 16.25
B18.2.2
B31.3
B36.10
B36.19
Unified Inch Screw Threads
Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal)
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded
Buttwelding Ends
Square and Hex Nuts
ASME Code for Pressure Piping - Process Piping
Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
Stainless Steel Pipe.
MSS Standards
SP-43 Wrought Stainless Steel Butt Welding Fittings
PFI Standards
ES-3 Fabricating Tolerances
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-1
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Q
E.
F
ASTM Standards
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ASTM A 999 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Alloy
and Stainless Steel Pipe.
ASTM B 804 - Standard Specification for UNS N08367 and UNS N08926
Welded Pipe.
ASTM A 403 - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless
Steel Piping Fittings.
ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Steel Bars and
Shapes.
ASTM A 312 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipes.
ASTM A 403 — Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless
Steel Piping Fittings.
ASTM A 774 - Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic
Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and
Moderate Temperatures.
ASTM A 778 - Standard Specification for Welded Unannelaed Austenic
Stainless Steel Tubular Products.
Documents referenced in each of the above are hereby incorporated by
reference.
The latest revision of all documents shall apply unless otherwise noted herein.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The fabricator shall prepare the necessary detail fabrication drawings from the
isometric piping drawings. Pipe size and dimensions of the existing piping
system shall be verified and measured in the field before the drawings are
submitted.
B. All piping shown on the isometric drawings is shown in normal assembly and
operating position. When specifically required, thermal expansion requirements
and cold springing will be shown on the drawings.
C. Pipe detail pieces shall be fabricated in accordance with the piece marks shown
on the drawings, unless otherwise required for handling and/or shipping.
Changes from the piece mark arrangement shown on the drawings shall require
approval of the Engineer.
D. If any conflicts exist between the Isometric Drawings and the Piping Material
Specification, such conflict shall be immediately brought to the attention of the
Engineer.
E. In addition to the above, the following shall be submitted:
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-2
10/29/12
�
•
•
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7.
8.
9.
10
The weight of each length of completed piping.
A complete total bill of materials.
Applicable Material Data Sheets from the supplying mill.
Original copies of mill certifications for each heat of material to be utilized.
Original copies of certified design calculations.
Original written certification from the supplying mill stating that the
fabricator has been pre-qualified for all required fabrication processes.
Original copies of certified test reports including a statementthatthe pipe,
flanges and appurtenances have been fabricated in accordance with all
applicable standards.
Recommended solvents and cleaning procedures for removal of protective
coatings applied prior to shipment.
Proposed welding repair methods.
A complete fabrication schedule.
1.04 APPROVAL OF PROCEDURES
I�
�
The fabricator shall submit a minimum of five (5) copies of his welding procedures
and procedure qualification records to the Engineer for review.
An approval of welding procedures is required from the supplying mill, in writing,
before welding is performed.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 PUMP DISCHARGE RISER PIPES AND FITTINGS
�
:
The Contractor shall furnish and install the riser pipes, fittings, supports, hangers,
hardware, and valves as shown on the drawings on each pump discharge line.
All stainless steel piping shall be provided with flanged connections and shall
connect to the pump discharge piping and valve vault piping as shown.
2.02 FABRICATION DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
A. Flanged branches with raised face or lap joint flanges:
L'�-�
C
center of header to face of flange or lap ±1/8" (3.2 mm)
maximum lateral offset t1/16" (1.6 mm)
Flanged branches with RTJ or tongue and groove flanges:
center of header to face of flange
maximum lateral offset
Beveled end branches:
±3/32" (2.4 mm)
t1/16" (1.6 mm)
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-3
10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
center of header to end of bevel ±1/8" (3.2 mm)
maximum lateral offset ±1/16" (1.6 mm)
In fitting reinforcing pads to the curvature of the pipe the maximum allowable gap
shall be 1/8" (3.2 mm).
E. Flange faces must be square with the pipe. The tolerance measured across the
outside diameter of the gasket surface with a level and thickness gage shall be
with the following:
Up to 4" ±1/32" (0.8 mm)
6" to 8" ±1/16" (1.6 mm)
10" ±3/32" (2.4 mm)
12" and Up ±1/8" (3.2 mm)
F. Bolt holes shall straddle the vertical centerlines of horizontal piping and in vertical
piping the centerline of the detail (spool) unless otherwise specified, and shall be
within 1/16" (1.6 mm) of exact alignment
2.03 MATERIALS
�
L:?
All stainfess steel pipe and fittings shall be fitted with flanged ends, be a minimum
wall thickness of Schedule 40, and rated for a minimum of 150 psi.
All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated from Type 316L extra low
carbon grade austenitic stainless steel.
2
3
Pipe shall conform to ASTM A-312 and be die-formed or rolled true to
dimension and round within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16-inch.
The two edges of the sheet shall be brought to line so as not to leave a
shoulder on the inside of the pipe. Fittings shall conform to ASTM A-403
or ASTM A-774.
Ends of pipe shall be true and perpendicular to the longitudinal axis with
the edges deburred.
4. Longitudinal seams on pipe and fittings shall be shop welded welded by
either tungsten gas or the metallic-gas method. Welding rod or wire shall
be of same composition or superior to the pipe and fittings material.
5. The weld deposit at the seam shall have a slight crown on both sides of
the weld and no cracks or crevices shall be allowed. Excessive weld
deposits, slag, weld spatter, and projections into interior of pipe shall be
removed by grinding. The interior welds shall be smooth, even, and shall
not have an internal bead higher than 1/16 inch.
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-4 10/29/12
�
•
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
.46
47
�
6. All pieces shall be marked with gauge and type of stainless steel.
7. Pipe and fittings shall be immersed in pickling solution in Manufacturer's
plant and scrubbed and washed until all discoloration and possible iron,
picked up from manufacturing process, is removed.
Fittings:
2.
3.
Q
All fittings for buried or submerged pipe shatl be shop fabricated, butt-
welded and flanged conforming to ASTM A403, class WP, using the same
material and wall thickness as the pipe, conforming to ANSI B16.9.
Elbows shall be long radius.
Flanges shall be Class 150 per ANSI B16.5. Flanges shall be welded on
both sides.
Pipe ends shall be prepared for flanges and couplings as required.
Blind flanges shall be constructed entirely of the same material (or better)
as the pipe (minimum thickness 3/8-inch).
E. Any material which is not in accordance with the classification shall be noted on
the Fabricator's Drawings as "out of spec." material. Material substitutions must
be approved in writing.
The fabricator shall provide Mill Test Reports for pipe and Certificates of
Compliance for fittings and flanges.
F. All materials shall be heat treated, welded, pickled, passivated and tested in
accordance with the supplying mill's requirements for the intended service
conditions. Any conflict between the supplying mill's requirements and these
specifications shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention.
2.04 SOCKET WELD FITTINGS
A. To avoid possible cracking of fillet welds when the pipe is seated against the
bottom of the socket prior to welding, it is required that the pipe be withdrawn
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) away from contact with the bottom of the socket
before starting welding.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with American National Standard, ASME
B31.3, "Process Piping" latest edition. Any allowable exceptions are noted on the
Piping Drawings or Piping Material Specifications.
B. Shop Welding
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-5 10/29/12
1 1. All welding procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
2 mill supplying the pipe and fittings. Any conflicts between the mill
3 requirements and those specified herein shall be brought to the Engineer's
4 attention prior to initiating welding.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Welding procedures and operators shall be qualified for welding materials
specified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," latest issue. Welding
Procedures and Welder's Qualification Test records shall be available for
examination by the Owner.
3. All welding shall be performed by welders or welding operators qualified in
accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,
"Welding and Brazing Qualifications" welder perFormance qualification.
�
5.
0
All welding, brazing and cutting shall be performed in accordance with
Occupationat Safety and Health Standards (OSHA).
The fabricator's welding techniques shall be GTAW, GMAW, SAW and
SMAW, used either individually or in combination with one another.
The design of weld joint, welding bevel, and reinforcement shall be in
accordance with ASME B31.3.
7. Prior to welding, the welding groove and adjacent base metal shall be
cleaned inside and outside of all scale, rust, oxides, paints, oils, or other
materials that may affect the welding.
8. The edges or surfaces of parts to be joined by welding shall be prepared
in the manner specified in the fabricator's qualified welding procedure.
9. The ends of_piping components to be joined by welding shall be aligned as
accurately as is practicable within the tolerances of diameter, wall
thickness, etc. Where the misalignment exceeds 1/16" (1.6 mm), the
inside diameter of the pipe extending internally shall be trimmed with the
angle of the bevel not to exceed 30 degrees. However, this trimming shall
not result in a piping component wall thickness less than the design
thickness plus corrosion allowance.
10. Alignment shall be preserved during welding by tack welds, spaced as
required, but with at least one tack weld in each quadrant. Tack welds
shall be of the same quality and material as the completed weld and shall
be thoroughly fused with the weld beads. Otherwise they shall be
removed during the welding operation.
CJ
�
11. The use of backing rings or strips is not permitted in the welding of girth or •
longitudinal joints.
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-6 10/29/12
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
12. The total joint penetration shail not be less than the thinner of the two
components being joined, except that incomplete root penetration is
permissible if it does not exceed 1/32" (0.8 mm) or 20 percent of the
nominal wall thickness of the thinner component, whichever is smaller.
The total length of such incomplete root penetration shall not exceed 1-
1/2" (38 mm) in any 6" (150 mm) of weld length. Welds on which 100
percent radiography is specified shall have complete joint penetration.
13. The undercut and weld reinforcement of a butt weld shall be in accordance
with Table 341.3.2 ofASME B31.3.For double welded joints this limitatic�n
on reinforcement shall apply to each surface of the weld separately.
14. On large diameter lines, where practicable, weld metal shall be deposited
from both sides (double welded).
17 15. Prior to depositing each weld layer, the previous weld shall be thoroughly
18 cleaned to remove all oxide, scale, slag, flux, or defects. Grinding or
19 chipping may be required to correct the defects. Peening shall not be
20 used to close cavities in the weld metal.
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
16. Longitudinal seams shall be located to clear openings and attachments
where practicable, and shall be staggered a minimum of 5t or 2" (50 mm)
whichever is less in adjoining courses. Where necessary to add outside
structural attachment to pipe across longitudinal seam weld, omit
attachment weld where crossing seam weld and notch out attachment.
17
�
The fabricator shall bevel, or otherwise prepare joint ends that are to be
field welded.
Alloy welding electrodes (filler metal) should be of the same approximate
analysis as piping material being welded.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Bolts and Nuts for Flanged Fittings:
1. Bolts and nuts for flanged connections shall be Type 316 stainless steel
conforming to ASTM A913, Grade B8M, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade
8M, for nuts.
2. Provide washer for each nut. Washers shall be the same material as the
nuts.
B. Gaskets for flanged connections shall be full-faced gaskets for flat-faced flang�es
and ring gaskets for raised face flanges. Gaskets shall be EPDM or FKM suitable
for the service of the pipe.
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-7 10/29112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
2.07 TESTING
A. Testing of the pipe and pipe materials shall be as outlined in Section 3.07 of this
specification.
2.08 EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION
A. Examination
1. The fabricator shall examine all welds in accordance with the requirements
set forth by ASME B31.3.
2. The acceptance criteria for welds shall be per Table 341.3.2 of ASME
B31.3. If weld examination reveals a defect it shall be repaired per
paragraph 328.6 of ASME B31.3. Further, for any weld defect revealed
with random or spot examination, additional items per paragraph 341.3.4
of ASME B31.3 shall be examined.
3. The Engineer and/or Owner's Inspector may specify further examination in
any category where he fee►s it is necessary.
4. The intent of these examinations is to provide the examiner and the •
inspector with reasonable assurance that the requirements of ASME
B31.3 and the engineering design have been met. The fabricator shall
provide the inspector a certification that all the quality control requirements
of the Code have been met.
B. The Owner's Inspector shall perform such inspection as deemed necessary.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. All pipe shall be delivered clean. Cleaning shall consist of removing all non-
adhering material such as loose scale, sand, weld spatter particles, rust, cutting
chips, oil or mineral spirits, etc., from the inside of the piping assembly by any
suitable means. Pipe shall not be coated with any protective or oil based
coatings.
0
C
�❑
Open ends, whether plain, beveled, or flanged shall be protected from damage or
entrance of foreign materials with suitable protectors securely fastened.
Small pieces shall be boxed or wired together to avoid loss in transit.
Loading and handling shall be done with reasonable care and details braced •
where required to prevent damage during transit.
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-8
10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2a
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
E. Marking
1
E
Each fabricated pipe detail shall be marked as follows, using waterproof
paint, or paint protected with a clear waterproof varnish.
On stainless steel and alloy material, the marker shall be lead, zinc and
sulfur free, and less than 200 PPM chlorides.
3. The Pipe Detail Number shall be marked on each end of the detail an
opposite sides. The detail number consists of area number, piece
designation, and line number.
Example: 111-A-25, 111-B-25, etc.
4. The welders identification symbol shall be marked adjacent to each weld.
Metal stamping shall not be used on austenitic stainless and other high
alloy type materials. Additionally, stamping on carbon and alloy steel
materials shall be prohibited when the design temperature specified is
below -20°F (-29°C). In these cases, the welders symbol shall be applied
in waterproof paint.
3.02 FIELD WELDING
A. Field welding shall only be allowed when approved by the Engineer. Welding
procedures and operators shall be qualified for welding materials specified in
accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding
and Brazing Qualifications," latest issue. Welding Procedures and Welder's
Qualification Test records shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Gas tungsten arc, gas metal arc, shielded metal arc or submerged arc welding
(GTAW, GMAW, SMAW & SAW) may be used. An inert gas purge shall be used
for the root and second passes in all welding processes except the shielded
metal arc.
C. Preheat is not required unless the metal temperature is below 50°F (10°C).
When such a condition exists, the metal shall be heated until it is warm to the
hand before any welding is performed.
D. Post weld heat treatment (stress relieving) is not required
3.05 ERECTION
A. The piping systems shall be erected to conform to the piping drawings and
specifications. Qualified craftsmen shall perform all work in a neat and
workmanlike manner.
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-9 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Piping shall be installed in a manner such that the resultant forces on the
equipment will be kept to a minimum. Particular care shall be taken at
mechanical equipment where piping forces can cause misalignment. Flange
misalignment beyond the acceptable tolerance shall be corrected by cutting and
re-welding, and not by the use of force on the bolting. Bending of pipe and
fittings is not allowed.
C. Pipe supports, anchors and guides shall be installed and adjusted in accordance
with the pipe support drawings and specifications to properly support the piping
and to control movements due to expansion of piping and equipment. Sufficient
ties shall be installed to prevent excessive sway and/or vibration of the piping and
lines having outstanding unsupported corners.
D. Where necessary to provide piping anchor points that are not shown on the job
pipe support drawings, consideration shall be given to expansion and contraction
movements of the piping and equipment, with minimum forces and stress being
transmitted to the equipment.
E. When permanent pipe supports cannot be installed during erection, adequate
temporary supports shall be provided, so that piping is not strained or deformed
during the erection process.
i
F. All precautions shall be taken to assure internal cleanliness of installed piping. •
Flange protectors, or other end closures shall not be removed until time of
installation. Pipe sections shall be inspected just prior to installation, to assure
that all debris has been removed. Wherever practicable, hydrostatic test water
shall be drained quickly to promote flushing for further cleaning.
3.06 EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION
A. Examination
The acceptance criteria for welds shall be per Table 341.3.2 of ASME
B31.3. If weld examination reveals a defect it shall be repaired per
paragraph 328.6 of ASME B31.3. Further, for any weld defect revealed
with random or spot examination, additional items per paragraph 341.3.4
of ASME B31.3 shall be examined.
2. The Welding Inspector may specify further examination in any category
where he feels it is necessary.
B. Inspector shall inspect all piping systems including pipe supports to assure that
the installation has been made in a good workmanlike manner and conforms to
the drawings and specifications. In addition, the work may be subject to
inspection by the clienYs authorized agency such as an insurance company or
government agency.
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-10 10/29/12
�
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
.
•
3.07 TESTING
A. A general hydrostatic test of all completed shop fabricated details is not required.
B. Testing shall be conducted after the completion of all erection by deadheading
the pumps at the valve vault and running them for 1 minute. Testing medi�am
shall be water.
C All visible leaks shall be corrected. Any defective material or components and all
lines that fail to meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until all
test requirements are met. All repairs and retests shall be performed at the
Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner.
END SECTION
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-11
10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK �
•
�
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065-12 10J29/12
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
SECTION 15094
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers,
supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, including metallic hanging and
supporting devices for supporting exposed piping.
B. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and anchors
shall be 316 stainless steel and shall match the number, type, location, and
capacity of the existing supports.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design and shall be
adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating
conditions. The minimum working factor for pipe supports shall be five (5) times
the ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe being
supported.
B. Alf pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a
manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When
manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be
transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification stating
that such requirements have been complied with.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
.
Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the General Conditions, shap
drawings of all items to be furnished under this section.
Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses
in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to support and secure the
pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to
adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal
expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable externaf forces
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-1 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. All pipe supports shall be
approved prior to installation.
B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of
meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests and
physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP-58.
C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 that the
maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet otherwise specified herein.
D. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be
manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. or equal. Any reference to
a specific figure or number is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of
and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item in type, style, quality, design
and perFormance will be for approval.
2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE
A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 316 SS hangers suspended by
steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling mounting as follows:
1. Hangers:
Pipe Size. Inches Piping Technoloqy & Products Fiq. No.
1 /2" to 3" 50
3" to 30" 83
Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
Paragraph 2.04
2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 304 stainless steel machine threaded with load
ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the rod
shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the following
minimum diameters:
Pipe Size, Inches
Less than 2-1/2
2-1/2 though 4
4
6
8-12
14-16
20-30
Above 30
Min. Rod Diameter, In.
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/2
See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
Paragraph 2.04
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-2 10/29/12
•
r�
�J
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. Beam
clamps shall be Anvil Fig. No. 228 or equal
4. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be designed to be used in ceilings,
walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers or ceiling mounting
bolts for individual pipe hangers, and shall be as manufactured by
Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as follows:
a. 316 SS Multi Set II drop in style anchors shall be used where
applicable and shall be used for hanger rods up to and including
7/8-inch diameter.
b. Ceiling mounting plates shall be used, where applicable, and be for
hanger rod sizes 1-inch through and including 1-1/4 inches, shall
be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by Anvi! or approved
equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical adjustment
under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as required and where
apptied, shall 304 SS be equal to Anvil Fig. No. 230. Wall or
column supported pipes shall be supported by welded steel
brackets equal to Anvil Fig. 194, 195, and 199, as required, for pipe
sizes up to and including 20-inch diameter. Additional wall bearing
plates shall be provided where required.
5. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be set on a
0.5-inch neoprene pad and U-bolt assembly supported by the bracket for
pipes 4-inches and larger or by a U-bolt for pipes smaller than 4-inches.
U-bolts shall be equal to Anvil Fig. 120 and 137.
6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be supported
by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket. Hangers and
steel rods shall be as specified above.
7. Wall or column supported pipes 8-inches and smaller may be supported
by hangers equal to Anvil Figure 103 as required.
C. Floor supported pipes 3-inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by
either cast-in-place concrete supports or adjust-able pipe saddle supports as
directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when
lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is provided),
and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where latera!
displacement of the pipes is not probable.
43 1. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the
44 Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with
45 temporary supports. Top edges and vertical corners of each concrete
•46 support shall have 1-inch bevels. Each pipe shall be secured on each
47 concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor strap anchored to the
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-3 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
2
concrete with cast-in-place bolts or with expansion bolts. Where directed
by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be grouted into drilled
holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral displacement of
the concrete support. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer,
maximum height shall be five (5) feet.
Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to
that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular.
3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the
corresponding size 150 Ib. companion flanges or slip-on welding flanges
respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel pipe
construction of the size recommended by the pipe support manufacturer.
Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a minimum of finro (2)
expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle supports shall be equal to
Anvil Fig. No. 259. Where used under base fittings, a suitable flange shall
be substituted for the saddle. Floor supported pipes iess than 3-inches
shall be supported by fabricated steel supports.
D. Vertical piping shall be supported as follows:
•
22 1. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be
23 supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction by •
24 pipe supports as previously specified herein.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pipes and greater than eight-inches in
diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support as shown in the
drawings.
3. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe shall be
supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the pipe
sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Anvil Fig. 262. Anchor bolts shall
be equal to Kwik-Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock Industries,
Minneapolis, Minnesota or Wej-it manufactured by Wej-it Expansion
Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado.
E. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be 304 Stainless Steel.
2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FRP AND PLASTIC PIPE
A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously specified
herein.
B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber
hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder
by Husky-Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States •
Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing shall
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-4 10/29/12
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
� 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches for rubber nose. Tray
width shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs of rubber hose and 12
inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished
complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc.,
required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured
to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps fasteners equal to Globe Model
M-CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or equal. Spacing between clamps shall not
exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide continuous support along the length of the
pipe.
C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall provide firm
support, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due to thermal expansion and
contraction.
2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS
A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown on the
drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework anchored into
the floor or curbing. The vertical piping shall be suitably secured to horizontal
support members connected at each end vertical support members and spaced
as required to provide a rigid installation.
The supporting systems shall be as manufactured by the Unistrut
Corporation, Globe-Strut as manufactured by the Metal Products Division
of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. Vertical and horizontal supporting members
shall be U-shaped channels similar to Unistrut Series P1000 constructed
of 304 stainless steel.
2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe clamps
or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Series P2558. All
components shall be of 304 stainless steel.
3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and fittings
required for a complete assembly.
4. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall show all
details of the installation including dimensions and types of supports.
B. Any required pipe supports forwhich the supports specified in this Section are not
applicable, including pipe supports for above 30-inch diameter pipe; high
temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be fabricated or
constructed from standard aluminum shapes in accordance with Specifications,
concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein and
shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-5 10/29/i 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
1
2.
Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and all
related Sections of this Specification.
Complete design details of the entire pipe support systems shall be
provided, for approval by the Engineer.
3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting
structures, in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is
designed:
4. Hanger rods for above 30-inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1-1/2-inch
diameter and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum
recommended safe load.
2.05 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING
A. Pipe hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1.1.0 and
MSS SP-69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supports exceed the
following:
Maximum unsupported pipe span
(FEET)
Nominal Pipe Size - Ductile Iron Stainless Steel FRP and PVC
Inches
1/2 N/A 5 3.5
3/4 N/A 6 3.5
1 N/A 7 3.8
1-1/4 N/A 7 4.0
1-1 /2 - 3 N/A 9 4.0
4 7 10 5.5
5-10 10 10 10
12-48 10 per manufacturer or 10
as shown on
drawin s
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building
structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in
direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping
shall be supported from other piping orfrom metal stairs, ladders and walkways,
unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or authorized by
the Engineer.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-6
10/29/12
•
�
•
•
1 B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to suppart
2 the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions
3 to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure forces,
4 thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable externally applied
5 forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be approved by the Engineer.
6
7 C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both
8 sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all pipe
9 forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to suppart
10 connecting pipes.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
L�7
E
F
Pipe supports shall be provided as follows:
Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum suppart
spacing of 10 feet-0-inches with a minimum of one support per pipe
section at the joints.
2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever possible.
Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended by
the manufacturer except that support spacing shall not exceed five (5)
feet.
3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall nat
exceed five (5) feet.
4. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at least
15 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests, and at all
points necessary to insure rigid construction.
Pipe supports shall not result in point loadings, but shall distribute pipe loads
evenly along the pipe circumference.
Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in
pipe support selection and installation.
G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete
is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked
which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper
location of pipe supports is included under this Section.
H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface.
3.02 PRIME COATING
A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean,
dry, and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign
substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy
Primer or equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rust-Inhibitive
Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa. or
equal.
C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be
applied, as specified in Section 09900.
3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS
A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable
insulation shall be provided befinreen adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact
and any resulting electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous impregnated
felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or upon
approval by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-8
10/29/12
.
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
SECTION 15100
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete and
ready operation of all valves and appurtenances shown on the Construction
Drawings and as specified herein.
B
C
D
E
All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the drawings.
All valves of the same type shall be from the same manufacturer.
All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in
raised letters on some appropriate part of the body.
The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Resilient seated and resilient wedge gate valves
Ball valves
Eccentric plug valves
Valve Actuators
Air release valves
Air and vacuum valves
Flange adapter coupling
Flexible type expansion Joints
Flexible couplings
Unions
Pressure and vacuum gauges
Quick connect couplings
Cushioned Swing check valve with bottom mounted oil buffer
Slanting disk check valve
Swing check valve
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard
for use in controlling the flow of potable water, wastewater, reclaimed water,
chemicals, air, etc., depending on the applications.
�
C
Unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings all resilient seats, seals,
and other sealing components of valves and flexible fittings shall be EPDM.
All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuator to match the type of
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-1
10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fashion as the existing actuator.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well-established
reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the
particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and
shall comply with these Specifications, as applicable.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to
the Engineer for review.
1.05 TOOLS
A. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied
with the equipment.
1.06 VALVE INDICES
�
A. The Contractor shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for •
the work. The schedule shall the location, type, a number, words to identify the
valve's function, and the normal operating position for each valve.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RESILIENT SEATED AND RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES
A. All gate valves 4 inches to 24 inches in diameter shall be resilient seated or
resilient wedge, manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AW1NA
C515 of latest revision and in accordance with the following Specifications.
Valves shall have an unobstructed waterway equal to or greater than the full
nominal diameter of the valve.
B. The valves are to be non-rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged or rolled
bronze shown in AW1NA C515. Two stem seals shall be provided and shall be
EPDM of the O-ring type, one above and one below the thrust collar.
C. The sealing mechanism shall consist of a cast iron gate having an EPDM coating.
The resilient sealing mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the valve design
pressure when installed with the line flow in either direction.
D. The valve body, bonnet, and bonnet cover shall be cast iron ASTM A126, Class
B. All ferrous surfaces inside and outside shall have a minimum 10 mil
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-2 10/29/12
�
LJ
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
fusion-bonded epoxy coating. A handwheei or wrench nut shall be provided fa�r
operating the valve. All Valves are to be tested in strict accordance with AVWVA
C515.
E. Handwheels or chain wheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open the
valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an arrow and the wo+rd
OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of opening.
F. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to atl applicable
requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90
entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants".
G. Valves shall be equal to those as manufactured by American, M&H, Mueller,
Kennedy, Clow, or equal.
2.02 BALL VALVES
A. PVC ball valves shall be of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with union, socket, threaded �ar
flanged ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic
construction, 150 psi rated with Teflon seat seals and T-handles. PVC ball valves
shall be as manufactured by Spears, Plastiline, Hayward, or equal.
B. True union, vented, PVC ball valves shall be used on hypochlorite applications
and shall be manufactured to ASTM F 1970 specifications and constructed from
PVC Type I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 1245. All O-rings shall be Latharge
Viton. All valves shall have stem with double O-ring seals. All valve handles
shall be polypropylene with built-in lockout mechanism. All valve union nuts shall
have Buttress threads. All seal carriers shall be Safe-T-Blocked. All valve
components shall be replaceable. All valves shall be certified by NSF
International for use in potable water service. Afl 1/2" through 2" valves shall be
pressure rated to 235 psi, all 2-1/2" through 8" and all flanged valves shall be
pressure rated to 150 psi for water at 73° F. Valves shall have a vent hole in the
ball to equalize internal fluid pressures. Install valve with ball vent on the
pressure (upstream) side when in closed position. Venfed ball valves shall be
True Union 2000 Industrial Ball Valves as manufactured by Spears, True Union
Z-Ball Valves by Hayward, or Engineer approved equal.
C. Bronze, brass or stainless steel ball valves shall be of 2-piece (1" and smaller) or
3-piece (1-1/2" and larger) construction. Valves shal! be rated for 150 psi
saturated steam pressure and 400 psi WOG pressure. Valves shall have
stainless steel, bronze or brass body, stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball,
replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem and vinyl covered
steel handle. All end connections shall be threaded.
D. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve position indicators are
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-3 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
plainly visible when standing on the floor.
2.04 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
A. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with standard
ANSI/AWWA C517 Table 1, Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves, of
the latest revision unless otherwise specified. MANUFACTURER shall provide
affidavit of compliance with AVWVA Standard. Valves shall be as manufactured
by DeZurik, Val-Matic, Homestead or approved equal.
B. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AVWVA C504, latest edition. Each
valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 of the above
reference and shall be given a leakage test and hydrostatic test as described in
Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage test shall be
applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The manufacturer
shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of design testing as
described in Section 5.2.4 of the above reference.
C. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and
shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged valves
shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI B16.1 125/150 Ib. standard. Mechanical
joint ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/ AVWVA C111/A21.11. Screwed
ends shall be to the NPT standard.
D. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron.
E. Port areas for valves 20 inches and smaller shall be a minimum of 80 percent of
full pipe area. Valves 24-inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of 100
percent of full nominal pipe area.
F. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium plated.
Valve plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A-48, Class 40 cast iron or ASTM A-
536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene.
G.
H
Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel,
oil-impregnated bronze or non-metallic upper and lower plug stem bearings.
Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not
acceptable.
Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual gear
actuators unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type with a packing gland follower.
Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the
actuator or bonnet from the valve.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-4 10/29/12
•
�
r1
U
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
K. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable
requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90
entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants".
2.05 QUARTER TURN VALVE ACTUATORS
A. General
Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the
full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry
system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve.
Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body.
2. Butterfly valve actuators shatl conform to the requirements of Section 3.8
of the AWWA Standard Specifications for Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves,
Designation C504, insofar as applicable and as herein specified.
19 3. The Contractor and the actuator manufacturer are responsible for
20 providing actuators of adequate size, pressure, and torque ratings for the
21 respective application.
22
.23 4. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing valves and
24 actuators in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The
25 Contractor shall replace any actuator damaged during shipping Qr
26 instatlation without cost to the Owner.
27
28 5. Valves located seven (7) feet or more above the floor level shall be
29 equipped with an actuator that allows operation of the valve less than five
30 (5) feet from floor level. Manual operators shall have a chainwheel and
31 electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
B. Manual Actuators
Manual actuators shall have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed
gearing with handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of rated valve
pressures and actual velocities. Actuators shall be equipped with
handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop-limiting locking
devices to prevent over travel of the disc in the open and closed positions.
They shall turn counter-clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall
be of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the
valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed
without creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and
designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80
pounds on the handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall
withstand an input of 450-foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300-foot
pounds for larger than 30" size valves at extreme actuator positions
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-5 10/29/12
1 without damage. Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or
2 chain wheel and position indicator, and valves located below grade shall
3 be equipped with a 2-inch square AWWA operating nut located at ground
4 level and cast iron extension type valve box. Valve actuators shall
5 conform to AVWVA C504, latest revision.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C
2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to
open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an
arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of
opening.
3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or more above the
operator walkway. Process air piping valves in the aeration basins shall
have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a
minimum of 24 inches above the operator walkway.
Motor-Operated Actuators
Motor-Operated actuators shall include the electric motor, reduction
gearing, valve stem drive nut/bushing, position sensor, overload torque
sensor, ductile iron gear case, automatic declutchable handwheel, local
control and mechanical position indication, and remote control and
position indication.
2. Motors shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated 480 volt, 3 phase and
specifically designed for high torque, low inertia duty. Motors for actuators
shall also be specifically designed and rated for 15-minute duty operation
at 104°F (40°C). Output capacity shall be sufficient to open or close the
valve against the maximum differentiat pressure when the voltage is 10%
above or below normal at the specified service conditions. Motors shall
have Class F insulation. Motors must be protected by 3 thermal contacts,
which are embedded in the motor windings. The actuator shall be suitable
for up to 60 starts per hour for open/close service and 1200 starts per hour
for modulating service.
3. The actuators shall be suitable for use on nominal 3 phase power supply
and must include motor, integral reversing starters, local controls and
terminals for remote control and indication housed within a self contained,
sealed enclosure. The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in a
lubricant filled cast iron gearcase suitable for operation in any orientation.
Non-metallic gearing is not acceptable. For rising stem valves the output
shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem, and incorporate thrust
bearings of the roller type at the base of the actuator. All gearing and
bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated and suitable for year-round
service based on prevailing ambient temperature conditions.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-6 10/29/12
�
I-�
U
u
u
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
4. The actuator shall be furnished with a handwheel with a maximum rim p�ll
requirement of 60 pounds for valve travel loads. An external manual
declutch lever shall be included to place actuator in the manual mode.
The lever shall not require more than 10 pounds of force to engage even
when the valve has been tightly seated. The lever is to be padlockable in
either handwheel or motor mode. Operation by motor shall not cause the
handwheel to rotate, or operation of the handwheel shall not cause the
motor to rotate. Handwheel shall operate in the clockwise direction to
close.
5. Two nameplates, made of stainless steel, shall be attached to each
actuator; one on the motor housing, showing all relevant motor data, one
on the actuator housing showing all relevant actuator data. Special
information, such as the valve tag no., shall be shown if required. The
nameplates shall be securely fixed to the actuator and motor, so that they
cannot be removed or scratched off during shipment, installation,
operation or maintenance.
6. The rated output torque of the motor actuator shall be at least 1.5 times
the maximum torque required to open or close the valve at any position
including seating and unseating conditions when subjected to the mast
severe operating condition including any mechanical friction and/or other
restrictive conditions that are inherent in the valve assembly. Do not
include hammer-blow effect in sizing the actuator to comply with this
torque requirement. Valve manufacturer is responsible to assure that the
motor actuator stall torque output does not exceed the torque limits of the
valve operating stem or shaft. Maximum torque shall include seating or
unseating torque, bearing torque, dynamic torque, and hydrostatic torque.
Assume that the differential pressure across the valve is equal to the
pressure or head rating of the valve.
7. Actuator housings, supports, and connections to the valve shall have a
minimum safety factor of five based on the ultimate strength or three
based on the yield strength of the material used. Actuators shall be 0-ring
sealed, watertight to NEMA 4/6 (6 feet for 30 minutes). All external
fasteners shall be of stainless steel. Gear case shall be cast iron.
8. Torque switch bypass to be provided for the torque sensing system to
inhibit torque switch trip during unseating or during starting in mid travel
against high inertia loads. Manual operation shall be by handwheel.
Manual operation will be via power gearing to minimize required rimpull
and facilitate easy changeover from motor to manual operation when the
actuator is under load. A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent
manual operation.
9. Test each actuator prior to shipment in accordance with AVWVA C540. The
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-7 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
application torque shall be the maximum torque required to open or close
the valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions.
10. For all actuators that are installed greater than five (5) feet above the
finished floor surface, the actuator manufacturer shall furnish for
installation by the Contractor a remote control unit, such that the operator
is able to manually control the actuatorwhile standing on floor grade. The
remote control unit shall be hardwired to the actuator and be equipped
with all the controls/functionality as on the face of the actuator. Remote
controllers shall be mounted befinreen 3 feet and 5 feet from the nearest
operator accessible floor surface.
11. The operator face plate shall include as a minimum:
a. Buttons for OPEN - STOP — CLOSE — RESET.
b. Backlit LCD display showing the actuator status in plain English
text.
c. Lockable selector switch with LOCAL - OFF - REMOTE function.
d. Indication lights for CLOSED, OPEN, RUNNING, and FAULT.
12. The terminal compartment shall provide sufficient space to accommodate
the possible maximum number of incoming wires. A minimum of three
cable entries must be provided. Each cable entry shall be properly sealed
by cable glands during site installation. The cable glands size shall be
chosen by the Contractor, responsible forwiring during the commissioning
phase.
13. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) — back-lit for setting menu showing status
indication and diagnostic information. The actuator shall include a digital
position indicator with a display from fully open to fully closed in 1%
increments. For all actuators that utilize a battery, the actuator
manufacturer shall furnish one (1) spare battery for each actuator
furnished.
14. Setting of all actuator parameters including the torque levels, position
limits, configuration of the indication contacts, and positioner functionality
shall be accomplished without removing covers from the actuator control
assemblies or housing.
15. Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall
be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from -20 °F
to +140°F, up to 1 QO% relative humidity. In order to prevent condensation,
a space heater shall be installed inside the actuator, suitable for
continuous operation. The actuator shall be stored according to the
Manufacturers instructions. If the Contractor voids the actuatorwarrantee
in any way, he shall replace the actuator at no cost to the Owner.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-8 10/29/12
�
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
16. Actuators are to receive remote input commands for OPEN, CLOSE, and
POSITION (as required). Actuators are to provide remote indication as
listed above.
17. Contractor is to provide startup, inspection, and instruction services from
the Manufacturer's authorized technical representative. Startup and
inspection shall not be less than five (5) days. One (1) day shall be
provided for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of
electric operators.
18. Each actuator shall be warranted for a minimum of 24 months from the
date of system acceptance by the Owner.
2.06 AIR RELEASE VALVES
A. The air release valves shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The valves
shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, EPDM seat and
stainless steel trim. The fittings shall be threaded. Air release valves shall be
equipped with a vacuum ball or check feature in order to prevent air from entering
the valve during vacuum conditions. The valves for wastewater and sludge
applications shall be Model D-025 as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. Air
release valves for reclaimed and potable water service shall be A.R.I. Model D-
040-C-VAC or equal.
B. A stainless steel or brass ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air release
valves. Stainless steel or brass piping shall be provided for air release valves on
pumps.
29 2.07 AIR AND VACUUM VALVES
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
A. The air and vacuum valves shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The
valves shatl have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, and an
EPDM seat. The valves shall be 2-inch threaded connection. Air and vacuum
valves shall be equipped with a baffle to protect the float from direct contact with
the rushing air and water and to prevent the float from closing prematurely in the
valve. The valves shall be Model D-040-C as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal.
B. A stainless steel ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air and vacuum
valves.
2.08 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS
G�
:
Flange adapter couplings shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings.
Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-9 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
C.
D.
All couplings shalt be restrained and shall have a sufficient number of anchor
studs to meet or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi minimum.
Couplings shall be JCM Model 301 R or equal.
2.09 UNIONS
8 A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds
9 malleable iron, zinc-coated. Unions on water piping 2-1/2 inches in diameterand
10 larger shall be flange pattern, 125-pound class, zinc-coated. Gaskets for flanged
11 unions shall be of the best quality EPDM. Unions shall not be concealed in walls,
12 ceilings, or partitions.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2.10 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES
A. All pumps furnished under this contract shall have pressure/ vacuum gauges
installed an their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on their
discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished under this Contract
shall be mounted per manufacturer requirements using tapping saddles and
sleeves specified in Section 15100, 2.19.
B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless
steel case with a 4-1/Z-inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass crystal
window, 1/4-inch shutoff valve, and a bronze pressure snubber. Provide
stainless steel diaphragm seals between shutoff valve and pressure gauge on all
lines with nonclear matter in suspension of solution. All gauges shall be
weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with jet black
graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both pounds per
square inch and feet of head.
C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of inercury vacuum to 50 feet of head.
Discharge gauges shall read from zero feet of head to the expected shutoff head
of the respective pump.
D. Gauges shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltown Instruments,
Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcroft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal.
2.11 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Swing check valves shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body
with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, and a noncorrosive shaft for attachment
of weight and lever. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard B.16.1, 125 Ib.
Class. Check valves shall absolutely prevent the return of water or wastewater
back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below the delivery
pressure.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-10 10/29/12
�
u
•
�
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. The valves must be tight seating and must operate without hammer or shock.
The seat ring must be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a
threaded joint.
C. Check valves shall be the lever and weight type with an adjustable position
weight and lever arm attached to the disc assembly to allow adjustment of the
closure force.
D. The valves shall be as manufactured by the Mueller, Kennedy or approved equal,
and shall be suitable for horizontal installation.
E. The Contractor is responsible for all labor and material costs associated with all
work made necessary by the use of replacement check valves with lay lengths
different than the existing check valves.
2.12 SLANTING DISK CHECK VALVE
A. Valve body shall be heavy two-piece ASTM A126 Grade B cast iron. The two (2)
body halves and body seat shall be O-ring sealed and bolted together in a
manner to sandwich the body seat on a 55° angle. Each body half shall have a
covered access hole for internal inspection and each body half and disc shall be
fully machined to accept the attachment of a bottom buffer oil dashpot.
B. The seat ring and disc ring shall be replaceable in the field without need for
special tools or machining. Disc and seat ring shall be bronze. The area
throughout the valve body must be equal to full pipe area.
C. The pivot pins in the body and the bushings in the disc lugs shall be stainless
steel of different hardnesses to prevent galling. The bushings shall be press fit to
prevent wear.
D. An indicator shall be provided to show position of the disc.
E. The valve shall have a bottom mounted buffer for free open and positive non-
slam closing. The buffer shall be designed to contact the disc during the last 10%
of closure and thereafter control the disc closure until the valve is shut in a
manner to minimize or prevent water hammer. The rate of hydraulic control and
the initial point of buffer contact to the disc closure shall be externally adjustable
and variable to suit the water column reversal time. The bottom buffer hydraulic
system must be self contained and independent from pipeline media to prevent
contamination of the media and protect the cylinder against corrosion. The buffer
rod, oil reservoir and buffer pneumatic tank shall be stainless steel.
F. Valve shall be Apco Series 800B slanting disc check valve with bottom mounted
buffer or approved equal.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-11 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to
alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed.
B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours at
the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test
pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of
operators and appurtenances as shown on the Construction Drawings that are in
masonry floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as
soon as forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these
items, the Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing
on their location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of these
valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures.
D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the
respective pipe sections in Division 15.
E. Ftanged joints shail be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts and
washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy steel
bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the pipe. All
buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats (14-20 mils DFT)
of bituminous paint comparable to Carboline Bitumastic 300M, Tnemec Series
46H-413 Tneme-Tar, or approved equal.
F. Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as other parts, shall be
thoroughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall be
moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite paste,
and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end. After the other pipe has been
brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly over the
pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then shalf be
placed. After the bolts have been inserted, the nuts shall be tightened until the
housing sections are firmly in contact, metal-to-metal, without excessive bolt
tension.
G. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned
thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket
lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to
a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on
the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-12 10/29/12
CJ
C�
•
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the Construction
Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard manner. Valve sterns
shall be vertical in alt cases. Place cast iron box over each stem with base
bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade. Boxes shall have
sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. Knobs on cover shall
be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill from valve box.
3.02 SHOP PAINTING
A. Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted shall
receive a coating of rust-inhibitive primer compatible to paint system specified in
Section 09900. Alt pipe connection openings shall be capped to prevent the entry
of foreign matter prior to installation.
15 3.03 FIELD PAINTING
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
�
A. All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view, except
ball valves, shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09900.
3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure and leakage in
accordance with Section 01625. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested.
Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to
prevent movement during tests.
END OF SECTION
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-13 10/29/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONAL
LY LEFT BLANK �
�
�
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-14 10/29/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SECTION 16230
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work identified in this specification section shall be perFormed and completed
while raw sewage is bypassed by pumping around Lift Station 42.
11
12 B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to design, install,
13 place in operation, and field test one, new remote mounted radiator and motor
14 driven fan system as specified herein to perform the intended function and
15 achieve a fully integrated and operational system.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is
required, but do not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the
requirements of the equipment application. It is, however, intended to cover
furnishing, shop testing, delivery, complete installation, field testing, of all
materials, equipment and all appurtenances for the complete replacement the
remote mounted radiator and motor driven fan system as herein specified,
whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not.
D. The radiator system manufacturer shall design and furnish all labor, materials,
equipment and incidentals required to provide a system, complete with contrnls
and accessories, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
E
F
The Contractor shall install the equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
The Contractor shall test the system to ensure full conformance to the
specifications.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. The radiator shall be configured with a horizontal mounted core and vertical air
discharge suitable for outdoor operation. New piping connecting the new radiator
to the existing piping shall also be provided. The radiator shall be a replacement
for the existing radiator and shall have equal or greater heat rejection capacity
than the existing radiator. The radiator shall be a single structure with one core
and sufficient cooling area to dissipate heat from the existing generator. The
existing generator and remote mounted radiator name plate information is
provided below:
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-1 10/29112
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
Generator
Kohler
Model #150ROZ J-71
Spec # 189812-71
Serial # 285619
2. Diesel Motor
John Deer
Serial # RG6076A168125
6076AF-00
3. Remote Radiator/Fan Unit
Modine Industrial Heat Exchanger
Model # M-07-HR-2
Part # 1A15285
Serial # 089147578-01
2HP Motor
It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide a remote mounted radiator assembly
that is completely compatible with the existing generator set.
C. The manufacturer of the existing radiator may no longer fabricate/provide
radiators. Therefore, it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify all unknown
information about the existing equipment that is required to properly size, and
install the replacement radiator. The Contractor shall provide a letter from the
generator manufacturer (Kohler) indicating that it has reviewed the proposed
radiator and concurs with its capacity and installation.
D. The radiator shall be as manufactured by Young Touchstone, Rocore Radiator, or
approved equal.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. To assure unity of responsibility, the remote radiator and fan assembly, all
materials, equipment, and incidentals, whether or not shown or specified herein,
shall be furnished and coordinated by the equipment manufacturer. The
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the satisfactory installation and
operation of the entire system as specified.
B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused and
shall be the standard product of a manufacturer functioning as a system supplier
and having a successful record of design, manufacturing, supplying, and
senricing the remote radiator system specified herein for a minimum of five (5)
years.
•
•
C. Should equipment which differs from these Specifications be offered and •
determined to be the approved equal of that specified, such equipment will be
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-2 10/29/12
�
1 acceptable only on the basis that any revisions in the design and/or construction
2 of the structures, piping, appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc., required to
3 accommodate such a substitution, shall be made at no additional cost to the
4 Owner and be as approved by the Engineer.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
`22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•46
47
D. The Engineer reserves the right to reject delivery of any or al4 pieces of
equipment found, upon inspection, to have any or all of the following: blisters,
chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots, foreign matter,
surface porosity or sharp discontinuity.
E. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment and each system
shall be tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration,
overheating, etc. All equipment must be adjusted and checked for misalignment,
clearances, supports, and adherence to safety standards.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of the
remote radiator system and shall provide all necessary facilities, manpower,
tools, instrumentation, and laboratory testing services required during this phase
of the work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications
shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01340.
B. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified shop and erection drawings showing all
important details of construction, dimensions, and materials of construction for all
components of the system.
C. Model numbers, dimensions, operating weights, operating parameters and
ranges, performance curves, anchor bolt templates, bolt hole patterns of inlet and
outlet connections, and installation instructions.
D. Process and instrumentation diagrams, piping schematics and layout drawings,
electrical interconnection and single line diagrams, schematic control diagrams,
loop diagrams for instrumentation, and detailed description of control system
function and sequence of operation.
E. Control panel submittals shall include the tag number and functional name of
each item that is in or on the panel; nameplate legends (text, letter size, color);
mounting and installation details; color coding; static inspection checklist; loop
check and point-to-point functional test procedures.
F. Calculations indicating the basis of design for the system shall be furnished that
demonstrate the equipment is structurally sound, will perform as specified, and
has the heat rejection capacity as specified or required. The performance
calculations shall include air flow and pressure drop across the radiator.
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-3 10/29/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
�
G
�
Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment.
A complete bill of materials for all equipment and an O&M manual.
A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's
current price for each item. All spare parts shall be properly protected for
prolonged periods of storage and packed in suitable containers which are clearly
identified with indelible markings as to contents
Motor Data: For each motor furnish a certified motor data sheet for the actual
motor or for a manufactured electrically duplicate motor that was previously
tested.
K. Complete copies of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be furnished in
accordance with Specification 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically
for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists,
descriptions, troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules,
etc. that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar
with such equipment.
L. A fan performance curve shall be submitted by the fan manufacturer showing the
specified design criteria and showing that the motor shall not be overloaded at �
any point on the fan operating curve.
M. A mechanical drawing of the overall equipment with all parts labeled and part
numbers identified. An exploded view of all mechanical equipment and
subassemblies with all parts labeled and part numbers identified.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. In order to assure the proper perFormance and compatibility of all equipment
supplied within the intent of this Specification the equipment furnished shall be
warranted by the same equipment manufacturer.
B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design
and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period,
it shall be replaced on-site and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the
Owner.
C. The manufacturer shall warrant the entire remote radiator system being supplied
against defects in workmanship and materials under normal use, operation, and
service for a period of one (1) year from the date of system acceptance by the
Owner.
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-4 10/29/12
•
•
2
3
4
5 1.06
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
D. The equipment supplied shall be resistant to chemical attack by compounds
present in this application and shall carry a warranty against corrosion-induced
failure for eighteen (18) months after initial start-up.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur
during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed
and the units and equipment are ready for operation.
B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a
prolonged period at the site.
14 C. All surfaces shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion.
15
16 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
17
18 2.01 FRAME
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
47
A. The radiator frame shall be heavy duty welded or bolted steel construction with a
self-supporting base and mounting holes and lifting lugs to facilitate handling
during installation. Structural members of the frame shall be A36 hot dipped
galvanized steel with 1/4" minimum thickness. The radiator shall be supplied with
a core guard and a hail screen and shall be installed in the same location as the
existing radiator. The radiator, fan, fan shroud and frame assembly shall be
designed for 120 mph wind load.
2.02 CORE CONSTRUCTION
A. The radiator core shall be constructed of brass tubes connected to steel header
plates and have copper fins. No solder shall be used to bond or seal the tube to
header joints. The tube to header connections shall be mechanically bonded.
Steel header plates shall be a minimum of 0.50" thick and include side rails with
expansion joints. One header must be free to float in order to accommodate
thermal expansion of the tubes. The tubes shall be of welded construction and
shall not be soldered. Solder joints are permitted for the tube to fin connection.
Fins shall be flat or serpentine construction.
B. The core shall be pressure rated in accordance with the diesel engine
manufacturer's recommendation but not less than 75 psi. Thermal expansion and
contraction differential befinreen non-ferrous core and steel frame shall be
compensated for. The core shall have suitable connections for venting and
draining. The core shall be finished coated at the factory with a corrosion
inhibiting coating specifically designed to resist attach by hydrogen sulfide gas.
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-5 10/29/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C. The core shall have sufficient capacity to dissipate the heat load produced by the
generator (at maximum rated output) using the flow and pressure rating of the
existing motor water pump at an outside ambient air temperature of 120F at sea
level. The core shall have sufficient capacity to lower the temperature of the
coolant to below the recommended thermostat rating of the generator motor on a
continuous basis at the conditions stated above. Pressure drop through the
radiator and connecting piping shall not cause the water pump to cavitate.
D. The coolant used and percent makeup shall be in accordance with the motor
manufacturer's recommendation.
12 2.03 MANIFOLD
13
14 A. The manifold tanks shall be removable to allow for core inspection and cleaning.
15 The core headers shall be attached to expansion tanks using an o-ring seal.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2.04 FAN AND FAN MOTOR
A. The fan shall be forced draft type, fixed center, with airFoil type adjustable pitch
blades and air flow shall be upwards. The fan shall be equipped with an OSHA
approved fan guard. The fan shall not exceed local noise thresholds at any
speed. The fan wheel, guard and shroud shall be of non-ferrous construction.
B. The radiator fan shall be driven by a heavy duty TEFC, 3-Phase, 230/460 Volt, 60
Hertz motor with a 1.15 service factor operating at 1780 rpm or lower. The
maximum power required to operate the radiator fan shall not exceed 3
horsepower. The motor shall be capable of starting simultaneously with engine
start up. The motor shaft shall be stainless steel. The motor fan and fan cover
shall be of non-ferrous construction.
2.05 EXPANSION TANK
A. The radiator shall be equipped with a galvanized expansion tank with a capacity
of at least 15% of the cooling system fluid volume mounted on top of the radiator
structure. The expansion tank shall be equipped with a site glass for ease of
checking the coolant level. The expansion tank shall be equipped with a low
water level switch. The expansion tank shall be shipped loose for installation in
the field by the Contractor.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS AND HARDWARE
A. All minor components such as guards, shields, covers, and brackets shall be
manufacture using non-ferrous components. All hardware shall be Type 304
stainless steel.
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-6
10/29/12
��
•
�
r�
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
•22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
2.07 POWER AND CONTROL SYSTEM
F. A new power disconnect and control panel enclosure shall be furnished and
mounted on the new radiator frame in similar fashion as the existing panel
serving the same function. The new panel shall provide power and control wiring
for the fan. Refer to the electrical drawings.
G. The control panel enclosure shall be of NEMA 4X fiberglass construction.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
B. The radiator shall be installed in the same location as the existing radiator, in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and accurately aligned in
orientation with related equipment as shown on the Drawings in order to insu�e
proper operation. The Contractor shall modify the existing concrete base as
required to accept the new radiator.
B. The Contractor shall supply all necessary anchor bolts, temporary lifting
equipment, power, labor and all other requirements for satisfactory installation.
3.02 START-UP AND PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to start up the new piping and
radiator the system shall be pressure tested with water at 20% above the typical
pressure developed by the generator motor while in operation under full load.
Any visible leaks shall be repaired and the leak test performed again until all
leaks have been stopped. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of
the leak testing schedule.
B. After successful leak testing has been conducted, the Contractor shall coordinate
with the Engineer and the Owner to start-up the system and check for proper
installation and heat rejection performance. Performance testing shall consist of
monitoring and recording radiator inlet and outlet coolant temperatures and
generator temperature gauge readings every 5 minutes while the generator is
running under load for 60 continuous minutes. Inlet and outlet coolant
temperatures shall be monitored with a hand held infrared thermometer that has
been checked and is known to be accurate with 2 degrees F. The ambient air
temperature shall be noted during the performance test.
C. The performance requirements will be deemed to have been met when the
system rejects heat in accordance with the design heat rejection capacity and
adjusted for the actual heat load applied (as a percent of full load rating) during
the test.
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-7 10/29/12
1 D. In the event of improper installation or failure to meet the heat rejection
2 requirements, the Contractor and the manufacturer shall be responsible for
3 supervising the correction of the work and subsequent test runs until the defects
4 are corrected.
5
6
7
8
9
10
E. Deliver to the Engineer within 30 days after testing a report that demonstrates
satisfactory performance of the system.
END OF SECTION
GENERATOR REMOTE RADIATOR
16230-8 10/29/12
.
�
U
•
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16452
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
BID DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is
part of each Division 16 Section making reference to grounding specified
herein.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by
drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding
work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment.
:
C.
The type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this Section
includes the following: Solidly grounded.
Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this Section
includes the following:
Electrical power systems
Grounding electrodes
Separately derived systems
Raceways
Service equipment
Enclosures/control panels
Equipment/pumps
Lighting standards
Signs
D. Refer to other Division 16 sections for wires/cables, electrical raceways,
boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction
with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding
products and associated accessories.
GROUNDING
16452 - 1 8/3/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
BID DOCUMENTS
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the
manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types and ratings
required, and ancillary grounding materials; including stranded cable,
copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and
bonding jumpers; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to
that required for project.
C. Codes and Standards:
Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical
code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as
applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to
systems, circuits, and equipment.
2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL
Standards No.'s 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding
Equipment", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment", pertaining to
grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. In
addition, comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and
Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide
grounding and bonding products which are UL listed and labeled
for their intended usage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING:
A. Materials and Components, General: Except as otherwise indicated,
provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with
assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires,
connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate
electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional
accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one
type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is
installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated,
provide products which comply with NEC and UL, requirements, and with
established industry standards for those applications indicated.
GROUNDING
16452 - 2 8/3/12
•
•
r�
U
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
• 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
BID DOCUMENTS
B. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding
conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply
wiring materials and are sized according to NEC.
C. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical
bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs, and clamps as recommended
by bonding plate, connector, terminal, and clamp manufacturers for
indicated applications.
D. Ground Electrodes: Solid copper, three-quarter inch (3/4") diameter by
twenty feet (20').
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and
bonding connections are to be made, and notify contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS:
A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions; applicable portions of NEC,
NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized
industry practices, to ensure that products comply with requirements.
B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interFace installation
of electrical grounding and bonding system work with other work.
C. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance to the
building cold water line and to three (3) three-fourths inch (3/<") diameter,
finrenty feet (20') long ground rods spaced ten feet (10') apart.
D. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to separate grounding
electrode.
E. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed
noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway
systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground
connectors, and plumbing systems.
F. All raceways with No. 10 or 12 AWG phase conductors for receptacles,
lighting fixtures, and similar circuits shall be provided with a parity-sized
green equipment ground conductor. Ground conductor shall be installed
GROUNDING
16452 - 3 8/3/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
BID DOCUMENTS
in entire raceway system, including wall switches and flexible conduit to
light fixtures. Equipment ground conductor sizes for circuits with phase
conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are indicated on drawings. Ground
conductors shall be connected to ground buss in panelboards.
G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment grounding
conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Conductors looped under
screw or bolt heads will not be permitted
H. Connect grounding electrode conductors to one inch (1") diameter or
greater metallic cold water pipe, using a suitably sized ground clamp.
Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange.
Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces to ensure
electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.
J. Provide a grounding bushing and a continuous copper bonding jumper
from the bushing to the equipment ground bus in all feeders. The bonding
jumper shall be the same size as the equipment ground conductor.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
•
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding •
systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where
tests show resistance-to-ground is over twenty-five (25) ohms, take
appropriate action to reduce resistance to finrenty-five (25) ohms or less by
driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance.
B. Submit test results (3 copies) to engineer of record. Test results shall
include grounding test method used, equipment used (manufacturer and
model number) with certification of calibration and data results.
END OF SECTION 16452
GROUNDING
16452 - 4 8/3/12
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
• 22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
• 45
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Q
SECTION 16482
MOTOR STARTERS
BID DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
This is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and
is part of each Division 16 Section making reference to motor starters
herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of motor
starters of types, ratings, and characteristics required; whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5)
years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience on projects utilizing motor starters similar to that
required for this project.
L
�
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to wiring methods,
construction, and installation of motor starters.
UL Compliance: Provide motor starters and components which are UL
listed and labeled.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
MOTOR STARTERS
16482 - 1
8/3/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
BID DOCUMENTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering motor starters which may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Allen-Bradley Co.
General Electric Co.
Eaton Corp.
Square D Co.
2.02 MOTOR STARTERS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and
ancillary companents which comply with manufacturer`s standard
materials, design, and construction in accordance with published product
information, and as required for complete installation.
B. Manual motor starters for 115 volts, single phase motors one horsepower
and smaller shall be single pole, horsepower rated switches with thermal
overload units and heaters. Starters shall be Square D Class 2510, with
stainless steel cover plates.
C. Magnetic full voltage starters for three phase motors shall be three pole,
horsepower- rated, magnetically operated, with three thermal overload
units and four extra auxiliary contacts. Control voltage shall be 120 volts
supplied from a control power transformer. A Hand-Off-Automatic, HOA
switch shall be mounted in front cover. Starters shall be Square D Class
8536.
D. Combination magnetic, full voltage starters for three phase motors shall
be three pole horsepower-rated, magnetically operated switches, with
three thermal overload units and four extra auxiliary contacts. Control
voltage shall be 120 volts supplied from a control power transformer. A
three pole horsepower-rated, non-fusible disconnect switch shall also be
included in the enclosure. An HOA switch shall be mounted in front cover.
Starters shall be Square D Class 8538.
L
F
G.
Phase loss protection shall be provided on all starters serving motors 15
horsepower or larger.
Provide 0-15 minute on-delay auto restart function on each starter.
Provide PLC contacts, one normally open and one normally closed — 5
amp rated. Coordinate with PLC controls contractor.
MOTOR STARTERS
16482 - 2 8/3/1 Z
u
•
�
u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
• 22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
�45
46
BID DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS:
A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices;
complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL and NEMA standards
to insure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Motor starters or any other electrical equipment located in smoke or fire
rated walls shall be mounted on Unistrut channels. Channels shall be
supported from floor and structure above ceiling. There shall be no
penetrations of the fire rated assembly pursuant to the equipment
installation.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, motor starters shown on the drawing shall be
furnished and installed under this Section. The full load current and
starting characteristics of each motor shall be verified for proper selection
of motor over load devices.
D. Furnish and install all steel shapes, etc., necessary for a support of all
motor starters.
E. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
values for equipment connectors.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A.
:.
Inspect electrical starter's operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and,
where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement.
Touch-up scratched or marred surFaces to match original finish.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Subsequent to connecting wires/cables, energize motor starter circuitry
and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with
requirements. Where necessary correct malfunctioning units, and then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Ensure that direction of rotation of
each motor fulfills requirements.
END OF SECTION 16482
MOTOR STARTERS
16482 - 3 8/3/12
BID DOCUMENTS
u
1
2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
3
4
•
•
MOTOR STARTERS
16482 - 4 8/3/12
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
� 46
BID DOCUMENTS
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SECTION 16620
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section,
and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical surge
suppression specified herein.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The work required under this division shall include all materials, labor, and
auxiliaries required to furnish and install complete surge suppression for the
protection of building electrical and electronics systems from the effects of
line-induced transient voltage surge and lightning discharge, as indicated on
drawings or specified in this section.
B. Types of surge suppression specified in this section include the following:
Service entrance type.
Distribution and branch circuit panels.
Point of use type (receptacle and plug-in units).
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. All surge suppression devices shall be manufactured by a company normally
engaged in the design, development, and manufacture of such devices for
electrical and electronics systems equipment.
�
C.
The surge suppressor manufacturer shall offer technical assistance through
support by a factory representative and local stocking distributor.
Submittals: Surge suppression submittal shall include:
Manufacturer's performance data on each suppressor type.
Dimensioned drawing of each suppressor type.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16620 - 1
8/3/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1.04
i�
1.06
BID DOCUMENTS
D. To estabiish the type and operating characteristics of the surge suppression
devices, equipment manufactured by LEA International is used as a guide in
determining the functions of the surge suppression system. Other equipment
will be considered for approval provided the following is submitted in writing
to the architect/engineer in accordance with the specifications.
E. Equipment Certification: Items shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories,
shall bear the UL seal, and be marked in accordance with referenced
standard.
F. Surge suppression devices shall be installed and located in accordance with
requirements of all applicable National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Codes.
WARRANTY:
A. All surge suppression devices shall be warranted to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship under normal use in accordance with the
instructions provided for a period of five (5) years.
B. Any suppressor which shows evidence of failure or incorrect operating during
the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced by the manufacturer and
installer.
�
A.
CODES AND STANDARDS:
The following standards and publications are referenced in various parts of
this specification and shall.apply:
UL 1449-1987 (Second Editon, August 17, 1998):
Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 (IEEE 587):
Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
ANSI/IEEE C62.33-1982:
Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge Protection Devices.
ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992:
IEEE Guide for Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits.
REQUIRED SUPPRESSORS:
Provide surge suppression for the equipment described herein:
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16620 - 2
8/3/12
�
•
�
U
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
• 46
�
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
On main electrical service entrance panels as shown in the project
drawings.
On distribution and branch circuit panels as shown in the project
drawings.
3. On 120 volt power connections for the fire alarm control panel,
intercom, television and sound equipment, telephone powersupplies,
nurse call equipment, and other dedicated circuits, as identified in the
project drawings.
4.
5.
At point of use locations (receptacles, plug-in units) as shown on the
drawings.
On all equipment identified in the project drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPRESSORS:
A. The surge suppressor manufacturer shall offer a complete line of surge
suppression products to support the required suppressors listed in Part 1.
B. The panel-mounted unit suppressor shall be designed with replaceable
modules for purposes of in-service replacement. The unit suppressor shall
be designed with redundant back-up surge protection in the event of a
module failure.
C. Module status indicators shall be provided to indicate individual module
status. When a module has failed, the module LED status indicator shall
indicate said failure.
D. Unit status indicators shall be provided to indicate the status of the complete
unit suppressor. The LED status indicators shall be located on the hinged
front cover to redundantly indicate module or unit failure. The unit
suppressor shall include alarm contacts (one N.O. and one N.C.) for remote
annunciation of unit status.
E. Suppressors shall be designed for the specific type and voltage of electrical
service and shall provide clamping action for both normal (L-N) and common
(L-N-G) mode protection.
F. Service entrance suppressors shall utilize normal and common modes of
protection - each phase line to neutral, each phase line to ground and neutral
to ground.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16620 - 3 8!3/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
BID DOCUMENTS
G. Distribution and branch circuit panel suppressors shall utilize protection of -
each phase line to ground and neutral to ground (if neutral conductor
present).
H. Suppressors shall be of a hybrid design and include circuitry with tight, wave-
tracking clamping characteristics.
Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous
operating voltage of not less than 115% of nominal RMS line voltage.
J. Suppressors shall contain internal safety fusing to disconnect the suppressor
from the electrical source if the suppressor fails. The fuses shall be rated to
interrupt the available fault current at the suppressor. Each suppressor shall
have an internal disconnect switch when not connected to a separate circuit
breaker or fused disconnect switch which is dedicated specifically for the
suppressor.
K. Suppressors shall be failsafe, shall allow no follow-through current, shall
have repeated surge capability, shall be solid state, shall be self-restoring,
and shall be fully automatic.
L
M
Suppressors shall be UL 1449 listed and shall be approved for the location in
which they are installed.
Suppressors shall have an operating temperature range of-40❑C to +85❑C.
2.02 SUPPRESSOR CRITERIA:
A. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Service Entrance: LEA GB100 or approved equal.
277/480 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Wye:
Minimum surge capacity of 150,000 Amps per phase.
Distribution secondary and/or subpanels: LEA LS150 or approved
equal.
Minimum surge capacity of 150,000 amps per phase.
B. Suppressors shall be sequential surge tested as per IEEE C62.45-1992, and
shall withstand 1000 test cycles at 3 KA.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16620 - 4
•
�
U
•
8/3/12
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
•
BID DOCUMENTS
C. Dedicated 120 volt, 20 amp power plug-in suppressors shall be LEA TT215
or approved equal. Provide hardwire or receptacle type device to match
equipment when required.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
LEA International
Joslyn
Innovative Technology
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPRESSORS:
A. Suppressors shall be installed as close as practical to the electric panel or
electronic equipment to be protected, consistent with available space.
Suppressors shall be close nippled to the device being protected in a
position near the point of connections, which will minimize lead length
befinreen suppressor and the buses or control breaker to which the
suppressor connects. Suppressor leads shall not extend beyond the
suppressor manufacturer's recommended maximum lead length without
specific approval of the engineer.
B. Suppressors shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. Lead dress
shall be as short and as straight as possible and be consistent with
recommended industry practices for the system on which these devices are
installed.
C. Supplementary grounding and bonding connections required between the
bonding bus or ground plane for each equipment cluster, and other locations
as indicated herein shall be accomplished using #6 AWG core copper
conductor and approved connections, unless otherwise noted. Referenced
to a common earth ground.
�
E
F
Suppressors shall be installed in a manner that allows simple replacement
within short periods of downtime.
Service entrance and panel type suppressors shall be installed with a means
of disconnecting the suppressor.
The surge suppression equipment shall be UL listed and installed per the
NEC and the manufacturer's specifications.
END OF SECTION 16620
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16620 - 5
8/3/12
BID DOCUMENTS
1 •
3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
�
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES •
16620 - 6 8/3/12
� �
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
• 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
SECTION 16775
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE: THIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY TO LIFT STATION NO. 42.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this Section.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of variable frequency drives work required by
this Section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this
Section.
A. All Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be provided with the complete
control and protective functions listed is part 2 of this specification.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's drive specifications and installation
and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings
indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of
assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual and parts
lists as specified in Section 01730.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Handle variable frequency drives and components carefully to prevent
damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged drives or
components; replace with new.
�
C.
Store VFDs and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for unloading VFDs and
moving them to final location.
1.06 WARRANTY:
A. All VFD units shall be warranted for a period of eighteen (18) months from
the date of Engineer's acceptance and beneficial use of the system by the
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 1 12/2/11
1 Owner. Any warranty expense during that time shall be born entirely by the
2 manufacturer, including any travel costs or living 'expenses necessary to
3 repair in warranty equipment.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE:
n
L'?
The speed control for variable speed pumps shall be variable frequency
drives suitable for installation as shown on the drawings.
The variable frequency drives shall include all internal auxiliaries required to
meet the functional specifications.
C. The variable frequency drives shall conform to all requirements stipulated in
this section and Division 16 - Electrical, and shall be designed for an
extended speed range of 0% to 100% of full load motor speed.
D. Each VFD shall have the following design features.
The VFD shall employ an internal bypass switch and output contactor
with auxiliary 5A contacts, 1 NC and 1 NO, to indicate position of bypass
switch.
2. The VFD shall employ microprocessor-based inverter logic isolated from
power circuits. The VFD shall employ a diode or fully gated bridge on
the input.
3. All VFD shall employ a DC bus inductor to reduce line harmonics and
improve power factor.
4. All VFDs shall employ full KVA rated phase shifting transformer
externally mounted with high temperature sensor. Transformer shall be
wall mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure.
5. Variable frequency drive harmonic distortion shall be limited in
accordance with IEEE 519 (1992) as measured at the Point of Common
Coupling (PCC), designated at the Main Service Disconnect line side
terminals.
6. The VFD shall employ a common Main Control Board.
7. The VFD shall employ a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) inverter system
using third generation IGBT's to minimize audible motor noise and
increase overall performance.
8. The VFD shall employ a switching logic powersupply operating from the
DC bus.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 2 12/2/11
•
•
•
� �
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
• 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
•47
48
�
9. The VFD shall furnish motor short circuit protection, and phase to phase
and phase to ground Surge Protection on VFD input.
10. The VFD shall be provided with DeviceNet or DPI serial control
capability for future monitoring and control flexibility.
11. The VFD shall be designed to have a minimum of 2 kHz carrier
frequency without de-rating output to minimize audible motor noise. The
carrier frequency shall be adjustable from 2 kHz to 12 kHz.
12. All VFDs 40 hp and above shall be provided as 6 pulse dual rectifier
input; with isolation transformer
13. The VFD shall be designed to operate/tolerate on an AC line which may
contain voltage fluctuations +/-10%.
14. The VFDe shall be designed to shut down with no component failure in
the event of an output phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit
and provide annunciation of the fault condition.
15. The VFD shall be designed such that the inverter section power
semiconductors do not require commutation capacitors.
16. The VFD shall be designed to be variable torque rated. The drive shall
supply 110% of rated current for up to one minute.
17. The VFD shall be designed to allow all parameter adjustments to be
made with the door closed.
18. The VFD shall be provided in a NEMA 4X (Stainless Steel — 304 grade)
enclosure. Maximum dimensions of the enclosures are as follows:
a. 40 HP VFD: 36"W x 18"D x 84"H, wall mounted.
19. The VFD shall be designed to have an adjustable output frequency up
to 60 Hz ±10%.
20. The VFD shall provide multiple programmable stop modes, including
ramp, coast, brake and S-curve.
The VFDs shall have the following features.
Interface: The VFD shall include a removable Human Interface Module
with integral display to show VFD operating conditions, adjustments, and
fault indications. The display shall be removable under power without
causing a VFD fault and be visible and operable without opening the
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 3
12/2/11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
enclosure door. This unit is a 6 line by 21-character backlit LCD display
with graphics capability. It is used to display VFD operating conditions,
fault / alarm indications and programming information with full text
support in English language. The VFD can also be programmed and
display all speed values in either Hertz or RPM.
2. Volts per Hertz Adjustment: VFD programming shall provide the ability
to fully configure the volts per hertz for squared, cubed, straight line or
full custom patterns.
11 3. Current Limit: The VFD shall provide a programmable current limit from
12 20% to 150% of variable torque rating. Current limit shall be active for
13 all VFD states; accelerating, constant speed, and decelerating. The
14 VFD shall employ PI Regulation for smooth transition.
15
16 4. Acceleration/Deceleration: The Accel/Decel settings shall provide
17 separate adjustments to allow either setting to be adjusted from 0
18 seconds to 600 seconds. The VFD shall provide a second set of
19 remotely selectable Accel/Decel settings.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
5. Speed Regulation: The VFD shall be capable of operating in a variety of
speed regulation modes, including slip compensation with 0.5% speed
regulation.
6. Speed Profiles: The VFD shall be capable of producing speed profiles
with linear acceleration/ deceleration or'S-Curve' profiles that provide
changing Accel/Decel rates. S-Curve profiles shall be selectable for
fixed or adjustable values.
7. Adjustments: The digital interface shall be used for all set-up, operation,
and adjustment settings. All adjustments shall be stored in non-volatile
memory for factory default values as well as a programmable set of user
defaults.
8. Auto Commissioning: The VFD shall be capable of automatically
determining the motor's stator resistance by outputting both an AC and
DC voltage to the motor and monitoring motor current. Stator resistance
shall be stored in VFD memory for determining proper voltage and
current requirements.
9. IR Compensation (DC Boost): The VFD shall provide a selectable
range for offsetting motor losses at low frequency operation DC Boost
shall be current regulated and shall automatically adjust, on each start,
to load changes. DC Boost shall be programmable from 15% to 120%
of VFD rated current. This function shall be part of the Auto
Commissioning and set by the VFD during Auto Tuning.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 4 12/2/11
�
r�
U
�
. �
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
• 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• 47
10. Fault Reset/Run: The VFD shall provide up to ten automatic fault reset
and restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring
manual restart.
11. Skip Tendencies: The VFD shall provide three adjustable setpoints to
lock out continuous operation at frequencies which may produce
mechanical resonance. The setpoints shall have an adjustable
bandwidth of 0 Hz to 60 Hz.
12. Run On Power Up: The VFD shall provide for automatic restart of
equipment after restoration of power after an outage.
13. Fault Memory: The VFD shall provide a means to store the last four
faults as well as operating frequency, VFD status, and power mode at
time of fault. Information shall be maintained in the event of power loss.
14. Overload Protection: The VFD shall provide NEC motor overload
protection testing in accordance with UL Standard 991. (including
Thermal Memory Retention per the newest UL Standard).
15. Terminal Blocks: The VFD shall provide separate terminal blocks for
control and power wiring.
16. Operator's Devices: The VFD shall be provided with the following door
mounted pilot devices in addition to the door mounted Human Interface
Module:
a. Hand/Off/Auto selector switch
b. Power On pilot light
c. Run pilot light
d. Fault pilot light
17. Control Inputs: The VFD shall provide a separate control input terminal
block for customer wiring to remote start, stop, remote speed reference
access and enable inputs. Four additional inputs shall be provided as
programmable for functions such as preset speed access, second
Accel and Decel time access and local control selection. Inputs shall be
programmable to configure the VFD for standard 3 wire, 2 wire, EC and
serial operation requirements.
18. Ride Through: The VFD shall be capable of control logic ride through in
the event of input power sag/outages (input voltage 5% below nominal)
up to 2 seconds in duration.
19. Loss of Reference: In the event of loss of the 4 mA to 20 mA reference
signal, the VFD shall be user programmable to the following:
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 5
12/2/11
1 a. Fault and stop
2 b. Alarm and maintain last reference (within 10%)
3 c. Alarm and got to preset speed
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
20. Analog I/O: The VFD shall supply two analog outputs 4 mA to 20 mA
which shall be user programmable such that is proportional to output
frequency, output current, bus voltage or output power, KW, output
volts, or output current. The VFD shall have finro analog inputs of 4 mA
to 20 mA signals proportional to the process variable from a control
system or field device.
21. Digital I/O: The VFD contact output ratings shall be 115 volt AC / 30 volt
DC, 5.0 amps resistive, 2.0 amp inductive. The four contacts provided
shall be as follows
a. Two Form C Contacts (One shall be designated as Fault)
b. Two programmable Form A contacts.
22. Reference Signals:
a. Analog: The VFD shall be capable of operating from the
following speed reference signals:
i. VFD Human Interface Module (Hand)
ii. 4 mA to 20 mA signal (Remote)
iii. Internal set-point controller with 4-20mA process variable
input signal from external transducer.
23. Internal pump Controller Capability: In addition to ability to folfow an
analog input related for speed control the VFD shall be able to operate in
the following control modes:
a. Simplex controller: The drive shall Accept a 4-20ma input
proportional to the process variable (flow, pressure, or as
indicated in other section of the plans and specifications). The
drive shall accept direct keypad entry or analog input entry of
desired setpoint. The VFD shall utilize PI setpoint control to
continuously modulate output speed to maintain setpoint.
b. Multi-plex controller: The VFD shall be capable of being
operated as a multiplex controller operating as in simplex mode
with same system inputs, and additional float switch (discrete
input), but provide lead-lag control of up to 3 pumps such that
setpoint is controlled via operation of one or more pumps while
alternating pumps to evenly distribute operation time.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 6 12/2/11
�
•
•
�
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
��
c. Digital inputs shall be programmable to include the following
functions and digital display shall indicate the following condition
status using the following English messages:
i. Local/Off/Remote selector switch input
ii. High wet well level Alarm
iii. High Motor stator winding Temperature condition
iv. Reactor High Temperature
v. External Fault
d. Analog inputs shall be programmable to include the following
functions and digitaf display shall indicate the following condition
status using the following English messages:
i. Process variable input (pressure, flow, level, or other).
ii. Setpoint
iii. Speed reference
Acceptable manufacturers for the variable frequency drive units are:
Yaskawa by ICON Technologies
Square D.
Any other manufacturer must be pre-approved ten (10) days prior to bid opening date.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 7
12/2/11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION: Examine areas and conditions under which variable frequency
drives are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DRIVES:
A. General: Install variable frequency drives where indicated, in accordance
with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with
recognized industry practices to ensure that system complies with
requirements and services intended purposes.
B. Access: Provide access space around drives for service as indicated, but in
no case less than that recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16775
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
16775 - 8
12/2/11
i
•
•
�
�
�J
r�
L_�
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
CONTRACTBOND ..................................................................................................................... 1
CONTRACT.................................................................................................................................. 3
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6
PROPOSALBOND ...................................................................................................................... 7
AFFIDAVIT.................................................................................................................................. 8
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9
PROPOSAL................................................................................................................................. 10
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................. 13
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ............................................................................................................ 14
SECTIONV[1].docx
10/29/l2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SECTIONV[1].docx ii 10/29l12
�
��
L_J
u
•
BOND NUMBER: 7652579
CONTRACT BOND
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF BROWARD
KNOW ALL �IEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC. as Contractor
and WESTFIELD [NSURANCE COMPANY, (Surety) whose home address is ONE PARK
CIRCLE, WESTFIELD CENTER. OHIO 44251
HEREIlVAF1`ER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater,
Florida (hereinafter calted the "Owner") in the penal sum of: NINE HUNDRED EIGHTY NINE
THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED STXTY DOLLARS AND NO CENTS (5989,560.001 for the
payment of wiiich we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns
for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day� of ,
2Q13, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Cleurwater for:
LIFT STATION 33 (09-0003-UT) & LIFT STATION 42 (10-0051-UT)
REHABILITATION PROJECT
a copy af which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
• NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS 013LIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the
Contractor shall in all respects cornply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of materiat and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Porm of
Surety Band, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technica! Specifications) and the
Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless
the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or
skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents
or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans
furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall protnptly make
payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and
Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or
indirect, or consequential, whieh said Owner may sustain on aceount of such work, or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
• Contract for Sigoature.docx Page 1 of 14 7/26/2012
•
•
•
f:ONTRAC`I' 130nf 11
(2)
ni.d the sa�d Contractc�r and tiurety h�reby fiu•the�� bind then�sc;3ves, tl�eir successoi�s, exectttors,
aiiministrators, and <�ssibns, jaintiy and severally, that tliey «�ill �SEnply anci fi�ily pra�ec[ Q�e saici
()wner a�ainst, aricl w�il( p�y �ny ��nd all amounts. dama�es. costs �nd j�icigments wi�ich iz�ay be
�•ecovered S�iiiilSi 0]' 1�`I31Cfl iI1C OW11C?' illfiy be cailed upon to pay to ai3y Esersan or coi-�oratia�i by
1'CiIS()Il U� L1riV ��I�E13fl�FS aYISlllg lE'��Ill 1�1C E)el't01't112TiC� 0� S�i1t� ��'Ofk. OF Of II1C TCj1c1lY O2' S1'[a1lliCri8i1CC
il�ereo£, or tl�e i��amlea• of doi�i� tlie saaie c�r tl�e itc;gleC! of tkle said Conir�eior or iiis agc;nts or
sec•va��ts or die improper per(orms��ce of tfle said �a�o��i: hy the Contractor c�c' ltis abettts or serv��tts, or
ii�e infi•in�emenls of any palent ri�hts by reason of'the i�sc of any materiril illl'IIISII�(i Ol' 11%UC2: donc;
as aforesaid, o►• othei•wise.
And ttie said Ca�zt3�actc�r �nd Surety fiereby fu�Kher bind th�;mselvcs, ti�ei�• successars, Ilcirs,
executors, tidmittisirators, ai�ci assigns, jointly and sever<alfy. ti> re�>ay tl�e o�vnc;r any sL�t�� «�hicli the
Uwner may l�e coinpcileci to pay bccause ot� aity lien for labo�• it�ater+al Curnisl�ed fo�• the ���ork,
e�}lbraced by said Caniract.
And the said Surety, ior tiie v�1�EC recei�red. l�et'eb� stipulcjtes anci ��►•ces thas ciu clta���e, extciision oi'
time, 1IiCC8li041 OI' i3t�Cjlllt?Il (C1 EIlB f8ft11S Of lI1C CUllll'ilCi 01' i0 fllC WOCk l0 E'Se }�CPf0i111�C� 1�1Ci•c:uzider or
if1i: S})�Ct�1Cii�lOriS i3�COri1�1�11)'151� IIIC SRIl1C Slliill LIl iitl}' '1'JiiV Bfi�Ct It$ O�II��tiOliS OIl fI11S �011(�, d11C1 II
d��es licrei�y waive notice of an�� sucl� chan�e, extension of time, altet�ation ar �iCi<lifI011 t<) tltC tCt'il1S „„�
� ., .•,: ,,.
of�the eontract or to the wc>i�k or to the s�ecifie�iians. . s•%a,,
II� 'I'T;S1'CMQiVX WT�ILI2[?OF, �uit��ess the ha��cls and seals of tl�c parties 1leret�� tt�is ___,...._,_..�_ ;� •
d�y o1___�_____. 2U E 3 .,, .
TI.G bIV1�RS��'1rD. INC ' ' .
—, ;
r.z�or�
�,
_ '',;,;� : �
���T�; � Dalas � erson/VP Operations
.�
Tiffany Monaco/Asst.Secretary
WITNESS:
_ ! ��.------..�
COUI!'`I'�RSiGNF1):
(
Cunu�aci !'or Signiaiurz.dcc�
Pngc 2 0l' i�
Westfield Insurance Com�any
St1ttCTY T
� '� ' �• C� ,e 3r.y
E3y:. . = `
A' O Y '-FACT � � � .:_, �-
Theodore J. Jec�l�ck.`i =;'; � a'
.� /�}' `JY .Cr' ..
. �.:��1 . . .
�y;
J
%.,
� .
C'�r•
7l2G!2Al2
Generai POWER NO. a992202 04
Power W�StffQld �115�l�"�t1C� �Oa
• of A�tarney Westfield Nationas insurance C�e
CERTIFIED COPY Ohio Farrrters Insur�nce Coo
Westiield Center, Ohio
Know AI! Men by 7hese Presents, T:�at WES?FIELD ItvSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIEID NATfONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and �HIO
FARfv1FR5 INSURANCF COMPANY, co� porations, hereinaf:er referred to individually as a"Com any" and collectively as "Companies," duly
organizeo and existing under the laws o` thc 5tate of dhic, and having its prir�cipai o�ce in Vl+est�eld Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these
presents make, constitute and appoinE
THEO�ORE J. JEDLICK
o( DAVIE ar.d State af FL its true and lawfi,i Ac.4rney(s)-in-�ac� with full powe: and authority hereby conferretl in its name,
place an� stead, co execu[e, ackrowtedge and deliver any and ali bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instrumc-nts or contracts of
su�eryship- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - •
UMITATtON: THtS POWER CF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFlCIEiVCY, MORiGAGE
GUARANTEE, OR BAIVK DEPOSiTORY BONDS.
and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fuily and to tne same ex[ent as if such t3onds were signedby the Presiderrt, seale� with [he torporate
seal of the appiica�le Company ano duiy attesced by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming aii tfiat the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in
the pramises. Sa�d appointment is made under and by authorfty of the fallowmg resoluUOn adopted by the Board oF Direc[ors of each o� the
VJcSTFIEt.D IAiSURANCE COMPANY, WE5TFiELd NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHtO FARMERS IlVSURANCE COMPAIVY:
"Be !t Resolved, that the President, any Senior Execuiive, any Secretary or any Fidefity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shaii
be and is hereby vesced with fuli power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s)-in-Fact ta represent and act for
and on behalf oF the Company subject to the ioilowinq provisions:
The Attorney-in-Fact. may be g�ven full pa+arer and authority fo� and in the name of and on behalf �f the Comparry, ta exewte, acknowtedge and
deliver, any and al( bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemniry and other conditional or obligatory undertakings a�d any arni all
notices and documents canceling or terminating ihe Company's liability tnereunder, and any such inswments so executed by any such
A;iorney-in-�ac: shali be as binding upon the Company as if signed by ihe President artd seafed and attested by the Corporete Secretary."
"Be rt Further Resofved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seai of the Comparry heretofore or hereafter affixed to any
po+rler of attorney or any cprti�itate rela[ino Lhereto by facsimile, and arry power o` attomey or certificate bearing facsimile signawres or iacsimile
seal shall be valid and binding u�on :he Comparry v,�th respect io any bond or undertaking :o wh�ch i[ is aRached." (Each adopted at a meeang
neld on February 8, ZOQO).
!n Witness Whereof, 4d=STFIELD INSURANCE COPtPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY 2rni OHIO FARMERS INS[lRANCE
C�J:V PANY have caused [hese preserrts ta be signed by their National Surety Leader and Senior Executive 2nd their corporate seals to be he�eto
a4ixed ttiis 15th day of APRII A.D., 2010 . .
Cnrporate o�gg���b `,,,��S:.n�;u:..�3,i,,,, +J• �""""""%,,,� WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPAfVY
Sea�s �? WESTFIELD NATi4NAL INSURANCE COMPA(dY
AfF"e��a,`°,: `+a° 1�,-. ;: o: �'%� = _'�=" ° �''� OHIO FARMERS tNSURANCE COMPAIVY
• �4�'' � t.ti� '.�' �i'j�]L �%r` _�;'���8%�3
''�; lt' ��Y_,�� : ��.. �.O : i� : 184$ ; ! ' .
� �� • ¢ - �$�yh'`� � J" a ° Bv: -��� Yv�"V 3
State o� Ohi� ���>•^� ' Dennis P. Baus, Nationa! Surety Leader and
County of Medina ss.: Senior Executive
On this 15th eay of APRIL A.D.. 2014 , before me personally came f}ermi5 P. Beus tfl me known, vaho, being hy me duly svorn, did
depose ar.d say that he resides in Wooster, Qhia; that he is National Surety Leader and Senia Ezecutive af WESTfIELD INSURAhCE
CON'.PANY, WESTFlELD NA+IQiVAL tNSURANCE COUIPANY and OHIO FARMERS iNSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described ir, and which
execu[2d the above inscrumer.t; chat ne knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals aEfixed [o said inswme�c are such corporate seals; that
they were so affixed try order of the Boards of Dirsctors of said Companies; and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
�ocarial .
S�al .� ¢tS1�� S',
.
Atfixr.d �p;. �'
��e �\,ifi/% 9�
2:..� ._-- {'
: • William J. Kaheiin, A mey at Law, NoFary Public
State of Ohio :� j���o Uly Commission Dces Not Expire {Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Cade)
County of Medina ss.: ':, q ��',-
T O .�'
., � �. Q.FM•''��,.
I, Ff2nk A. Carrino, Secretary of 1fdE5TFtELU INSURANCE COMPANY, dvES7FtELD NATIONAL tNSURANCE COMPAhY snd OHIO F/1WVfERS
INSURA�CE COMPA�!Y, do hereby certify :hat th� above and faregoing is a true and correcc copy of a Pawer of Attomey, Qxecuted by said
Compar.ies, which is sti11 :n full forte and effect; ard furthermore, tne resolu[ions of the Boards of Directors, 5et out in the Power of Atiorney are
in iuli force and eFfe�t.
!n l�/itness Whereof, I have hereunto sec my nand and affixed trie seals of said Companies ai Westfield Center, Ohio, this day of
A'Q' ,.�.m,,,..
�gUR� ,.•'?t�^n�";,�.,';', r'' ���''�
O,r""" " $t'$i, : ,�. •:;SG :
a Qr�,J tfY �i o } � C • �' � ' ` `p��.� � �
x c�a� ��./�.Si'ro+ � l;• ilLL'11.� �T - :�' �M��,�3 �/� � � 'S
i 11% , s�.t7ti ���� "il�• . . - `� � ?� ;� Za�� �o� � ��
�?�'� ;z,•' ,., . •o; , ... Frank A. Carrirta, Secretary
• „ �'",•b.�«w.�'"''a
BPOAC2 (combined) (05-02)
�
CONTRACT
This CONTRACT made and entered into this �y day of 1 �l , 2013 by and between tlae
City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter d ignated as the "City", and TI,C
DIVERSIFIED. INC,. of the City of PALMET"TO County of MANATEE and State of Florid.a,
hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements
on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
LIFT STATION 33 (09-0003-UT) & LIF'T STATION 42 (10-0051-UT)
REHABILITATION PROJECT IN THE AMOUNT OF NINE HUNDRED EIGHTY NIN�
THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED SIXTY DOLLARS AND 1�10 CENTS (�989,560.00)
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other specYal
• provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with �y
advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successnrs
and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the
City.
•
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulatians
as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND AS5IGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE
TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAG ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAIlVST
THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS
CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS
AND CONDITIONS AS CUNTAINED IiEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND
HARMLESS FROM ANY AND AGL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, NDGMENTS
OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST
THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS,
SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
Contract for Signature.docx Page 3 of 14 7/26/w012
•
CONTRACT
i�)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractar agrees to conform to the following requiremen��:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not �o
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of r�e, sex, religion, color, i�r
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the followin�:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off �ir
termination; rates of �pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employe�s
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or ageements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors %�r
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in tYte
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulat�d
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may 1�
due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 aer dav for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of �1.000.00 aer
• ¢� shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the
Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being fiuther agreed that this sum is not to
be construed as a penalty but is only to be canstrued as liquidated datnages for failure of the Contractor
to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
r1
LJ
It is fiuther mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
Contract for Signature.docx Page 4 of l4
7/26/2012
�
��
CONTRACT
(3)
�1� WITNESS WHEREO�', thc pat�ties ta the agreemei�t have hereunio sct their l�ands and s�a1s a�id
have e?;ecuted this A�reement, in duplicate, the dAy and year first above wiitten.
CITY O� Ci,EAItWATER
IN PINELLAS C(3UN'1'Y, FLURIllA
C
By: �
wl 1At13 . �i0t11 , YI
Clf� IVjc�il1�01'
Catuttersigneci:
�y.
— C(�A�tt ��� �.�1'�S
George N. Cretekas,
Mayor
(Contractor tnust indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Indi��idual.)
(The {�erso�i signing sliall, in his own
liandwriting, sign the T'rincipai's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his auihori#y to bind the Carporatian).
� Contract for Signntare.doc� Pabe 5 of 14
n���st:
�� ����f ryF�" `�
��\`��� �
� -__ ...��'>�' �,
�-���
Camilo Soto
Assistant City Atiorney
TLC DIVERS FiED. INC.
"T(.0 l7� �-i'Si�1er��c. _
(Contractor)
AL
��, .�CtS
v. P, °�`'�i''�
a
� �+ e
��
:� • ° M�
rr •
. ... . - a�,�#'e�.
"7 �` S
,'
. . : -�..� � .
7/2fi/?012
i
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORM)
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized tv
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly swom,
deposes and says:
That he is the (TITLE)
of TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC., a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located ��t
271917 STRE T EAST, PALMETTO, FLORIDA 34221(herein, the "Contractor").
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of
. 2013 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as
Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of:
LIFT STATION 33 (09-0003-UT) & LIFT STATION 42 (10-0051-UT)
REHABILITATION PROJECT
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors,
laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature
• nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work
against the described property.
•
That he is making this �davit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) Yn
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this ai�davit shall mean any and all arising under the operation w�f
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me
This day of , 20
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
Contract for Signature.docx
Page 6 of 14
:
AFFIANT
PRESIDENT
7/26/2U 12
•
�
�J
ArFIDAVIT
(To bc; tilled in and cxecutoci if t�ie bidde�• is a e<iiporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUhTY Or �ATEE )
Joanne Lamberson UClllb (IUIY SWOI'it, dcposcs and says that hdshc is
Secretaryof TLC Diversified, Inc.
a corporatiazt organizeci anct existiug under and by vi�Kt�e of tlie laws �f the State af Florida, Al1C� �1AVt11�
its principa! ofrics at:
2719 17th Street East, Palmetto, Manatee, FL_34221 ___
Street & N�unUcr
Gity
County State
Afliant further says that lie is femiliar wiih tl�e rc.conls, �ninule Uooks and by-la�vs of
TLC Diversified Inc. _
. (Name of Coi7x�ratio»)
Affifmt fuitl�er sTys Qiat Thurston Lamberson is �President .
� (nfficer's Name) (Tidc)
of the corporation, is duly authottized to si�n the Proposal for TLC Divers i f ied, Inc . __
for said cc�i7�oration vy ��irtue of Resolut ion of the Board� Februar�2 5� 2 �]] __
(state whethcr a provision of by laws oi �� I:et;:lt�ti��n�,Qf�lie Board of
_ Directors. lf byResalu�i{on �i� c}:�tct}f a<iei?tion).
v A '
`� � `
�
r
�.... j'� ..� �/,' ' 4 ��_t.. v ......
�6L�' _ � '� S.. .� �.__-. .......___._._�
� ,% � nir��,�
Joanne-�amberson/Secretary
Sworn to befoi�e me this 4 th day of _ Apr i 1 , 2p 13 .
���
�"�"�,; LIq�A KA1� MOORE
.; Notary Publk - Stat� ot florida
�� ? My Comm. Expiree M�r 20, 20f8
. �;:•' Commission N EE tdSMe
„�,., ,
--.--�•-�.�.-.�.�-.,.�.
• SGCTIO\V[1 J.docx Pagc 8 of 14
+. , t►� :
i. � nda Kay Moore �_._ ___ ___
'I'ype/print/st�imp name of Natary
Notary Public
Titie or rank, and Serial No., if any
10/29/12
•
�+ebruary 25, ZOl 1
RE: Authoriiy to Sign Le�al Docnmcnts
TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN;
GORPOI2ATL KLSSOLSJTION
TLC Dtveraificd, Inc., bein� st tegal Corporation a�ganizcd uncicr the Larvs of the State of
FMrida in April, 1985, h9r. TharsEon Lan�beraon �nd i�irs. Jonnne R. I,Amberson �nd
hs�ving IOQ% of thc outstariding shAres o! aeid Corporation nwned since M�rch of 89
dcclares the foUa�ving as a matter of rc¢ord.
• Mr. Tharston Lambcrson, Presidcnt, sh:lt bnvc tull po�vcr and atrthority to sign any nnd �li
4egaF and Bir�ding Documcnts aud make all commitment� af Hhatcver naturt for TLC
Divcrsificd, lnc.
•
Slgned this 2Sth day of Feb, 2011
��-`_ � ' � _ � �
Thurston I,Ambcrson �
Presidc»�
, / �
,
� � � ,
��+y ^r _
oanne R. ambcraun
Vice-PresIdent
S�vorni to aud subscribed befare me'fhurst�n L.amberson� end Joun»e R l.xruberson wl�om
I kno�• this 25th dav oi Feb, 2(11 l.
� ' � i
t.�C;�4 a %r'l�r� f
LindA I�aj� o,'e --___.
Notary Public
�1y C'o�umi4sion F.xpires: MArch 20, 2p 12
:y�`�;;. L�NUA KAY AAC)bRf: I
. MY :,.O�++IISS!(1N t; tr )/7pA3Q �
••�� � d4'IRf.� �?'we4� tq 701% `
(aJ��96n� � . ,.a �� . .� .�..a.. �
.
�
NON-CQLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OT' FLORIDA
COtiNTY Or �NATEE )
_ Thurston Lamberson_ ____...__,.___ bei�ib, f�st ctuly swan, deposcs and s�ys Qiat l�e is
President of_ TLC Diversified, Inc. >
the pany makiu� thc fareboin� Pr�posal or IIid; that such t3id is gettui�ie a�xt uot collusive or sham: Qtat
said bidder is not financially interesteci in or othe�wisc affililted in � business way witlt any oQtcr biddcr
on the same contract; tiu�t said bidder has nat colludeci, eonspired, connived, or agre��ci, dii-�'ctly or
indirectly, K�ith any bidders or petson, to put in a sham bid or that such ather persoii slu�lt refrain fi'oen
bidding, fltlC� I1flS not in flriy ]IlfllltlCl', directly or indir��ctly, sought by BbCC�111C111 or cotlusion, or
cc�mmunicati�n or conferencc, with any peison, t� Cx the bid p�ice or affant or any other bidder, or ta
fix flny overhetid, pro�t or cost eleinent of said Uid price, or tl�t of nny other bidder, or to secure any
advantage ngainst tfie City of Clcanvate,•, Floridfl, or any person or �crsons interested in the proposed
contract; anri that all stateme��ts contained in said pi�posal or bid a�•e eruc; and fu��ther, tl�►t sucli biddee
has not diceclly oi• indircetly submitted this bici, or the eontents thercx�f, a• divul�;ed info�tii»tion or dat�
relalivc thereto to a��y associ�lion or to t�ny inemUer or �bene thereof.
_ Affiaiit
Thurston Lamberson/Presicient
Sv��orn ta and subscriUed before me this 4 th day of __,_ Apr i 1 , 20 13 .
i.wa► �unr Moo�
. . �+n► n�r�c - aa�. a paw.
Mr ce�a. Ex�lra INu 20. P9t•
Coaa�IsNpe / EE 16lM�
• SGCfiONVi I J.docx Page 9 of 14
i �
� j
_- - l ���_
�
Linda Kay Moore
Io/39112
�
�ORIGINA�L
PRONOSAL
(1)
TO THE C1TY OF CLEARWAT�R, FLORIDA, far
REHABILITATION UF LIFT STATIOi�' #33 (PROJECT #09-0003-UT) AND #42 (PROJECT
#10-0051-UT)
and dain� such �ther ti�ork incide�rial thereto, all in accorciance with tt�e conG•act documents, marked
RCHAIIILITATION OF LIFT Si'ATION �33 (09-00(13-UT) AND #42 (10-0051-I;T)
Eve�y bidder rnust take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepteci �nd the dac;uments
signed by t}Ye bidder to whom nn award is made and by thosc officials authorized to do so on hehxlf o!'
tlte City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such awatd or signing shall be considered a binding contraci
without a certific:ate fivin the Finance Director that funds a��e avAilable to c�ve�• the cast of Qle wo�ic to
be ctone, �r wiChout the approval of the City Attoiney as to the f'onn And legality of the contrael end ell
the pertinent duci�ments ��ctatin�; thereto hnvii�g been Approveci by sAid City Attoiyicy; and such bidder is
hereby chargecf with this notice.
The signcr af Q�c Pro�os��I, as bidder, also declai�cs that thc only person, peisons, c.ompnny or Parties
interested in this Proposal, aix: nt�ineci ii� this Pcoposnl, thai he has carefully examinecf thi
� Adve�Kisement, Instruccions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications,
General Conditians, Spceial Pmvisions, �nd GoixrFtet Bond, that he or his representt�tive h�s made such
investigation as is nccess�+cy to dete�7nine d�e chai�acter and extent of the �vork and he proposes and
agrees that if die Proposal be accepted,lie will contiact with the Gity of Cle,�iwatcr, Florida, in d�e fonn
of conu�ct; hercto atuicxed, to provide the necessary labor, matedals, machinery, «�uipment, tools or
Apparatus, do all the work rcqui��ed to comptete the contiact wid�in the time mentioneci in die Geiierai
Conditions and accoi�iing ro the re.�ui��ements of the City of CleaiwAter, �lorida, as hei�ein and
hereinafter set forth, aixl fuinish the rc�uired surety bonds for Qte following prices to wit:
• SL;C't'IUNV� };.�c;� Page 10 of f4 IO1291f 3
•
PROPOSAL
(2)
If the forcgoing Propasal shatl be acceptcd by the City of Clcarwster, Flarida, and the undetsi�;necl shall
fail to execute a satisfacto�y conti�act as staced in tl�c Advertisement hei�ein attadied, then the City may,
at its option detemiine tl�at die unde�si�ned has abandoned die couU•act, and thereupon this Proposal
shall be null and voici, and the ce�rtified check or Uond accompanying this Proposal, sllali be forfeited to
become thc property of die City of Giearwater, Flarida, atxl thc ft�ll amount of said chcck shall be
retai�ieci by the City, Ol' !f tI1C Pl'O�OSflI IIO11CI liC �iVGtl� thc full amount of'such bond shall be p�id to thc
City as sti�xilated or iiquidated dama�es; otheiwisc, the bond or cei�tificd chcck accon�panying this
Proposal, or thc Pmount of said check, shalt bc retiu��cd ro Q�e undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a lwnd or certifiec! eheck on Bid Bond-West f ield Insurance Co .
B�nk, for Qtc sunt of
Ten Percent (� 10�
(I�lilb d 111tI11I11Q111 O� lOa/o OC CO11lIiiClOY�s total bid amoui�Q.
Tlie fult namcs and residences of all persons and p�rties interested in thc foi�egoin� bid are as fallows:
(lf corpoi�ation, givc the names and addresses of the P��csidei�t and Sccretary. lf fi�m or p�rtneiship, die
• names and add��esscs of the inembe�s oc p�Mi�ers. The Bidder sl�all list not only liis name but also thc
namc of any pe�son with wham bidde�• has any type of agreenient ��hcreUy such pecson's
improvemcnts, eurichment, emptoymeni or possible bcneCt, whether sub-c�nti�actor, materinl mAn,
flgcnt, supplier, or cmployer is contin�ent upon ihe award of the contiact to thc bidder).
NAMES: ADDRESSES:
Thurston Lamberson/President/5539 2nd Ave.Cir.W.,Palmetto,FL 34221
Joanne Lamberson/Secreta�1Same__addre_ss as_above
Thurston Lamberson/President
(The bicider must indicate whether Coiporation, Partnershi�, Company ar Individuat).
• S}:C'Fi0\V(Ij.docx Page ! i of i4 10/29�12
�
PROPOSAI,
(3}
The person si�;ning shall, in his own handw�7ting, sign tlie 1'rincipal's name, his own nAme and his title.
Where tlie person signinb for a coiporation is oth�a• l)ian tl�e Presideut or Vice-President, he ntust, by
affidavit, show his sutlwrity, to bind the co�orAtion.
Princip !: �1..� � 1 � ��S I Fi � �C.�. -------------- - _ ___ —
BY� _ _.. �-_ _-- — - _ _ __._.. _ _ Title: �� t j��y"
Thurston Lamberson
BusinessAddressofL3idder: 2�19 17th Street East
Cityt�nd St�te: _ Palmetto, FL ___
Dated Ht Palmetto, FL , tl�is 4th
�rkt� oc' ��to�FicakreN 1s �1c�.-�ok
C J
Zip Code _ 3 4 2 21
day of April , A.D., 2013 .
• SGCI'IUNV(iJ.4ocs Pagel3ofl4
� a�9J� 2
u
�
CITY O� CLEAR�VAT�R
ADD�NDL`M SHI:ET
PROJECT: RFHARII.ITATION OT I.IFT STATION #33 (09-0003-U'I�
AhD #42 (10-0051-U7')
Ack�x�wled�;m�nt is hereby made of the follo�ving addenda received siuce issuance of Alans and
Spc.�ciGcatians.
Addendum No. � Date: 03(2�i �2013
Addendum No. Datc:
Addenduin No, Date:
Addendum Na Date:
Addendum No. Datc:
Addenduul No. DtEtc:
Addendum No. Date:
Addeudwn No. D�tc:
Adde��dum No, Datc:
Addeudauz No. Date:
Addcndain No. Datc:
C Diversified _ Inc..�
(Name of Bidder)
_ ---- —
(Signatui�e of Ofi7cer)
Thurston Lamberson/President
{Titic of Officer)
--A�.11 � 4 a 2. 013
(DAte)
� S13C7'10\V�1j.docx Pagc 13of 14 tUl2911?
•
BtDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJEC'1': REHA1311.1'fAT10N OF LIF'1' S'1'ATION N33 (09-Q003-U'1') A\D M42 (t0-0051-U'1�
I31D 1'I'F,1�lS ES7' ��IT Ui�l'I' TOTAL �
,r,�, PItIC� �
I.iii Stacan 42 Rehabilitatioii Complcte iti accordnncc «�ith 5� � ��) �� �
� Section O1 I50, 3,01 A � �-S 5 j S �
` Lifi Station 42 Linc Stop and Valve Inserlion on :auth Horcc � � S S �Q 5� $ I O s� �
A4ain Com �lete in accorclancc �ti�ith Sectiw� 011 �0, 3.U1 13 1 � (
Lifl Station 33 Rehabilit�tion C'amplete in accordance �viU� '
3 Section O1 i50. 3.Q1 C 1 l.S s 3U7� oc� s�(j 7� �(�(} �
4 �lobilizalion in accordaixc with Section Ul I 5�, ;i.Ul U I � LS S� �;k) �(p � �
�
5 Ir.demnificalioit in accordance �vith Section 01 I SQ, 3.0! E 1 i LS � 2 W.tlO 5 10O.00 �
-- —�
SUB-'1'O'CAt, l'fE1�1S 1-5 $ �Q ��
i 0°fo Oi� ncr's Contingcncy in accrn•dance H�ith Section A I t 50,
� 3AlF t10°oofSuUtotal,Item.I•5) 1 1_S S��9(� 1� $��ej�
tilD TO'I'AL ([7't Y15 1-6) � � $�
Co���RAC'rOR: TLC Diversified, Inc.
81DDF.R'S I3AS[; BID TOTAL(ltems t-6): S��� S� . c�fi (Attunl�•.)
QIDDER'S li.4Sl: 131U T07'A� iltcma 1-6):
1���C�_'d� (Words)
• "fNE: H1DU�R'S TOTAL AB01'E !S 1{IS 7'07'rU. [iln 13ASEl) ON I1IS U:VIT PRICES ANI)1.CMP SU1r1 PRICF;S
AND 7'HE 1'sST(MATEU QUA[�'f11'!ES REQUlRLU FOR IsACH SBC'1'10�. 'f111S 1�lCURG tS FOR
INFORMATION OtiLY A'C'1'H[: 'fli14E OF OPI:NI\G BIDS. 7'W1: CI'1'1' WILL �IAKE TNIs '1'�1BULA7'[O\
k120A1 THE UNIT PRICES Atip LUNIP S[:i41 PRICF BID. 1f THI:RE IS A1V BRRpR 1N'I'HF. 7'OTAI. DY TI•!E
lil!)llGR, 1'f SEIALI, l3E CHANGEU AS ONL1"1'Nl: Unl'I' Pt2ICF.5 AND L.UMP SUM PRIC@: SHALL COVEI2\.
• SE('TIOt�V[IJ.doc� Nagc 14 of 14 IO/29/12
•
•
�'ROP(?SAL. Li4NU
(�Vc+t to he fillexi out if a ce�lified check ig submitted)
KNOWIv ALL MEN BY 'I'1�IES� PRk,S�IVTS: Tt►at wa, the uiuiersi�neti,
..TLCµDiversified� Inc. asP�incipal,�u�d Westfield Insu�$nce
Companv as Sui�cty, whc�'s address is �ne Park G; �"'1 p,
Westf ield Centgr, OH 44251 , a�c hcld Rnd finnly bound imto
the Ciry c>f Gle�iwatea•, Pkmda, in the sum nf Ten Percen�
Dotla��x (S 10� )(being p minimum of 10% uf Conithctor's I�ta! bid amowu) i'or the p�yment of
which, wcU a�ui truly co be mndc, we hereby j�intly and severaliy biixi ourselves, �ur heirs, exceutors,
octmin;st���tc�rs, s��cc:exsors xixt xssigns.
'1'hc co�xli�ipn of the alx��e o(�ligation is such tlu�t iftlic att�chod Pi�osal of__.._��.� __._
TLC Diversified, Inc. �,4Princilx+t,and Westfield Ineurance Companyas
---• --•.__.......___.......__._........._ ......... ... . _.._........ ..
Stu•ety, fnr �vtN•k specifiexl as: R�HABILITATION �F I.ii�T STATION #33 (09•0003-U'1�
A�iD �f42 (I�-OQ,Sl-U'17
alt as stipulatccl in seici Nra�nsal, by doin� al) work incide�ual therera, tit ACCOl�11CC Wit}1 IIIG NIBitS AtlCi
specificacions p�nvideci here for, nll witl�in Pinellxs Gounty, is acecpted and the contract awAided to the
s�bove naineci biddtr� and the said bidcier shall wi�hin te�� deys etier notice of saicf award enter into e
contract, i:� wrilin�,r, Hixt R�rnish the i�quired Pcrfonnancc Bancl �vith nirety or sur�ties to l� flpprc�vec!
byr tlu City Mnnager� this abli�ation shat! be ��oid, othei�uvisa tl�e �xme shall be in fl�ll force and virtue
by lew n«ci thc full »mount of [his P�n�x�sal 13ond wifl bc pnid to ihe City es stipufated or liquidated
dumHge.q.
Si�ned this _ 2 5 day of ._ March ,, 2013 .
(Princ.ti�wl mu�t iiuiic:Ate �vl�thha•
ca ratian, ��a�inccship, co»ipany
or m iv�duai)
7'he ��eiy;on si�tiiug shall, in Itis Uw��
liatuiwriting, xign the Principnl's
neu�e, his own name anci l�is tille;
the ��on signing for a corporation
must, by a(fidavit, show his authority
to bind the cai�x�ration.
� sI'sC77oNY{ 1J.docx Page 7 or ta
�- _ ,. _ . _
...'. � .._,��
L,.�.-'__ _ ..." "" ._... C.=-.v..�.'ar ............. `�
_._ ,...-. °- .,�_.,sw —
Y �-��..-.�....
. ., .�,�ma. .._,�_:... - "-++,,y.. ....-.--...._..
c�.�..--'---�-� ' _.,._..
— .
,,; 2. �_ . .._..__�.� .�-�_.
Thurston LambersoniPreside�7t
TLC Diversified,Inc,
Principal
By:�
Titie r ey In-FacC
Theodore J. .;edlirk .
Westf_ield.._�.�ur�nc�. Company
Sure[y
IQl:9112
�
Itehabilitation of L.iO St:ttious IR. 3S. 59, and C+ii
i'rc�jrr�k 2�)b-tC'
An;� rlainis iankr ihi� MHki IlY►v �;µ4�lri!�SCII Il�:
�
U
�;ira i�c�ur7
�
N:mk c�l'Surcn�
Mailin� A�k!mss
)1=8 ! �.t127')
Westfield_Insurance Company
Same as Street
sutti� nddm� One._Park. .Circle._ _.,__
Westf.ield__ Center�OH 44251
I�amr nn:l nueilat� addnac o1'
:��iu <wr.��r�apl:Hi,•c in
I�lorid;l ifdilTe�n;nl fnnv
:dx►v�
Tckpipnk nun�lxrol'Surrq.
:nxl dg�nt <w re{H'cxeM:nivr
in Fh�'ickt
i irc�cm
JBI Group., . Inc_._.,_......
6191 Orange.Driye
_# 615.9 E._ . .. _ ____._�_._._..__
.Davies.... FL.. 33314_.._..._.
Theodore J. Jedlick
.J__S O O M.L 3 31-.$.� $ 2_.._.
.._S . 954_�__ 327.-,0442.--..
�x►:�x�-�o
Tl11S POWER OF ATTORNEY SUPERCEOES ANY PREVIOUS POWER BEARINO THIS SAME
POWER �t AND ISSUED PRIOR TO 04l15M0, FOR ANY PERSON OR PERSANS NAA/EO BEL01N.
�General
•Power
of Attorney
•
��
POWER NO. 0992202 d4
Westfield insurance �o.
Westfield National Mnsurance �Co.
CERTIFIED COPY �hio Farmers fnsurance �Ca.
Westfield Center, Ohio
Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WES7FtEL� NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OH10
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, caporabons, hereinaRe� referred to mdwFduelly as a'Company' and collect�vely as 'Compan�es,' duiy
organfied snd e�dsting under the laws ot the Stste ot Ohio, ancf nav�ng its prinapal ornce m Westheld Center, MeCina County, Oh�o, do bp these
presents make, cxnstitute and appoint
THEODORE J. J�OLICK
of DAV1E and 5tata of FL rts true and lawtul Attorney�s)in•Fact, v�nth /ull power and authordy hereby conferred �n rts name.
pface and steatl, to executn, acknowledge and deliver any and aN bonds, recognizances, urxlertakings, or other i�strunent: or contracts of
surstyaMp...............•--•----......---......-----------------_.. _ _.
UI�AITATlON: THIS POWER OF ATTORNfY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE OUARANTEE, AAORTOAOE DEFICtENCY, MOR'fC3A0E
aTTA1Z7IATE�f, OR BANK OEPOSfTORY BONOS.
antl to bind any d the Companies thereby as fuily antl to the sama extent as �f such bonds were s�gned by the Pres�deM, sesied with the corporate
seal Of tAe spp11qd8 Company end duiy attest� by its Secretary, hereby ratify�ng and conHrming aIl that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact map ao i�
WESTFI�EI.� N URAN�CE COMPANY, W�E8TFIE D NAT ONALh NSURANCE COMPANYBand OHIO FARMERS I S URANCErCOMPANYot each ot tne
'Be It Rssohred. that thn Pres�dent, sny Senior Executive, sny Sac►acary or any Fitlel�ty � Surety Operations Execuhve or other Ezecutiw snai�
be arxl is hereby vested wlth full power antl authorlty to appoint any one a mo►e suitable persons as AttorneYls)-in-Fact to represent and aa fo�
and on behaM oi the Company subject to the tollowmg proWSfons:
The Attorney-m-Facl. may De gwen fu11 powar and authority for snd in the nama oi and on behaif or the Compa�y, to execut0. adcnawied� a�c
deliver, sny and eli bonds, reao�rnzance,s, contraas, ap►cernents of fndemnity antl �Ner wn�ibonal or oDUgato►y undertakings and any anC a}
natrces Md doeumoMS canceF�ny o► t�minatinq the Compsnys lisbll►ty thereunder, and any auch instrumeMs so exautad by any suc`•
Attaney-�n-Fact shsll ba ss b�nding upon the Compeny as if signetl by the Pres{dent antl sealad ana attestad by the Gorpcxate Secretary.��
'8e It FuRhei Resofved, that the si�nsture of any such designated person and the sesl of the Company haretofore or hereaher atfixecl to a^,
�� � �� a�rtiffcate relaqnp therdo by taGSimile, and sny power of attorney w certi8cate beanny facsimita signatures or �ar.s�r�e
ng upon the Compsny wIM respect to sny bond or undertak�ng to which it rs attached' (Each adopted st a mee ..
h�d on Februsry E, 2000). �
Irt ►Nltn�se Wherool, WESTFIEl.O IN$URANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OMIO FARMERS INSU�AHGw
COMPANY hsva cauaed thase presents to be siyned by the�r Sa�ior E�c�attlw snd their corporete sasla to be hereto atfixed this tbth aay c'
APR11. A.D.� 1�10 .
Corvorat� �S�"„'�
spis
AH�xed q .w. ~`ti
� 5,�,
3 e nr. �
StaQe of Ohio �+�"'"
counry ot Mec�ne 9s.:
, � �E�. ,.�
. ••R • .a
_
1:, 1849 ; i
•- -' - '•
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WE3TFIELD NATIONAL INSURANC6 COMPANY
OHIO FRRMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
� ` -
ey:
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive
On thia 15th day of APRIL A.O., �010 , before me personally came Rkhard L. Kinnai�d, Jr. to ma known, who, being by n^ae dWy
sworn� dd depoee srW say, Mnt he residos in MtdMe, Ohio; thet he is Se�ior Executive of WESTFIEI.D INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIEIe�
NATIONAL INBURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARI�dERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the compaMes tlescnbed In and wMch executed thq abe>ve
�nstrumeM; th�t ho Knows tho seals of ssid Compsniar thet the seals afflxad to said instrurnent era such corporate seals; that ttiey were so affixec
by order pf the 9oards of Oiredora ot saitl Comparn�; and that ne slg�ed Ms name therato by Ilke wder.
Noiirial �
r
Arnxad �Q,P\ t s •
2 `'`'" t,!����-
William J. Kahelin, A ney at Law, IVotary Public
State of Ohio M ��o My Commission Ooes N� Expira (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Reviseal Cc�e:
Camty of Medina ss.� �' ��,.
'`h..T� � f �.�'°r
I, Frank A. Catrino, Secretary ot WESTFIELD IN5URANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY antl OHIO FARV=_-�
INSURANCE COWiPANY, tlo heraby certify that the aboVe and twegoinq is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attornay, executed b�• sa �
CampAnies, whfch Is sti11 in full force and effecF, antl furthermore, the resdutions of the Boertla d Directas, se! out in the Powe► ot Attor+�ey a•�
in tuil forCe 0nq eftxt.
!n Wltnesa WAe�eof, 1 have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals ot sald Companfes at Westrield Center, Omo, th�s L7 � �a; �
M��v �L, A.O., s�� !] .
j ,.�.�,�.
�!Vp�,, .`'�••�nN/u,�..,��,, ....'�'H.n.�r
Ov"'"w-�,'�l�� ;�'r'p'(''�� '�NS' ~' 1
�v� .is► � o� � O: '•Gp': ��
����:x =uE pT '�py.s ff���0� 3
�ti �N� SEt1L. ;m= � .���
�r��lr� 5�.. .•'O,� ��L�.,184$.��:
.., ,�..�"'�� _y„"'�tinw"'✓��{
�i�"�l ` �
Semrt�ry
Frsnk A. Carrino, ecret
�
Scuion Iil —Gencial Co�xlitions
SCRUTTNIZFD COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIO�S WlTH CUBA AND
SYR1A CCRTITICATCON FORiVI
TN1S FQRM MUS7' BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WI��I THF. /3ID PROPOSAI
FA/LURB TO SUBM17' THIS FOKM AS REQUIRGD, MAY DEE1Y1 YOUR SUBMITTAL
NONRES!'ONSI VE.
The afCant, by vii�tuc oCthc signflture below, ccrtifics Q�at:
i. Tl�e vendor, company, individual, principflt, subsidia�y, aft'iliAte, or owner is aware of the
requirements of section 287.135, �lorida Statutes, re�;ardin�; companies on the
Se�utinized Comp�nies with Activities in Sudan I.ist, �he Scrutiniz�d Gompanics with
Activities in the Iran Petroleurn Ene�•�y Scctar List, or e��gaging in business operfitions in
Guha arid Svi-ia; and
2. 1'l�e vendor, compnny, iadividual, princip��l, subsidiary, af�liate, or owner is eli�ible to
participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinizect Com�nics 4vith
Acti�ities in Sudan List, the Scn�tinized Companies �vith Activities i�i the Iran Petroleum
Sec;toi• List, or engageci in business oper�tions in Cuba and Syria; a�id
3. �usiness Operations means, far pi�rposcs specifically �t;laled to Cuba or Syi•ia, en�aging
in coinmerce in any 1'nrm in Cub� or Syria, including, but not limiteci to, acquirin�,
developing, maintaii�iu�;, owning, sellinb, possvssing, Icasing or aperating cquipmenc,
facilities, pec:u�nuel, �nnducts, services, persoual praperty, rcal property, �nilitary
ecluipi�tent, or any other aE�paratus c�f busiiiess ar commerce; anii
• 4. IF award�d the C��ntract (or Agrcemenr), the vendar, comj�any, individua(, princiNat,
sub�icliary, affili�te, or ownc;r will immediately notify the Cit�� of Clear�vater in writing,
no later than Cve (5) calendar days after any of its Nrincipals are placed on the
Scrutinixed Companies with Activities in Sudan I�ist, the Scrutinired Companies wieh
Activitics in titc Iran Petraleum Sector List, or en �ages in Uusiness ope��atious in Cuba
and Syria.
. ig�iature
Thurston Lamberson
Printed Name
President
Title
TLC Diversified, Inc.
Nainc of Entity/Corporatiou
� sccuo+�w.ao�� Aagc 4'� of 49 ?!3Il201 Z
�
Scclion II! —Gencnl Co:xlitions
STATE Ol� FLORIDA
COUNTY OF MANATEE
The fa•e�oin� insfnunent was acknowledged before me on this Fourth day of
Agril , 2U13 , by _Thurston Lamberson (name of pcison whose si�;nature
is bcing nc�ta:ixed) as the President (title) of TLC Diversified,�Inc.(name of
cor}x�ra�ion/enuty), }�eisonatly known to me as ciescribed herein `_�_, or produced a
____ _ (type of identiGcation) as identiGcation, and who did/did not take
fln aatli.
LqIDA KA1f MOORE
. . Noqry Pu�Nc - �N ef Nor1Aa
Mr co�nm. Ex�lra Mhr !0. �o�e
H �� ..� Cammbtion N � tAl04/
NOT�iRY SEAL A/30I�E
�
r
.
�r '` i � � �l►
.
Linda Kay Moore
Priuted Namc
My Commission Expires: March 2 0, 2 016
. Section! I l.dotx Pagc 49 of 49
7/31�2012
• .�
SECTION E- BID SUBMITTAL FORM ���
•
�
FLORIDA TRENCH �4FETY AGT
CERTIFICATION ANO DISCLOSURE STATEMENT
The undersigned acknowledges ihe requirements of the Fbrida Trench 3afety AcE (SeCtiort 553.60 et. seq. Fbrida Statutes).
A. The Bidder further ackrwwledges that the Florida Trench Safety Act, (the Act) establishes the Federa! excevatiort safety standards
set forlh at 29 C.F.R. 5ect+on 1926.650 Subpart P, as the fnter�m state standard untii such ti�ne as the slate of Fia'ida, through NS
DeparUr�ent oi Labbr ar� Empbymerd Security, or any sucoeseor agency, adopts, updates, or roviaea saud interim atanderd. This State
of Florida standard may be aupplemented by special ahoring roquirements eatebliahed by the State of Flaida or arry oi its politicai
subdivisbns.
8. The Bidder, as ConiracEOr, shaU comply with aii epplk�ble excavataNtrench safety atandards.
C. The «bnntractor shaN consider the geotechnical data available (rom the CouMy, if amy, lhe Contractors own sources, and a►I other
relev�t in(ormation in its des(on of the trench safety syslem b bs empbyed on the subject Pro}act. The Contractor ecknowledges
sole responsibilities 1or the selection of the data on which R reli� i� designing the safefy system, as weil as for fhe system itself.
D. The amounts that the Bidder has set /orth Ior pipe tnstallation includes the folbwing excavationitrenc� safety mea5ures �d the
tinear feet of trench excavated under each safety measure. These units, costs, and unit valuea shail be disclosed solely for the
purpose oi comppance with proCedural requirements ot the Act. No adjuslmenl to the Agreement Time or price shall be made for
any diHerence in the actual number of Nnear feet of trench excavation, except as may be othervvise provided in these Conbact
D�umeMS.
Trench Satety M�asuro Units of Unit Unit Extsnded
�DescrlpNon) �leasuro (Quantity) Cwt Cost
_ LF SF
1. � �.S '� S.5"DC�►OU a!,Cl O' o�c,
2. -51U � �.f= ro� s ioo a���� �.
�
s. a s
a. S_____ _
s. � � i
For Iniormation Onjy, Not tor Payme�t Purposes S�0�� �%
BWder may use 8dditbnAl sheets ea necessary 10 extend this to►m. FaNure to complete the above may result in the bid beinp declared non-
responsive.
E. The amount diadoaed �s the oost o( compliance with the appHCaWe trench sa%ty requirements does no1 oonstitute the extent of the
Cont►�ctors obliga�lion to c�nply wilh said standards, The Contrector shall entend additionai sums at no addiN�onal c� to ihe CouMy,
it necessary, to oomply with the Act (except aa otherwise be provided}.
F. Aa�ptance of the bid to whfch lhis certif+catbn and discbsure appHes in no way represents that ihe County or its representatives has
evaluated ar�d ihereby delermined that lhe above coais are adequate io comply with the appt�able Uench safety regutrements nor
dq�s it in any way retieve the Contractor of its sole respor�sfbil�y to comply with the appUcable trench safely requirements.
rsified
Neme
fic�e Thurston Lamberson
Addroes:
2719 17th Street East
Palmetto....F'L 34221
- President
(941) 722-0621 / (941) 722-1382
%lephonelFax
59-2513308 ..
Federat Employae ID NO. (FEIN)
tlambersonc�ticdiversified.com _
� Emait of Account Representativs
.
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE FORM
The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087, as amended from
rime to time, hereby certifies that
TLC Diversified Inc. does:
(Name of Business)
1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,
distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance is prohibited
in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees
for violation of such prohibition.
2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the
business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug
counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties
that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.
3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual
services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a
condition of working on the commodities, or contractual services that are under
bid, the ernployee will abide by the terms of the statement, and will notify the
employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty, or nolo cantendere to any
• violation of chapter 893, Florida Statutes, as amended from time to time, or of any
controlled substance law of the United States, or any State, for a violation
occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days afler such conviction.
5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse
assistance, or rehabilitation program, if such is available in the employee's
community, by any employee who is so convicted.
6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implernentation of this secrion.
As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully
with the above requirements.
Bidders Signature
Thurston Lamberson, President
Apri104. 2013
Date
•
�
PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME FORM
SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 287.133(3) (a), FLORIDA STATUTES ON
PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES
THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED AND SWORN TO IN THE PRESENCE OF A
NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER
OATHS.
1. This sworn statement is submitted to City of Clearwater, FL �
T'hurston Lamberson President
(print individual's name and title)
for
TLC Diversified Inc.
(print name of entity submitting sworn statement)
whose business address is
27l 9 17�` St E Palmetto FL 3422 t
• and (if applicable its Federal Employer ldentification Number (FEIN) is
59-2513308
2. I understand that a"public entity crime" as defined in Para. 287.133(lxg), Florida
Statutes, means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to
and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an
agency or political subdivision of any ather state or with the United States,
including, but not limited to, any bid or contract for goods or services to be
provided to any public entity or an agency or political subdivision of any other
state or of the United States and involving antitrust, fr�ud, thett, bribery,
collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation.
3. I understand that "convicted" or "conviction" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(b),
Florida Statutes means a finding of guilt or a conviction of a public entity crime,
with or without an adjudication of guilt, in any federal or state trial court of record
relating ta charges brought by indictment of information after July 1, 1989, as a
result of a jury verdict, non-jury trial, or entry of a plea of guilty or nolo
contendere.
4. I understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(a), Florida Statutes
means:
�
�
a. A predecessor or successor of a person convicted of a public entity crime;
or
b. An entity under the control of any natural person who is active in the
management of the entity and who has been convicted of a public entity
crime. The term "affiliate'° includes those officers, directors, executives,
partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in
the management of an affiliate. The ownership by one person of shares
constituting a controlling interest in another person, or a pooling of
equipment or income among persons when not for fair market value under
an arm's length agreement, shall be a prima facie case that one person
controls another person. A person who knowingly enters into a joint-
venture with a person who has been convicted of a public entity crime in
Florida during the preceding 36 months shall be considered an affiliate.
5. I understand that a"person" as defined in Para. 287.133(1}(e), Florida Statutes
means any natural person or entity organized under the laws of any state or of the
United States with the legal power to enter into a binding contract and which bids
or applies to bid on contracts for the provision of goods or services let by a public
entity, or which otherwise transacts or applies to transact business with a public
entity. The term "person" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners,
shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in management of
• an entity.
6. Based on information and belief, the statement which I have marked below is true
in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. Please indicate which
statement applies:
X Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers,
directors, executives, parMers, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who
are active in management of the entity, nor any affiliate of the entity have been
charged with and convicted of a public entity crirne subseyuent to July 1, 1989.
The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers,
directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members or agents who
are active in management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been
charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July i, 1989.
The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers,
directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who
are active in the management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been
charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989.
However, there has been a subsequent proceeding before a Hearing Of�cer of the
State of Florida, Division of Administrative Hearings and the Final Order entered
by the Hearing Officer determined that it was not in the public interest to place
•
�
�J
the entity submitting this sworn statement on the convicted vendor list (attach a
copy of the final order).
I UNDERSTAND THAT THE SUBMISSION OF THIS FORM TO THE
CONTRACTING OFFICER FOR THE PUBLIC ENTITY IDENTIFIED IN
PARAGRAPH ONE ABOVE IS FOR THAT PUBLIC ENTITY ONLY AND,
THAT THIS FORM IS VALID THROUGH DECEMBER 31 OF THE
CALENDAR YEAR IN WHICH IT IS FILED, I ALSO UNDERSTAND THAT
I AM REQUIRED TO INFORM THE PUBLIC ENTITY PRIOR TO
ENTERING INTO A CONTRACT IN EXCESS OF THE THRESHOLD
AMOUNT PROVIDED IN SECTION 287.017 FLORIDA STATUTES FOR
CATEGORY TWO OF ANY CHANGE IN THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED IN THIS FORM.
(Signature)
Thurston Lamberson, President
Sworn to and subscribed before me this 4th day of April , 2013
� Personallv known to me. --
N
LII�A KAY 11100RE
� Na�r r�oue - sra. a� Linda Kay Moore
? Mp Canm. E:pim 1ul�r 2Q, 2016
,�: .•� comm►suon r EE teed4e
Notary Stamp:
•
�
.
�
APPENDIX
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION
Table of Contents:
PROJECT PERMITS
FDEP Domestic Wastewater Collection/Transmission System Construction Permit for the
LS 33 Project.
FDEP LS-33 De minimis File No. 52-0312718-002 dated December 5, 2012.
The Contractor shall obtain City of Clearwater Building Department Permits.
GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT
Driggers Engineering Geotechnical Investigation for LS-33 dated December 27, 2012.
ASBESTOS REPORT, No Asbestos Report is Anticipated.
10/29/12
�
.
•
PROJECT PERMITS
FDEP Domestic Wastewater Collection/Transmission System
Construction Permit for the LS 33 Project
dated September 27, 2012
Appendix.doc
10/29/12
CJ
In the Matter of an
Application for Permit by:
Florida Department of
Environmental Protection
Southwest District Office
13051 North Telecom Parkway
Temple Terrace, Florida 33637-0926
September 27, 2012
City of Clearwater Engineering Department
Robert Fahey, Utilities Engineering Manager
100 South Myrtle, Suite 200
Clearwater, FL 33756
robert. fah evn,myclearwater.com
Rick Scott
Governor
Jennifer Carroll
Lt. Governor
Herschel T. Vinyard Jr.
Secretary
Lift Station 33 Rehabilitation
Permit No. CS52-0139900-047-DWC/CM
City of Clearwater East W WTF
Pinellas County
NOTICE OF PERMIT ISSUANCE
Attached is Permit Number CS52-0139900-047-DWC/CM to construct a domestic wastewater
collection/ transmission system, issued pursuant to Section 403.087(1), Florida Statutes.
A person whose substantial interests are affected by this permit may petition for an administrative
� proceeding (hearing) in accordance with Section 120.57, Florida Statutes. The petition must contain
the information set forth herein and must be filed (received) in the Office of General Counsel of the
Departrnent at 3900 Commonwealth Boulevard, Tailahassee, Florida 32399-3000, within 14 days of
receipt of this permit. Petitioner shall mail a copy of the petition to the applicant at the address
indicated above at the time of filing. Failure to file a petition within this time period shall constitute a
waiver of any right such person may have to request an administrative determination (hearing) under
Section t20.57, Florida Statutes.
•
The petition shall contain the following information:
a) The name, address, and telephone number of each petitioner, the applicant's name and address, the
Department Permit File Number, and the�county in which the project is proposed;
b) A statement of how and when each petitioner received notice of the Department's action or
proposed action;
c) A statement of how each petitioner's substantial interests are affected by the Department's action or
proposed action;
d) A statement of the material facts disputed by petitioner, if any;
e) A statement of facts which petitioner contends warrant reversal or modification of the Department's
action or proposed action;
fl A statement of which rules or statutes petitioner contends require reversal or modification of the
Department's action or proposed action; and
g) A statement of the relief sought by petitioner, stating precisely the action petitioner wants the
Department to take with respect to the Department's action or proposed action.
www. dep.state�l. us
City of Clearwater Engineering Department
Lift Station 33 Rehabilitation
Permit No. CS52-0139900-047-DWC/CM
If a petition is filed, the administrative hearing process is designed to formulate agency action.
Accordingly, the Department's final action may be different from the position taken by it in this permit.
Persons whose substantial interests will be affected by any decision of the Department with regard to
the application have the right to petition to become a party to the proceeding. The petition must
conform to the requirements specified above and be filed (received) within 14 days of receipt of this
notice in the Office of General Counsel at the above address of the Department. Failure to petition
within the allowed time frame constitutes a waiver of any right such person has to request a hearing
under Section I20:57, F.S., and to participate as a party to this proceeding. Any subsequent
intervention will only be at the approval of the presiding officer upon motion filed pursuant to Rule 28-
5.207, F.A.C.
This permit is final and effective on the date filed with the Clerk of the Department unless a petition is
filed in accordance with the above paragraphs or unless a request for extension of time in which to file
a petition is filed within the time specified for filing a petition and conforms to Rule 62-I03.070,
F.A.C. Upon timely filing of a petition or a request for an extension of time, this permit will not be
effective until further order ofthe Department.
�
When the order (permit} is final, any party to the order has the right to seek judicial review of the order
pursuant to Section 120.68, Florida Statutes, by the filing of a Notice of Appeal pursuant to Rule
9.l ] 0, Florida Rules of Appellate Procedure, with the Clerk of the Department in the Office of General
Counsel, 3900 Commonwealth Boulevard, Tallahassee, Florida 32399-3000, and by filing a copy of
the Notice of Appeal accompanied by the applicable filing fees with the appropriate District Court of �
Appeal. The Notice of Appeal must be filed within 30 days from the date the Final Order is filed with
the Clerk of the Department.
Executed in Hillsborough County, Florida.
STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT
OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
�C.,�r�-�
�
Jeffry S. Greenwell, P.E.
Water �'acilities Administrator
Southwest District
Page 2 of 3
•
City of Clearwater Engineering Department
� Lift Station 33 Rehabilitation
Permit No. CS52-0139900-047-DWC/CM
CERTIFICATE OF SERVICE
The undersigned duly designated deputy agency clerk hereby certifies that this NOTICE OF PERMIT
ISSUANCE and all copies were mailed before the close of business on 9/27/l2 to the listed persons.
FILING AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT
FILED, on this date, pursuant to Section 120.52(7), Florida Statutes, with the designated Department
Clerk, receipt of which is hereby acknowledged.
_;, :� ' �%-: ` - 9/27/12
� �� (Clerk) (Date)
Attachments
• cc: Thomas A. Traina, P.E., King Engineering Associates, Inc., ttraina(c�kin�en�neering.com
•
Page 3 of 3
��
�J
Florida Department of
Environmental Protection
Southwest District Office
1305} North Telecom Parkway
Temple Terrace, Florida 33637-0926
PERMITTEE:
City of Clearwater Engineering Department
Robert Fahey, Utilities Engineering Manager
100 South Myrt1e Avenue, Suite 200
Clearwater, FL 33756
robert. fah ey(a� m y c learwater. c om
PROJECT:
Lift Station 33 Rehabilitation
Section 16, Township 29, Range 16
Pinellas County
Rick Scott
Governor
Jennifer Carroll
Lt. Govemor
Hersche{ T. Vinyard Jr.
Secretary
Permit No. CS52-0139900-047-DWGCM
Issuance Date: September 27, 2012
Expiration Date: September 26, 2017
Processor: Tammy McWade
This permit is issued under the provisions of Chapter 403, Florida Statutes, and Florida Administrative Code
Rule(s) 62-3, 62-4, and 62-604. The above-named permittee is hereby authorized to perform the work or
operate the facility shown on the application and approved drawing(s), plans, and other documents enclosed
herewith or on file with the Department and made a part hereof and specifically described as follows:
DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT:
Construction of a domestic wastewater collection/transmission system to serve existing development. This
• project consists of a lift station and one manhole. No additional flow wilt be treated at the City of Clearwater
East W W"TF [Facility ID No. FL0021865j.
u
SPECIFIC CONDITIONS:
1. Drawings, specifications, information, and correspondence submitted in support of the permit application
for this system are incorporated into this permit and must be adhered to during installation and operation of
the system.
2. This permit does not authorize the connection of this collection system to the designated WW7'F. The
permit shall not be construed to infer any assurance that the necessary authorization for connection shall be
granted. Any such authorization shall be granted only when adequate treatment in accordance with rules,
regulations, and issued permits of the Department is available for any flows transported by the system.
3. No portion of this system may be installed in FDEP jurisdictional wetlands prior to the receipt of any and' all
required wetlands resource management permits.
4. The waterlsewer/reclaimed water clearance requirements specified Rule 62-555.314, FIorida Administrative
Code, shall be adhered to throughout the project, and shall supersede any specifications included in the
documentation submitted in support of the permit application for this system.
5. No portion of this system shall be installed within l00 feet of a public supply potable water well.
6. All collection/transmission systems shall be constructed using the pipe diameters designated in the drawings
and specifications included with the permit application for this project and approved by the Department.
Pursuant to Section 33.43 of the "Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities," 1990 ed.
(incorporated into Chapter 62-604 of the Florida Administrative Code by reference), oversize sewers shail
not be approved to justify using flatter slopes.
www.dep.state fl.us
City ofClearwater Engineering Department
Lift Station 33 Rehabilitation
Permit No. CS52-0139900-047-DWC/CM
lf prehistoric or historic artifacts, such as pottery or.ceramics, stone tools or metal implements, dugout canoe
remains, or any other physical remains that could be associated with Native American cultures, or early
colonial or American settlement are encountered at any time within the project site area, the permitted
project should cease all activities involving subsurface disturbance in the immediate vicinity of such
discoveries. The permittee, or other designee, should contact the Florida Department of State, Division of
Historical Resources, Compliance and Review Section at 850245_6333 or 800.847.7278, as well as the DEP
Southwest District office_ Project activities should not resume without verbal and/or written authorization
from the Division of Historical Resources and the DEP Southwest District office. ]n the event that
unmarked human remains are encountered during permitted activities, all work shall stop immediately and
the proper authorities notified in accordance with Section 872.05, Florida Statutes.
8. All components of the lift station, i.e. the wetwell, valve box, and electrical control panei will be locked or
otherwise secured against unauthorized access.
9. Upon completion of construction and prior to placing the system into use, the permittee or his engineer-of-
record shall submit to this Department the following documents:
a) Domestic Wastewater Collection/Transmission Systems Certification of Completion of Construction
[DEP Form 62-604.300(8xb)], together with a copy of the record drawings for the system; and
b) Certification by the Professional Engineer-of-Record shall be construed to mean conformance to the
General Technical Guidance for Collection Systems and Transmission Facilities. [62-604, F.A.C.]
•
Department acceptance and written approval of these documents shall be required prior to placing the •
system into service.
l0. The system shall be inspected for any sediment debris and flushed prior to connection to the designated
W W TF.
] 1. The permittee shall be aware of and operate under the FAC Chapter 62-4.160 Permit Conditions as
applicable. Permit Conditions are binding upon the permittee and enforceable pursuant to Chapter 403 of
the Florida Statutes.
STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT
OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
_����� �
Jeffry S. Greenwell, P.E.
Water Facilities Administrator
Southwest District
•
Page 2 of 2
• 62-4.160 Permit Conditions
All permits issued by the Department shall include the following general conditions:
( I) The terms, conditions, requirements, limitations and restrictions set forth in this permit, are "permit
conditions" and are binding and enforceable pursuant to Sections 403.141, 403.727, or 403.859 through 403.861, F.S. The
permiriee is placed on notice that the Department wiU review this permit periodically and may initiate enforcement action
for any violation of these conditions.
(2) This permit is valid only for the specific processes and operations applied for and indicated in the
approved drawings or exhibits. Any unauthorized deviation from the approved drawings, exhibits, specifications, or
conditions of this permit may constitute grounds for revocation and enforcement action by the Department.
(3) As provided in subsections 403.087(6) and 403.722(5), F.S., the issuance of this permit does not convey
any vested rights or any exclusive privileges. Neither does it authorize any injury to public or private property or any
invasion of personal rights, nor any infringement of federal, state, or local laws or regulations. This permit is not a waiver
of or approval of any other Department permit that may be required for other aspects of the total project which are not
addressed in this permit.
(4) This permit conveys no title to land or water, does not constitute State recognition or acknowledgment of
title, and does not constitute authority for the use of submerged lands unless herein provided and the necessary title or
feasehold interests have been obtained from the State. Only the Trustees of the ]ntemal Improvement Trust Fund may
express State opinion as to title.
(5) This permit does not relieve the permittee from liability for harm or injury to human health or welfare,
animal, or plant life, or property caused by the construction or operation of this permitted source, or from penalties
therefore; nor does it allow the permittee to cause pollution in contravention of Ftorida Statutes and Department rules,
unless specifically authorized by an order from the Department.
(6) The permittee shall properly operate and maintain the facility and systems of treatment and control (and
related appurtenances) that are installed and used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit,
are required by Department rules. This provision includes the operation of backup or auxiliary facilities or similar systems
when necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit and when required by Department rules.
(7) The permittee, by accepting this permit, specifically agrees to allow authorized Department personnel,
. upon presentation of credentials or other documents as may be required by law and at reasonable times, access to the
premises where the permitted activity is located or conducted to:
(a) Have access to and copy any records that must be kept under conditions of the permit;
(b) Inspect the facility, equipment, practices, or operations regulated or required under this permit; and
(c) Sample or monitor any substances or parameters at any location reasonable necessary to assure
compliance with this permit or Department rules.
Reasonable time may depend on the nature of the concern being investigated.
(8) If, for any reason, the permittee does not comply with or wiU be unable to comply with any condition or
limitation specified in this permit, the permittee shall immediately provide the Department with the following information:
(a) A description of and cause of noncompfiance; and
(b) The period of noncompliance, including dates and times; or, if not corrected, the anticipated time the
noncompliance is expected to continue, and steps being taken to reduce, eliminate, and prevent recurrence of the
noncompliance. The permittee shall be responsible for any and all damages which may result and may be subject to
enforcement action by the Department for penalties or for revocation of this permit.
(9) ]n accepting this permit, the permittee understands and agrees that all records, notes, monitoring data and
other information relating to the construction or operation of this permitted source which are submitted to the Department
may be used by the Department as evidence in any enforcement case involving the permitted source arising under the
Florida Statutes or Department rules, except where such use is prescribed by Section 403.1 I I and 403.73, F.S. Such
evidence shall only be used to the extent it is consistent with the Florida Rules of Civil Procedure and appropriate
evidentiary rules.
(] 0) The permittee agrees to comply with changes in Department rules and Florida Statutes after a reasonable
time for compliance; pmvided, however, the permittee does not waive any other rights granted by Florida Statutes or
Department rules. A reasonable time for compliance with a new or amended surface water quality standard, other than
those standards addressed in Rule 62-302.500, shall include a reasonable time to obtain or be denied a mixing zone for the
new or amended standard.
(11) This permit is transferable only upon Department approval in accordance with Rule 62-4.120 and 62-
730.300 F.A.C., as applicable. The permittee shall be liable for any non-compliance of the permitted activity until the
transfer is approved by the Department.
(12) This permit or a copy thereof shall be kept at the work site of the permitted activity.
(l3) This permit atso constitutes:
• (a) Determination of Best Available Control Technology (BAC'1�
Page l of 2
(b) Determination of Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) •
(c) Certification of compliance with state Water Quatity Standards (Section 401, PL 92-500)
(d) Compliance with New Source Performance Standards
(14) The permittee shall comply with the foilowing:
(a) Upon request, the permittee shall fumish all records and plans required under Department rules. During
enforcement actions, the retention period for all records will be extended automatically unless otherwise stipulated by the
Department
(b) The permittee shall hold at the facility or other location designated by this permit records of all
monitoring information (including all calibration and maintenance records and a11 original strip chart recordings for
continuous monitoring instrumentation) required by the permit, copies of all reports required by this permit, and records of
all data used to complete the application for this permit. These materials shall be retained at least three years from the date
of the sample, measurement, report, or application unless otherwise specified by Department rule.
(c) Records of monitoring information shall include:
1. the date, exact place, and time of sampling or measarements;
2. the person responsible for performing the sampling or measurements;
3. the dates analyses were performed;
4. the person responsible for performing the analyses;
5. the analytical techniques or methods used;
6. the results of such analyses.
(15) When requested by the Department, the permittee shall within a reasonable time furnish any information
required by law which is needed to determine compliance with the permit. ]f the permittee becomes aware the re�evant
facts were not submitted or were incorrect in the permit application or in any report to the Department, such facts or
information shall be corrected promptly.
(16) In the case of an underground injection control permit, the following permit conditions also shall app{y:
(a) All reports or information required by the Department shall be certified as being true, accurate and
complete.
(b) Reports of compliance or noncompliance with, or any progress reports on, requirements contained in any
compliance schedule of this permit shall be submitted no later than 14 days following each schedule date.
(c) Notification of any noncompliance which may endanger health or the environment shall be reported �
verbally to the Department within 24 hours and again within 72 hours, and a final written report provided within two
weeks.
1. The verbal reports shall contain any monitoring or other information which indicate that any contaminant
may endanger an underground source of drinking water and any noncompliance with a permit condition or malfunction of
the injection system which may cause fluid migration into or between underground sources of drinking water.
2. The written submission shall contain a description of and a discussion of the cause of the noncompliance
and, if it has not been corrected, the anticipated time the noncompliance is expected to continue, the steps being taken to
reduce, eliminate, and prevent recurrence of the noncompliance and all information required by Rule 62-528.230(4)(b),
F.A.C.
(d) The Department shall be notified at feast 180 days before conversion or abandonment of an injection
well, unless abandonment within a lesser period of time is necessary to protect waters of the state.
•
Page 2 of 2
• • .
LOCATION OF PUBLIC WATER SYSTEM MAINS IN ACCORDANCE WITH F.A.C. RULE 62-SSS.314
Joint Spacing Q Crossings
Other Pipe Fiorizontat Separahou Crossings (1} 1! Joiat Centered
-�-� �-- -- Altanate 3 R minimum
w�� ��„ � a w8cer tvreia
��
Fz s��a i9 u�e ��,,
5torm Sewer, 3 g, ��� except for ato�m aewer, thea Watu Metn
Siormwattr Foree :Vlain, 6 Iaches is fhe ssiaiiaum aad
Rcclsimad'Watcr (2i 12 incbas is profecrai ,
--�--� at�� 3 �. • • �
�ater Maia � wster tvtaio '�--�
:....�.�...
Watsr Main
Vacuum Saaftary Sewer 10 ft. pnferred 12 inches ptefess'sd
3 it m3nimum 6 inchrs minimum
�_ ,.�_,,, Alteruabe 6 ft. minimum
Watet Msin� Watc Maia
Graviry or Pressure 10 R. prefetrai 12 iaches is the miaimvm,
Watar Maia �
Saaltary Sewer, 6� p��� (3) excapt for gravity sewer, thea
Sanitary Sewer Rorce Main, . '
8eclaimed Wata (4) 6 iuchas is tbe miuim� aad
12 iaches is prefe�d
Oa-Site Sewaga Treatwent & 10 ft. tninimam
Dis osal stem "' '—
(1) Water main shoutd cross above othcr pipe. When watcr main must hc bclow other pipe, the minimum separation is 12 inches.
(2) Reclaimed water ragulaied under Pert lIi ofChapfer 62-610, FA.C.
(3j 31t. Tor �avtty sanitary sewer where the bottom oFfhe water main is laid at Icast 6 inches abOVe the top ofthe gravity salnitary sdwcr.
(4} Rcclaimed water not ro�ulatad undcr Part III of Chnptcr 52-610, F.A.C. �
04W{nw-7Ybdotemewityrovi6edRrrourceersaimuaatr PleasenfarolACRok6Z.53i7l�fxaaE±tlovatwastwctieenqa�raie�ota.
Page 1 of 1
.;3�
n
�
•
•
PROJECT PERMITS
FDEP De minimis File No. 52-0312718-002 for the LS-33 Project
dated December 5, 2012
03/04/13
•
.
\ J
Florida Depat-tment o�
Envil:onmental Pt•ote�tion
Soutitwest Qistrict aRice
1305 E North TeIccom P�rk�v�y
Temple Terrace, Florida 33637-4926
Dccei�i�ier 5, 2012
City of Cieai�vater
clo Robert S. Fal�ey, P.E.
1:00 Sout1� Myrtle Street, Suite 20Q
Cleanvate�•, FL 33756
itc�bec-[. E �31��Cr:3tiyr.ILa r�v3te r�,cc�_t�i
File i�lo.: 52-031271 �-002
Cou�tty_ PiEic(las
Dear Mr. Faiiey:
1Zi�k Scfltt
c;o, erncrr
1e-f�nifer C'a1r�r�«ll
Lt. �iovern�a'
I�I�rsc���l 7°, l�sngard �Jr.
;�ecret<iry
Th�nk you for your request to tlae De}�at•tinet�t for an exei��ption detei'�ni�ratio�� regardi��g t�e �ro�osed
rehabilitatiai� of Lift Statian #33. Sitei�t���ro�retneut� i�icl�ide sti�ueEure d��notitio��, te�nporaiy Uyp��s
piping, the replaceme�tit of the str�icture �vet���el(, valve vault and �allast, tize repl�ce�i�ent of the plumbing,
plu�i�s and setvice �uatk�vay. Aciciitionally, coi�struction �vil1 inch2de the replaceinelat of ��i existing 15-
#�oot-«�ide access drive�vay rvith tlie iT�st�llatioa oi�n access di•iveivay consisting of open cell geo�i�eb a��d
#57 stt�ne. Ti�e uew access clrive�v�y «�ill be co»shl►cted atttae sarne elevations as the existi»g drivetvay.
All cons�niction activities �vitl be conapleted abave the mean-lu�li tivater line of t}je acljacent �vetlands �►�d
Old Ta�n�a Bay, a Class I[ Florida Waterbody. The project site is located south of Cleai�vater Christiaii
Colle�e ��id �vesC of Dam�rseus Road, Cleaitivater, Sectian 1 G, Ta�vnship 29 Souttr, IZange 7 6 E�st, i�1
Pinellas Gai�nty.
This type of aetivity rent�ires a regulatory autl�orizatio�; foi• const�uctian aiid ope��atiot� of tltc projeet
purstiant fo Fart IV, Ghapter 373, Ftorida Statute (F.S.), iuiless athe�lvise exeKUpt by stahrte or rule,
proprieta�y �utliorizativti to use statc-otiv«eci subt��erged laticls Chaptet�s 253 �nd 25$ F.S., �rid fecteral
a�itliorization for tivarks in tivaters of the United States tl�roi�gh the State Prograiiunatic Getieral Perii�it
(SPGP) progi•a�n. Yo�ir 1•eqnest l�as bee�i revie�ved for all tlu-ee atrthoriz.�tions. Tlie �uthorizations yot�
t�ave been grantecl ace listed belo;v. Plcase read each seciion carefi�ily. Your project n�ay not 13ave
qtialifieci for all tttree at�tltorizatiot�s. If yotir project clid not �ualify for o�ta or ntore of the authorizations,
ttiat sl�ecific section �vi11 advise yo�i hotv to obtaii� it, Yoti �nay NOT cornrnence your project tivithout aIl
tliree authorizations. tf vot� chaage tlie.project fram �vhat yoi� submitted Et�e authorization(sl �ranted m�v
no longcr be valid at the ti►��e of comtnence�nent of the nroiect. Ple�se coiitaet irsprior to be�irir�in�your
i�a�oject if Yott �vish to make aai c� lianges.
REGiJLATORY REViEW — APPItOVED
Pu�suanE to Sectian 373.4fl6{&), F.S,, an€i basecl upan ilie fon��s, dra�vings, and docume�tts stibtuiited o»
October 30, 2012, the proposed project appeaFS to have ocily minint�l or i��significant iudividual or
cutttul�tive adverse iinpacts an tlie tiaater resources of the State. Theref�re, tl�e proposed project appeais
io qualify as an activity that is exenlpt fioni r�gulation �sursuant to Chaptee 373.406�6), �.5. A copy of
Chapter 373.446{G), F.S. is attached. This detertninatioi� is based solely orr the infonnation �rovided to
il�e Departme»t a��d tiae stah�tes and ruies in effect cvhen the exemptio�� deterinination reyiiest �uas
City of Gleanvatet! Lift'Slation #33 Kel�abilitation
File "No.. 52-Q3 t 2? 18-UO2
Page i of 18
�
submitied, and is effective only for the specific activity proposed. Tt�is detei�ninatioi� sl�al! automatically
ex}�ire if site conditions �naterially chan�e o�• the governing stati�tes or rules �re an�ei3ded. In addition,
a��y substantial modifications in your plans shotild 13e st�bmitted to Ihe Department for review, as changes
�nay result in a permit being rec�uired. In any event, tlus deteimination shTll e�pire after one yeat•.
T}�is �letei•minatio�t that your acfivity quatifies for an exemptiou does not retieve you fi•om the t�eed to
co�n�ly �vitl� ail a�}�licable �vater qiiality standards during the constructioti and operation oftl�e facitity.
Activities con�ucted under this exe�nption must Ue consi�-ucted arid operated ttsing appropriate best
rnana�e�nent practices ancl in a�nanner ti�at does not catase ivater c�iiatity violations, pursua��t fo Rule
62-302, Floi�ida Adn�inistrative Code (F. A. C.}.
T1�e deterinination that your praject qeralifies as an e:cempt activity purst�ant Chaptc�- 373.�i46(6}, F.S. may
be revoked if the instal)xtion is si�bstantialiy madified, if tlie basis for the exeniption is determinec� to be
mater'sally i�icorreci, or if the installatio�� �'esnl#s in �r�ater c�uality viola#ions. Any changes made in the
constructio�� plans or location af the �raject ma}� necessitate a permit or certificatioi� fi�om ti�e
Depart2��ent. Therefore, you a�•e advised to contact #he Depa�t►rxeY�t befote l�egiiuiing tt3e project �itd
before E�egi�viin�; any �vo�•k in �vaters w• 1vetlands not specifica}!y deseribed in yofir s�il��nittal.
Autliority for revie�c�- Part 1V of Ci�apter 373, P.S., Title 62, F.A.C, 811CI 111 1CC01'[I817C� t0 O�)eCatlltg
agreements execc�ted bettiveet� tt�e Depai�tment and the Water Maciage�nent I}istricts, as referenced in
Chapter$2-113, F.A.C.
PROPRIETARY REVIEW EIPPROVED
Please be stchrisecl that any use of save�`eigi� suUme�•gecl la»�3s wit}�out sPeciCc prior authoriz,�tioir
fi•om tlie Bo�rti of Trc�stees ��ill T�e co��siclered a violation oi Cl�apter 253, Tiaricla Staf��tes and ni�y •
subject thc affected t�j�land riparian �ro�jerty oa�*u�rs td l�gal aciion �s welt as pote�zti�l fi�tQS far fhe
prior iuiAUthoi•ized use of sovereign laud,
A review of the location +�f yozn• proposed �roject inciicates that it is nat o�� state-otivned su�merged lands.
`I'herefoi•e, your peoject is exe�npt tt�om the fiirthe�• req«i�•ements of Chapter 253, �.5.
A��thorifiy foc revierv - Chapter 253 �r�� Ch�pter 258, F. S., and Chapter 18-21, F.A.C. aiid Cha�tei• ] 8-20,
�'.A.C. (if lacated ii� ai� ac�iratic preserae), and Sectian 62-343.075, F,A,C, as required.
SPGP REVIEW — IrIOT APPROVED
A co��y of yot�r applicatioi� also has bee7� s���t ta the U.S. Arrny Corps of Engineei•s (USACOE) fo�-
revie�v, The USACOE �nay require a se�rate permit. Failu��e to obtain this authorization prior to
construction could subject you to enforcement actioi� by tl�at agency. Foi-fu��her infoimation, yau sliottld
contact the USACOE Ta�npa Regtai�tory Field Office at (813) 769-70G0.
City of �Icar�raterl Lift Station #33 Rehabititution •
Fi1c No.: 52-03 1 271 8-002
1'agc Z of i 8
•
'I'hank you for you�• assistance in protecti}�g the nataral reso�u�ces of the State of Flocida. If you have any
questions, please contact N�vankakt� Om«rnli at & i 3-632-7600, e�tensio�t 488. When referrii�� to this
project, please use tlte file nuinber listed above.
Sincerely,
L-��i[,�"c�i2,�
li%���
Ma�yellcn Ed�vards
Program Adn�inistt•ato►•
Si�bmerged Lands and Enviranmental Resoucce Program.
Southttirest District
cc: Doug I�ry, FDEP Tallatiassee , Dou�;.F� � c,dep.state.fi.us
TJiomas A. T��ai�aa, A.E., King Engi��eeri��g Associates, Ine. ttrain�(n?kingen i�leeriii .� ca►n
F.nctosures:
Cl�apter 373.406(6), F.S.
Project Dratvings, 11 pages
• Notice of Rigl�ts of Substanti�ll�r Affected Persons
Attac}�n�eE�t "A" for Discretiona�y Publicatio»
• Ci1y of Cieanvaicr/ Lifi Station i�33 Rsli�biiiiation
File No.: 52-03 1 271 8-002
I'agc 3 flf I8
•
C�RTIFICA7'E (�F SER'VICE
Ttie cindersi��ed duty clesig�l�ted deputy clerk hereby ce��tifies ttaat tl�is determination includitig �I! copies;
�vas �naited t�efore the close
of bcisi�iess on Dece���ber 5, 2012, To the above listed �aersorts.
F1LlNG ANT3 ACKNOWLEDGMENT
FILED, o�� diis date, under t20.52(7) of tfie
F.S., ��iCh tize ciesignated Departynent Clerk,
receipt of �vhicl� is liereby aelu�o�vlecigecl.
Cle�•k��� Date 12-5-1'2
Cha�#er 373.406�fi), F.S.
l�ny district or the Depa�•trnent inay exen�pt fi-o�3� re�i�iatio►� under this part those activities that the district
oi• Departtne�rt deterini�ies �vill have a�ly ininimal or insig��ificant inclivitltial or cunii�lative aclvei•se •
i��paats on ttle �vater resources of tlte district. Ti�e district and tlie De�a�-tttt�nt are atitho�7zed to
deter�nii�e, c�n a case-by-case basis, tvhetlier a s�ecific activity comes �vithi�i this exemption. Requests to
qualify for tl�is exemptionshali be subinitted in �1�•iting to the district or Depa�•tfnent, and such acfivities
sh�li :�ot be eomn�►enced ivithoc�t a written dete��mi�aation from tlae distt•ict or De���rtment conf rntit�g tl�at
the activity qualifies fo►- tlie e.ce�nptiot�.
City of Clcart�aterl LiR Station #133 Itchabilitntion •
l�ite Na.: 52-03127i $-002
Page � af 18
• � •
c�:
�
�
�
�
.yy "�'e
(9 ^�'.
� �.
"d
O `
�:.r
� N �
p W C
� N O �
04 v �
� �
W
C W
w �
�
S
C'
o'
�
n�anr:s a� rr.�uvs
sE�e�x# s�rnssr.tat izort
. ae++eionar.Tmnm�v .
YtM A110�'Lp110titWllK��lJD Ii�N
` a:e,., wdviinsrwwar.
, �nmowa�r.he.w.oaroxay
aa c�e�waoNmnapsntovixxam�mnwe+n.w
I u�a va�o's� . .
'. � .qPSlb�o�w�uv �O�NNONO��/.�o
rw .w.a�uew� v�wrMa�rumw..ur
� � � �e+etaw r �
.� � ,�.�,.�,�„�.n.
� ��W
s�w �w�xtw�aoe�seraua�a
e� .w�ww��rmteean�o� �
4. msrnuva.a+ow�nv.ua.io. � ae
m � wsceavi..�
raa marnrc++.�r.us � �� � y
�
r
,� ,
J
� �� 1
�� :}�� :
�� a.
�Rl�
� /I�r
�
.�`
ti v <M--6t�' � „
/� -. �, y � �� � .
V.,F y3.�'i.4.�� �„µ.
try 4�•� � P����I��� ��
}r• r��+��r� .'
M— r �''r� �Gni��;r• � . ' .
U
Engiaze�ri.�g �epar��m.ex3t
� 100 5. Mqttto Avenue. Cleerwates, Flotida 33766
L/FT STA i/ON #33 REKAB/L/TAT/ON
Sod 16, Twn 29, kny f8 .
� . . NroJacl No. 09-0003—UT
j
r
�
cirxor�zcrnr.s eomvcn�.�E�
ceoete x..ceeueko. �Sfayor � ' seac 1
Dmem.Ba�D�oHw Via7�{�y� Sem1
�ap Covaal� .Maaber Seoc3
�i1LJo�moa Coundllfembcr Seat4 .
Pan1F. Gnb.oa Germd Wember Smx 5
b
'�B.liomeII CLyMmngrr .
Miehad A.Q�i'llmyPB �
Chy'8°@%w.� '
�� , �
��� _
8/D DOCUMENTS �°'��ip��'
i dr.�sr.wo
��ina�m
• '�..�iflwsar.
����^ LNi+�dle '... .
z � .
o �
a .
�� �� �
� x�
o s ��
� �� �� g�
w
�
R�[ �}s ��
�
� ��� �� ��
v� ] s g�'� N �!t
� ��� ��� � �
� ��� �� Z � .
! �
a �i�i �� �
a
^ �
w
o �� i
� ���r�����Ii�'��'�i�
m
m
a itll3.ldikl.i4eMS�t�1NAh,�Ilillfi�
�
E�
y� �
������
���
�
���
�
��
K�
�
���� �
�� :
���� ,
��
�
Gity afGleAn�aterL Lift Station #33 Rehabiliiation
Fi}e No.: 52-U312718-UU2
I'age b of 18
•
�
� �
�
•
u
Cit�� of Clear�vater! Lift Statioi� #33 [t�h�bilitation
File No.: 52-0312718-fl02
PAgC 7 O� I 8
City of Clcurti+�Ater/ I.1�I StAilOit N�3 RClliiblll1A1i011
I�iic No.: 52-a3127 t &002
l'age 8 0l' 18 :
i
•
•
•
�'
��
�;� x
l�
l'� " P �
�
�
�
�
�
� •� .. � . .. ..... §5 . .
��\
�\
� , ,� � ���� " � ' .. *�
�q � �
,,
E � Ct�, � �6d��} 8� 3 � i
� r. � yy � �2a� i� � � ax P
t � �Y� � �� � �' ��
w y.. r�#��i� �.�� t MM�i ��
�_ �o� � g�g'� ���� ��`}��f `
�—� , . i5 � x� � 4�� X� ��.� . .ax s� .
e �$���� � ��
�. . , �-
�
X
�
�
� �
� �
, �s A-.
a�<�p
U �n
��s�
1
1.� �
I ~'�i �S
.a,����,..:�.�a���
• City c�f Cleartvatcri l,ifi Statian #33 Rehabilitation
I�ile No.: 52-U3I27F8-002
3'age9oC18
Cit}� of Clcarwater/ I.ilt Siation #33 Rehabititation
1� ite No.: 52-U312718-002
Page l0 of 18
.
•
•
�
�
• City of Cleariva�ierJ I.ifl Station #�33 itehabilitation
File l�n.: 32-03 i2718•002
Pa�e 11� of 1�,$
C
CitS of Clear�ti�ttter/ Lift Stfltion 1t33 Rel�t�t�iiitation
File No.: 52-0312718-OQ2
Page 12 af t 8
i
�
•
•
�
•
g .��`� m� ��i�, �
s • ��`�� -.l r�� ~ �
. �aj.� � Z �
'� t f ``� '� �1 = �
� �_� � { � �l Z � �, : � A.
� �i� �� �, � �� � ������ ntiit����o`�'�� � ����� �
f � �. g � t�Il��
� i � ;A a a �
� �� � i�{ � q
F . � � jii. �. � .. t 'p .
� ���� �'��� � ` � u
$ � ��E{i;'�' �� � �
� � ���[ ����� ' � r
� i ,:li��•;��
� 5 �,a. i,.. � .
� .
� ��
I �t <
� � :i � � :
��� � ,i� ����� � k
� � � ��� � �;�t, � �� � �
' � �''� �E����
4
� � � t �E �' �� IE
jl�•i; � � 4r ��� ����
�l����'�� ��! '' €� ,� .. � ; `�i�9� �
� �!�
�i�l����� 61 �� � �� ��� �-
�i}; � �
.,� �,fr,� ��� � �� � ����
� {�� � :� �� .
� fi:'� s a ,
i;
'i ', �
� � �"s! i��i ;�; � j�� � ._ �} � :�� �� .
E- � �� � �
1 ,
,s t �
�P," P ���, EI L� I i� i�
'b j �� �_p S�� D
t �
i
�����i� +c ; � f Yi � i
��= f . � - �. � � i.
,� � � � - � � �
4� �7:i3 � �; j- a " � �� � f�
I t jr
' � �� ��,: � �� ' �� ` �
� {El�� fi s it �• ' • �� �'
� , _.�•
��i � � 'F.��� ;t �t �+ � �
`= �� � � �,'� a� �I
�. s���! t4 4� 1 1
,�, �.,-.�, ,Y,�a,N.�,.�..a���
eiEy af'�le�rtia�ater/ i.ili Statian 3133 Reitabilila#ion
rile Ato.: 52-03 1 27 2 8-OU2
Page 13 of ! 8
4 � �
� �
�
.�
�
r
� �
A�� ' a
,
���
�.
��� �
� ��
�
:n
� ���
��,
e� U'y�j� . .
� ����
�� ��:�
� ��� �� �
�` �����
$
Gity oFClear�vttcerl Lili Station #33 Rehabiiitation
I� ile No.: 52-(13 1 271 8-002
PAge: l� 01' t8
�
■il
6
�@
5
�
��
��
��
■_
�-
� `,���
,a ��
���
� ����a
�SD
�+
,
• �
��
•
�
•
•
�
s'
� � "p�.
s
�
c
��� ' �
i' �� a
���� �� ��
° ��
s�
�. 4� . �� . --- — , ��;� � �
� ! .a� i� E
� &
y �
R �e� � � �
�� L��
3s
�� �� 3�
$;
g;;y ��� .�
F g� ,
� � ! s' � �����g —
a �� � ' �--
City oFGiearivuter/ i,iit Station #33 Reh�bilttntion
i�ile No.: 52-U312718-0f?2:
1'mge I5 Qf 18
��
��
��
.� (
a�n��,
� s
�
�
R1GI-ITS OF AFFECTED PA[tTJES
Tliis determinatian is fit�al and effective on tlie date fileci tivit}� the C1eck of the De��a��ttne�it t�nless a
sufficient petition for an a�iniinistrative hearing is timely fileci under sectio»s 120.5G9 and I20.57 ofthc
F.S. as provided belo�v. If a sufficielat }�etition for an acin�i»istrative l�eflring is timely filed, this
determil�at'son auton�atically beco3ues onllr peoposed agency actioi� subject to the result of tlie
adtt�inisti�tive revie�v process. Tl�erefore, aia the filing of a timely a��d si�fficient petition, t[�is action tivilt
not be finai xn�i effective tintil fi�rtlier o�•der of tiie Uep�rtment. 'I'he pj•ocedures for petitio�ung for a
he�ring are set fo�1h in the atiache�l notice.
Tftis �ieterinination is based on #lie inforniatio�a yot� pi•ovicl�ct ihe Dep�t�iment and tlle statutes and rules in
effect �vhen tite application tivas st�bmitt�d ancE is affective only for t(ie specific activity �raposed. Tl»s
detes•�ni��ation shall auto��iatically e.epire if site cort�litions materially cl�an�e or• th� governing statutes or
r��les 2ce ameiadeci. I�l addition, an}r substantia[ modifications in yoiu• pIa»s siiould be sulimitted to tlie
Depart�nent ft�r r•evie�v, as �lianges n�a�f ��stitt in a pet•mit bei»g ret�ui�•ed. In �;��� eve��t, Tl�is c�eters»inatian
shal! ex�ir•e after one year.
Be advisecl that youc• nei�i�boi•s and otiter pa►•ties �vho i��ay be su�statitiatiy affected by the pro��oseti
activity alto�ved under this determination of exem�tion have a rigl�t to reqaest an adi»inistrative heacing
on the De�arhnent's decisio�� ihat tlie proposed activity� qualifies for this exemption. Becaiise the
actministrative`i�earing process is designed to redetermine final agency action on tl�e a�plicatiori, the filing
of a pe#ition for a�3 �tiii�inistrltive he�ring n�ay result i�� a finai cieterniination tl�at the proposed activiry is
not autho�•ized under the exeinption established �mdee Cl�apter 373.406{6), F.S.
The Depaz4�nent ti�il! not pu�lish notice of tl�is deterr7rination, PuUlication of tiris notice by ��ou is
flption�l �nd is nor t�qt�ired foi• yau to �r�ceed. Ho�vever,, i:� t1�� evet�t tl�at an adiniiustrative hearing is •
lielcl a��d the DepartmenYs detea•�yii�iatian is reversed, proceeding �vith the proposed activity before the
tirne perioci for requesting an adi»itiistrative hearin� l�as expirecl �vould Tnea►t #ltat tlie activity «�as
conducted without tt�e r�quired peemit.
If yot� tivish to iiinit the ti�ne witl�in �vl�icli �Il s��bsta��tialiy affected >>ersoz�s n�ay reqctest an �dministrative
l�earing, you raay'elect'to �ut�iish, at yot�r ��vn ex��e��se, the enclosed notice (Attaclunent A} in the legal
advertisement section of a ne�vspa�er of g�r�eral circitlfltion it� ttie co�mty �vhere tlie activity is to take
place. A single puUlication �vill suffice.
If yo�i �vislt to liinit the time �vithin �>>hich any s�ecific peison(s} niay request an administrative hearing,
you rilay pravide suc}� �eison(s), by cei�tified n�ail, a co�y of this de#ernaivation, including At3achment A.
For the pur�poses af publication, a�iewspaper af ge�ieral circul�tian means a��eavspaper meeting the
reqnirements Qf sections 50.011 a1�et 50.031 of tlie F.S. lii the event yo�i ela publish tllis notice, �vitl�in
seven days of publication, yo�� �nust provide to ti�e follo;vir�g add►•ess proof of publicaiion issued by the
ne��s�aper as provided in section 50.051 of the F.S. If �ot� provi�ie �lirect rvritten notice to Tny persoj� as
noted above, you mnst provide to the follo�ming adclress �s capy of t6e direct �vritten notice.
City qf Cleartcater/ Lit't Station it33 Rehabilitaiion •
Fi]� No,; �2-03 1 27 1 8-002
Page 16 of 18
•
ATTACHMENT "A" FOR DISCRETIONARY PUBLICATION OF NOTICE OF DETERMTNATIQN
OF OtJAL1FICATION FOR AN EXEMP°I'ION
in the Malter of an Application
for a Detei�nination ofQualification
for an Exe�iipt'ton i�y;
P�•o�•ess Ene��gy Florida, Inc.
clo Wayne Ricl�a�•dsoi�
P.O. Boi 14042, PEF 9fl3
St. Pete��sburg, FL 33733
DEI' �ite No.: 52-0312718-002
Coe���t��: Pineilas
'I'he De��artme�it of Ei�vironme��tal Protectio» gives notice that it has received a rec�tfest fo�� authw•izatioj3
to rel3abititat� I,ift Station #33. Site ianp�•av�►nents inclu�ie st��ucture de��ia3ition, tem�orary bypass
�iping, tlie replaceiilent of the st��ucltire �v�huetl, v�lv� vatjlt and baitast, the repl�eement of the plt�nil�ing,
puinps a�td service }valk�vay. Additionatl}�, cot3sti•uction ���ill incltade tlle re}�tacement of an existing t 5-
foot-�vicle access c��•ive�vay �vith the installatio�a of an access drive�i�ay consisting of open cell geoiveb aiid
�{57 sto��e. '1'lie ne�v access drive�vay �vi(1 be coi;structed at the same elevations as the existing d►•ive�vay.
All constroction activities �vill be completed above the mean tiigi� �vater tine of the adjacent �vetiaiads and
Olci Tam�a I3ay, a Glass lI Fla�•ida Watei•body. The project site is Iocated south of Glea��vater Cllristian
College a�id �vest of Dan�ascus Roacl, Clear�vater, Section I6, To�vnsiYip 29 South, Range i G East, ir}
• Pi�tell�s Coi�r�ty. This activity a�pears to liave only �»ir�i�nal ar insigiaificant i�lclividual or cuinulative
adverse in�pacts on ttie tvater resources of the State, and has thei-�fore deter��l�ined the activity to t�e
exempt from regul�tion unde�• Chapter 373.406(6), F.S.
A perse,t� �vhose subst�}�tial inte»sts are affeefed by #�ie Depart�neY�f's actiou may petitio�i fo� ai�
ad�ninistrafive proceeding (hearing) �rnder sections 12U.569 anci 120.57 of the F,S. Tlje petitiat� int►st
contaii� the inforn��tio�� set fortli belo�v and u�ust be filed (received E�y the clerk) in tlie Office af Genet�al
Coi�nsel of the I3epaa-tt7tent at 3900 Cammon�vealth Bouleva�•d, M�il Station 35, Tallal�assee, Florida
32399-300U.
Mediation is ►iot available.
If a tintely at�ci saf�cient pctitio�i for arr acli�unistrative heariiig is filed, otl�er persons �vhose scibstantial
intei�sts �vill be a'ffected by' tlte outcame of t}�e at{�nit�istr�ti�e prc�cess l�a�� tl�e rigl�t ta petiti�n :io
i�tt�rvene in the proceeding. lnterv�ntion �vill be pennitted only at the discretian of the presiding officer
i�po1� t1�e filir�� �f a motion in compliance �vith rule 28-106.205 of the F.A.C.
in aceorciance with �'ule 62-114.1�6(3), F.A.C., }�etitions for an administrative heariiig n���st be file�i
cvithin 21 ctays of �uUtication af the notice or ceceipt of tvritten noiice, �vl�ichever oecurs fiist. U��der rufe
62-11U.106(�) of tlie F.A.C., a person tivliose substantial interests arc affected �y the Depat�tment's action
rnay also requ�st an extension of time to fil� a peti#ion for a» admit�istrative l�ear'rng. The De��artment
may, for goa�l ca��se sho�vi�, gra»t ttae renuesi for an exte��sion of time. Itequests for sxtension of time
mtrst be fi}ed avith the Oifice ;of Gexteral Cot�nsel of the Departme��t �t 390U Commomvealth Iio�rlevacd,
Mail S#ation 35, Tailaliassee, Floricia 32399-3Ud0 prior ta the ap}�iicable deadiine. A ti�nely reqttest for
exiension of tinte sliall toll tfie r��nning af tlie tin�e period for filing a pekifion izntii the req«est is acled
upa�j: Upon rnotion by the i-eques#ing parky sho�ving that tlte failure to fite �►�:quest for an ex#ension of
• Gity of C(ear�vRter/ Lifi Station #�33 Reha6ilitation
Tile No.: 52-0312718-0Q2
Page 17 of 18
i
tin�e befflre tl�e deadline �vas tt�e result af excusable ne�lect, tlie Departme�it may also gi•ant the rec���esteci
exteiasion of time.
Tl�e petitio��er s3iall ptail a co}�y of tl�e petitian to tt�e applicant at tl�e a�lciress indicateci above at the tifine
of fi'ling. T►ie failure af any pecson to file a petition for an adtninistrative heat•ing �vithil� the appropriate
ti�Y�e ��e�iod shall constitute T�vaiver of tl7a# riglit.
A petitio�� tl»t dis}�tites the materi�l facts o�t rvl�icli tlie Departit�ent's actiot� is t�ased must cotitai�� tlie
falloaving information:
(a) Tlie name and address of each a�ericy affected a�i�i eacl� agency's file or icle�itification
number, ifkno�vn;
(b) The na►iie, a�ldress, a»d telephone nuint�er of tlye l�etitioraer; tlte natne, address, and
tclephone nun�ber of tlie pe#itioner's j•epresentati��e, if an}J, �vhich s}iall be t}�e address for
service piuposes duri�3g tite c�urse of tl�e ��•oceeciing; a��d an ex�tanatio�i of f�o�� ti�e
petitionee's substantial interests are or tvill be affecteci by ti�e a�;e�icy detern�ination;
(c) A statement of rvhes� and ha��r tl�e petitio��er received notice of the age��cy� decisio��;
(d) A sfiaten�ent of al( dispute� issues of a3�atefi•�al f�c3. If there a��e no�e, tlie petition rnt�st so
indicate;
{e) A concise statemenf of the ultim�te f'acts �Ileged, including tl�e s�ecific facts the
petitio��er coutetids �>rarrant reve�•sa3 or n�odificativn of tl�e �gency's proposed actio�r
(f} A state�nent af the s�ecific rides o�• statxites tixat t13e }�etitioner contends ret�uire ret�ersal
or moclification of the agency's proposed action; and
{g} A stafe�ne��t of tlle relief sou�l�t by the petitionet; stating }�recisely the aetion tliat tlte
��titidner tvisttes tt�e age���y to tak� witl� respe�t to tlie aget�cy's �ro�ased aetic�n.
A petition thafi �ioes not dispute the �natet•ial facts on �vhicti the Depa�7mes�t's action is based sha11 state •
tlra# no such facts ace in dispute and other�vise s}�all contain tlte san3e z��formatian �s set foi�th above, as
required by �•ule 28-106.307.
Under sectio«s i20.5fi9(2)(c) and {d) of ti�e F.S., a petiti4n far atimii3istrative Itiearing sltall be clisia�issed
by tl�c agency if tl�e petitia�� does not s�►bstantiatly coinply �vith tl�e aboue requirements o�' iS UC1tltliBly
�i �e(1,.
Co�tiplete copies of atl cloct�ments rel�ting to this determinatioi� of exeitrption �re available far Uublic
inspectio�i d«ring t�ormat business l�ours, 8:00 a.m. to S:QU p;m., Mo��day ti�ro«gl� Friday; at tl�e
Degart�nent's 5outly�vest District �ffice, 134� 1 No��tta Telecom Parlctivay, Ten�ple Ter�•ace, FL 33637-
Q926.
Ciiy of Clearrvater/ I,iti Station #33 Reh�bilitation •
Fite No.: 52-0312718-002
Page 18 of 18
GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT
�
Driggers Engineering Geotechnical Investigation for LS-33
dated December 27, 2012
•
•
03/04/13
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
03/04/13
�
•
•
•
•
•
REpURT UF THE
GEOT�CHNICAL INVESTIGAT�ON
LIFT S1`ATION #33 R�HABILITATION
CLEARWATER, FL4RI�?A
i3ri�gsr� �t���e°r��rir�g S�r�vices �r�c�rpc�rr���ci
�
•
�
City o#' Clearwater
Geatechn+ca� Engineeeing S:
c/o King �ngineering tlssociates, lnc.
4921 Mem4rial Highway
Suzte 3Qa
Tampa, �loricia 3363�
AttentiQn: Mr. ThQmas Traina, P:E.
RE: �tepc��rt of th� Ge�+technieal Znvestigat�an
Pump Statian #33 l�ehabilitatirrn
Clearwater, F`lorida
Our Fite: I}ES 1�7497
Purchase flrder Ni�: 0327-9fi6$fi-563$tiU-535-000-t10�i0
Dea�- Mr. Traina:
December 27, 2012
Pursc�ant to yr�ux request antt au�hor�zatioz�, l.�R�G��RS EN+��NEERTNG SERVICES,
INC, %as co�d�u�t�d a s�bsu�"�ce i�vestig�iior� at the subjeet p�.u�n� station. t'rese�ted l�erein are t�e
resti�lts o#'QUr �'ie3d a�d labor�t�ry �vestigatior� tag�ther wit� a d�seussig� �f geut�chnieal in�pacts,
INVEST�GATZO�Y PROGR.A�il+�
SOIL B4RiNG - plate � ufttae atiack�nents ide�ntifies the appruxamate pflsiti�3zi�g of t�Ze req�ested
Sta�da�r� T'enet�a�i8n Test (SPT) bpring which vvas adva�ced t�,a reques�ed c�epti� af 2U feet below
pr�,sent �ade. I�Tot� t�at t}�e boring uvas o#'�'set from the inte�d�d �c�cataon due tQ the presence t�f
iarg� pi�c�s of asphalt a�d arvck w�ickz prahibited advan�ing a hand au�er bor�n� thx�ug� the upp��
sc,��s as a preca�ti�n against e�cour�tering �u�novv��an iatzri�c� t�tility li�ae�. '�e S#and�c� Pe���-at�on
test rrzet�d �f s�mplin� (ASTl�1 D� 1S8G} was util�z�€� in ord�r ;tc� s�c�re sc�il s�m�p�es #'car visual
e�assi�cation ar�ci �o dev�lop Stand�rd �'�z��tration re�is�nce da�� in�i�atir�� af t�ie stren�h �nd.
hea�a�� capabili�y af f�te sc�ils ��r��tc�ted. LQgs c�#"the test'bar�ngs ar� �r�sez�t�d i� th� att�c�mea�ts
i�d��aii�g vis�al a�d estirn�ted �f.T�i�'�ed S�iI Glas�i�ca�io� �ys�errm �[I�CS) desig,�atic�r�s as'w��1 as
��1:��T�C3 ��assi�icat�ans versus c�cpt�a.
Sas�ata
Phor�e_ 9�i.371.3849
F&x: 94#.374.8962
sarafti�e �#rig��rs-�r�g.co�rt
�taarwater
4?U. 8ax;;t?839+�i+earwater, F1€�rid� 3�7s2
Phroa�e: 7Z7.�71.i313 • �ax: 72T.�3,2.4d9(f
G#wo�CB �drig�jHrs•ec��COm
Ta�p�
�'#10ti�: 72T.57"1 _ 1313
Fax: 727.572.409�w
�pab�f#fC@ �dt�tS•eng: cam
�
2
LABORA�'ORY TESTI�G - A lirnited Iaboratory classification testing �rogram was also
implemented tv a�d in characterizing the engineering properties of the subsurface soils. 4ur
laboratory tests included Atterberg Ixquid limit and plastic limits deternuna#ions and grainsi�e or
sieve analysc�. The results of ow laboratory tests are included in #he report appendix. Also provided.
in the attaclunents are the graphical represen#ations ofthe individual grains�ze analyses.
GENERALIZED SIJBSURFACE CONAITIUNS
SOIL CONDITIONS - The subject site is located west of Damasc�s Driv� ar�d north of the
Courtney Campbe�l Causeway and is accupied by the existing ptamp station. 'The SPT baring has
identifiecl a surfieia� unit of fill, about 5.5 feet in thiekness, consisting pz�iazczpally a� bro�vz� to dark
gray f ne sands variable siI#, clay and organic fines. The �ll also cantains large pieees of roek axi�1
asphalt. The fill was ut�de�lain by a thin seam c�f sandy clay foilowed hy predomin�nt�y �aray sands
�uith variable silt and clay fines conier�t to the cornpletion depth of the boz�ng at about 21.5 feet
be�ow gradE at the bQring location. The reeove€ed soils were pri�mari�y represented by tl�e SP, SP�
SM and SM Unified Svit Classification Systern (iJSCS) designatio�s cyr �l-3 and A-2� A,AST�TO •
desig�ations. Staxidard Penetra�an resista�ce c�ata xevea�ed predominantly a loose mediuzia dense
relaiive density to abaut l4 feet. Scai�s below X f} feet were dense ta �nediu�n dense:
G,�t��N�}WATER C+DI�DYTIUNS - Crroundwater was r�carded 5 feet belaw existi�n� grade at
the #ime of aur inves�igation. In cQnsid�ration Qf the site �bcation in proximtity to Tampa Bay, we
anticipate t.ha# gr�aundvv�tez levsls woutd be tidaliy control�ed. �t s�uld a�sa be nc�ted thai th�
�otentiotn�tric w�ter level within the upper Florzdan A�uifer is e��ected #o be at ak�o�t �L +5 #'eet
NGVD whieh is rel�tively close to the e�isting ground st�rface at the bor�g location.
GEO'���1�ICAL �VALUA�ON
P`LA,NNE�? FACII.��'TTES - It is our ua�derst�ndix�g, based vn isniarsnation pravic�ed by K�g
�ngur�ee�ing Associates, L�c., t�at ti�ensw vi�et w�il wi�� be 3ocated cla� ta t�� �xisti�g s��ur� �d
wo�ld k�av� a battam o�the mat foimc�atifln:at EL -11.7 f�t v�I�c}� is apprflximately l 8 f�et`b�lc�w
g�c�e. �3ased �� ex�erienc� with simi�a� +cQ�zst�ruct�on, we ant�cipa�e t�at th� tv� �r� t�Ze rnat
fpu�ia�ic�n wi�l resc�lt i�a a�et i�aer�ase an sa�� �ressc��e greate� than th� grevic�usly prese�t o�ver�ird�ri:
sr�ils of about 754� ps�; t�r less,
�
�rFr�g�rs �rzgir���rrng Seruices lnc+c�rpQr���c1
.
3
GEOTECHI'�ICAL RECOMMENDA'I'�QNS - As mentionedprevinusly, it is our underst�nding
that #he bottom of ttze struc�e foundation will b� about 18 feet beit�w existi�g g�'ad�. This wc�uid
place the base o#'tk�e fowc�dation vvitb� dense slig3�tly s��ty �ine sands ta mec�ium dens� silly to elayey
fu3e sands. The relative density of these soils wauld suggest a rela�iveiy lovu� potentaal for
dist�bance reiated postWconstnyction settlernent. Thexefore, we wauld not anticipate the n�ecl ft�r
a gravel bedditxg material frt�m a g�atee�cai perspeetive. Nevertheless, shouid a gravet warking
platforn� be desized �or construction-reasons, a geotext�le �'abric such as 1vlir� i 40�t (or equivalent}
shauld be placed on the excavation �ottom and draped u� th� sides of the excavation to
accommodate the placement of a compact�d gravel working p�at£arm carrespo�ding fa g�ading nv
coarse� thara FDOT Na. �7 aggregate. The No. �� aggregate shouid �e unif'or�n�y campactecl so as
to develop �. fum and unyietding subgrade for subsequent ma# foundatit�n canstruction. The
geotextile should ther2 be wrapped over the top of the gravel becid�ng #o prevent the mi�ration of
sands i�zto th� �ravei.
Fo�lowing proper �ubgrade pre�aration as recaz�►mended her�in, we wo�d anti�ipate
settle:mez�ts of less #hat� � ineh. We wouId expect these settlexxze�ts would occur virtua�ly coir�cident
• with ihe re�Iaee��nt of back�il� soi�� and installation of the purnps anti p�p�ng, �urthe�r, we wouIci
antacipate relative�y ur�i#'ozxa�r set#�e�enf �r�vided that apprc�priate plumbness is �aintain8d ��ring
backfiliing opera#ions and extr�ction af a�y sheeting utilized. AtthQUgh the sett�e�et�t �►ag�itudes
are rel�#ively �odest, consideratian si�buld �Se g�v�n to the timeliz�ess of i�fluent and �fflu�nt �ip�ng
cannec�ior�s so as to avgid any e�cessive stresses on the piping. Tt would also be �rrud�nt tc� �ainta%n
observatiotts o€eleva�ians t�fthe structare during the backfilling operatic�ns to check that set�e�nents
are consistent with expected �evels :anc� c�n�rrn that s�ttiements are uirtua�ly connplete priar to
rnakin� f �al �ip�ng ct�nnec#��s. � -
�
LJ
C4�ST�tt�CT�Ci�i �C>I��i�ERA'.l�b�'�TS - �?wriz�g �In� �or�stntekian oft�� �et we�, gr�unclwater
levels must be cvn�trol�ed and maintained no �ess �tlaan i2 inc�es belcrw �e �n�irt�ur:� exc�vatirr�
dept� ox t�r a grea�er depth as ueeded ta prep�re the subgrade �►�� �rt�ject s�ecif'rcabic�n requir���#s.
CQn�id€rit�g t�� de��� o�t�� plan�ed e�cavatic�z� a�ci t�� vari�ble silt �es eontent re�Iected by �
rec�uested test ��ng, we �ongly ��cp�n�nt� tha� �e �t�s�cct�ve con�r�€tv� ��tai� � q�i�'�d
dewaterin� expexxt tv assist i�n the deveIupme�t c�fhis dewatering �la� and ove�see �aip�e��ta�t�a�
th�r��f �� wa�l� e�zccourag� �at all w�I! s�areens b� apprc�prxateIy �cas�d i� ��r�perly ��si�d
f�lte� r�.edia iu �prc�v� c���t�ri�g �£#iciency and minimize clt�gg�ng:
Q�riggc*r� �rtc�;�e�ring S+�rvi�e�+ t��crr�sau^��ed
�l •
As previously rnentioned, the piezo�etric level within the deeper limests��e campris�ing t1�e
Floridan Aq�.ufer may occur sigr��cantiy above the excavaUan bottom. T`hus, if tl�ere is tl�e
possibility ihat excavations may extettd into'tl�e dee�ex li�estone foxr�atior�, this couid represez�t a
so��rce oi seepage depending on the averall conf'inexnent of ihe overburd�� soils. We would
rccommend that piezorr�etez�s be instal�ed to cr�nfirm the de�velopmeut of ef%cfive cantroi and
�arxagement of groundwater priar ta a�d duri�g excavation activities.
Due to the proxur�ity of the existing facilities, we �nticipate that excavatian sharit�g would
generally be required. For any open excavatio:tis, slope rafios should be maintain�c� no steeper than
l.5 horizontal to 1.4 vertical ua otder to minimize sloughing or caving during ilae backfilling
operations. Ut�lization of this slape ratio will necessitate prc�per dewatering as previous�y discussed.
Naturall�+, the contractor m�t camply with applicable OS�-IA requirements with respect to trench
safety. Where sheeting is �ncorpaz�ted, careful cansideration must �Se given to properly designing
and brac�g the sheeting for potential �ydros�aiic pressure on the c�utside c��the sh�eting systern as
well as horizonta� stress�s fru�n surfaee Ioadung. It should be xeCOgni�ed that vii�ratory i�sta�lation
and e�rtractian of s�eeting and assQCiated disturba�ce can result in unexp�cted settlemeni uf adj acent
struchtres and u�i��ities. 'I'13e con€�cior s�tould, therefore, consider ways aud �eans of constzuctioz�
to minirnize exee�sive vibrat�ons following sett��g i�te struchtre to grac�e. •
BAC�C+'Y�.I., P�.ACEIVIE�T A1�? COIVI�PACT�Q1`�T - We wou�d arit�cip�#� t�at prc��ect
speci�caiions would inclt�d� �ep�acem�nt ar�d compac#i�n af bacicfil� around the pump bazrels
u�ilizi�ng p ranular mate�ia�s �h�t are €iensi�ieci to �o less tl�an S5% of t�e Mod�ed Proctor maxzmurn
dry density per ASTM �-tSS�. Backfili saiis comprising t�xe SF to SP-SM Unified Sail
Classifi�ation iden�i�ied wQUid repr�seni s�i�able materials far use a� campacted baekf'�1�. Th� s�ams
�f silty sands may be a��arc�p�a�ely mixed 1vit�Z th� sands abave and belaw resulting i� �:n accept�hle
b�ckfil� materiat.
TT�te backfil� ma#e�ial shau�d be pla�ed �d eompacted so as ta a�hieve a�i�ortn density of
11Q� �eSS �l� �S�Io t1�f� �IfDCIi�EC� FTflC'COT 3T2�X7�Li:llil � C�(:I1Sif� �Ei AST� �%� SS�. T.t�se sc�ils
shou�d b� bacl�;E'�ile�i in t�vin li�ts not exceeding i2 inches witk� each iif� com�ac#ed �zt�iiz��g hand-
gui�ed vibrat�ry €am,�ct�t�z� equip�e�#. �.arger sel� �ropelied units shou�d b+� avoided du� to the
���# f�ia# ��y rr��y devel€�� �t�essive I�eral �artia gr�ssur�s that coe�d �result in damage �o th�
w�rdergrc��d s�uct�u�;s. Sails it� �e �i�iz,�c� as back#i�l excava#�d tielaw �h� �ro�wa�e� ta�Ie would
req�.ire ap�r�priate adj�sim�nf i,� �nv��s� coz�t��t �c�r ar�ptace���t �nd �onapaeti��. �€��stur�
���ite�t si�a�ld k�e cc�ntt�l��d to �th� �,2°,/Q of �ap#i�wn r�oisi�re as ,�stablish�d by tl�e �oc�fi�d
��oc�c�r rnai�twre dens�ty re��tio�ship tfl fae�ate ca�pactiQ�.
•
�2#`i�Lf'°`u �i'i�lt`t��t"��'iC„� �BC'y3��5 1tiC�11"€SC?i"�t�Gi
•
VALVE VAULT - It is our understanding a packaged valv� vault will be co�truc#ed with the
bottom a fEw feet beneath present grade. YQUr atteniion is directed to filie debris noted in tk�e boru�g
to a depth of about 5.5 feet. If excavation for the wet weil does not e�compass the area of the vatve
vaul#, it is our recomumendation �hat the area be probed to identi�y unsuitable materials or voids
within large pieces of debr�s which would warrant undercutting and repiacement to help prevent
unacceptable settlements. Foliowing removal any un�uitable materials, the vaul# may be supported
oz� a compacted subgrade. Com�action should be performed so as to achieve a density af at least
9S°lo ofthe Modified Proctor maxirnum dry density.
LIMITATIOI�TS - It should be recognized that o�ar geotechnical invastigation performed herein was
for ihe principal pt�t�pose af designing the pIanned wet weil and providing general subsurfaee
information for the prospective general contra�#ors. Note that the �eq�ested boring depth is only a
few feet deep�r thaai tl�e planned bottorn ofthe structure. Accardingly, su�snrface conditioz�s which
may be affected by excavatxon shoring pr dewatering r�ay r�vt have been identi�ed hy the requesied
boring. Tb�erefare, our studies may not have includet� development of alI subsurface i�%rmation that
. may be desirable depending upon the contraete,r's ways a�d means. Co�tractors are cert�ir�Iy
e�cot�raged to cond�tCt such additianal studies as rnay be warranted ta resolve �ny potenfial questions
•
and qualify their bid pTO�osal.
Driggers Erigine�r,ng :�ervec�s trrcprpt7r����f
�
DRIGGERS EIYG��RI�G SER�CES, I�TC. appreciates this opportunity to be of
servics to you on this prQj�ct. Should yQU l�ave any questions regaxding the results of our findings,
please do not h�sitate ta contact the und�rsi�ed a# your convenience.
Respectfi�lly submitted,
D�GGERS ENGIN��RING SERV`IC�S, �NC.
f � ,
icl�las T, I�orecki, P.E.
Senior Createchraical E�ngin,
�L Reg�stration �Io. A�5529
nggers, P.E.
Pre id�n#
�L �2:egis#ra#ion No. � 6989
'�u:+""'' `�`Se;
s°��p+S T. J,� �'°4,�f
�- ,C3
�_ -.
��.• ��G�NS�.•..ft'i'ri
: �': No. �4�529 '�'� ��i
* ° �� ��'I�-�'. � � �
, .
s �+ ry�. a M
f � ' �7TaJ � t�� +.
i�+���`'•.'cj t7R 1G�P ..��,'���
l�e�� �`;�/C}NAL����.~'�
NTI�-REP\1�70�?
Cr�pies subrn�itted: {�j King Engineeri�g A.ssoc�at��; Attn: Mr. Tho�nas Traina, P.E:
{�r+g��rs Er►�ineer�g �e��rice� �nccar�ora�tstl
��
�
�
•
•
�
C�
APPENDIX
PLATE x- BOItING L4CATION PLAN
ST'.ANAA►RA PENE'TRATIf}N TEST BflRYNG L4G
SUIVIMARY 4�` LABO�tAT4RY TEST' RE5ULTS
GRAINS�2,� ANA:GYSES
STANDARI7 PENETRAT�Q�I TES'�' �VIET�4D
C�rs��e�~� ��c,��in�ering �ervi�es ta-rccs�°�rc3r���ci
•
u
�J
PLATE I- BO�tiNG LQCAfiIO�T PLAN
t�rir�gers �nc,�ine�is-Rg �erv`sc�s tn��r�t`�t�t�
•
•
f�►
�
a
D
z
v
D
�
O
.'m0
Z
rn
�
�
z
�
�
�
m
0
�
z
c�
r
cQi
D
�
O
Z
•
0
N N
n
�
'z `,� -�}
� L„1.
a
R.D.B. J N.T.K.
111LE
BORING LOCATIaI� PLAN
LIFT STATtON #33 REHASILITATION
o�h: r�'�snz
DES 127097
F'L;4TE I
�
• S'T'ANDA.RD P�NE�RA.TItJ1V TE�I` BORIf�tG LOG
•
Clr�gsrs �s�irr��ring S�rvi�es Ert�t3r�scyr��#
�
��
�
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCC�RPC�RATED
Project No. DES 127097 BORING NO. 6-1
Project Lift Station #33 Rehabilitation, Clearwater, Florida
Location See Plate I foreman J.R,
Completion De pth Ta
Depth 21.5' Date 12/19/12 Waier 5.0' Time Date: 12l11i12
� � z �,�u F�- STANDARD
� � w O a� PENETRATION TEST
= m� SOILDESCRIPTION v, � z s�.owsr�T, oN z° o.o..
a �� � a;p SAMPLER-148 LB,
0 �� �� O HAMMER, 30" DRt7P
Q (AUTOMATIC' HAMMER)
SURF. EL: +6.0+/-' �� 10 20 40 60 80
Brown sil Fine SAND v►Fith roots SM
Brown slightiy siity Fine SAND with rock �-
fra ments SP-SM
Brown Fine SAND with roots, clayey Fine SAND
nd rock fra ments SP/SC
� Dark grayish-brown Fine SAND (SP)
Brown sand CLAY CN
Loose to medium dense gray to brown and gray 4/4!4
silty, slightJy clayey Fine-SAND (SM)
4/4!5
10
5/7/9
}�. Mediurn dense gray Fine SAND with trace of GLAY 4/8/10
. �SP�
,r? y�: Dense light grayish-brown slightly silty
1�' ""•'� Fine SAND (SP-SM)
� }, �. �;
, YT rt; 15/16/7 $
. tiisiCr7.. . .. . .
l.f.):L't'
} �1:1.1'
Medium dense light gray silty,
stightly clayey Fine SAND {SM}
20
17!'14t11
25
30
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Lengtit
•
• Si�IYXMA�RY OF LA ki�RA3`QRY TE�T RESULTS
�
l�xt,�g�:rs �r�gir�e�rxrtc,y Servic�� incc>rpps^�rtec�
• • s
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
ATCERBERG
BURING 1?EP71i DFSCRIi'TION Y'�"� Y a G, LIMITS P.P. U.C. CON. G.S. ORG, pii GI. SO i RSS.
NO. (tt) (P��l (ts� (%•} �PPmI iPPm) jo6m-cm)
I.L PL SL
$-1 6.0•7;5 Crray silry. SGghUy etayey Fina SAND t7:5 NP NP ••
14.4
ai to.ai i.s cr�y $���, �ugnay �i8y�y ��� snxn •
�1 13.0.16:5 I�ight gtayish-brtrwn slightly silty Fioe SAND '
W%
Ye(i���i e
(�:$ �
LL
Pi.
ST: �
i'.S'; irsfl —
u.c: �
�✓StC[ C4IItCI1t.
Chy Donsiiy
SptciSc Gnvity
Liquid,Limit`
Plastic LimiC
S6rinkage Limit
Pocke: P`enttrometer
Uncon£�ned Compression
Con. ffi Consolidntion Tast
G.S. (+1} _ � Grainsize Analysis (Hydrameter)
pR(}, (4�e) = Or�anic Cbntent
C!. (ppm) � Tota+Chloride
SOa (ppm) = Tota1 Sulfate
RES. (ohm-cm)s � Lab Resistivity
+ = 3ee TesC Gurv�s
+� = Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve
CLIENT:
PRO.rECT:
FILE:
King Engineering Associutes, Inc.
Lift 3fation td33-Rehahilitatinn,�
Clcarwatar, Florida
DES 127097
i
•
•
GRAINSIZE ANALYSES
�Jr;gger:, �r�rc„}iri�ring �rvices tncocpora�er3
• • •
DRIGGERS'ENGtNEERING $ERVICES, 1NC.
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERYIC£S, iNC,
• . �
�
• STANDARD PENETRA3'IQT'�t TEST 1VCETHOD
C�
t�rig�ers �nt,�incYeeing �r��s Irxcqrpqr�tezt
� STANDARD PENETRATIOIV TEST
A1�1D
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D-1SSb�
In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a ratary drilling rig is used to advance the barehole to the desired fest depth.
A viscot�s drilling fluid is cuculated through the drill rods and bit to stabilize the borehole and ta assist:in removal of
soil and rock cuttings up and out of tlxe borehole.
Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D. split-barrel sampier or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes called,
is attached to an N-size drill rod and lowered to the bottom af the borehole. A 140 pound 2�ammer, attached to tl�e
drili string at the ground surface, is then used to drive �he sampler into ttie formation. The hammer is successively
raised and dropped for a distance of 3U inches using a rope and "cathead" assembly. The number ofblows is recorded
for each b inch interval of penetration ar until virtual refusal is achieved. In the above manner, the samples are ideal}y
advanced a total of 18 inches. The sum of the blows required ta effect the fival 12 inci�es of penetration is ealled the
blowcount, penetration resistance or "N" value of the particular material at the sample depth.
After penetration, the rods and sampler are retracted to the ground surface where the core sample is removed, sealed
. in a glass jar and transported to the laboratory for verification of field classification and storage.
SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Soil and rock samples secured in tt�e field sarnpling operation were visually classi�ed as to text�-e, coior and
eonsistency. TheUnifiedSoilGlassificationwasassignedtoeachsoilstratumperASTMD-248'T. Soitclassi�cations
are presented descriptively and symbolically for ease of interpretation. T'!�e stratum identifica#ion lines represeni the
approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, this transition may be gradval.
Gonsi�tency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear strengfh, unless othervvise n4ted, is based upan
Standard Penetration resistance values af "N" values and industry-accepted standacds. "N" values, or bloweounts,
are presented in both tabular and graphical form on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphicai
plot of blowcoun[ versus depth is for illustration purposes only and does not warrant conrinuity in-soil consistency
or linear variation between samp.te intervals.
The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring locations and sample interwals only. Variations in
subsurface conditions may accur between bnring locations. Gmundwater depths shown represent water depths at the
dates and timc shawn anly. The absence of water table infornaation does not necessarily imply tiYat;groundw�ter was
not encountered.
� Rev.9/2011